nortel gsm bss 13 parameter dictionary
TRANSCRIPT
Wireless Service Provider Solutions
BSS Parameter DictionaryPE/DCL/DD/0124 13.04/EN Standard March 2002411–9001–124
< 124 > : BSS Parameter Dictionary
Wireless Service Provider Solutions
BSS Parameter DictionaryDocument number: PE/DCL/DD/0124
411–9001–124Document status: StandardDocument issue: 13.04/ENProduct release: GSM/BSS V13Date: March 2002
Copyright 2000–2002 Nortel Networks, All Rights Reserved
Printed in France
NORTEL NETWORKS CONFIDENTIAL:
The information contained in this document is the property of Nortel Networks. Except as specifically authorized inwriting by Nortel Networks, the holder of this document shall keep the information contained herein confidential andshall protect same in whole or in part from disclosure and dissemination to third parties and use for evaluation,operation and maintenance purposes only.
You may not reproduce, represent, or download through any means, the information contained herein in any way or inany form without prior written consent of Nortel Networks.
The following are trademarks of Nortel Networks: *NORTEL NETWORKS, the NORTEL NETWORKS corporate logo,the NORTEL Globemark, UNIFIED NETWORKS, DMS, DMS–MSC, BSC6000, S2000, S4000, S8000.GSM is a trademark of France Telecom. Sun, Ultrastation are registered trademarks of Sun Microsystems, Inc.All SPARC trademarks are used under license and are trademarks or registered trademarks ofSPARC International, Inc. in the United States and other countries. Sybase is a registered trademark of Sybase, Inc.Windows is a U.S. registered trademark of Microsoft Corp.
All other brand and product names are trademarks or registred trademarks of their respective holders.
Publication HistoryNortel Networks Confidential iii
BSS Parameter Dictionary
PUBLICATION HISTORY
System release : GSM/BSS V13
March 2002
Issue 13.04/EN Standard
Answer to CR (Change Request) Q00181313
The following parameters were added:
bscIPFirstAdr
bscIPSecondAdr
mainNetworkBand
bsMsmtProcessingMode
btsWithCavity
network protocolUsed
uplinkMappingMeasurementMode
The following parameters were modified:
geographicalCoordinates
unequippedCircuit
bscArchitecture
networkIndicator
errorCorrectionMethod
transcoderArchitecture
coderPoolConfig
signallingTerminalNumber
timeSlotNumber
associatedTMUPosition
cpueOccurrence
concentric cell
codingScheme
operationalState
positionInShelf
Nortel Networks Confidentialiv Publication History
PE/DCL/DD/0124411–9001–124
Standard 13.04/EN March 2002 GSM/BSS V13
interOmuEtherlinkOper
CTU cable
upgradeStatus
lsaRc Reference
port0X25Status
The following parameters were deleted:
bscIPAdr
protocolUsed
pwciHreqave
rxLevNCellHreqaveBeg
rxNCellHreqave
rxQualDLIH
rxQualHreqave
rxQualULIH
rxQualWtsList
selfTuningObs
lapdexists
lsaPcmList
hardwareSlotPosition
Answer to CR (Change Request) Q00216666
Updated the following parameter:
administrativeState for transceiverEquipment
October 2001
Issue 13.03/EN Preliminary
Update after internal review according to PE/DCL/GES/248 V01.01/EN
October 2001
Issue 13.02/EN Draft
The following parameters were added:
Issue 13.02/EN Draft
Publication HistoryNortel Networks Confidential v
BSS Parameter Dictionary
executableSoftwareId
executableSoftwareName
relatedSoftwares
configRefList
bscList
softwareLabel
bsc2GEqptId
tSCBNumber
tSCBUse
aLAIntState
bsc3GEqptId
bscReset
bscLogId
maxNbrConsMess
transcoder2GEqptId
transcoderAlarmList
transcoderMatrix
transcoderIntPcmIntState
transcoder3GEqptId
lapdLinkCallPLoad
coderPoolList
associatedTMUPosition
atmRmId
bscUsedAdr
ccId
cemId
cnId
iemId
inId
lsaRcId
mmsId
omuId
Nortel Networks Confidentialvi Publication History
PE/DCL/DD/0124411–9001–124
Standard 13.04/EN March 2002 GSM/BSS V13
protocolUsed
sw8kRmId
tmuId
trmId
September 2001
Issue 13.01/EN Draft
The following parameters were added:
administrativeState
availabilityStatus
operationalState
upgradeStatus
standbyStatus
positionInShelf
shelfNumber
CTU cable
lsaRc Reference
NumberOfEnabledHDLCPorts
lapdexists
lsaPcmList
privateMmsOmuRef
mmsUsage
portEthernetOperational
portEthernetStatus
X25Port0Operational
X25Port1Operational
port0X25Status
port1X25Status
Publication HistoryNortel Networks Confidential vii
BSS Parameter Dictionary
System release : GSM/BSS V12
June 2001
Issue 12.09/EN Preliminary
Answer to Service Requests:
• SREE10379: Updated the class value of cpueNumber parameter(btsSiteManager object), in Chapter 2
• SREE11026: Updated the description ofnumberOfTCHFreeToEndCongestion parameter (bts object), in Chapter2
• SR30358404: Updated the value range of pointCode parameter (signallingpoint and signallingLinkSet objects), in Chapter 2
The following changes were made in individual chapters:
Chapter 2 “Parameters listed in alphabetical order”
• updated the description of maxNbrPDAAssig parameter (transceiver object)
• updated the description of maxNbrRLCEmptyBlock parameter (transceiverobject)
• completed the description of numberOfTCHFreeBeforeCongestionparameter (bts object)
V12.4 release update after internal review according to PE/DCL/GES/224V01.01/FR
April 2001
Issue 12.07/EN Draft
Answer to Service Requests:
• SREE10565: updated the value range of longTbfLossThroughput parameter(bts object), in chapter 2
• SREE00527: updated the value range of intracell parameter(HandOverControl object), in chapter 2
The following changes were made in individual chapters:
Chapter 2 “Parameters listed in alphabetical order”
• added the default value for several parameters
• completed the descritpion of reserved5 parameter (bts object)
Nortel Networks Confidentialviii Publication History
PE/DCL/DD/0124411–9001–124
Standard 13.04/EN March 2002 GSM/BSS V13
February 2001
Issue 12.06/EN Draft
V12.4 release update after internal review according to PE/DCL/GES/217V01.01/FR
The following changes were made in individual chapters:
Chapter 2 “Parameters listed in alphabetical order”
• removed the table in the description of adjacentCellHandOver parameter
• removed the table in the description of adjacentCellReselection parameter
• updated the value range of endCounterThreshold
• changed the class of gprsTranscvLockBtsExtendedConf
• updated the value range of log parameter
• updated the value range of longTbfLossThroughput parameter
• explained the meaning of the value range of maxRACH parameter
• updated the value range of mdScanner parameter
• updated the value range of Observed object class parameter
• changed the class of reserved1 (pcu), reserved1 (transceiver), reserved2(pcu), reserved2 (transceiver), reserved3 (pcu), reserved3 (transceiver),reserved4 (pcu), reserved4 (transceiver), reserved5 (pcu), reserved5(transceiver) parameters
• updated the value range of t3101 parameter
January 2001
Issue 12.05/EN Draft
The following changes were made in individual chapters:
Chapter 2 “Parameters listed in alphabetical order”
• modified bscMdInterfaceVersionNumber, backup manager addressesparameters type (DI, not DP)
• completed the description of bsCvMax parameter
• added bsMsmtProcessingMode parameter
• completed the description of cellReselectHysteresis parameter
• updated the value range of circuitGroupBlock parameter following theintroduction of feature UF–1169–1 Unequipped circuit and circuit groupblock (unblock)
• completed the description of configRef parameter
Publication HistoryNortel Networks Confidential ix
BSS Parameter Dictionary
• completed the description of drxTimerMax parameter following theintroduction of GPRS feature TF1220 “TBF establishment improvements”
• completed the description of gprsCellActivation parameter
• completed the description of gprsPreemption parameter
• added hexa text parameter
• updated the value range of language parameter
• completed the description of checks of msTxPwrMaxCCH parameter
• completed the description of checks of numberOfTCHQueued–BeforeCongestion parameter
• added Object Filter List parameter
• updated the value range of objects parameter
• completed the description of packetAckTime parameter according to feature“TF1220 – TBF establishment improvements”
• completed the description of pan parameter
• completed the description of reserved3 (T3168) parameter
• completed the description of reserved4 (T3192) parameter
• completed the description of sigPReserved1 parameter according to featurePM1251.1 “BSC capacity control”
• changed the name of states parameter (now called system state)
• updated the value range of unequippedCircuit parameter according to theintroduction of feature UF–1169–1 Unequipped circuit and circuit groupblock (unblock)
Answer to Service Requests:
• SR30315339: a note was added (in June 2000, in 12.03/EN release) inbtsDescription parameter (maximum configuration loaded on one of theBTSs)
• GV00302 (clone 30340279): added the following parameters: exclusiveinterval of codano, inclusive interval of codano, exclusive list of codano,inclusive list of codano
• SR30068156 (master 30067821): completed the description of externalalarm configuration parameter and radioSiteMask parameter
• SR30334467 (master 30320056): updated the value range of maxDwAsignparameter
• SR30331543 (30328124): updated the value range of maxRach parameter
• SR EE00499 (30340234): updated the description of checks and value rangeof msTxPwrMax parameter
Nortel Networks Confidentialx Publication History
PE/DCL/DD/0124411–9001–124
Standard 13.04/EN March 2002 GSM/BSS V13
• SR30315359 (30109408): changed the class of standard indicator Adjparameter
• SR30315346 (30136216): updated the value range of teiTranscoderparameter
• SREE00911: updated the value range of type parameter (new partition names)(omc object)
September 2000
Issue 12.04/EN Standard
The following changes were made in individual chapters:
Chapter 2 “Parameters listed in alphabetical order”
• added additional unmasked users alarms parameter following theintroduction of the GSM–R feature “Additional external alarms on CBCFBTS – FM1158”
• added additional supervised PCMn (n=0 to 5) parameters following theintroduction of the GSM–R feature “D&I PCM fault management – FM1189”
• completed the description of gprsAvgParam parameter
• completed the description of gprsPermittedAccess parameter
• updated btsSensitivity parameter value range
• completed the description of longTbfLossThroughput parameter
• completed the description of maxDwAssign parameter
• completed the value range of reserved3 (bts) and reserved4 (bts) parameters
• updated t3101 parameter value range
• completed the description of unmasked users alarms parameter
• answer to Service Request:
– EE00527: updated intraCell parameter value range
June 2000
Issue 12.03/EN Preliminary
V12.4 release update after internal review according to PE/DCL/GES/182V01.01/FR
The following changes were made in individual chapters:
A note was added in btsDescription parameter (maximum configuration loaded onone of the BTSs), Chapter 2.
Publication HistoryNortel Networks Confidential xi
BSS Parameter Dictionary
Answer to Service Requests:
30104649: Data14.4OnNoHoppingTs parameter added, Chapter 2
30127416: eMLPPThreshold parameter and preemptionAuthor parameter hadtheir class changed (3 instead of 1), Chapter 2
EE00531: numberOfTCHFreeOfCongestion parameter value range update,Chapter 2
30315382: Uplink mapping rxLevUL value extension, Chapter 2
30315351: Timers T3168 and T3192, Chapter 2
30315352: Dual–band cell and power control (new parameters:btsSensitivityInnerZone and maxBsTransmitPowerInnerZone), Chapter 2
30315354: processorLoadSupConf parameter value range update, Chapter 2
30320757: password and new password 1st try parameters definition update,Chapter 2
March 2000
Issue 12.02/EN Draft
V12.4 release update
The following changes were made in individual chapters:
Chapter 2 “Parameters listed in alphabetical order”
• added GPRS parameters
• added parameters related to feature “TF995 Automatic cell tiering”
• added parameters related to feature “TF876 Uplink mapping”
January 2000
Issue 12.01/EN Draft
Creation:
Chapter 1 “Introduction” contains the former Paragraphs 3.1.1 and 3.1.2 whichwere removed from NTP < 07 >.
Chapter 2 “Parameters listed in alphabetical order” contains the former Chapter 3“Dictionary of parameters” which was removed from NTP < 07 >.
Nortel Networks Confidentialxii Publication History
PE/DCL/DD/0124411–9001–124
Standard 13.04/EN March 2002 GSM/BSS V13
PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
Table of contentsNortel Networks Confidential xiii
BSS Parameter Dictionary
About this document 0–1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Applicability 0–1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Precautionary message 0–1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Audience 0–2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Prerequisites 0–2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Related documents 0–2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
How this document is organized 0–2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Vocabulary conventions 0–3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1 Introduction 1–1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.1 Network configuration objects and their parameters 1–1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.2 The different types of configuration parameters 1–6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.3 Description of dictionary entries 1–7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.3.1 Header line 1–7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.3.2 Main body of the entries 1–8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2 Parameters listed in alphabetical order 2–1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A 2–1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
B 2–44 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
C 2–90 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
D 2–139 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
E 2–154 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
F 2–175 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
G 2–179 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
H 2–185 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
I 2–193 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
J 2–203 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
L 2–204 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
M 2–219 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
N 2–260 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
O 2–275 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
P 2–298 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
R 2–322 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
S 2–346 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
T 2–377 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
U 2–415 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table of contents Nortel Networks Confidentialxiv
PE/DCL/DD/0124411–9001–124
Standard 13.04/EN March 2002 GSM/BSS V13
V 2–423 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
W 2–425 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
X 2–426 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Z 2–430 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Appendix A Objects and parameters evolution 3–1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A.1 New V13 parameters 3–1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A.1.1 New V12 parameters 3–2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A.2 V12 parameters 3–2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A.2.1 New V12 parameters 3–2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A.2.2 Parameter updates linked to new feature introduction 3–5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Appendix B Configuration parameter list 4–1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
List of figuresNortel Networks Confidential xv
BSS Parameter Dictionary
Figure 1–1 Object main tree structure 1–1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 1–2 omc subtree objects 1–2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 1–3 md subtree objects 1–3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 1–4 network subtree objects 1–4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 1–5 Menus in the OMC–R browser window 1–5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 1–6 Header line 1–8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
List of figures Nortel Networks Confidentialxvi
PE/DCL/DD/0124411–9001–124
Standard 13.04/EN March 2002 GSM/BSS V13
PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
About this documentNortel Networks Confidential 0–1
BSS Parameter Dictionary
ABOUT THIS DOCUMENTThis BSS Parameter Dictionary is a reference guide that describes all GSM BSSnetwork element parameters that can be accessed through the OMC–R.
Applicability
This document applies to the GSM900, GSM1800, and GSM1900 digital wirelesssystems.
The present edition of the dictionary applies to V13 BSS operations by default.
In V13 release, the OMC–R manages V13, V12 and V11 BSSs with BSCs 6000,12000, and 30000. Some differences or restrictions may apply when the OMC–Rmanages V12 and V11 BSSs. The user is informed when it is necessary to refer tospecific subsystem features.
The BSS Parameter Dictionary is part of the BSS NTP Suite. It is closely associatedto the following manuals:
The BSS Operating Principles Manual (NTP < 07 >) describes general operatingprinciples and explains the mechanisms that enable Man-Machine interfacecommands.
The Observation Counter Dictionary (NTP < 125 >) describes all theobservation counters used in performance management commands.
The OMC–R User Manual (NTPs < 128 > to < 130 >) is a user-oriented guide toperforming Man-Machine interface commands.
The BSS Operating Procedures Manual (NTP < 34 >) describes variousprocedures that help users operate or reconfigure a BSS.
Precautionary message
The following message:
CAUTIONGSM–R specific
Indicates that specific equipment and specific software (such asspecific software in the BSC) dedicated to Railway application isused and that therefore the feature is not available for all standardGSM users.
GSM–R specific parameters listed in this dictionary contain “GSM–R V12” in the“Feature” field.
Nortel Networks Confidential0–2 About this document
PE/DCL/DD/0124411–9001–124
Standard 13.04/EN March 2002 GSM/BSS V13
Audience
This document is intended for:
OMC–R administrators
OMC–R maintenance attendants
GSM network engineers
users who want to know more about OMC–R
Prerequisites
Users must be familiar with networking principles.
They must also be familiar with the following manuals:
< 00 > : BSS Product Documentation Overview
< 01 > : BSS Overview
< 06 > : OMC–R Architecture and Reference Manual
< 07 > : BSS Operating Principles
< 16 > : TCU Reference Manual
< 22 > : BSC Reference Manual
< 32 > : OMC–R Preventive and Corrective Maintenance Manual
< 34 > : BSS Operating procedures
< 125 > : Observation Counter Dictionary
< 128 > : OMC–R User Manual – Volume 1 of 3: Object and Fault menus
< 129 > : OMC–R User Manual – Volume 2 of 3: Configuration, Performance,and Maintenance menus
< 130 > : OMC–R User Manual – Volume 3 of 3: Security, Administration,SMS–CB, and Help menus
Related documents
The NTPs listed in the above paragraph are quoted in the document.
How this document is organizedChapter 1 “Introduction” contains general information on BSS operatingparameters.
Chapter 2 “Parameters listed in alphabetical order” describes all the operatingparameters listed in alphabetical order, and explains their use.
About this documentNortel Networks Confidential 0–3
BSS Parameter Dictionary
Vocabulary conventions
The glossary is presented in NTP < 00 >.
To help users operate configuration objects and parameters, the items are identifiedaccording to the release of the BSSs managed on the OMC–R. The following ruleapplies:
Vn means that the item is only significant for a BSS of release n.
Vn+ means that the item is only significant for a BSS of release n and above.
Vn– means that the item is only significant for a BSS of release n and under.
No identification means that the item does not depend on a BSS release.
Nortel Networks Confidential0–4 About this document
PE/DCL/DD/0124411–9001–124
Standard 13.04/EN March 2002 GSM/BSS V13
PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
IntroductionNortel Networks Confidential 1–1
BSS Parameter Dictionary
1 INTRODUCTION
1.1 Network configuration objects and their parameters
This dictionary summarizes all the GSM BSS parameters used to define all theobjects managed on the OMC–R. An object model is used to describe each managednetwork element. Each object is defined in terms of its parameters (also calledattributes), and its relationships with other objects. A containment tree is used todepict the relationships among these objects (see Figure 1–1 to Figure 1–4). Formore information on objects and parameters, refer to NTP < 07 >, andNTP < 128 >.
root
md network omc
23 1
bscbscMdInterface
Figure 1–1 Object main tree structure
Nortel Networks Confidential1–2 Introduction
PE/DCL/DD/0124411–9001–124
Standard 13.04/EN March 2002 GSM/BSS V13
omc
userProfile
terminalProfile
commandFile shortMessageuserMessage
sessionLog
job
jobResult
clearedAlarmLog currentAlarmListnotificationLogrelay
directory
alarmCriteria
machine
1
Figure 1–2 omc subtree objects
IntroductionNortel Networks Confidential 1–3
BSS Parameter Dictionary
md
mdScanner bscMdInterface
traceControl
logefd mdWarning
alarmRecord
callPathTrace
mdScanReportRecord
stateChangeRecord
observationFileReadyRecordtraceFileReadyRecord
traceLogRecord
3
bsc
: Referenced objects with no hierarchical relationship: Functional objects
executableSoftware
Figure 1–3 md subtree objects
Nortel Networks Confidential1–4 Introduction
PE/DCL/DD/0124411–9001–124
Standard 13.04/EN March 2002 GSM/BSS V13
network
bscMdInterface
signallingPoint
bsc
2
pcusn
signallingLinkSet
signallingLink
xtp
pcmCircuit(A)
transcoder
transcoderBoard
software
tcu
tdti
tcu e3
btsSiteManager
pcmCircuit(Abis / Ater)
lapdLink software
bsc 2G
bscCounterList
pcu
software
cem trm lsaRc
iem
: referenced objects with no hierarchical relationship
: Functional objects
bsc e3
bsc log
Figure 1–4 network subtree objects
IntroductionNortel Networks Confidential 1–5
BSS Parameter Dictionary
Users can create, modify, and delete objects using commands and actions displayedin the menus of the OMC–R Browser window (see Figure 1–5). Parameters arewidely used in all commands and actions.
For more information on commands, refer to NTPs < 128 > to < 130 >:
Described in Manual < 130 > Chapter 13
Described in Manual < 130 > Chapters 9to 12
Described in Manual < 130 > Chapter 8
Described in Manual < 129 > Chapter 6
Described in Manual < 129 > Chapter 5
Described in Manual < 128 > Chapter 4
Described in Manual < 128 > Chapter 3
Described in Manual < 130 > Chapter 14
Described in Manual < 129 > Chapter 7
Figure 1–5 Menus in the OMC–R browser window
Nortel Networks Confidential1–6 Introduction
PE/DCL/DD/0124411–9001–124
Standard 13.04/EN March 2002 GSM/BSS V13
1.2 The different types of configuration parameters
There are two types of configuration parameters: customer and manufacturerparameters.
Customer parameters:
• addressing parameters, which are relative to objects (for example: bscnumber)
• design parameters, which are relative to contract characteristics (for example:configRef, SiteName)
• optimization parameters, which are relative to network tuning (for example:cellReselectHysteresis)
• operating parameters, which are relative to network operation (for example:cellBarred)
Manufacturer parameters:
• system parameters, which can seriously affect system operation, and whichmust be under the control of the manufacturer (for example: runPwrControl)
• product parameters, which are incompatible with the current system release(for example: sWVersionbackup)
Configuration parameters are summarized in tables in Appendix A.
IntroductionNortel Networks Confidential 1–7
BSS Parameter Dictionary
1.3 Description of dictionary entries
Each parameter is described separately and arranged in alphabetical order.
Dictionary entries fall into two parts:
the header line
the main body, composed of several fields
1.3.1 Header line
The header line contains some or all of the following information (see followingfigure):
the name of the OMC–R parameter
the class of the parameter (if any)
the BSS version from which it applies
Nortel Networks Confidential1–8 Introduction
PE/DCL/DD/0124411–9001–124
Standard 13.04/EN March 2002 GSM/BSS V13
bssMapT20 Class 1 V8
Only DP parameters have a class.
� Class 0: the parameter can be set only beforethe application database of the parent BSC isbuilt (bdaState: “not built”).
� Class 1: the parameter can be set only whenthe parent bsc object is locked(administrativeState: “locked”).
� Class 2: the parameter can be set only whenthe object is locked and the parent bsc objectis unlocked.
� Class 3: the parameter can be set only whenthe parent bsc object is unlocked.
For more information, refer to NTP < 07 > .
parameter name
� “Vn” means the parameter applies from the VnBSS version, that is to say Vn, Vn + 1 and so on.
� “ ”: when there is no version, it means that thisparameter is applicable from the V7 BSS releasewhich was the release where the Q3 model hasbeen introduced.
Figure 1–6 Header line
1.3.2 Main body of the entries
The main body contains up to nine fields:
Description: parameter definition
Value range: displayed in square brackets and the unit if any
Example: [2 to 300] seconds
Object: object name(s) in which the parameter is defined
Default value: value wich allows to deactivate the function
Type: parameter type. The five accepted values are the following:
IntroductionNortel Networks Confidential 1–9
BSS Parameter Dictionary
type meaning is handled by the Con-figuration Managementapplication
is handled by any otherapplications (4)
DD Dynamic data (1) X X (5)
DI Internal data (2) X
DP Permanent data (3) X X (6)
DS Static data X
Id Identifier X X (7)
(1) : Dynamic parameters (DD) are not stored in databases. They are managed bythe BSC applications, and they can be consulted on operator request.
(2) : Internal parameters (DI) are stored in the OMC–R operation database (BDE)and they cannot be modified by the operator. They supply additional informationon how an object is configured at a given time, and they can be consulted onoperator request.
(3) : Permanent parameters (DP) are stored in the application database (BDA)and in the operation database (BDE). Most of them are mandatory and they aredefined with the object that uses them. They are managed by the operator.
(4) : Fault Management, Performance Management, Command Functions, etc.
(5) : parameter displayed in command output
(6) : parameter entered by users
(7) : parameter which is either entered by users, or displayed in command output
Condition: It indicates the necessary conditions in which the parameter can beused.
Checks: Semantic checks performed by the OMC–R are indicated with theCreate [C], Set [M], Delete [D], or specific action [A] commands.
Feature: Field introduced from V12. It indicates the reference of the Feature thatimpacts the parameter description.
Restrictions: Applicable restrictions are indicated with the Create [C], Set [M],Delete [D], or specific action [A] commands.
Remark: optional field containing comments.
Nortel Networks Confidential1–10 Introduction
PE/DCL/DD/0124411–9001–124
Standard 13.04/EN March 2002 GSM/BSS V13
PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
Parameters listed in alphabetical orderNortel Networks Confidential 2–1
BSS Parameter Dictionary
2 PARAMETERS LISTED IN ALPHABETICAL ORDER
A
abisSpy Class 3
Description : Whether measurement reports from the BTS and the mobilesare forwarded to the BSC in order to spy on the Abis Interface
The number of measurement reports is limited to four(respectively eight) communications per SICD (respectivelySICD8V) port.
Value range : [in progress / not in progress]Object : bts
Default value : not in progress
Type : DP
Checks : [M] : The parent bsc object is unlocked.
Note : Allowing spying increases the BSC SICD(8V) board load.
absoluteRFChannelNo Class 2
Description : Radio frequency used in the network frequency band by aradio time slot that does not obey frequency hopping laws
Setting this attribute forbids the radio time slot to obeyfrequency hopping laws.
The frequency of the radio time slot that carries a cell BCCHin a TDMA frame (channelType = “mainBCCH”,“mainBCCHCombined”, or “bcchSdcch4CBCH”) is notmanaged by users. When the parent bts object is unlocked, thesystem automatically assigns the cell bCCHFrequency to theconcerned channel object and updates it whenever it ischanged.
Value range : [1 to 124] (GSM 900 network / Extended GSM network),[0 to 1023] (GSM–R),[512 to 885] (GSM 1800 network),[512 to 810] (GSM 1900 network)
Object : channel
Condition : To define if the TDMA does not hop
Type : DP
Nortel Networks Confidential2–2 Parameters listed in alphabetical order
PE/DCL/DD/0124411–9001–124
Standard 13.04/EN March 2002 GSM/BSS V13
Checks : [C/M] : The attribute is undefined when the radio time slotis authorized to hop or its channelType is“mainBCCH”, “mainBCCHCombined”, or“bcchSdcch4CBCH”.
[C/M] : The attribute is defined when the radio time slot isnot authorized to hop and its channelType is“tCHFull”, “sDCCH”, “sdcch8CBCH”, or“cCH”.
[C/M] : When defined, the frequency is one of thoseallotted to the parent bts object (cellAllocationlist).
[M] : Concentric cell: When defined, the frequency isnot used by the channel objects related to thetransceiver objects allotted to the other cell zone.
[M] : The parent bsc object is unlocked and the parentbts object is locked.
access time end
Description : Time of the day after which the user is not allowed to log in.It is after access time start.
Value range : [<time> (18:00)]Object : user profile
Type : DP
Checks : [C/M] : access time end is after access time start.
access time start
Description : Time of the day after which the user is allowed to log in
Value range : [<time> (09:00)]Type : DP
Checks : [C/M] : access time start is before access time end.
accessClassCongestion Class 3 A1 V9
Description : List of access classes that are not authorized in a cell duringTCH congestion phase (class 10 not included)
Value range : [0 to 9] User classes[11 to 15] Operator classes
Object : bts
Type : DP
Checks : [M] : The parent bsc object is unlocked.
Parameters listed in alphabetical orderNortel Networks Confidential 2–3
BSS Parameter Dictionary
accessibilityState
Description : MSC accessibility state
Value range : [reachable / congested / unReachable]
reachable The remote signaling point is within. . . . . . . . reach.
congested 80% of the BSC pool of buffers. . . . . . . . handling outgoing MSC messages isfull.
unReachable The remote signaling point is out of. . . . . reach.
Object : signallingLinkSet
Type : DD
acknowledged by
Description : To select alarms acknowledged by a given user. Enter theuser’s name as defined in the user’s profile.
Do not fill in if this criterion is not to be selected.
Value range : [case sensitive]Object : Alarm logs – Filter
Type : DP
acknowledgment time
Description : To select messages acknowledged at that time
Value range : [<date>,<time>]
Absolute time format entry forms are detailed in NTP < 130 >.
Do not fill in if this criterion is not to be selected.
Object : Alarm logs – Filter
Type : DP
Nortel Networks Confidential2–4 Parameters listed in alphabetical order
PE/DCL/DD/0124411–9001–124
Standard 13.04/EN March 2002 GSM/BSS V13
activationObject
Description : Identifier or name of the traced bsc object on the OMC–R
Value range : [1 to 255]Object : callPathTrace
Type : DP
Checks : [C]: The bsc object is created.
[C]: The callPathTrace object is not created for the bscobject. The Call path tracing function is unique ina given BSS.
Restrictions : [M]: This attribute cannot be modified.
activationObject
Description : Identifier or name of the traced bsc object on the OMC–R
Value range : [1 to 255]Object : traceControl
Type : DP
Checks : [C]: The bsc object is created.
[C]: The traceControl object is not created for the bscobject. The Call tracing function is unique in agiven BSS.
Restrictions : [M]: This attribute cannot be modified.
active (passive) chain disk state V10
Description : Chain disk state
Value range : [Working, Degraded, Partially degraded, Not significant]Object : bsc
Type : DD
Note : This parameter is only available for BSC 2G
active (passive) chain Dmux state V10
Description : State of passive equipment of chain controlled by ECI boardvia alarm loops
Value range : [working, fault]Object : bsc
Type : DD
Note : This parameter is only available for BSC 2G
Parameters listed in alphabetical orderNortel Networks Confidential 2–5
BSS Parameter Dictionary
active (passive) chain ECI board state V10
Description : Chain ECI board state
Value range : [working, fault]Object : bsc
Type : DD
Note : This parameter is only available for BSC 2G
active (passive) chain REM link state V11
Description : Used BSC/OMC–R link state
Value range : [Working / Degraded / Partially degraded / Not significant]Object : bsc
Type : DD
Note : This parameter is only available for BSC 2G
active (passive) chain Sic board state V10
Description : Chain SIC chain state
Value range : [Number, card type (CCS7, SICD, SICX), internal state(working, fault)]
Object : bsc
Type : DD
Note : This parameter is only available for BSC 2G
active (passive) chain sic channels state V10
Description : Chain SIC channel state (LAPD and SS7 channel state)
Value range : [working, fault]Object : bsc
Type : DD
Note : This parameter is only available for BSC 2G
active (passive) chain sls board state V10
Description : SLS board state
Value range : [working, fault]Object : bsc
Type : DD
Note : This parameter is only available for BSC 2G
Nortel Networks Confidential2–6 Parameters listed in alphabetical order
PE/DCL/DD/0124411–9001–124
Standard 13.04/EN March 2002 GSM/BSS V13
active (passive) chain state V10
Description : Chain state
Value range : [nominal state, deteriorated state]Object : bsc
Type : DD
Note : This parameter is only available for BSC 2G
active (passive) chain switching capacity V10
Description : Chain switching capacity
Value range : [working, fault]Object : bsc
Type : DD
Note : This parameter is only available for BSC 2G
active (passive) chain tcu accessibility V10
Description : Chain TCU state
Value range : [working, fault]Object : bsc
Type : DD
Note : This parameter is only available for BSC 2G
active (passive) chain ute board state V10
Description : DDTI, BSCB, TSCB, and ALA board state
Value range : [working, fault]Object : bsc
Type : DD
Note : This parameter is only available for BSC 2G
active rem link V10
Description : BSC/OMC–R link used
Value range : [rem link 0, rem link 1]Object : bsc
Type : DD
Note : This parameter is only available for BSC 2G
Parameters listed in alphabetical orderNortel Networks Confidential 2–7
BSS Parameter Dictionary
activeChain
Description : Identifier of the BSC active chain
Value range : [chainA / chainB]Object : bsc
Type : DD
Note : This parameter is only available for BSC 2G
additional supervised PCM 0 Class 2 V12
Description : Configuration of a new alarm controlled by a BTS in Drop andInsert configuration. The alarm is sent when a level 1transmission network link failure is detected by the BTS, andis caused by an odd PCM port connected with a physical PCMlink on the Abis interface between the BSC and one of thefollowing BTSs:
S8000 BTS with BCF
S8000 BTS with CBCF
S8002 BTS with CBCF
S2000 H/L BTS
e–cell
Value range : [yes (the odd PCM link is supervised by the BTS) / no (the oddPCM link is not supervised by the BTS)]
If PCM 0 belongs to the bscSitePCMList parameter the valuesYES or NO are equivalent (recommendation: NO)
Object : btsSiteManager
Feature : GSM–R V12
Type : DP
Checks : [M] The parent bsc object is unlocked and thebtsSiteManager object is locked.
Nortel Networks Confidential2–8 Parameters listed in alphabetical order
PE/DCL/DD/0124411–9001–124
Standard 13.04/EN March 2002 GSM/BSS V13
additional supervised PCM 1 Class 2 V12
Description : Configuration of a new alarm controlled by a BTS in Drop andInsert configuration. The alarm is sent when a level 1transmission network link failure is detected by the BTS, andis caused by an odd PCM port connected with a physical PCMlink on the Abis interface between the BSC and one of thefollowing BTSs:
S8000 BTS with BCF
S8000 BTS with CBCF
S8002 BTS with CBCF
S2000 H/L BTS
e–cell
Value range : [yes (the odd PCM link is supervised by the BTS) / no (the oddPCM link is not supervised by the BTS)]
If PCM 1 belongs to the bscSitePCMList parameter the valuesYES or NO are equivalent (recommendation: NO)
Object : btsSiteManager
Feature : GSM–R V12
Type : DP
Checks : [M] The parent bsc object is unlocked and thebtsSiteManager object is locked.
additional supervised PCM 2 Class 2 V12
Description : Configuration of a new alarm controlled by a BTS in Drop andInsert configuration. The alarm is sent when a level 1transmission network link failure is detected by the BTS, andis caused by an odd PCM port connected with a physical PCMlink on the Abis interface between the BSC and one of thefollowing BTSs:
S8000 BTS with BCF
S8000 BTS with CBCF
S8002 BTS with CBCF
S2000 H/L BTS
e–cell
Parameters listed in alphabetical orderNortel Networks Confidential 2–9
BSS Parameter Dictionary
Value range : [yes (the odd PCM link is supervised by the BTS) / no (the oddPCM link is not supervised by the BTS)]
If PCM 2 belongs to the bscSitePCMList parameter the valuesYES or NO are equivalent (recommendation: NO)
Object : btsSiteManager
Feature : GSM–R V12
Type : DP
Checks : [M] The parent bsc object is unlocked and thebtsSiteManager object is locked.
additional supervised PCM 3 Class 2 V12
Description : Configuration of a new alarm controlled by a BTS in Drop andInsert configuration. The alarm is sent when a level 1transmission network link failure is detected by the BTS, andis caused by an odd PCM port connected with a physical PCMlink on the Abis interface between the BSC and one of thefollowing BTSs:
S8000 BTS with BCF
S8000 BTS with CBCF
S8002 BTS with CBCF
S2000 H/L BTS
e–cell
Value range : [yes (the odd PCM link is supervised by the BTS) / no (the oddPCM link is not supervised by the BTS)]
If PCM 3 belongs to the bscSitePCMList parameter the valuesYES or NO are equivalent (recommendation: NO)
Object : btsSiteManager
Feature : GSM–R V12
Type : DP
Checks : [M] The parent bsc object is unlocked and thebtsSiteManager object is locked.
Nortel Networks Confidential2–10 Parameters listed in alphabetical order
PE/DCL/DD/0124411–9001–124
Standard 13.04/EN March 2002 GSM/BSS V13
additional supervised PCM 4 Class 2 V12
Description : Configuration of a new alarm controlled by a BTS in Drop andInsert configuration. The alarm is sent when a level 1transmission network link failure is detected by the BTS, andis caused by an odd PCM port connected with a physical PCMlink on the Abis interface between the BSC and one of thefollowing BTSs:
S8000 BTS with BCF
S8000 BTS with CBCF
S8002 BTS with CBCF
S2000 H/L BTS
e–cell
Value range : [yes (the odd PCM link is supervised by the BTS) / no (the oddPCM link is not supervised by the BTS)]
If PCM 4 belongs to the bscSitePCMList parameter the valuesYES or NO are equivalent (recommendation: NO)
Object : btsSiteManager
Feature : GSM–R V12
Type : DP
Checks : [M] The parent bsc object is unlocked and thebtsSiteManager object is locked.
additional supervised PCM 5 Class 2 V12
Description : Configuration of a new alarm controlled by a BTS in Drop andInsert configuration. The alarm is sent when a level 1transmission network link failure is detected by the BTS, andis caused by an odd PCM port connected with a physical PCMlink on the Abis interface between the BSC and one of thefollowing BTSs:
S8000 BTS with BCF
S8000 BTS with CBCF
S8002 BTS with CBCF
S2000 H/L BTS
e–cell
Parameters listed in alphabetical orderNortel Networks Confidential 2–11
BSS Parameter Dictionary
Value range : [yes (the odd PCM link is supervised by the BTS) / no (the oddPCM link is not supervised by the BTS)]
If PCM 5 belongs to the bscSitePCMList parameter the valuesYES or NO are equivalent (recommendation: NO)
Object : btsSiteManager
Feature : GSM–R V12
Type : DP
Checks : [M] The parent bsc object is unlocked and thebtsSiteManager object is locked.
additional unmasked users alarms Class 2 V12
Description : Configuration of the new user (unprotected) external alarmloops controlled by the BTS (added to the already existingunprotected external alarms, see parameter “unmasked usersalarms”). These additional alaarms are detected by theRECAL board of the main cabinet. When an alarm isunmasked, it means the relevant equipment is monitored bythe BTS.
There are 24 additional user (unprotected) alarms on theS8002 BTS, 14 alarms on the S8000 Outdoor BTS, and 20alarms on the S8000 Indoor BTS.
A user alarm is used when an external item of equipment isinserted in the BTS (a microwave terminal for instance) anddoes not require a new DLU.
Value range : [All alarms maskedAlarm 1 unmaskedAlarms 1 to 2 unmaskedAlarms 1 to 3 unmaskedAlarms 1 to 4 unmaskedAlarms 1 to 5 unmaskedAlarms 1 to 6 unmaskedAlarms 1 to 7 unmaskedAlarms 1 to 8 unmaskedAlarms 1 to 9 unmaskedAlarms 1 to 10 unmaskedAlarms 1 to 11 unmaskedAlarms 1 to 12 unmaskedAlarms 1 to 13 unmaskedAlarms 1 to 14 unmaskedAlarms 1 to 15 unmasked
Nortel Networks Confidential2–12 Parameters listed in alphabetical order
PE/DCL/DD/0124411–9001–124
Standard 13.04/EN March 2002 GSM/BSS V13
Alarms 1 to 16 unmaskedAlarms 1 to 17 unmaskedAlarms 1 to 18 unmaskedAlarms 1 to 19 unmaskedAlarms 1 to 20 unmaskedAlarms 1 to 21 unmaskedAlarms 1 to 22 unmaskedAlarms 1 to 23 unmaskedAlarms 1 to 24 unmasked ]
Object : btsSiteManager
Feature : GSM–R V12
Type : DP
Checks : [M] : The parent bsc object is unlocked and thebtsSiteManager object is locked
addresses
Description : Definition of the OMC–R user(s) to whom the message isaddressed
Select the all option to send the message to all OMC–R users.
Select the users option to send the message to selectedOMC–R users. Enter their names as defined in their profiles[case sensitive], separated by the “&” character.
Object : user message – Answer / New message
Type : DP
adjacent cell umbrella ref Class 3 A2 V9
Description : Identifier of the adjacentCelHandOver object that describesthe neighbor cell towards which a directed retry will betriggered in BSC mode
Value range : [0 to 31]Object : bts
Type : DP
Checks : [C/M]: The preferential umbrella cell must refer to anexisting adjacentCellHandOver object instance.
[C/M]: When the function “directed retry” is made byinterrogation of the BTS, the preferentialumbrella cell must not be indicated.
[M]: The parent bsc object is unlocked.
Parameters listed in alphabetical orderNortel Networks Confidential 2–13
BSS Parameter Dictionary
adjacentCellHandOver V8
Description : Identifier of an adjacentCellHandOver object that defines aneighbor cell of a serving cell for handover managementpurposes. A bts object may reference up to thirty-two objectsof this type.
Value range : [0 to 31]
Object : adjacentCellHandOver
Type : Id
Checks : [C]: The associated bts object is created and theadjacentCellHandOver object is not created forthat object.
[C]: The number of adjacentCellHandOver objectscreated for a bts object is limited tomaxAdjCHOARMPerBts (static configurationdata).
[C/M]: The (baseColourCode, bCCHFrequency,networkColourCode) combination is unique inthe set including a serving cell and its neighborcells.
[C/D]: If the related BSC application database is built, theparent bsc object is unlocked.
[M]: The parent bsc object is unlocked.
[M/D]: The adjacentCellHandOver object is created.
[D]: If the application database of the related BSC isnot built, it has been reset by an Off line reset BDAcommand.
[D]: No mdScanner object refers to theadjacentCellHandOver object (no observation isrunning on that object).
[D]: At least one adjacentCellHandOver object shouldbe created for the bts object.
Nortel Networks Confidential2–14 Parameters listed in alphabetical order
PE/DCL/DD/0124411–9001–124
Standard 13.04/EN March 2002 GSM/BSS V13
adjacentCellReselection V8
Description : Identifier of an adjacentCellReselection object that definesreselection management parameters for a serving cell. A btsobject may reference up to thirty-two objects of this type.
Value range : [0 to 31]Object : adjacentCellReselection
Type : Id
Checks : [C]: The bts object is created and theadjacentCellReselection object is not created forthat object.
[C]: The number of adjacentCellReselection objectscreated for a bts object is limited tomaxAdjCHOARMPerBts (static configurationdata).
[M]: The parent bsc object is unlocked.
[C/D]: If the application database of the related BSC isbuilt, the parent bsc object is unlocked.
[M/D]: The adjacentCellReselection object is created.
[D]: If the application database of the related BSC isnot built, it has been reset by an Off line reset BDAcommand.
adjCHOReserved3 Class 3 A3 V12
Description : Attribute reserved for future use
Value range : [–32768 to 32767]Object : adjacentCellHandOver
Default value :
Type : DP
Checks : [M]: The parent bsc object is unlocked.
adjCHOReserved4 Class 3 A4 V12
Description : Attribute reserved for future use
Value range : [–32768 to 32767]Object : adjacentCellHandOver
Default value :
Type : DP
Checks : [M]: The parent bsc object is unlocked.
Parameters listed in alphabetical orderNortel Networks Confidential 2–15
BSS Parameter Dictionary
administrativeState
Description : Activation state of an alarm criteria
An alarm criteria is created in unlocked state.
The OMC–R Fault Management function ignores the inactivecriteria when processing notifications.
Value range : [locked (inactive) / unlocked (active)]Object : alarm criteria
Type : DP
administrativeState V13
Description : ISO state
Value range : [locked / unlocked]Object : atmRm
Feature : BSC/TCU e3: AR 1209
Type : DP
administrativeState
Description : ISO state
Value range : [locked / unlocked]
A bsc object is created in locked state.Object : bsc
Type : DP
Checks : [M]: If mobileCountryCode andmobileNetworkCode are defined for the bscobject, they match those of all dependent btsobjects.
[M]: The lapdLinkOMLRef attributes of alldependent transcoder objects refer to lapdLinkobjects using the same lapdTerminalNumber inthe BSC.
The following check is only performed when the bsc object isunlocked:
• The dependent software object is created and itssWVersionRunning attribute defines a software versiondownloaded to the BSC disk.
Nortel Networks Confidential2–16 Parameters listed in alphabetical order
PE/DCL/DD/0124411–9001–124
Standard 13.04/EN March 2002 GSM/BSS V13
administrativeState
Description : ISO state
Value range : [locked / unlocked]
A bscMdInterface object is created in unlocked state.
When the object is locked, the BSC involved in theBSS/OMC–R link described by this object cannotcommunicate with the OMC–R.
Object : bscMdInterface
Type : DP
Checks : [M]: The concerned bsc object is unlocked.
administrativeState
Description : ISO state
A bts object is created in locked state.
When the object is unlocked, the described cell will beworking if the carrier TDMA frame (or BCCH frame) issuccessfully configured in the BTS and at least<minNbOfTDMA> TDMA frames (including the carrierframe) are operating.
Value range : [locked / unlocked / shuttingDown (soft release)]Object : bts
Type : DP
Checks : [M]: The parent bsc object is unlocked.
[M]: It is not possible to change from “shuttingDown”to “unlocked” or from “locked” to“shuttingDown”.
[M]: It is not possible to change to “shuttingDown” ifthe application database of the related BSC is notbuilt.
The following checks are only performed when the bts objectis unlocked:
The associated handOverControl and powerControlobjects are created for the bts object.
The mobileCountryCode and mobileNetworkCodeattributes match those of the parent bsc object when they aredefined for that object.
Parameters listed in alphabetical orderNortel Networks Confidential 2–17
BSS Parameter Dictionary
The frequencies in the cellAllocation list comply with thestandardIndicator attribute value.
The minNbOfTDMA attribute value is less than or equalto the number of transceiver objects created for the btsobject.
Cavity cell: The number of dependent transceiver objectsequals the number of frequencies in the cellAllocation list.
Eight channel objects are created for each dependenttransceiver object if the cell works in normal mode, fourchannel objects are created for each dependent transceiverobject if the cell works in extended mode. The following
apply:
• Only one of them has a channelType equal to“mainBCCH”, “mainBCCHCombined”, or“bcchSdcch4CBCH”.
• If the smsCB attribute of the bts object is “used”, one ofthem has a channelType equal to “sdcc8CBCH” or“bcchSdcch4CBCH”.
Concentric cell:
• Two transceiverZone objects are created for the btsobject.
• Each dependent transceiver object refers to atransceiverZone object (transceiver zone Ref isdefined).
• All channel objects describing the cell BCCH orcommon channels (channelType = “cCH”) depend ontransceiver objects allotted to the outer zone.
• If frequency hopping is allowed in a zone (zonefrequency hopping), it is allowed in the cell(btsIshopping).
• The frequencies used by the transceiver objects in a zoneare separate from the frequencies used by the transceiverobjects in the other zone.
Nortel Networks Confidential2–18 Parameters listed in alphabetical order
PE/DCL/DD/0124411–9001–124
Standard 13.04/EN March 2002 GSM/BSS V13
Releasing a bts object by shutting down sustains the callssupported by the described cell. The system actions are asfollows:
Radio resources remain allocated until the calls end.
Once a TDMA frame is released, a CLEAR CONFIGREQUEST message is sent to the partnered TRX/DRX.
When all calls are terminated, the cell is released(administrativeState = “locked” and operationalState =“disabled”) and the concerned TRX/DRXs and TDMAframes are unreachable (availabilityStatus =“{dependency}”.
Notes : It is recommended to bar direct access to the cell beforeinitiating a soft release (cellBarred = “barred”), to preventoff-call mobiles from listening to the cell during the softrelease phase, so they can immediately reselect another cellfor receiving or sending calls.It is recommended also to forbid incoming handovers in thecell (incomingHandOver = “disabled”), to remove the cellfrom the list of eligible cells and, thus, avoid its selectionif the BTS receives such a request.
In order to speed up the soft release process, the ForceHandOvers command can be used first to redirect the trafficcurrently handled by the serving cell towards its neighborcells.
If a hard lock request is sent during the soft release phase,all the calls supported by the cell are immediately releasedby the BSC.
administrativeState
Description : ISO state
Value range : [locked / unlocked]
A btsSiteManager object is created in locked state.Object : btsSiteManager
Type : DP
Parameters listed in alphabetical orderNortel Networks Confidential 2–19
BSS Parameter Dictionary
Checks : [M]: The parent bsc object is unlocked.
The following checks are only performed when thebtsSiteManager object is unlocked:
The scheduled time slot (pcmTimeSlotNumber) ismasked in the btsSiteManager object radioSiteMask.
The radioSiteMask of all btsSiteManager objects sharinga same PCM link in the BSS are dissociated and theirscheduled time slots are different and masked in theirradioSiteMask.
The bscSitePcmList list includes at least two items if thebtsSiteManager object redundantPcmPresence attributeis “true”.
All pcmCircuit objects referenced in the list(pcmCircuitBsc components) are created for the parentbsc object and assigned to the Abis interface.
One of them identifies a PCM link with apcmCircuitBtsSiteManager reference in the range [0 to3] for clock synchronization.
The maxNbOfCells attribute value is greater than or equalto the number of bts objects created for the btsSiteManagerobject.
The configRef attribute defines a DLU file downloaded tothe BSC disk
The dependent software object is created and itssWVersionRunning attribute defines a software versiondownloaded to the BSC disk.
administrativeState
Description : ISO state. Locking the object blocks the collection of data andthe generation of the associated messages.
Value range : [locked / unlocked]
A callPathTrace object is created in locked state. Unlock theobjet to start collecting data in the related BSC.
In that case, data collecting is stopped in the related BSC.However, current messages are stored by the BSC and notifiedto the OMC–R agent.
Object : callPathTrace
Type : DP
Nortel Networks Confidential2–20 Parameters listed in alphabetical order
PE/DCL/DD/0124411–9001–124
Standard 13.04/EN March 2002 GSM/BSS V13
Notes : If trace data collecting is stopped by locking the object, theBSC continues to send the current trace messages to theOMC–R agent, but no notifications are issued.
If trace data collecting is stopped by locking the object oron reaching the end-of-session criterion, it is automaticallyrestarted whenever the callPathTrace object is unlocked.For instance, if the end-of-session criterion defines a periodof time that elapsed, data collecting will restart for theentire period.
administrativeState V13
Description : ISO state
Value range : [locked / unlocked]Object : cc
Feature : BSC/TCU e3: AR 1209
Type : DP
administrativeState V13
Description : ISO state
Value range : [locked / unlocked]Object : cem
Feature : BSC/TCU e3: AR 1209
Type : DP
administrativeState V13
Description : ISO state
Value range : [locked / unlocked]Object : cn
Feature : BSC/TCU e3: AR 1209
Type : DP
Parameters listed in alphabetical orderNortel Networks Confidential 2–21
BSS Parameter Dictionary
administrativeState
Description : ISO state. Locking the object blocks the transmission of theassociated messages to the OMC–R manager.
The administrativeState of an efd object is set by the user atobject creation time and can be changed with the Modifycommand.
Value range : [locked / unlocked]Object : efd
Type : DP
administrativeState V13
Description : ISO state
Value range : [locked / unlocked]Object : g3BscEqp
Feature : BSC/TCU e3: AR 1209
Type : DP
administrativeState V13
Description : ISO state
Value range : [locked / unlocked]Object : g3TranscoderEqpt
Feature : BSC/TCU e3: AR 1209
Type : DP
administrativeState V13
Description : ISO state
Value range : [locked / unlocked]Object : iem
Feature : BSC/TCU e3: AR 1209
Type : DP
administrativeState V13
Description : ISO state
Value range : [locked / unlocked]Object : in
Feature : BSC/TCU e3: AR 1209
Type : DP
Nortel Networks Confidential2–22 Parameters listed in alphabetical order
PE/DCL/DD/0124411–9001–124
Standard 13.04/EN March 2002 GSM/BSS V13
administrativeState
Description : Activation state of a repeated job
A job object is created in unlocked state.
When a job is set inactive, it is not run.
Value range : [locked (inactive) / unlocked (active)]Object : job
Type : DP
Checks : [M]: The job is not running.
administrativeState
Description : ISO state. It is set by the OMC–R agent.
Value range : [locked (= restored log) / unlocked (= current log)]
An unlocked log object describes a current log on the OMC–Ragent disks. A locked log object describes a log restored on thedisks.
Object : log – Display
Type : DP
Note : The attributes of the log objects are not managed by users.
administrativeState V13
Description : ISO state
Value range : [locked / unlocked]Object : lsaRc
Feature : BSC/TCU e3: AR 1209
Type : DP
administrativeState
Description : ISO state. Locking the object blocks the generation ofprocessed alarms when out-of-range conditions are met.
The administrativeState of an mdWarning object is set by theuser at object creation time and can be changed with theModify command.
A change of state is effective when the OMC–R is restarted.Whatever the state of the object, the related notifications arealways forwarded to the OMC–R manager.
Value range : [locked / unlocked]Object : mdWarning
Type : DP
Parameters listed in alphabetical orderNortel Networks Confidential 2–23
BSS Parameter Dictionary
administrativeState V13
Description : ISO state
Value range : [locked / unlocked]
Object : mms
Feature : BSC/TCU e3: AR 1209
Type : DP
administrativeState V13
Description : ISO state
Value range : [locked / unlocked]
Object : omu
Feature : BSC/TCU e3: AR 1209
Type : DP
administrativeState
Description : ISO state
Value range : [locked / unlocked]
A pcmCircuit object is created in locked state.
Object : pcmCircuit
Type : DP
Checks : [M]: The parent bsc object is unlocked.
administrativeState V12
Description : ISO state
Value range : [locked / unlocked]
A pcu object is created in locked state.
Object : pcu
Feature : GPRS (SV407 – V12)
Type : DP
Checks : [M]: the parent bsc object is unlocked.
Nortel Networks Confidential2–24 Parameters listed in alphabetical order
PE/DCL/DD/0124411–9001–124
Standard 13.04/EN March 2002 GSM/BSS V13
administrativeState
Description : ISO state
Value range : [locked / unlocked]
A signallingLink object is created in locked state.
Object : signallingLink
Type : DP
Checks : [M]: The parent bsc object is unlocked.
administrativeState V13
Description : ISO state
Value range : [locked / unlocked]
Object : sw8kRm
Feature : BSC/TCU e3: AR 1209
Type : DP
administrativeState V13
Description : ISO state
Value range : [locked / unlocked]
Object : tmu
Feature : BSC/TCU e3: AR 1209
Type : DP
administrativeState
Description : ISO state. Locking the object blocks the collection of data andthe generation of the associated messages.
Value range : [locked / unlocked]
A traceControl object is created in locked state. Unlock theobject to start collecting trace data in the related BSC.
Object : traceControl
Type : DP
Parameters listed in alphabetical orderNortel Networks Confidential 2–25
BSS Parameter Dictionary
Notes : If trace data collecting is stopped by locking the object, theBSC continues to send the current trace messages to theOMC–R agent, but no notifications are issued.If traced calls are not terminated when the object is locked,all trace information related to those calls will be lost,unless partial record generation was requested. In that case,only data that are not yet recorded will be lost.
Trace data collecting is automatically restarted in the BSCwhenever the traceControl object is unlocked.
administrativeState
Description : ISO state
Value range : [locked / unlocked / shuttingDown (soft release)]
A transceiverEquipment object is created in locked state.Object : transceiverEquipment
Type : DP
Checks : [M]: The parent bsc object is unlocked.
[M]: It is not possible to change from “shuttingDown” to“unlocked” or from “locked” to “shuttingDown”.
[M]: It is not possible to change to “shuttingDown” ifthe application database of the related BSC is notbuilt.
The following checks are only performed when thetransceiverEquipment object is unlocked:
The lapdLinkOMLRef and lapdLinkRSLRef attributesof the transceiverEquipment object refer to lapdLinkobjects using the same lapdTerminalNumber in theparent BSC.
The related software object is created and itssWVersionRunning attribute defines a software versiondownloaded to the BSC disk.
Releasing a transceiverEquipment object by shutting downsustains the calls supported by the described TRX/DRX andthe partnered TDMA frame. The system actions which may becarried out are the following:
To carry out a soft release. This action does notautomatically cause a handover. By carrying out thisaction, the operator must wait for the end of the comsbefore the TRX/DRX changes to “blocked”.
Nortel Networks Confidential2–26 Parameters listed in alphabetical order
PE/DCL/DD/0124411–9001–124
Standard 13.04/EN March 2002 GSM/BSS V13
To carry out a forced handover. A forced handover on thecell object will cause the DRX/TRX to change to“blocked” more quickly.
If the TDMA frame affected by this operation has priorityover other frames in the BSS, the BSC reconfigures thatframe on a different TRX/DRX and immediately transfersthe current calls handled by the TRX/DRX being released.
When all calls are transferred or terminated, the TRX/DRXis released (administrativeState = “locked” andoperationalState = “disabled”), and the partnered TDMAframe is unreachable if it has not been reconfigured(availabilityStatus = “{dependency}”.
Note : If a hard lock request is sent during the soft release phase, allthe calls handled by the TRX/DRX are immediately releasedby the BSC.
administrativeState
Description : ISO state
Value range : [locked / unlocked]
A transcoder object is created in locked state.
Object : transcoder
Type : DP
Checks : [M]: the parent bsc object is unlocked.
The following checks are only performed when the transcoderobject is unlocked:
All transcoder objects created for the same parent bscobject refer to lapdLink objects that use the samelapdTerminalNumber in the BSC.
<maxTranscdBPerTranscd> dependent transcoderBoardobjects are created for the transcoder object.
Parameters listed in alphabetical orderNortel Networks Confidential 2–27
BSS Parameter Dictionary
administrativeState
Description : ISO state
Value range : [locked / unlocked]
A transcoderBoard object is created in locked state.Object : transcoderBoard
Type : DP
Checks : [M]: The parent bsc object is unlocked.
The following check is only performed when thetranscoderBoard object is unlocked:
The related software object is created and itssWVersionRunning attribute defines a software versiondownloaded to the BSC disk.
administrativeState V13
Description : ISO state
Value range : [locked / unlocked]Object : trm
Feature : BSC/TCU e3: AR 1209
Type : DP
administrativeState
Description : ISO state
Value range : [locked / unlocked / shuttingDown (soft release)]
An xtp object is created in locked state.Object : xtp
Type : DP
Checks : [M]: The parent bsc object is unlocked.
[M]: It is not possible to change from “shuttingDown”to “unlocked” or from “locked” to“shuttingDown”.
[M]: It is not possible to change to “shuttingDown” ifthe application database of the related BSC is notbuilt.
The BSC will refuse to unlock a terrestrial traffic circuit thatcould break the OMC channel connection down.
Nortel Networks Confidential2–28 Parameters listed in alphabetical order
PE/DCL/DD/0124411–9001–124
Standard 13.04/EN March 2002 GSM/BSS V13
Releasing an xtp object by shutting down sustains the callsupported by the described terrestrial traffic circuit. Thesystem actions are as follows:
Any further attempt of the MSC to allocate the terrestrialcircuit is refused.
When the call is completed, the terrestrial circuit is released(administrativeState = “locked” and operationalState =“disabled”).
Notes : All terrestrial circuits supported by a given PCM link canbe softly released at the same time. If the PCM linksupports a signaling link, it remains operating.
If a hard lock request is sent during the soft release phase,the call supported by the terrestrial circuit is immediatelyreleased by the BSC.
aLAIntState
Description : Internal state of the BSC ALA board
Value range : [working / fault]
working The board is correctly configured..
fault The board configuration was unsuccessful.. . . .
Object : bsc
Type : DD
alarm criteria
Description : Active alarm configuration
Value range : [day configuration / night configuration / specificconfiguration / reference configuration]
The active configuration is the alarm criteria configurationcurrently used by the OMC–R Fault Management function forfault processing.
The names given to the alarm operating configurations (day /night / specific) only serve to identify them. Any configurationmay be activated at any time by users, but only one can beactive at a time.
Object : omc
Type : DP
Parameters listed in alphabetical orderNortel Networks Confidential 2–29
BSS Parameter Dictionary
Notes : When the OMC–R is started up or the active server isswitched over, the OMC–R activates the configuration thename of which corresponds to the time of the day thatstart-up or switchover occurs. The following apply:
• The daytime configuration is activated when the eventoccurs between 9:00 a.m. and 6:00 p.m. (staticconfiguration data).
• The nighttime configuration is activated when the eventoccurs between 6:00 p.m. and 9:00 a.m. (staticconfiguration data).
The active configuration can be forced by users at any othertime. If a problem occurs while loading the selectedconfiguration, the OMC–R uses the referenceconfiguration and sends a warning message to the user.
alarm criteria
Description : Identifier of an alarm criterion on the OMC–R
Value range : [0 to 999] (manufacturer configuration), [1000 to 65535](operator configurations)
Users can manage operator configuration alarm criteria. Themanufacturer reference configuration alarm criteria can onlybe displayed.
Object : alarm criteria
Type : Id
Checks : [C]: The alarm criteria identifier is in the range [1000to 65535].
[C]: The alarm criteria does not exist in the operatorconfigurations.
[M/D]: The alarm criteria exists in the operatorconfigurations.
alarm number
Description : To select alarms with a given number
Do not fill in if this criterion is not to be selected.
Value range : [0 to 2147483646]Object : Alarm logs – Filter
Type : DP
Nortel Networks Confidential2–30 Parameters listed in alphabetical order
PE/DCL/DD/0124411–9001–124
Standard 13.04/EN March 2002 GSM/BSS V13
alarm severity
Description : To select alarms according to the severity
Do not fill in if this criterion is not to be selected.
Value range : [critical / major / minor]Object : Alarm logs – Filter
Type : DP
alarm state
Description : To select alarms according to the acknowledgement state
Do not fill in if this criterion is not to be selected.
Value range : [acknowledged / unacknowledged]Object : Alarm logs – Filter
Type : DP
alarmDuration
Description : Alarm hold duration when a counter is involved
Value range : [0 to 345600] secondObject : alarm criteria
Condition : To define if a counter is associated with the criterion.
Type : DP
alarmListConverter
Description : State of the TCU converters
Value range : [working / failed]Object : transcoder
Type : DD
Note : This parameter is only available for BSC 2G
alarmListFan
Description : State of the TCU fans
Value range : [working / failed]Type : DD
Note : This parameter is only available for BSC 2G
Parameters listed in alphabetical orderNortel Networks Confidential 2–31
BSS Parameter Dictionary
alarmListFanBoard
Description : State of the TCU fan boards
Value range : [working / failed]Object : transcoder
Type : DD
Note : This parameter is only available for BSC 2G
alarmListVCOTension
Description : State of the TCU VCO voltage
Value range : [working / failed]Object : transcoder
Type : DP
Note : This parameter is only available for BSC 2G
Nortel Networks Confidential2–32 Parameters listed in alphabetical order
PE/DCL/DD/0124411–9001–124
Standard 13.04/EN March 2002 GSM/BSS V13
alarmPriority
Description : Alarm processing priority
Value range : [CLEARED / critical / indeterminate / major / minor /warning]
There are six defined priority levels which provide anindication of how it is perceived that the capability of themanaged object has been affected. The following definitionsare used:
CLEARED: The cleared severity level indicates. . . . . . the clearing of one or morepreviously reported alarms. Thisalarm clears all alarms for thismanaged object that have the sametype, probable cause, and specificproblems.
critical: The critical severity level indicates. . . . . . . . . that a service affecting condition hasoccurred and an immediatecorrective action is required.
indeterminate: The indeterminate severity level. . . . indicates that the severity level of theservice affecting condition cannot bedetermined.
major: The major severity level indicates. . . . . . . . . . that a service affecting condition hasdeveloped and a deferred correctiveaction is required.
minor: The minor severity level indicates the. . . . . . . . . . existence of a non–service affectingfault condition and that a correctiveaction should be taken in order toprevent a more serious fault.
Parameters listed in alphabetical orderNortel Networks Confidential 2–33
BSS Parameter Dictionary
warning: The warning severity level indicates. . . . . . . . . the detection of a potential orimpending service affecting fault,before any significant effects havebeen felt. An action should be takento further diagnose and correct theproblem in order to prevent it frombecoming a more serious serviceaffecting fault.
Object : mdWarning
Type : DP
AlgoId V8
Description : Definition of the speech algorithms used in a TCB
This parameter is a component of the algorithm Usedattribute. Refer to this entry in the Dictionary.
Value range : [full rate / enhanced full rate]Type : DP
Object : transcoderBoard
Default value : full rate
algorithm Used Class 2 V8
Description : Speech processing algorithm parameters used in the SPUprocessors of a TCB
Value range : AlgoId = [full rate / full rate & enhanced full rate],powerDownLink = [–15 to +15] dB,powerUpLink = [–15 to +15] dB
AlgoId speech algorithms used. . . . . . . . . .
powerDownLink power gain on the downlink. . .
powerUpLink power gain on the uplink. . . . . Object : transcoderBoard
Type : DP
Checks : [C/M]: The AlgoId component contains “full rate”.
[C/M]: The AlgoId component also contains “enhancedfull rate” if the parent transcoder object versionattribute value is “TCB_2”.
[M]: The parent bsc object is unlocked and thetranscoderBoard object is locked.
Nortel Networks Confidential2–34 Parameters listed in alphabetical order
PE/DCL/DD/0124411–9001–124
Standard 13.04/EN March 2002 GSM/BSS V13
allocationState
Description : TDMA frame allocation state
Value range : [available / not available / not significant]
available The SACCH FILLING messages. . . . . . . . containing the SYS INFO 5 and 6have been acknowledged by the BTS.
not available The SACCH FILLING messages. . . . . containing the SYS INFO 5 and 6have not been acknowledged by theBTS.
not significant The SACCH FILLING messages. . . . containing the SYS INFO 5 and 6have not been sent to the BTS by theBSC.
Object : transceiver
Type : DD
allocBitmap Class 3 V12
Description : Maximum size of the allocation bitmap provided to the MSand error rate in the cell used by the PCU to build theallocation bitmap
Value range : [maxSize / blockErrorRate]
maxSize [0 to 127] blocks
blockErrorRate [0 to 100] %
Object : transceiver
Default value : 24 blocks, 8%
Feature : GPRS (SV407 – V12)
Type : DP
Checks : [M]: The parent bsc object is unlocked.
Parameters listed in alphabetical orderNortel Networks Confidential 2–35
BSS Parameter Dictionary
allocPriorityTable Class 3 A5
Description : Table of eighteen elements that define the internal prioritiesfor processing TCH queued allocation requests for eachexternal priority defined (among them, fourteen are GSMpriorities)
TCH is always allocated using the internal priority.
Value range : [0 to 7]. “0” defines the highest priority.
Object : bts
Default value : 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Type : DP
Checks : [M]: The parent bsc object is unlocked.
allocPriorityThreshold Class 3 A6
Description : Number of free TCHs needed for processing a TCH allocationrequest with an internal priority higher than 1
These channels are reserved to allocation requests with amaximum internal priority (priority 0).
The TCH allocation is performed according to this algorithm:
Number of freeTCH = 0
1 ≤ Number of freeTCH ≤
allocPriorityThreshold
Number of free TCH> allocPriorityThre-
shold
TCHrequest ofpriority 0
– queueing ifdefined or– reject
TCH allocated TCH allocated
TCHrequest ofpriority > 0
– queueing ifdefined or– reject
– queueing if definedor– reject
TCH allocated
Value range : [0 to 2147483646]
Object : bts
Default value : 0
Type : DP
Checks : [M]: The parent bsc object is unlocked.
Nortel Networks Confidential2–36 Parameters listed in alphabetical order
PE/DCL/DD/0124411–9001–124
Standard 13.04/EN March 2002 GSM/BSS V13
allocPriorityTimers Class 3 A7
Description : Table of eight timers that defines for each internal processingpriority the maximum waiting time of TCH allocationsrequests
Value range : [0 to 2147483646] seconds
Object : bts
Default value : 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Type : DP
Checks : [M]: The parent bsc object is unlocked.
allocWaitThreshold Class 3 A8
Description : Table of eight elements that defines for each internalprocessing priority, the maximum number of TCH allocationrequests that can be queued
A TCH request of priority Pi, P0<Pi≤P7, is queued if the totalnumber of requests of priority Pj, with j≤i, already in the queuedoes not exceed the waiting threshold of the queue “i”(element “i” of the allocWaitThreshold table).
Value range : [0 to 2147483646]
Object : bts
Default value : 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Type : DP
Checks : [M]: the parent bsc object is unlocked.
allOtherCasesPriority Class 3 A9
Description : Index in the allocPriorityTable that defines the processingpriority of TCH allocation requests with cause “other cases”
This priority is used in primo-allocations or when an SDDCHcannot be allocated for overload reasons.
Value range : [0 to 17]
Object : bts
Default value : 17
Type : DP
Checks : [M]: The parent bsc object is unlocked.
Parameters listed in alphabetical orderNortel Networks Confidential 2–37
BSS Parameter Dictionary
answerPagingPriority Class 3 A10
Description : Index in the allocPriorityTable that defines the processingpriority of TCH allocation requests with cause “reply topaging”
This priority is used in signaling mode on TCH only.
Value range : [0 to 17]Object : bts
Default value : 17
Type : DP
Checks : [M]: The parent bsc object is unlocked.
architecture
Description : Architecture of the OMC–R agent in terms of servers. It isprovided by the OMC–R agent.
The standard configuration is “one active with one passive”and the basic configuration is “one active without passive”.
Value range : [dual servers but passive not runningdual servers runningsingle server running]
Object : md – Display
Type : DP
Checks : [M]: This attribute is not managed by users.
assignRequestPriority Class 3 A11
Description : Index in the allocPriorityTable that defines the processingpriority of TCH allocation requests with cause “immediateassignment”
This priority is used when radio resource allocation queueingis not requested by the MSC or not authorized in the BSS (referto the bscQueueingOption entry in the Dictionary).
Value range : [0 to 17]Object : bts
Default value : 17
Type : DP
Checks : [M]: The parent bsc object is unlocked.
Nortel Networks Confidential2–38 Parameters listed in alphabetical order
PE/DCL/DD/0124411–9001–124
Standard 13.04/EN March 2002 GSM/BSS V13
associatedInterface
Description : Interface on which a LAPD link is used
Value range : [Abis / Ater / Agprs]
A LAPD link used on the Abis interface carries BTS signaling.A LAPD link used on the Ater interface carries TCU signaling.A LAPD link used on the Agprs interface carries PCUsignaling.
Object : lapdLink
Feature : GPRS (SV407 – V12)
Type : DP
Checks : [C]: The value is whether “Abis” or “Agprs” if thelapdConcentration attribute value is “disabled”.
[C]: The value is whether “Abis” or “Ater” if thelapdConcentration attribute value is “enabled”.
[C]: The “Agprs” value is only allowed for PCUlapdLink interface from V12 BSCs.
Restrictions : [M] : This attribute cannot be modified.
Note : This parameter is only available for BSC 2G
associatedLog
Description : Identifier of the log object that describes the associated recordson the OMC–R agent disks
For an mdScanner object, this attribute is displayed providedmdLog = “logged”.
Value range : [0 to 2147483646]Object : callPathTrace, mdScanner, traceControl – Display
Type : DI
Restrictions : [C/M]: This attribute is not managed by users.
associatedTMUPosition V13
Description : Indicates the TMU position. Dynamically managed by theBsc.
Value range : [{0 to 1} / {1 to 15}]Object : btsSiteManager
Type : DP
Parameters listed in alphabetical orderNortel Networks Confidential 2–39
BSS Parameter Dictionary
atmRmId V13
Description : Identifier of the ‘atmRm’ object class. This identifier isallocated by the MD–R at object creation, depending on theshelf and slot numbers indicated by the BSC. This attributecannot be modified. This attribute is relevant for BSC e3.
Value range : [0 to 2147483646]
Object : atmRm
Type : DP
Attenuation Class 2 A12 V9
Description : Attenuation due to coupling system losses. This value dependson the BTS configuration and should not be modified by theoperator.
Value range : [0 to 14] dB
Object : btsSiteManager
Default value : Depends on the equipment
Type : DP
Checks : [M] : The parent bsc object is unlocked and thebtsSiteManager is locked
Note : If the Attenuation parameter is not set (value = NULL), thenthe DLU attenuation value is used.
If the Attenuation parameter is set [0 to 14] then the DLUattenuation is replaced by the OMC attenuation parameter.
Nortel Networks Confidential2–40 Parameters listed in alphabetical order
PE/DCL/DD/0124411–9001–124
Standard 13.04/EN March 2002 GSM/BSS V13
auditBdaStatus
Description : Synthetic result of a BDA audit
Value range : [no difference / some differences (see list below) / manydifferences (see partial list below)]
The information is stored in sessions logs.
no difference Object instances in BDA and BDE. . . . . . are identical.
some differences Less than ten object instances are. . . different in BDA and BDE (they arelisted in the session logs).
many differences More than ten object instances are. . different in BDA and BDE (the firstten are listed in the session logs).
Object : bsc
Type : DI
auditState
Description : Whether an audit is in-progress in the BSC. Access to a BSCare blocked whenever an audit of its application database isin-progress (Audit BDA command).
This attribute is unknown to the BSC and cannot be directlymodified by users.
When an audit is in-progress in a BSC, all configurationcommands involving the BSS are forbidden.
Value range : [inProgress / notInProgress]
Object : bsc
Type : DI
authorised user
Description : List of the users authorized to copy, display and run thecommand file. Enter their names as defined in their profilesand use the “&” character to separate them.
Object : commandFile
Type : DP
Parameters listed in alphabetical orderNortel Networks Confidential 2–41
BSS Parameter Dictionary
availabilityStatus
Description : ISO state
Refer to the operationalState entries in the Dictionary for adescription of possible state parameter combinations for theseobjects: administrativeState, availabilityStatus,operationalState.
Value range : [{} / {dependency} / {failed}]
Object : bsc, bscMdInterface,btsSiteManager,lapdLink, pcmCircuit,signallingLink, transceiver,transceiverEquipment, transcoder,transcoderBoard
Type : DD
availabilityStatus
Description : ISO state
The “enabled” state for a bts object is a transitory state thatfollows a soft release request. Refer to theadministrativeState entry related to the bts object in theDictionary.
Value range : [{} / {dependency} / {failed}]
Object : bts
Type : DD
availabilityStatus
Description : ISO state
The “logFull” state applies to a log object that describes anobservation or trace log, and indicates that the saving messagedirectory on the OMC–R agent disks is full. Refer to thecapacityAlarmThreshold entry in the Dictionary.
Value range : [{} / {logFull}]
Object : log
Type : DP
Nortel Networks Confidential2–42 Parameters listed in alphabetical order
PE/DCL/DD/0124411–9001–124
Standard 13.04/EN March 2002 GSM/BSS V13
availabilityStatus
Description : ISO state
Value range : [{} (the associated observation is running) / {offDuty} (theassociated observation has ended)]
Object : mdScanner
Type : DD
availabilityStatus V12
Description : ISO state
Refer to the operationalState entry in the Dictionary for adescription of possible state parameter combinations:administrativeState, availabilityStatus, operationalState.
Value range : [{} / {dependency} / {failed}]Object : pcu
Feature : GPRS (SV407 – V12)
Type : DD
availabilityStatus V12
Description : ISO state
Refer to the operationalState entry in the Dictionary for adescription of possible state parameter combinations:availabilityStatus and operationalState.
Value range : [{} / {dependency}]Object : pcusn
Feature : GPRS (SV407 – V12)
Type : DD
availabilityStatus
Description : ISO state
Refer to the operationalState entry in the Dictionary for adescription of possible state parameter combinations:administrativeState, availabilityStatus, operationalState, andusageState.
A state change notification is issued after the soft release.
Value range : [{} / {dependency} / {failed}]Object : xtp
Type : DD
Parameters listed in alphabetical orderNortel Networks Confidential 2–43
BSS Parameter Dictionary
averagingPeriod Class 2 A13
Description : Number of SACCH multiframes over which the interferencelevels are averaged. This averaging will be performedimmediately before the transmission of the RESOURCEINDICATION message.
This attribute, together with the “thresholdInterference”attribute, allows users to manage interferences in radio cells.Refer to this entry in the Dictionary.
Value range : [0 to 255] SACCH frame (1 unit = 480 ms on TCH, 470 ms onSDCCH)
Object : handOverControl
Default value : 20
Type : DP
Checks : [M]: The parent bsc object is unlocked and theassociated bts object is locked.
Nortel Networks Confidential2–44 Parameters listed in alphabetical order
PE/DCL/DD/0124411–9001–124
Standard 13.04/EN March 2002 GSM/BSS V13
B
backup manager addresses
Description : Backup addresses of the OMC–R manager that receives themessages. They are provided by the manager.
Object : efd – Display
Type : DI
Restrictions : [C/M]: This attribute is not managed by users.
backupServer
Description : Name of the backup OMC–R agent server if any. It is providedby the OMC–R agent.
In a mono-server configuration with redundancy, this attributeis not filled in.
Object : md – Display
Type : DP
baseColourCode Class 3
Description : Base station Color Code assigned to a neighbor cell. The(BCC, NCC) pair forms the cell BSIC.
Value range : [0 to 7]
Object : adjacentCellHandOver
Type : DP
Checks : [M]: Each defined (baseColourCode,bCCHFrequency, networkColourCode)combination is unique in the set including a servingcell and its neighbor cells.
[M]: The parent bsc object is unlocked.
Parameters listed in alphabetical orderNortel Networks Confidential 2–45
BSS Parameter Dictionary
baseColourCode Class 2 B2
Description : Base station Color Code assigned to a serving cell. It isbroadcast on the cell SCH and is used to distinguish cells thatshare the same BCCH frequency.
The (BCC, NCC) pair forms the cell BSIC.
The information is broadcast on the cell SCH.
Several BCCs may be assigned to a same BTS. Hence,different codes can be allotted to cells that may haveoverlapping areas (adjacent cells).
The Base Station Identity Code (BSIC) is a 6-bit code:bits 6–5–4 = NCC (PLMN color code), bits 3–2–1 = BCC(Base station color code). At cell level, the NCC bits can beused to increase BCC color possibilities when the NCC is notneeded.
Value range : [0 to 7]
Object : bts
Type : DP
Checks : [M]: Each defined (baseColourCode,bCCHFrequency, networkColourCode)combination is unique in the set including aserving cell and its neighbor cells.
[M]: The parent bsc object is unlocked and the btsobject is locked.
bCCHFrequency Class 3
Description : Radio frequency allocated to a neighbor cell BCCH in thenetwork frequency band
The information is broadcast on the serving cell SACCH.
Value range : [1 to 124] (GSM 900 network / Extended GSM network),[0 to 1023] (GSM–R),[512 to 885] (GSM 1800 network),[512 to 810] (GSM 1900 network)
Object : adjacentCellHandOver
Type : DP
Nortel Networks Confidential2–46 Parameters listed in alphabetical order
PE/DCL/DD/0124411–9001–124
Standard 13.04/EN March 2002 GSM/BSS V13
Checks : [M]: Each defined (baseColourCode,bCCHFrequency, networkColourCode)combination is unique in the set including aserving cell and its neighbor cells.
[M]: The bCCHFrequency value must be setaccording to the standardIndicator attribute.
[M]: The parent bsc object is unlocked.
bCCHFrequency Class 3
Description : Radio frequency used for selection and reselectionmanagement
The information is broadcast on the serving cell BCCH.
Value range : [1 to 124] (GSM 900 network / Extended GSM network),[0 to 1023] (GSM–R),[512 to 885] (GSM 1800 network),[512 to 810] (GSM 1900 network)
Object : adjacentCellReselection
Type : DP
Checks : [M]: The bCCHFrequency value must be setaccording to the standardIndicator attribute.
[M]: The parent bsc object is unlocked.
Note : An adjacentCellReselection object can use the same BCCH asthe serving cell to which it is associated. This allows a mobileto immediately recover the cell on which it was “camping”after being switched off, then switched back on, and isespecially useful in the selection process.
bCCHFrequency Class 2
Description : Radio frequency allocated to a cell BCCH (Broadcast ControlCHannel) in the network frequency band
The information is broadcast on the cell SACCH.
The BCCH frequency is automatically assigned to the radiotime slot carrying the cell BCCH when the cell is brought intoservice (absoluteRFChannelNo attribute of the channelobject describing the carrier TDMA frame TS0). It isbroadcast to the radio time slot whenever modified.
Parameters listed in alphabetical orderNortel Networks Confidential 2–47
BSS Parameter Dictionary
The BCCH is used by the BTS for broadcasting cell relatedsystem information to MS, such as frequency band and list offrequency channels used, authorized services and accessconditions, list of neighbor cells, and radio parameters(maximum transmission strength, minimum receptionstrength, etc).
Value range : [1 to 124] (GSM 900 network / Extended GSM network),[0 to 1023] (GSM–R),[512 to 885] (GSM 1800 network),[512 to 810] (GSM 1900 network)
Object : bts
Type : DP
Checks : [M]: The BCCH frequency is included in thecellAllocation list.
[M]: Each defined (baseColourCode,bCCHFrequency, networkColourCode)combination is unique in the set including aserving cell and its neighbor cells.
[M]: For a dualband cell, the bCCHFrequency attributemust be in the primary band of frequencies.
[M]: The parent bsc object is unlocked and the btsobject is locked.
bda activation type V11
Description : Whether the Build BDA should be automatic or commanded
See to NTP < 128 > .
Value range : [automatic / commanded]
Object : bsc – Build BDA
Type : DP
Remark : For a V11+ BSC the value can be as follows:
“automatic”: basic BDA change without prototype BDAchange
“commanded”: basic BDA change without prototype BDAchange or BSC upgrade with prototype BDA change (BSCEdition Upgrade or BSC Version Upgrade)
For a V10 BSC the value must be “automatic”.
Nortel Networks Confidential2–48 Parameters listed in alphabetical order
PE/DCL/DD/0124411–9001–124
Standard 13.04/EN March 2002 GSM/BSS V13
bdaNewBscState V11
Description : Current bsc state related to the new BDA
Value range : [ready for on–line reset / running on–line reset / waiting foron–line build / waiting for software change / waiting for Bdachange / running software change/ running Bda change /waiting for end of probative phase / { }]
Object : bsc
Type : DI
Remark : This attribute is modified by the OMC–R agent whenprocessing “end of probative phase”, “Activate New BDA”,“On line reset BDA”, or “On–line reset cancel” actions orreceiving an unsolicited message sent by the BSC.
This attribute is NULL { } as long as the BSC has not beenconnected to the OMC–R agent.
Note : For a V10 BSC, this attribute is always NULL { }.
The different states are obtained according to the following:“ready for on–line reset”: This state is reached after thefollowing occurrences:
• BSC complete restart
• “end of probative phase” or BDA “new” activation orreset on–line cancel succeeded
• partial or complete spontaneous BSC restart
• BSC operating command aborted“running on–line reset”: BSC reset on–line is beingexecuted
“waiting for on–line build”: BSC reset on–line hassucceeded
“waiting for software change”: “BDA version” reseton–line has succeeded
“waiting for Bda change”: “BDA edition” reset on line hassucceeded
“running software change”: BSC Type 5 EFT activation isbeing executed
“running Bda change”: BSC BDA “new” activation isbeing executed
“waiting for end of probative phase”: BSC Type 5 EFTactivation has succeeded
Parameters listed in alphabetical orderNortel Networks Confidential 2–49
BSS Parameter Dictionary
bdaSelected V11
Description : Current BSC Application Database (BDA)
Value range : [running / new]Object : bsc
Type : DI
Remark : This attribute is modified by the MD–R when processing “Online reset BDA” actions or receiving a BSC spontaneousevent.
This attribute is set “running” at the bsc object instancecreation
For a V10 BSC, this attribute is never modified and its valueis “running”.
Note : The different states are obtained according to the following:
“new”: BSC upgrades with prototype BDA change
“running”: BSC upgrades without prototype BDA change
bdaState
Description : Whether the BSC application database (BDA) is built. Notransactions with a BSC can be implemented prior to buildingits application database.
When a bsc object is created or following a user Off line resetBDA command, the value of this attribute is “not built”.
This attribute is unknown to the BSC and cannot be directlymodified by users. It is updated by the system after a user BuildBDA command.
Value range : [built / not built / inconsistency]
Object : bsc
Type : DI
Nortel Networks Confidential2–50 Parameters listed in alphabetical order
PE/DCL/DD/0124411–9001–124
Standard 13.04/EN March 2002 GSM/BSS V13
bdaVersionBuild
Description : Version number of the BSC application database forrebuilding purposes
When the BSC is initialized or following a user Off line resetBDA command, the value of this attribute is “0” (BDA notbuilt). The BSC then sends a “build database request”message, indicating that its database is defective and needsrebuilding.
By issuing a Build BDA command, the user informs theOMC–R that the BSC database must be regenerated.
Value range : [1 to 254]Object : bsc – Build BDA
Type : DP
Checks : [A]: If the command follows a BSC architecturechange, the new architecture complies with theinformation in the last “build database request”message received from the BSC.
bdaVersionNumber
Description : Current version number of the BSC application database. “0”means that the BDA is not built.
Once the user has built or rebuilt the BDA, this attribute isassigned the bdaVersionBuild value sent with the user buildcommand.
If the BDA is being regenerated following an On line resetBDA command, this attribute gives the user the versionnumber of the BDA currently used by the BSC.
Value range : [0 to 254]Object : bsc
Type : DD
Beginning date
Description : To select call monitoring data recorded on that date and after
Do not fill in if information produced from the start should bedisplayed.
Value range : [mm/dd/yyyy hh:mm:ss]Object : Call monitoring – Display SDO
Type : DP
Checks : [A]: Beginning date is on or before End date.
Parameters listed in alphabetical orderNortel Networks Confidential 2–51
BSS Parameter Dictionary
beginSearchTime
Description : Absolute time to start searching for the observation reports tocumulate
Observation data accumulating starts with the informationcontained in the last observation message collected in therequested period of time. Refer to the partneredendSearchTime entry in the Dictionary.
Absolute time format entry forms are detailed in NTP < 130 >.
Value range : [<date>,<time>]Object : Display custom report
Type : DP
Checks : [A]: beginSearchTime is after endSearchTime.
[A]: The defined period is less than or equal to sixhours.
beginSearchTime
Description : Absolute time to start searching for the observation report toedit default is the current date and time)
The report displays the information contained in the lastobservation message generated in the requested period of time.Refer to the partnered endSearchTime entry in theDictionary.
Absolute time format entry forms are detailed in NTP < 130 >.
Value range : [<date>,<time>]
Object : Display raw report
Type : DP
Checks : [A]: beginSearchTime is after endSearchTime.
Nortel Networks Confidential2–52 Parameters listed in alphabetical order
PE/DCL/DD/0124411–9001–124
Standard 13.04/EN March 2002 GSM/BSS V13
beginSearchTime
Description : Absolute time to start searching for the available temporaryobservations to list (default is the current date and time)
The first listed report is the last observation report generatedin the requested period of time. Refer to the partneredendSearchTime entry in the Dictionary.
Absolute time format entry forms are detailed in NTP < 130 >.
Value range : [<date>,<time>]Object : List available temporary observations
Type : DP
Checks : [A]: beginSearchTime is after endSearchTime.
beginSearchTime
Description : Absolute time to start searching for the observation messagesto list (default is the current date and time)
The first listed message is the last observation messagegenerated in the requested period of time. Refer to thepartnered endSearchTime entry in the Dictionary.
Absolute time format entry forms are detailed in NTP < 130 >.
Value range : [<date>,<time>]
Object : List observation messages
Type : DP
Checks : [A]: beginSearchTime is after endSearchTime.
Parameters listed in alphabetical orderNortel Networks Confidential 2–53
BSS Parameter Dictionary
biZonePowerOffset Class 3 B3 V12
Description : Power offset between the inner TRXs and the outer TRXs ofthe adjacentCellHandOver object of a dualband,dualcoupling, or concentric cell.
Offset added in calculation formula to draw up the list ofeligible cells for handover towards a dualband, dualcoupling,or concentric cell inner zone to take into account the differenceof propagation models between the two bands of the cells andthe difference of transmission power between TRXs of the twozones due to either BTS configuration or coupling.
Value range : [–63 to 63] dB
Object : adjacentCellHandOver
Default value : 63
Type : DP
Feature : Dualband cell management (TF875 – V12)
Checks : [M]: The parent bsc object is unlocked.
Note : This parameter is only available for S8000 or e–cell BTS DRXtransceiver architecture.
biZonePowerOffset Class 3 B4 V12
Description : Power offset between inner and outer TRXs of thehandOverControl object of a dualband, dualcoupling, orconcentric cell.
Value range : [–63 to 63] dB
Object : handOverControl
Default value : 3
Type : DP
Feature : Dualband cell management (TF875 – V12)
Checks : [M]: The parent bsc object is unlocked.
Note : This parameter is only available for S8000 or e–cell BTS DRXtransceiver architecture.
• zoneTxPwrMaxReduction (inner zone)
bsc2GEqptId V13
Nortel Networks Confidential2–54 Parameters listed in alphabetical order
PE/DCL/DD/0124411–9001–124
Standard 13.04/EN March 2002 GSM/BSS V13
Description : Identifier of the ‘bsc2GEqpt’ object class. This identifier isallocated by the MD–R at object creation. The only valueallocated by the MD–R is 0. This attribute cannot bemodified. This attribute is relevant for BSC 2G.
Value range : [1 to 255]Object : bsc2GEqpt
Type : DP
bsc3GEqptId V13
Description : Identifier of the ‘bsc3GEqpt’ object class. This identifier isallocated by the MD–R at object creation. The only valueallocated by the MD–R is 0. This attribute cannot bemodified. This attribute is relevant for BSC e3.
Value range : [0 to 0]Object : bsc3GEqpt
Type : DP
bsc
Description : Identifier of a bsc object on the OMC–R.
The bsc reference is part of all BSS configuration objectidentifiers.
In all MMI commands, a bsc object can be referenced by name(bscName).
When a bsc object is created and the referencedbscMdInterface object is unlocked, the system attempts toestablish the BSS/OMC–R link connection.
Value range : [1 to 255]Object : bsc
Type : Id
Checks : [C]: The number of BSCs managed by an OMC–R islimited to maxBscPerNetwork (staticconfiguration data).
[C]: The referenced bscMdInterface object(bscMdInterfaceRef) is created.
[D]: The BSC application database has been reset by anOff line reset BDA command (bdaState = “notbuilt”).
[D]: No mdScanner, traceControl, or callPathTraceobject refers to the bsc object (no observation ortrace function is active in the BSC).
Parameters listed in alphabetical orderNortel Networks Confidential 2–55
BSS Parameter Dictionary
bsc
Description : Identifier or name of a bsc object on the OMC–R
It defines the parent bsc object.
Value range : [1 to 255]
Object : adjacentCellHandover, adjacentCellReselection,bts, btsSiteManager, channel, frequencyHoppingSystem,handOverControl, lapdLink, multiple site, pcmCircuit,powerControl, signallingLink, signallingLinkSet,signallingPoint, software, transceiver,transceiverEquipment, transceiverZone, transcoder,transcoderBoard, xtp
Type : Id
Checks : [C]: The bsc object is created.
bsc equipment name
Description : To select messages issued by a given type of BSC or TCUprocessor
Do not fill in if this criterion is not to be selected.
Value range : [ddti / ala / eci / sicx / sicd / swm / cpue / O.M.N.communication / cabling and PCM cross connect / css7 /cpu486Se / sup / LAPD channel / signalling link / sls / tdti /tuc / internal PCM–TCU / tcb / swe / swc / sw16 / tscb / msw/ sic lapd (8 channels) / 2nd generation of TCB board / bscb/ CPUE pentium 120 / mmu / mmu ide / cpum133 / cpue133/ sup2 / sls2 / pcu element]
Object : Alarm and notification logs – Filter
Feature : GPRS (SV407 – V12)
Type : DP
Remark : “css7” identifies the BSC CCS7 boards; “signalling link”identifies the SS7 signalling links defined in the BSS andcontrolled by the CCS7 boards.
Nortel Networks Confidential2–56 Parameters listed in alphabetical order
PE/DCL/DD/0124411–9001–124
Standard 13.04/EN March 2002 GSM/BSS V13
BSC list
Description : List of the BSCs simultaneously monitored for further dataprocessing by the SDO machine. Fill in the list with BSCreference numbers or names, up to maxBscPerNetwork.
Do the following to create the list:
To add a BSC, fill in the BSC number field with thereference number of the BSC on the OMC–R and click Add.
To remove one or more BSCs, select the lines that displaytheir reference numbers and click Remove.
When the list is complete, click the option matching thedesired command, as follows:
Start: starts collecting call monitoring data. . . . . . . . . . . in the selected BSCs.
Stop: stops collecting call monitoring data. . . . . . . . . . . . in the selected BSCs.
Transfer: transfers the BSC selected data files. . . . . . . . . to the OMC–R.
Processing: copies and processes the selected data. . . . . . . files in the SDO machine. A set ofresultant ASCII data files isproduced, it is identified as the Level1 set.
Value range : [1 to 255]
Object : Call monitoring – Commands (SDO)
Type : DP
Checks : [A]: The number of BSCs in the list is limited tomaxBscPerNetwork (static configuration data).
[A]: Each BSC occurs once in the list.
Notes : The user must make sure that the BSCs in the list are createdon the OMC–R since no checks are performed by thesystem.
Parameters listed in alphabetical orderNortel Networks Confidential 2–57
BSS Parameter Dictionary
Processing: The call monitoring data files are meant toexist in the “/MD/ftam/bsc” directory on the OMC–R agentdisks. For each BSC in the list, all files saved in thatdirectory whose name begins with “SDO_CM_BSCnnn”will be processed: “nnn” is the BSC reference number onthe OMC–R (if bsc = 5, then nnn is read “005”). See toNTP < 07 >.
The BSC list needs not be defined when selecting the Querycommand which displays the activity state of the Callmonitoring function in all the BSCs connected to theOMC–R.
bsc model
Description : To select messages issued by a given model of BSC
Value range : [bsc 12000 / bsc 6000 / bsc 2000]
Do not fill in if this criterion is not to be selected.Object : Alarm and notification logs – Filter
Type : DP
BSC number
Description : Identifier [1 to 255] or name of a BSC to add to the BSC list
Fill in this field and click Add to add the BSC to the list. Referto the BSC list entry in the Dictionary.
Object : Call monitoring – Commands (SDO)
Type : DP
bscAlarmMask Class 3
Description : Configuration of the eight external alarm loops managed bythe BSC ALA board. The alarm loop number “32+n” ismonitored (not monitored) when the nth bit is set to 1 (0).
Value range : 8 bit register numbered 0 to 7
bscAlarmMask = x x x x x x x x
| |
alarm 39 alarm 32
Object : bsc
Default value : 11111111
Type : DP
Checks : [M]: The bsc object is unlocked.
Nortel Networks Confidential2–58 Parameters listed in alphabetical order
PE/DCL/DD/0124411–9001–124
Standard 13.04/EN March 2002 GSM/BSS V13
bscArchitecture Class 0
Description : Architecture of the BSC
This attribute, together with the bsc object bscType attributeand the related software object sWVersionRunning attribute,defines the dimensioning constraints.
Value range : [bsc6000 / bsc12000 / bsc30000]Object : bsc
Default value : BSC6000 (for V8 and lower BSC release)
Type : DP
Checks : [C/M]: The type of the BSC (bscType) complies with thenew architecture.
[M]: The BSC application database is reset (bdaState= “not built”).
bscChainId
Description : BSC processing chain(s) to reset
The consequences are as follows:
activeChain: The active chain is reset and becomes. . . . . . passive, and the passive chainbecomes active. Class 1 DPs are notreconfigured.
passiveChain: The passive chain is reset if it can be. . . . . reached.
bothChain: Both chains are reset and the BSC is. . . . . . . restarted. Class 1 DPs arereconfigured.
Value range : [activeChain / passiveChain / bothChain]Object : bsc – Kill chain
Type : Id
bscCounterList V11
Description : Identifier of the bscCounterList object defined with regards tothe bsc object
Value range : [0 to 2147483646]Object : bscCounterList
Type : Id
Default value :
Parameters listed in alphabetical orderNortel Networks Confidential 2–59
BSS Parameter Dictionary
bscDateTime
Description : Current BSC reference date and time
This attribute is set by a user Synchronize bsc clock command,which broadcasts the current OMC–R agent date and time tothe concerned BSC.
It is also updated by the OMC–R agent in the followingconditions:
A user Set command on the md object is run, which changesits externalTime attribute.
The BSS/OMC–R link is established.
The BSS/OMC–R link is reestablished after a breakdown.
The statutory time is modified.
The OMC–R agent sends an alarm notification to the OMC–Rmanager when the time difference with a BSC drifts too much.
Value range : [<date>,<time>]Object : bsc
Type : DD
bscGprsActivation Class 3 V12
Description : Flag used to activate the GPRS at BSC level
Value range : [disabled / enabled]
Object : bsc
Feature : GPRS (SV407 – V12)
Type : DP
Default value : disabled
Checks : [M]: The parent bsc object is unlocked.
Nortel Networks Confidential2–60 Parameters listed in alphabetical order
PE/DCL/DD/0124411–9001–124
Standard 13.04/EN March 2002 GSM/BSS V13
bscHopReconfUse Class 1 B5 V8
Description : Whether frequency hopping reconfiguration is authorized inBTSs that use cavity coupling
When frequency reconfiguration is authorized, it allows toautomatically reconfigure the hopping sequence whenever afrequency is lost or recovered in the BTS.
Value range : [true / false]
Object : bsc
Default value : True
Type : DP
Checks : [M]: It can be “true” provided thebtsHopReconfRestart of one of the related btsobjects is also “true”.
[M]: The bsc object is locked.
bscIPFirstAdr V13
Description : Indicates the first BSC IP address used for a ’bscMdInterface’object instance.
IP address corresponds to the subscriber number on thenetwork used.
At least one IP address must be specified if protocolUsed is IP;it may be specified otherwise.
This attribute is modified by the Manager.
Value changes are notified to the Manager.
This attribute can be modified only if the ’bscMdInterface’object instance is locked.
Value range : [7 to 15] String
Object : bscMdInterface
Type : DP
Parameters listed in alphabetical orderNortel Networks Confidential 2–61
BSS Parameter Dictionary
bscIPSecondAdr V13
Description : Indicates the second BSC IP address used for a’bscMdInterface’ object instance.
IP address corresponds to the subscriber number on thenetwork used.
At least one IP address must be specified if protocolUsed is IP;it may be specified otherwise.
This attribute is modified by the Manager.
Value changes are notified to the Manager.
This attribute can be modified only if the ’bscMdInterface’object instance is locked.
Value range : [7 to 15] String
Object : bscMdInterface
Type : DP
bscList V13
Description : This attribute indicates for which BSC(s) the units of softwarehas been downloaded. This attribute is allocated by the MD–Rat object creation. This attribute cannot be modified by theManager. This attribute is updated by the MD–R when a“sWDownload” command is performed successfully.Value changes are notified to the Manager.
Value range : [0 to 41]
Object : executableSoftware
Type : DP
bscLogId V13
Description : Identifier of the ‘bscLog’ object class. This identifier isallocated by the MD–R at object creation. This attributecannot be modified. This attribute is relevant for BSC e3.
Value range : [ bscVers13 +Inf ]
Object : bscLog
Type : DP
Nortel Networks Confidential2–62 Parameters listed in alphabetical order
PE/DCL/DD/0124411–9001–124
Standard 13.04/EN March 2002 GSM/BSS V13
bscMdInterface
Description : Identifier of a bscMdInterface object defined with regard tothe md object
Value range : [0 to 255]Object : bscMdInterface
Type : Id
Checks : [D]: No bsc object refers to the bscMdInterface object.
bscMdInterfaceRef
Description : Identifier of the bscMdInterface object that describes theBSS/OMC–R link involving the BSC
Value range : [0 to 255]Object : bsc
Type : DP
Checks : [C]: No bsc object refers to the bscMdInterface object.
Restrictions : [M]: This attribute cannot be modified.
bscMdInterfaceVersionNumber
Description : Release number of the BSC/OMC–R interface. It is providedby the BSC when the BSS/OMC–R link is physicallyestablished.
If the release number does not match the software versionrunning in the BSC (sWVersionRunning attribute of therelated software object), the BSC issues a start-of-faultmessage.
Value range : [11 to 99]Object : bsc – Display
Type : DI
Restrictions : [C/M]: This attribute is not managed by users.
bscMSAccessClassBarringFunction Class 3 B6 V9
Description : Enable or disable dynamic barring of access class at the bsclevel
Value range : [enabled / disabled]Object : bsc
Default value : disabled
Type : DP
Checks : [M]: The bsc object is unlocked.
Parameters listed in alphabetical orderNortel Networks Confidential 2–63
BSS Parameter Dictionary
bscName V13
Description : Reference name of a bsc object on the OMC–R.
It begins with a letter and is case sensitive.
Value range : [30 characters max]
Object : bsc
Type : DP
Checks : [C/M]: The name of a BSC is unique to the OMC–R.
bscPcuPcmRefList Class 2 V12
Description : List of BSC–PCU PCM link numbers
Value range : [1 to 12] values in the range [0 to 47]
Object : pcu
Feature : GPRS (SV407 – V12)
Type : DP
Checks : [C/M]: All the referred pcmCircuit object instances of thisattribute must exist.
[C/M]: The referred pcmCircuit object instances must beof pcmAgprs type (pcmType attribute).
[C/M]: The referred pcmCircuit object instances must notbe already referred to another pcu object instanceon the same BSC.
[M]: The parent bsc object is unlocked and the pcuobject is locked.
Note : Only one Agprs PCM is used to connect the BSC and one PCU.
Nortel Networks Confidential2–64 Parameters listed in alphabetical order
PE/DCL/DD/0124411–9001–124
Standard 13.04/EN March 2002 GSM/BSS V13
bscQueueingOption Class 1 B7
Description : Whether radio resource allocation requests are queued in theBSC when no resources are available
If no resource is available when an allocation request isreceived and queueing is not allowed, the allocation request isrefused immediately.
Value range : [allowed (MSC driven) / forced (O&M driven) / not allowed]
allowed Resource allocation request queueing. . . . . . . . . . depends on the type of operation andindicative items provided with themessages received from the MSC.
forced Resource allocation request queueing. . . . . . . . . . . depends on the type of operationonly.
not allowed Resource allocation request queueing. . . . . . . is forbidden.
Object : signallingPoint
Default value : forced
Type : DP
Checks : [M]: The bsc object is locked.
Note : Allocation requests for immediate assignments and inter-bss,intra-bss, and inter-bts handovers are never queued. Only TCHresource requests (assigments request and intraCell handover)are queued depending on the priority of the demand and thenumber of request present in the queue.
bscRefList Class 3 V12
Description : List of the bsc objects managed by a pcuSN object
Value range : [1 to 12] values in the range [0 to 2147483646]Object : pcusn
Type : DP
Feature : GPRS (SV407 – V12)
bscReset V13
Description : Requests a control node reset
Value range : [0 to 1]Object : bsc3GEqpt
Type : DP
Parameters listed in alphabetical orderNortel Networks Confidential 2–65
BSS Parameter Dictionary
bscSitePcmList Class 2
Description : List of the PCM links allotted to a site on the Abis interface,up to maxPcmCPerBtsSM. Each link is identified by a(pcmCircuitBsc, pcmCircuitBtsSiteManager) pair thatdefines it on BSC end and BTS end.
The Abis interface connects a BTS to a BSC through PCMlinks that are identified by the boards to which they areconnected on both ends of the interface, that is DDTI boardson BSC end and DTI boards on BTS end.
The following rule is applied:
A PCM link connected to DDTI board no.i in the BSC has apcmCircuitBsc reference equal to “2i” or “2i+1” withregard to the BSC (each board manages two links at a time).Refer to BSC Reference Manual.
The same PCM link connected to DTI board no.j in the BTShas a pcmCircuitBtsSiteManager reference equal to “j”with regard to the BTS (each board manages one singlelink). Refer to BTS Reference Manuals.
The number of pairs in the list sets the number of links allottedto the radio site.
Value range : [0 to 2147483646] (pcmCircuitBsc),[0 to 5] (pcmCircuitBtsSiteManager)
Object : btsSiteManager
Type : DP
Checks : [C]: The number of PCM links allotted to a site islimited to maxPcmCPerBtsSM (staticconfiguration data).
[C/M]: The list contains at least one pair, two if thebtsSiteManager object redundantPcmPresenceattribute is “true”.
[C/M]: Each pair is unique in the list.
Nortel Networks Confidential2–66 Parameters listed in alphabetical order
PE/DCL/DD/0124411–9001–124
Standard 13.04/EN March 2002 GSM/BSS V13
[C/M]: Each pcmCircuitBsc reference matches apcmCircuit object created for the parent bsc objectand assigned to the Abis interface (pcmType =“pcmAbis”).
[M]: If a pcmCircuitBsc reference is changed, thecurrent link is not used by any dependenttransceiverEquipment object.
[M]: The parent bsc object is unlocked and thebtsSiteManager object is locked.
bscTimeSlot
Description : PCM link (pcmCircuitId) and time slot (timeSlotNumber)used by the radio time slot on the Abis interface. The PCMlink is identified on BSC end [0 to 47].
The information is displayed provided the parent transceiverobject is working. Refer to the operationalState entry for thisobject in the Dictionary.
Value range : pcmCircuitId [0 to 47]timeSlotNumber [1 to 31 (E1 PCM) or 24 (T1 PCM)]
Object : channel
Type : DD
Parameters listed in alphabetical orderNortel Networks Confidential 2–67
BSS Parameter Dictionary
bscType Class 0
Description : Type of the BSC. It defines the BSC configuration in terms ofequipment boards.
See the table listing BSC configuration types in NTP < 07 >.
Value range : [type1 / type2 / type3 / type4 / type5]Object : bsc
Default value : type5
Type : DP
Checks : [M]: number of SICD(8V) ports available in the BSC:See NTP < 07 >.
[M]: number of PCM links connected to the BSC: SeeNTP < 07 >.
[M]: number of sites managed by the BSC: SeebtsSiteManager entry in the Dictionary.
[M]: The lapdTerminalNumber attributes of thedependent lapdLink objects comply with thenumber of SICD(8V) ports available in the BSC.
[M]: The BSC application database is reset (bdaState= “not built”).
Note : This parameter is only available for BSC 2G
bscUsedAdr V13
Description : BSC address actually used. This attribute is managed by theMD–R. Value changes are not notified to the Manager.
Value range : [X25 / IP]Object : bscMdInterface
Type : DP
bsCvMax Class 3 V12
Description : Number of packets left to transmit divided by the number ofUL TS allocated to the MS.
Value range : [1 to 15]Object : bts
Default value : 1
Feature : GPRS (SV407 – V12)
Type : DP
Checks : [M]: The parent bsc object is unlocked.
Comments : bsCvMax is broadcast in the system information.
Nortel Networks Confidential2–68 Parameters listed in alphabetical order
PE/DCL/DD/0124411–9001–124
Standard 13.04/EN March 2002 GSM/BSS V13
bscX25PrefAdr Class 2
Description : X.25 priority address used by the BSC.It corresponds to the subscriber’s number in the X.25network.
Value range : [15 decimal figures max]
Object : bscMdInterface
Default value : $BSC{bscId}_X25P
Type : DP
Checks : [C/M]: The X25 address must not already be used in apreferential address for another bsc objectinstance.
[C/M]: The X25 address must not already be used in asecondary address for another bsc object instance.
[M]: The bscMdInterface object is locked.
Note : This parameter is only available for BSC 2G
bscX25SecAdr Class 2
Description : X.25 address used by the BSC as backup. It is identical to thepriority address when there is no redundancy.It corresponds to the subscriber’s number in the X.25network.
Value range : [15 decimal figures max]
Object : bscMdInterface
Default value : $BSC{bscId}_X25S
Type : DP
Checks : [C/M]: The X25 address must not already be used in asecondary address for another bsc object instance.
[C/M]: The X25 address must not already be used in apreferential address for another bsc objectinstance.
[M]: The bscMdInterface object is locked.
Note : This parameter is only available for BSC 2G
Parameters listed in alphabetical orderNortel Networks Confidential 2–69
BSS Parameter Dictionary
bscX25UsedAdr
Description : X.25 outgoing address currently used by the BSC
This dynamic attribute allows the user to know the addressselected by the system when the connection is established bybringing the link into service.
Value range : [15 decimal figures max]
Object : bscMdInterface
Type : DD
Note : This parameter is only available for BSC 2G
bsMsmtProcessingMode Class 2 B8
Description : Whether radio measurements collected by the mobiles for acell are processed by the BTS or the BSC
Value range : [preProcessedMeasurementReporting (BTS) /basicMeasurementReporting (BSC)]
Object : bts
Default value : preProcessedMeasurementReporting
Type : DP
Checks : [C/M]: The attribute value equals“preProcessedMeasurementReporting”.
[M]: The parent bsc object is unlocked and the btsobject is locked.
Remark : Since radio measurements are always preprocessed by theBTS, changing this attribute has no meaning.
bsPowerControl Class 3 B9
Description : Whether BTS transmission power control is allowed at celllevel
Value range : [enabled / disabled]
Object : powerControl
Default value : disabled
Type : DP
Checks : [M]: The parent bsc object is unlocked.
Nortel Networks Confidential2–70 Parameters listed in alphabetical order
PE/DCL/DD/0124411–9001–124
Standard 13.04/EN March 2002 GSM/BSS V13
bssMapT1 Class 1 B10
Description : A interface timer triggered by the BSC in the BSSMAPmanagement procedure.
It is started on transmission of BLOCK or UNBLOCK by theBSC and canceled on receipt of BLOCK ACKNOWLEDGEor UNBLOCK ACKNOWLEDGE sent by the MSC.
Value range : [2 to 300] secondsObject : bsc
Default value : 5
Type : DP
Checks : [M]: The bsc object is locked.
bssMapT12 Class 1 B11
Description : A interface timer triggered by the BSC in the BSSMAPmanagement procedure. This timer is used with a Phase IMSC only.
It is started on transmission of RESET CIRCUIT by the BSCand canceled on receipt of RESET CIRCUITACKNOWLEDGE sent by the MSC.
Value range : [2 to 300] secondsObject : bsc
Default value : 5
Type : DP
Checks : [M]: The bsc object is locked.
bssMapT13 Class 1 B12
Description : A interface timer triggered by the BSC in the BSSMAPmanagement procedure.
It is started on receipt of RESET sent by the MSC. On elapse,the BSC sends RESET ACKNOWLEDGE to the MSC.
Value range : [2 to 300] secondsObject : bsc
Default value : 32
Type : DP
Checks : [M]: The bsc object is locked.
Parameters listed in alphabetical orderNortel Networks Confidential 2–71
BSS Parameter Dictionary
bssMapT19 Class 1 B13 V8
Description : A interface timer triggered by the BSC in the BSSMAPmanagement procedure. This timer is used with a Phase IIMSC only.
It is started on transmission of RESET CIRCUIT by the BSCand canceled on receipt of RESET CIRCUITACKNOWLEDGE sent by the MSC.
Value range : [2 to 300] secondsObject : bsc
Default value : 32
Type : DP
Checks : [M]: The bsc object is locked.
bssMapT20 Class 1 B14 V8
Description : A interface timer triggered by the BSC in the BSSMAPmanagement procedure
It is started on transmission of CIRCUIT GROUP BLOCK orCIRCUIT GROUP UNBLOCK by the BSC and canceled onreceipt of CIRCUIT GROUP BLOCK ACKNOWLEDGE orCIRCUIT GROUP UNBLOCK ACKNOWLEDGE sent bythe MSC.
Value range : [2 to 300] secondsObject : bsc
Default value : 32
Type : DP
Checks : [M]: The bsc object is locked.
bssMapT4 Class 1 B15
Description : A interface timer triggered by the BSC in the BSSMAPmanagement procedure
It is started on transmission of RESET and canceled on receiptof RESET ACKNOWLEDGE sent by the MSC. On elapse,the BSC sends RESET.
Value range : [5 to 600] secondsObject : bsc
Default value : 60
Type : DP
Checks : [M]: The bsc object is locked.
Nortel Networks Confidential2–72 Parameters listed in alphabetical order
PE/DCL/DD/0124411–9001–124
Standard 13.04/EN March 2002 GSM/BSS V13
bssMapT7 Class 1 B16
Description : A interface timer triggered by the BSC in the BSSMAPmanagement procedure
It is started on transmission of HANDOVER REQUIRED andcanceled on receipt of HANDOVER COMMAND, RESET,RESET CIRCUIT, CLEAR COMMAND or HANDOVERREQUIRED REJECT.
Value range : [2 to 120] seconds
Object : bsc
Default value : 7
Type : DP
Checks : [M]: The bsc object is locked.
bssMapT8 Class 1 B17
Description : A interface timer triggered by the BSC in the BSSMAPmanagement procedure. It is greater than t3103 for each cellmanaged by the BSC
It is started on transmission of HANDOVER COMMAND andcanceled on receipt of CLEAR COMMAND sent by the MSCor HANDOVER FAILURE sent by MS.
Value range : [0 to 255] seconds
Object : bsc
Default value : 15
Type : DP
Checks : [C/M]: bssMapT8 > t3103 for all bts objects dependenton the bsc object.
[M]: The bsc object is locked.
Parameters listed in alphabetical orderNortel Networks Confidential 2–73
BSS Parameter Dictionary
bssMapTchoke Class 1 B18
Description : A interface timer triggered by the BSC in the handovermanagement procedure
It is started by the BSC when the last neighbor cell in the listis rejected. On timer elapse, the BSC asks the MSC to providea new list of eligible cells.
Value range : [1 to 255] secondsObject : bsc
Default value : 4
Type : DP
Checks : [M]: The bsc object is locked.
bssSccpConnEst Class 1 B19
Description : A interface timer triggered by the BSC in the handovermanagement procedure
It is set on transmission of CONNECTION REQUEST andcanceled on receipt of CONNECTION CONFIRM orCONNECTION REFUSED.
Value range : [5 to 360, by steps of 5] secondsObject : signallingPoint
Default value : 5
Type : DP
Checks : [M]: The parent bsc object is locked.
Note : The default value is 5 seconds
bssSccpInactRx Class 1
Description : A interface timer T(iar) triggered by the BSC in the SCCPinactivity detection procedure.
It is set either on transmission or receipt of CONNECTIONCONFIRM or on receipt of any other message during theconnection and canceled on receipt of any message.
Value range : [2 to 30] minutesObject : signallingPoint
Default value : 11
Type : DP
Checks : [M]: The parent bsc object is locked.
Nortel Networks Confidential2–74 Parameters listed in alphabetical order
PE/DCL/DD/0124411–9001–124
Standard 13.04/EN March 2002 GSM/BSS V13
bssSccpInactTx Class 1
Description : A interface timer T(ias) triggered by the BSC in the SCCPinactivity detection procedure.
It is set either on transmission or receipt of CONNECTIONCONFIRM or on transmission of any other message during theconnection and canceled on transmission of any message.
Value range : [1 to 15] minutes
Object : signallingPoint
Default value : 5
Type : DP
Checks : [M]: The parent bsc object is locked.
bssSccpRelease Class 1
Description : A interface timer T(rel) triggered by the BSC in the SCCPmanagement procedure.
It is set on transmission of RELEASE and canceled on receiptof RELEASED COMPLETE or RELEASED.
Value range : [1 to 20] seconds
Object : signallingPoint
Default value : 10
Type : DP
Checks : [M]: The parent bsc object is locked.
bssSccpSubSysTest Class 1
Description : A interface timer T(state info) triggered by the BSC in theSCCP management procedure.
It is set on transmission of SST and canceled on receipt ofSSA.
Value range : [5 to 60, by steps of 5] seconds
Object : signallingPoint
Default value : 30
Type : DP
Checks : [M]: The parent bsc object is locked.
Parameters listed in alphabetical orderNortel Networks Confidential 2–75
BSS Parameter Dictionary
bsTxPwrMax Class 3 B20
Description : Maximum theoretical level of BTS transmission power in acell
The BSC relays the information to the mobiles in the AbisCELL MODIFY REQUEST message.
Value range : [2 to 51] dBmObject : powerControl
Default value : 43
Type : DP
Checks : [M]: The parent bsc object is unlocked.
[M]: The use of the block edge channels induces a cellpower limitation to 32 dBm for GSM 1900networks (See Remark hereafter).
Note : Some bsTxPowerMax values are not compatible with theeffective power output by the BTS. See NTP < 07 >.
Remark : For a GSM 1900 network (standardIndicator of bts objectset to ‘pcs1900’), the MD–R checks the following:
bsTxPwrMax < 32 (dBm)
when an edge frequency is defined for the cell (i.e. if the valueis included in the cellAllocation attribute values).
The use of edge frequencies leads to a cell power reduction.The list of edge frequencies is described in the MD–Rconfiguration file, MD/base/config/boundEdge.cfg. Thisfile is off–line configurable. To update the database accordingto the list of edge frequencies, use the shell/MD/install/shell/cm_configBde.sh.
Nortel Networks Confidential2–76 Parameters listed in alphabetical order
PE/DCL/DD/0124411–9001–124
Standard 13.04/EN March 2002 GSM/BSS V13
bts
Description : Identifier of a bts object defined with regard to abtsSiteManager object
All channel, transceiver, and transceiverEquipment objects ina BSS are identified with regard to a bts object that defines thecovering cell.
In all MMI commands, a bts object can be referred to by thesequence “siteName.cellName” where siteName andcellName identify the covering site and the cell respectivelyby name.
Value range : [0 to 5]
Object : bts
Type : Id
Checks : [C]: The number of cells managed by an OMC–R islimited to maxBtsPerNetwork (staticconfiguration data).
[C]: The maximum number of cells controlled by aBSC is as follows:
BSC 12000/6000
T1 T2 T3 T4 T5
120 120 160 160 160
[C]: The number of cells attached to a radio site islimited to maxNbOfCells (attribute of the parentbtsSiteManager object).
[C]: The software object related to the parentbtsSiteManager object is created.
[C]: The mobileCountryCode andmobileNetworkCode attributes match those ofthe parent bsc object if they are defined for thatobject (cell CGIs must comply).
Parameters listed in alphabetical orderNortel Networks Confidential 2–77
BSS Parameter Dictionary
[C/M]: The adjacent cell umbrella Ref attribute isdefined if the cell is a microcell (cellType) anddirected retry handovers are processed in BSCmode (directedRetryModeUsed).
[C]: If the application database of the related BSC isbuilt, the parent bsc object is unlocked and theparent btsSiteManager object is locked.
[D]: If the application database of the related BSC isbuilt, the parent bsc object is unlocked, the parentbtsSiteManager object is locked, and the bts objectis locked.
[D]: If the application database of the related BSC isnot built, it has been reset by an Off line reset BDAcommand.
[D]: No adjacentCellHandOver object refers to the btsobject (the described cell is not used as a neighborcell of another serving cell).
[D]: No mdScanner object describing a temporaryobservation refers to the bts object (no observationis running on the described cell).
[D]: No traceControl or callPathTrace object refers tothe bts object (no tracing is running on thedescribed cell).
Note : All cells covered by a given radio site must be created innumerical ascending order and deleted in the reverse order.
bts
Description : Identifier or name of a bts object.It defines the associated bts object.
Value range : [0 to 5]
Object : adjacentCellHandOver, adjacentCellReselection,channel, frequencyHoppingSystem, handOverControl,powerControl, software, transceiver,transceiverEquipment, transceiverZone
Type : Id
Checks : [C]: The bts object is created.
Nortel Networks Confidential2–78 Parameters listed in alphabetical order
PE/DCL/DD/0124411–9001–124
Standard 13.04/EN March 2002 GSM/BSS V13
bts equipment name
Description : To select messages issued by a given type of BTS equipment
Do not fill in if this criterion is not to be selected.
Value range : [main power / converter B / converter C / converter A / CSW1 /CSW2 / CSW1M / TX / SYN / SYNO / ALAT / ALATO / DCC/ DTI /RX splitter / TX splitter / antenna / column system RX /converter D / column system TX / fan system / RX fan / TX fan/ cabinet fan / fans rack / MWT system / exchanger system /rectifier system / rectifier groups / fuses system / breakers / batterysystem / temperature system / door contact / smoke detector /CSWM / SYNC / ALCO / DSC / PCMI / GTW / PCM0 / PCM1/ rectifier 48V / converter F / converter BCF / internal batterysystem / cooler system / LNA / VSWR / user system / distributionsystem / battery cabinet / main breaker / diu / external alarm / VGA/ DLNA / MNU / DCU / RX / DBF / AMNU / DCU4 / DRX /FPRX / Lightning protection / BCF Cabinet door / BCF Cabinetfan / SBCF / PA / AC power supply / DC power supply / transmitantenna / cabinet high temperature alarm / cabinet low temperaturealarm / drx main reception chain / drx diversity reception chain /splitter output / high power module / splitter / low power RFmodule / rf supply module / CMCF / PCM / CPCMI / RECAL/ rx splitter M / rx splitter D / combiner h4 lna / combiner h4 vswr/ txFilter / combiner d lna / combiner d vswr / rxMainConnector/ rxDivConnector / dacsCooler / compact dacs cooler / compactdistribution / PMNU / RDRX / PMOD / ABIS BTSSynchronization / PSU / Heatsink / Preventive lightning protection/ Battery / External Environment / SALCO / not protected alarm/ internal temperature / external temperature / Remote TunableCavity Combiner / Cavity]
Object : Alarm and notification logs – Filter
Type : DP
Parameters listed in alphabetical orderNortel Networks Confidential 2–79
BSS Parameter Dictionary
bts list
Description : List of the cells involved in broadcasting the short message.Enter the (bsc, btsSiteManager, bts) reference of each btsobject.
Object : short message – Start broadcast
Type : DP
Checks : [A]: Each bts object in the list is created.
[A]: Each bts object in the list is assigned a CBCH, thatis there is one channel object in the set oftransceiver objects dependent on the bts objectwhose channelType is “bcchSdcch4CBCH” or“sdcch8CBCH”.
[A]: No more than five short messages are beingbroadcast in the cells at that time.
bts time between HO configuration Class 3 B21 V9
Description : Whether the HOPingpongTimeRejection timer can be used atbts level when processing handovers
Refer to bts object btstimeBetweenHOConfiguration andadjacentCellHandOver object HOPingpongTimeRejectionattributes in this Dictionary of Parameters.
Value range : [0 to 60] second for V9 to V11[0 / 1] for V12
In a V12 BSS, the range value meaning is the following:
“0”: The timer is disabled.
“1”: The timer is used.
Object : bts
Feature : General protection against pingpong handovers(TF821 – V12)
Default value : 0
Type : DP
Checks : [M]: The parent bsc object is unlocked.
Nortel Networks Confidential2–80 Parameters listed in alphabetical order
PE/DCL/DD/0124411–9001–124
Standard 13.04/EN March 2002 GSM/BSS V13
btsDescription V10
Description : BTS configuration description (BTS type, configuration,coupling system...) corresponding to the transcription ofconfigRef attribute
Value range : [chain of characters]
Object : btsSiteManager
Type : DI
Note : It designates the maximum configuration of the configRef fileloaded on one of the BTSs. But it does not necessarilycorresponds to the configuration of the btsSiteManager objectconcerned.
btsHopReconfRestart Class 2 B22 V8
Description : Whether hopping frequency reconfiguration is authorized onTX restart in a cell
Value range : [true / false]
Object : bts
Default value : true
Type : DP
Checks : [C/M]: If the attribute value is “true”, thebscHopReconfUse attribute of the parent bscobject is also “true”.
[C/M]: The parent bsc object is unlocked and the btsobject is locked.
btsIsHopping Class 2 B23
Description : Whether frequency hopping is allowed in a cell
Value range : [hopping / noHopping / hoppingWithCarrierFilling (V8) /noHoppingWithCarrierFilling (V8)]
Object : bts
Default value : Hopping
Type : DP
Parameters listed in alphabetical orderNortel Networks Confidential 2–81
BSS Parameter Dictionary
Checks : [M]: If frequency hopping is allowed, the GSM“fhMgt” function is defined in thesiteGsmFctList attribute of the parentbtsSiteManager object.
[M]: If it is disabled, no channel object dependent onthe bts object is authorized to obey frequencyhopping laws.
[M]: The parent bsc object is unlocked and the btsobject is locked.
Note : The “xxxWithCarrierFilling” configuration means that theBTS covering the cell must use a TX for BCCH fillingpurposes. The following apply:
The BSC sends the information to the BTS in the AbisCELL CONFIGURATION REQUEST message.
If the BTS does not have a redundant TRX/DRX, one of theoperating TRX/DRXs is assigned to that purpose and thepartnered TDMA frame is unreachable (refer to theoperationalState entry for the transceiver object in theDictionary).
When this TRX/DRX is malfunctioning, the BTSreconfigures the other TRX/DRXs. Users are then warnedby the system, by means of a notification.
The “noHoppingWithCarrierFilling” configuration can beused in all BTSs, regardless of the coupling mode. Thefollowing apply:
Hybrid coupling: All cell TX configurations provideBCCH filling.
Cavity coupling: Only the TX that transmits the cell BCCHfrequency is configured to provide BCCH filling.
The “hoppingWithCarrierFilling” configuration can only beused in BTSs that use cavity coupling. The following apply:
Hybrid coupling: The BTS refuses the configuration.
Cavity coupling: All cell TX configurations provideself-frequency filling.
Nortel Networks Confidential2–82 Parameters listed in alphabetical order
PE/DCL/DD/0124411–9001–124
Standard 13.04/EN March 2002 GSM/BSS V13
btsLockedReserved2 Class 3 B24 V12
Description : Attribute reserved for future use
Value range : [–32768 to 32767]Object : bts
Default value : 0
Type : DP
Checks : [M]: The parent bsc object is unlocked.
btsMSAccessClassBarringFunction Class 3 B25 V9
Description : Enable or disable dynamic barring of access class at the btslevel
Value range : [enabled / disabled]Object : bts
Default value : disabled
Type : DP
Checks : [M]: The parent bsc object is unlocked.
btsReserved3 Class 3 V12
Description : Mean number of logical channels belonging to the largefrequency reuse pattern and used at the same time for datacommunications
Value range : [–16 to +16]Object : bts
Default value : 0
Feature : Automatic Cell Tiering (TF995–V12)
Type : DP
Checks : [M]: The parent bsc object is unlocked.
btsReserved4 Class 3 B26 V12
Description : Attribute reserved for future use
Value range : [–32768 to 32767]Object : bts
Type : DP
Checks : [M]: The parent bsc object is unlocked.
Parameters listed in alphabetical orderNortel Networks Confidential 2–83
BSS Parameter Dictionary
btsSensitivity Class 3 V12
Description : Target power needed for BTS decoding. This parameter has aninfluence on the power control efficiency.
Value range : [0 to 255]Object : bts
Default value : 0
Feature : GPRS (SV407 – V12)
Type : DP
Checks : [M]: The parent bsc object is unlocked.
Note : The power control function used is the Open Loop Control.
btsSensitivityInnerZone Class 3 (gprsBtsExtendedConf) V12
Description : Minimum power needed for BTS decoding in the inner zoneof a dual–band cell
Value range : [0 to 255]Object : bts
Feature : GPRS (SV407 – V12)
Default value : 0
Type : DP
Checks : [M]: The parent bsc object is unlocked.
btsSiteManager
Description : Identifier of a btsSiteManager object defined with regard to absc object
All bts, channel, transceiver, and transceiverEquipmentobjects in a BSS are identified with regard to a btsSiteManagerobject that defines the covering radio site.
In all MMI commands, a btsSiteManager object can bereferred to by name (siteName).
Value range : [0 to 146]Object : btsSiteManager
Type : Id
Checks : [C]: The maximum number of radio sites controlled bya BSC depends on its type and architecture(numbers in ordinary brackets apply to a BSC thatdoes not concentrate BTS LAPD signaling).
Nortel Networks Confidential2–84 Parameters listed in alphabetical order
PE/DCL/DD/0124411–9001–124
Standard 13.04/EN March 2002 GSM/BSS V13
BSC 12000/6000
T1 T2 T3 T4 T5
28(7)
60(15)
92(23)
124(31)
147(39)
[C]: The software object related to the parent bsc objectis created.
[C]: The referenced lapdLink object(lapdLinkOMLRef) is created for the parent bscobject and assigned to the Abis interface.
[C]: If the application database of the related BSC isbuilt, the referenced pcmCircuit objects(bscSitePcmList) are created for the parent bscobject and assigned to the Abis interface(pcmType = “pcmAbis”).
[C/M]: The bscSitePcmList list contains at least twopairs if the btsSiteManager objectredundantPcmPresence attribute is “true”.
[C]: If one of the pcmCircuit objects in the listdescribes a PCM link that is shared with anothersite in the BSS, the radioSiteMask of the twobtsSiteManager objects are dissociated.
[C]: If the application database of the related BSC isbuilt, the parent bsc object is unlocked.
[D]: If the application database of the related BSC isbuilt, the parent bsc object is unlocked and thebtsSiteManager object is locked.
[D]: If the application database of the related BSC isnot built, it has been reset by an Off line reset BDAcommand.
Parameters listed in alphabetical orderNortel Networks Confidential 2–85
BSS Parameter Dictionary
btsSiteManager
Description : Identifier or name of a btsSiteManager object. It defines theparent btsSiteManager object.
It defines the parent btsSiteManager object.
By definition, a radio site (btsSiteManager object) is related toa BSC, a radio cell (bts object) is related to a radio site, aTRX/DRX (transceiverEquipment object), a TDMA frame(transceiver object) and its radio time slots (channel objects)are related to a radio cell.
In all MMI commands, the objects dependent on abtsSiteManager object can be identified at BSC or site level,whichever is the most convenient to users.
Value range : [0 to 146]
Object : adjacentCellHandOver, adjacentCellReselection, bts,channel, frequencyHoppingSystem, handOverControl,powerControl, software, transceiver,transceiverEquipment, transceiverZone
Type : Id
Checks : [C]: The btsSiteManager object is created.
btsSiteManager model
Description : To select messages issued by a given model of BTS
Do not fill in if this criterion is not to be selected.
Value range : [s2000 inDoor / s2000E inDoor / s2000E outDoor / s4000inDoor / s4000C inDoor / s4000 outDoor / s4000 smart /s8000 inDoor / s8000 outDoor / s2000 Low Power O1 / s2000Low Power O2 / s2000 Low Power S11 / s2000 High PowerO1 / s2000 High Power O2 / s2000 High Power S11 / s8000inDoor CBCF / s8000 outDoor CBCF / s2000 Low PowerEnhanced Packaging O1 / s2000 Low Power EnhancedPackaging O2 / s2000 Low Power Enhanced Packaging 2O4/ s2000 High Power Enhanced Packaging O1 / s2000 HighPower Enhanced Packaging O2 / s2000 High PowerEnhanced Packaging 2O4 / s2000 High Power EnhancedPackaging S11 / e–CELL / s8002 outdoor CBCF O2]
Object : Alarm and notification logs – Filter
Type : DP
Nortel Networks Confidential2–86 Parameters listed in alphabetical order
PE/DCL/DD/0124411–9001–124
Standard 13.04/EN March 2002 GSM/BSS V13
btsSiteManagerList Class 2
Description : List of btsSiteManager objects attached to a multiple siteobject
Value range : [0 to 146]
Object : multiple site
Type : DP
Checks : [C/M]: Each btsSiteManager object is unique in the listand created for the parent bsc object.
[M]: The parent bsc object is unlocked and thereferenced btsSiteManager objects are locked.
Note : The order in which the btsSiteManager objects are entered inthe list must match the BTS chaining order, beginning with theBTS closest to the BSC.
btsSMReserved1 Class 2 B27 V12
Description : This space is used for RadioSiteMask offset parameter
Value range : [–32768 to 32767]
Object : btsSiteManager
Default value :
Type : DP
Checks : [M]: The parent bsc object is unlocked and thebtsSiteManager object is locked.
btsSMReserved2 Class 2 B28 V12
Description : This space is used for RadioSiteMask offset parameter
Value range : [–32768 to 32767]
Object : btsSiteManager
Default value :
Type : DP
Checks : [M]: The parent bsc object is unlocked and thebtsSiteManager object is locked.
Parameters listed in alphabetical orderNortel Networks Confidential 2–87
BSS Parameter Dictionary
btsThresholdHopReconf Class 2 B29 V8
Description : Minimum number of frequencies that must be working in acell to allow frequency hopping reconfiguration
If this attribute defines the nominal number of cellfrequencies, the reconfiguration process is deactivated. Referto the btsHopReconfRestart entry in the Dictionary.
Value range : [1 to 64]
Object : bts
Default value : 1
Type : DP
Checks : [M]: This number is less than or equal to the number oftransceiver objects created for the bts object.
[M]: The parent bsc object is unlocked and the btsobject is locked.
btsWithCavity Class 2 V12
Description : Whether the bts object instance uses a transceiver equipmentwith cavity
Value range : [true / false]Object : bts
Default value : false
Feature : Mixed hybrid and cavity combiner BTSs (PR1179 – V12)
Type : DP
Checks : [M]: The parent bsc object is unlocked and the btsobject is locked.
Nortel Networks Confidential2–88 Parameters listed in alphabetical order
PE/DCL/DD/0124411–9001–124
Standard 13.04/EN March 2002 GSM/BSS V13
buildState
Description : Whether BSC application database building is in-progress.Commands on all objects related to the bsc concerned objectare refused while the BDA is being built.
When the bsc object is created, the value of this attribute isenforced to “notInProgress”. It is unknown to the BSC andcannot be directly modified by users.
It is changed to “inProgress” by the system after a user BuildBDA command on the bsc object as long as database buildingis in-progress. It is then changed back to “notInProgress” whenthe operation is complete.
Value range : [inProgress / notInProgress]
Object : bsc
Type : DI
Parameters listed in alphabetical orderNortel Networks Confidential 2–89
BSS Parameter Dictionary
C
callClearing Class 3 C1
Description : Maximum distance between MS and BTS before call is cleared
It is greater than msRangeMax.
This distance defines the cell maximum coverage area.
Value range : [2 to 35] km (non–extended mode)[2 to 120] km (extended mode)
Object : bts
Default value : 35 in non–extended mode, 90 in extended mode
Type : DP
Checks : [C/M]: callClearing > msRangeMax (attribute of thehandOverControl object associated with the btsobject).
[C/M]: The maximum distance is 35 km if the extendedcell attribute of the bts object is “false”.
[C/M]: The maximum distance is 120 km if the extendedcell attribute of the bts object is “true”.
[M]: The parent bsc object is unlocked.
7 km for urban
35 km for rural
callPathObservationArea
Description : List of up to thirty-one same-type objects observed. Enter eachobject reference according to the type (bts,transceiverEquipment, xtp).
Value range : [list of objects belonging to the same class]
Object : callPathTrace
Type : DP
Checks : [C/M]: All observed objects belong to the same class.
[M]: The callPathTrace object is locked.
Nortel Networks Confidential2–90 Parameters listed in alphabetical order
PE/DCL/DD/0124411–9001–124
Standard 13.04/EN March 2002 GSM/BSS V13
callPathTrace V8
Description : Identifier of a callPathTrace object defined with regard to themd object
This object describes the Call path tracing function of a BSS(follow–up of calls using one or more common resources inthe BSS).
A callPathTrace object is created in locked state. Unlock theobject to start collecting trace data.
Value range : [0 to 2147483646]Object : callPathTrace
Type : Id
Checks : [C]: The callPathTrace object is not created for the mdobject.
[C/M/D]: The application database of the related BSC isnot being built.
[C/M/D]: If the application database of the related BSC isbuilt, the BSS/OMC–R link is established and noaudit is running in the BSC.
[D]: The callPathTrace object is created.
callPathTraceType
Description : Type of information stored by the BSC
The information stored with respect to the type is detailed inNTP < 07 >.
If the request cannot be fulfilled, the BSC attempts to storeanother type of information, using the following rule: radio>>> hand over >>> radio.
Value range : [basic / hand over / radio]Object : callPathTrace
Type : DP
Checks : [M]: The callPathTrace object is locked.
Parameters listed in alphabetical orderNortel Networks Confidential 2–91
BSS Parameter Dictionary
callReestablishment Class 3 C2
Description : Whether call re–establishment in a cell is allowed when theradio link is broken off for propagation reasons
The information is broadcast to the mobiles at regular intervalson the cell BCCH.
On receipt of a CHANNEL REQUIRED message with cause“call re–establishment”, the BSC attempts to allocate a TCHin one of the cells where call re–establishment is allowed.Then, if no TCH is available the BSC attempts to allocate aSDCCH.
Value range : [allowed / not allowed]Object : bts
Default value : not allowed
Type : DP
Checks : [M]: The parent bsc object is unlocked.
callReestablishmentPriority Class 3 C3
Description : Index in the allocPriorityTable that defines the processingpriority of TCH allocation requests with cause “callreestablishment”
This priority is used in primo-allocations or when an SDDCHcannot be allocated for overload reasons.
Value range : [0 to 17]Object : bts
Default value : 17
Type : DP
Checks : [M]: The parent bsc object is unlocked.
capacityAlarmThreshold
Description : Filling threshold of the message saving partition on theOMC–R agent disks, beyond which a notification is triggered
The size of the saving partitions is indicated in the systemcommissioning files.
This attribute is significant when the object describes a currentlog; it has no meaning when the object describes a restored log.
When the threshold is reached, the OMC–R agent initiates thefollowing actions:
A notification is sent to the OMC–R manager.
Nortel Networks Confidential2–92 Parameters listed in alphabetical order
PE/DCL/DD/0124411–9001–124
Standard 13.04/EN March 2002 GSM/BSS V13
For a current alarm log, old messages are deleted to makeroom in the partition. If all saved messages are of today’sdate, further notifications are not saved and theoperationalState of the log object is forced to “disabled”.
For a current observation or trace log, the operationalStateof the log object is forced to “disabled” and itsavailabilityStatus is forced to “logFull”.
Value range : [0 to 2147483646]. “2147483646” defines a 100% threshold(the partition is full).
Object : log – Display
Type : DP
Note : The attributes of the log objects are not managed by users.
�����
Description : To select messages according to one or more causes associatedwith a fault number. Refer to BSS and OMC MaintenanceManuals.
This parameter is a component of the specific problems filter.Refer to this entry in the Dictionary.
Value range : [0 to 19070980]
Object : Alarm and notification logs – Filter
Type : DP
ccId V13
Description : Identifier of the ‘cc’ object class. This identifier is allocated bythe MD–R at object creation, depending on the shelf and slotnumbers indicated by the BSC. This attribute cannot bemodified. This attribute is relevant for BSC e3.
Value range : [0 to 2147483646]
Object : cc
Type : DP
Parameters listed in alphabetical orderNortel Networks Confidential 2–93
BSS Parameter Dictionary
cellAllocation Class 2 C4
Description : List of no more than 64 frequencies allotted to a cell in thenetwork frequency band
By definition, all cells covered by a given radio site use thesame frequency band defined by the type of the network(standardIndicator). All cells declared as neighbor cells ofa serving cell use the same frequency band as the serving cell.
Value range : [1 to 124] (GSM 900 network / Extended GSM network),[0 to 1023] (GSM–R),[512 to 885] (GSM 1800 network),[512 to 810] (GSM 1900 network)
Object : bts
Type : DP
Checks : [C/M]: Each frequency occurs once in the list andcomplies with the type of the network (refer to thestandardIndicator entry in the Dictionary).
[C/M] : GSM 900 / GSM–R / Extended GSM networks:The number of frequencies in the list is limited to64.
[C/M] : GSM 1800 or 1900 network: The number offrequencies in the list depends on the gap betweenthe lowest and the greatest defined frequencies.
Maximum gap betweenfrequencies
Number of frequencies
between 257 and 512 [2 to 18]
between 129 and 256 [2 to 22]
between 113 and 128 [2 to 29]
between 1 and 112 [2 to 64]
[C/M]: The cell BCCH frequency (bCCHFrequency) ispart of the list.
[C/M]: For dualband networks, the number of frequenciesmust be inferior or equal to 64 by frequency band.
[M]: The frequencies allotted to the radio time slots(channel objects) of the set of TDMA framesrelated to the cell are part of the list.
[M]: The parent bsc object is unlocked and the btsobject is locked.
Nortel Networks Confidential2–94 Parameters listed in alphabetical order
PE/DCL/DD/0124411–9001–124
Standard 13.04/EN March 2002 GSM/BSS V13
cellBarQualify Class 3 C5 V8
Description : Cell selection priority used in the C2 algorithm in Phase II
The information is broadcast to the mobiles at regular intervalson the cell BCCH.
Value range : [true (low priority) / false (normal priority)]Object : bts
Default value : False
Type : DP
Checks : [M]: The parent bsc object is unlocked.
cellBarred Class 3 C6
Description : Whether direct cell access are barred to mobiles
The information is broadcast to the mobiles at regular intervalson the cell BCCH.
During a call, it is transmitted on a signaling link.
If the attribute value is changed to “barred”, all in-progresscalls can continue but the BSC will direct further mobile callsto another cell.
Value range : [barred / not barred]
Object : bts
Default value : not barred
Type : DP
Checks : [M]: The parent bsc object is unlocked.
Remark : Even when cell access are barred to MSs, the cell may beindirectly accessible if incoming handovers are allowed(incomingHandOver attribute of the associatedhandOverControl object).
Parameters listed in alphabetical orderNortel Networks Confidential 2–95
BSS Parameter Dictionary
cellDeletionCount Class 3 C7
Description : Number of consecutive “Measurement Result” messageswhich, if not received from a given neighbor cell, will causeall previously stored information related to that cell to bedeleted.
From V12, this number corresponds to the number of missingmeasurement reports after which this neighbour cell is nomore eligible. The measurements related to this neighbour cellare not deleted as far as less than 10 consecutive measurementsare missing.
Value range : [0 to 31]Object : bts
Default value : 5 in rural environment, 2 in microcell environment
Type : DP
Checks : [M]: The parent bsc object is unlocked.
Note : Any entered value superior than 10 is taken into account as 10value.
cellDtxDownLink Class 3 C8
Description : Whether the use of discontinuous transmission in BTS-to-MSdirection is allowed in a cell
Value range : [enabled / disabled]
Object : bts
Default value : enabled
Type : DP
Checks : [M]: The parent bsc object is unlocked.
Remark : The dtxMode attribute allows users to control the use ofdiscontinuous transmission on the uplink. Refer to this entryin the Dictionary.
Nortel Networks Confidential2–96 Parameters listed in alphabetical order
PE/DCL/DD/0124411–9001–124
Standard 13.04/EN March 2002 GSM/BSS V13
cellIdentity Class 3
Description : Cell Identity code (CI) that identifies in a location area, aneighbor cell of the current cell
Value range : [0 to 65535]
Object : adjacentCellHandOver
Type : DP
Checks : [C/M]: A CGI is unique in the set including a serving celland its neighbor cells.
[M]: The parent bsc object is unlocked.
cellIdentity Class 3
Description : Cell Identity code (CI) that identifies in a location area, aneighbor cell of the current cell
Value range : [0 to 65535]
Object : adjacentCellReselection
Type : DP
Checks : [C/M]: A CGI is unique in the set including a serving celland its neighbor cells.
[M]: The parent bsc object is unlocked.
cellIdentity Class 2
Description : Cell Identity code (CI) that identifies a serving cell in alocation area
A CGI (Cell Global Identifier) is unique in a location area. Itidentifies a cell in the PLMN and includes four fields:cellIdentity (CI), locationAreaCode (LAC),mobileCountryCode (MCC), and mobileNetworkCode(MNC).
Value range : [0 to 65535]
Object : bts
Type : DP
Checks : [C/M]: A CGI is unique in the set including a serving celland its neighbor cells.
[M]: The parent bsc object is unlocked and the btsobject is locked.
Parameters listed in alphabetical orderNortel Networks Confidential 2–97
BSS Parameter Dictionary
cellName
Description : Reference name of a bts object on the coverage site. It is casesensitive.
Value range : [30 characters max]
Object : bts
Type : DP
Checks : [C/M]: The name of a cell is unique to the covering radiosite.
cellPagingState
Description : Processing mode of the paging requests in the cell
Value range : [allowed / not allowed / not significant]
This attribute is dynamically managed by the BSC.
allowed The operationalState of the. . . . . . . . . . transceiver object describing theTDMA frame no.0 carrying theBCCH is “working” and SYS INFO1, 2, 3, 4 have been acknowledged bythe BTS.
not allowed The operationalState of the. . . . . . . transceiver object describing theTDMA frame no.0 carrying theBCCH is “working” and SYS INFO1, 2, 3, 4 have not been acknowledgedby the BTS.If no message has beenacknowledged by the BTS, thenotification 1256 “Non response toSYS INFO 1, 2, 3, 4 or 2bis” is issued.
not significant The operationalState of the. . . . transceiver object describing theTDMA frame no.0 carrying theBCCH is not “working”.
Object : bts
Type : DD
Nortel Networks Confidential2–98 Parameters listed in alphabetical order
PE/DCL/DD/0124411–9001–124
Standard 13.04/EN March 2002 GSM/BSS V13
cellReselectHysteresis Class 3C9
Description : Hysteresis to reselect towards a cell:
when the MS is in GSM – IDLE mode and reselects a cellwith a different LA (Location Area)
when the MS is in GMM stand by state and reselects a cellwith a different LA (Location Area) or a different RA(Routing Area)
when the MS is in GMM ready state and reselects a differentcell
A mobile can select a cell in another location area provided thereselection parameter value of that cell oversteps thereselection parameter values of all the cells in the samelocation area as the current camping cell by at leastcellReselectHysteresis dB.
The information is broadcast on the cell BCCH.
The reselection criterion (C1) formula is: C1 = (A – Max(B,0)) where A and B are as follows:
A = average level of the received signal – rxLevAccessMin
B = msTxPwrMaxCCH – Maximum RF output power of theMS
The reselection criterion (C2) formula is given with thecellReselectOffset entry.
Value range : [0 to 14, by steps of 2] dB
Object : bts
Default value : 6 dB
Type : DP
Checks : [M]: The parent bsc object is unlocked.
Note : The greater the value of cellReselectHysteresis, the later anew cell in another location area is selected. This preventsfrom switching back and forth two location areas.
Parameters listed in alphabetical orderNortel Networks Confidential 2–99
BSS Parameter Dictionary
cellReselectOffset Class 3C10 V8
Description : Encouragement to reselect a cell (C2 criterion) for phase 2 MS
The reselection criterion (C2) formula is:
C2 = C1 + cellReselectOffset – temporaryOffsetx H (penaltyTime – T)
C1 is defined with the cellReselectHysteresis entry.
T is a timer that is started when the cell is placed by the MSon the list of most suitable cells to receive the calls, and isstopped when the cell is no longer on the list.
H(penaltyTime – T) equals 0 when penaltyTime < T andequals 1 when penaltyTime ≥ T.
In the case when penaltyTime = 640, reselection criterionformula becomes:
C2 = C1 – cellReselectOffset
Value range : [0 to 126, by steps of 2] dB
Object : bts
Feature : AR 264
Default value : 4
Type : DP
Checks : [M]: The parent bsc object is unlocked.
Note : The value given to this attribute allows to more or lessencourage the mobiles to reselect the cell.
Type : DP
cellReselInd Class 3 C11 V8
Description : Whether cell reselection criterion (C2) use is authorized
Value range : [true / false]
Object : bts
Default value : True
Type : DP
Checks : [M]: The parent bsc object is unlocked.
Nortel Networks Confidential2–100 Parameters listed in alphabetical order
PE/DCL/DD/0124411–9001–124
Standard 13.04/EN March 2002 GSM/BSS V13
cellType Class 3 C12
Description : Type of the adjacent cell
Value range : [normalType / umbrellaType / microType]Object : adjacentCellHandOver
Default value : normalType
Type : DP
Checks : [M]: The parent bsc object is unlocked.
cellType Class 3 C13
Description : Type of the serving cell
Value range : [normalType / umbrellaType / microType]Object : bts
Default value : normalType
Type : DP
Checks : [C/M]: The adjacent cell umbrella Ref attribute isdefined if the cell is a microcell (cellType) anddirected retry handovers are processed in BSCmode (directedRetryModeUsed).
[M]: The parent bsc object is unlocked.
cemId V13
Description : Identifier of the ‘cem’ object class. This identifier is allocatedby the MD–R at object creation, depending on the shelf andslot numbers indicated by the BSC. This attribute cannot bemodified. This attribute is relevant for BSC e3 and TCU e3.
Value range : [0 to 2147483646]Object : cem
Type : DP
chain
Description : Identifier of a BSC processing chain
It identifies the chain whose software markers are displayed.
Value range : [A / B]Object : software–bsc – Display markers
Type : DD
Parameters listed in alphabetical orderNortel Networks Confidential 2–101
BSS Parameter Dictionary
chain
Description : To select messages originating from a BSC processing chain
Do not fill in if this criterion is not to be selected.
Value range : [chainA / chainB]
Object : Alarm and notification logs – Filter
Type : DP
chainId
Description : Identifier of a BSC processing chain
It identifies the chain whose characteristics are displayed.
Value range : [chainA / chainB]
Object : bsc – Display chain information
Type : Id
Note : This parameter is only available for BSC 2G
chainId
Description : Identifier of a BSC processing chain
The consequences of the command are as follows:
If the chain is active at the time the BSC receives the order,it is reset and the operations are switched over to the passivechain.
If the chain is passive when the BSC receives the order, it isreset if it can be reached.
To determine which chain is currently active in a BSC, run aDisplay all command on the concerned bsc object: theactiveChain attribute identifies the active chain.
Value range : [chainA / chainB]Object : bsc – Suicide chain
Type : Id
Nortel Networks Confidential2–102 Parameters listed in alphabetical order
PE/DCL/DD/0124411–9001–124
Standard 13.04/EN March 2002 GSM/BSS V13
channel
Description : Identifier of a channel object (radio time slot)
In all MMI commands, a channel object can be referred to bythe sequence “siteName.cellName.transceiver.channel”,where siteName and cellName respectively identify thecovering site and cell by name.
Value range : [0 to 7]
Object : channel
Type : Id
Checks : [C]: The number of channel objects dependent on atransceiver object is limited to eight.
[C/M]: If the channel object does not obey frequencyhopping laws, the absoluteRFChannelNo isdefined unless it carries the parent cell BCCH, andfhsRef and maio are undefined.
[C/M]: If the channel object obeys frequency hoppinglaws, the absoluteRFChannelNo is undefined,and fhsRef and maio are defined.
[C/D]: If the application database of the related BSC isbuilt, the parent bsc object is unlocked and theparent bts object is locked.
[D]: If the application database of the related BSC isnot built, it has been reset by an Off line reset BDAcommand.
Parameters listed in alphabetical orderNortel Networks Confidential 2–103
BSS Parameter Dictionary
channel state
Description : Type and resource state of the logical channels multiplexed onthe radio time slot
Value range :
Type: [BCCH / RACH / PCH AGCH /SDCCH/4 / SDCCH/8 / TCH (fullrate) / CCH],
Resource state: [not created / disabled / working / free/ busy / blocking / working, blocked/ blocking, removing / disabled,blocked / free, blocked / removing /available / working not CBCH /disabled not CBCH / working CBCH/ disabled CBCH]
available The channel is allocated, not blocked,. . . . . . . . and free.
busy The channel is allocated, not blocked,. . . . . . . . . . . . and busy.
disabled The channel is not configured.. . . . . . . . .
working, blocked The channel is allocated and blocked.. .
disabled, blocked The channel is not allocated and. . blocked.
Object : channel – Display channel state
Type : DD
Notes : The types of logical channels that can be multiplexed on aradio time slot depend on its channelType. Refer to thisentry in the Dictionary.
The resource state of SDCCH no.2 is “disabled” if a CBCHis defined.
A radio channel is blocked or released by means of a userModify channel state command.
A radio channel is allocated when the TDMA frame isconfigured (in the Abis way) and its radio time slots aremapped onto an Abis interface PCM link.
Nortel Networks Confidential2–104 Parameters listed in alphabetical order
PE/DCL/DD/0124411–9001–124
Standard 13.04/EN March 2002 GSM/BSS V13
channelType Class 2 C14
Description : Type of logical channel supported by a radio TS
Value range : [tCHFull / sDCCH / mainBCCH / mainBCCHCombined /bcchsdcch4CBCH / sdcch8CBCH / cCH (V12) / pDTCH(V12)]
An SDCCH is only allocated to a mobile during call setup.Once the call is established, the SDCCH is released and a TCHsupports the call, serving traffic and signaling needs.
A CBCH (Cell Broadcast CHannel) configuration enables useof the Short Message Service –Cell Broadcast (SMS–CB) ina cell when a radio time slot of a TDMA frame related to thecell supports that type of channel. The CBCH can be combinedwith an SDCCH/8 or a BCCH+SDCCH/4. It takes the place ofSDCCH no.2 in all cases.
If the time slot carries a cell BCCH, its type sets the cell BCCHconfiguration (combined or not combined).
Object : channel
Feature : Extended CCCH (TF184 – V12)GPRS (SV407 – V12)
Default value : None
Type : DP
Checks : [C/M]: If the type is “mainBCCH”,“mainBCCHCombined”, or“bcchSdcch4CBCH”, the channel objectidentifier is [0] and the object is not authorized tohop.
[C/M]: The type “cCH” can only be used if TS 0 carriesa BCCH logical channel (“main BCCH”, “mainBCCH combined”)
[C/M]: The only allowed association of (BCCH + CCCH)timeslots are (0), (0, 2), (0, 2, 4), (0, 2, 4, 6)
[C/M]: If the type is “sdcch8CBCH”, the channel objectidentifier is in the range [0 to 3] if the covering cellworks in normal mode, and it equals 0 or 2 if thecell works in extended mode (extended cellattribute of the parent bts object).
[C/M]: If the type is “sdcch8CBCH”, thenoOfBlksForAccessGrant attribute of the parentbts object has a value greater than 0.
Parameters listed in alphabetical orderNortel Networks Confidential 2–105
BSS Parameter Dictionary
[C/M]: If the type is “bcchSdcch4CBCH” or“sdcch8CBCH”, use of the SMS–CB service isauthorized in the parent bts object (smsCB =“used”).
[C/M]: Concentric cell: If the parent transceiver objectbelongs to the cell inner zone, the only authorizedtypes are “bcchSdcch4CBCH” and“sdcch8CBCH”.
[M]: The “pDTCH” channelType is only allowed fromV12 BSCs for GPRS.
[M]: The parent bsc object is unlocked and the parentbts object is locked.
A radio channel is identified by an 8-bit code built up by theOMC–R from the channel type and the number of the time slotthat supports it:
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
C5 C4 C3 C2 C1 < TN >
TN bits (bits 3 to 1) indicate the radio time slot number[0-7].
C bits (bits 8 to 4) describe the type of the channel:
00001 ACCH with a TCH/FR (SACCH/FACCH)
0001T ACCH with a TCH/HR
001TT ACCH in an SDCCH/4 configuration
01TTT ACCH in an SDCCH/8 configuration
10000 BCCH
10001 RACH (Uplink CCCH)
10010 PCH + AGCH (Downlink CCCH)
The T bits indicate the subchannel number [0 to 7]:
• There are four subchannels [0 to 3] in an SDCCH/4configuration:
00100 SDCCH/4 + ACCH subchannel no.0
00101 SDCCH/4 + ACCH subchannel no.1 (combined CBCH)
00110 SDCCH/4 + ACCH subchannel no.2
00111 SDCCH/4 + ACCH subchannel no.3
• There are eight subchannels [0 to 7] in an SDCCH/8configuration:
01000 SDCCH/8 + ACCH subchannel no.0
Nortel Networks Confidential2–106 Parameters listed in alphabetical order
PE/DCL/DD/0124411–9001–124
Standard 13.04/EN March 2002 GSM/BSS V13
01001 SDCCH/8 + ACCH subchannel no.1 (CBCH)
01010 SDCCH/8 + ACCH subchannel no.2
01011 SDCCH/8 + ACCH subchannel no.3
01100 SDCCH/8 + ACCH subchannel no.4
01101 SDCCH/8 + ACCH subchannel no.5
01110 SDCCH/8 + ACCH subchannel no.6
01111 SDCCH/8 + ACCH subchannel no.7
The logical channels that can be multiplexed on a radio timeslot depend on its channelType. They are described in thefollowing table.
channelType Bits C5–C1
tCHFull BM + ACCH (SACCH/FACCH)
sDCCH SDCCH/8 + ACCH subchannels [0 to 7](SACCH/FACCH)
mainBCCH BCCHRACH (Uplink)PCH + AGCH (Downlink)
mainBCCHCombined BCCHRACH (Uplink)PCH + AGCH (Downlink)SDCCH/4 + ACCH subchannels [0 to 3]
bcchSdcch4CBCH BCCHCBCH (= SDCCH No2)RACH (Uplink)PCH + AGCH (Downlink)SDCCH/4 + ACCH subchannels [0 to 3]
sdcch8CBCH CBCH (= SDCCH No2)SDCCH/4 + ACCH subchannels [0 to 3](SACCH/FACCH)
cCH BCCHRACH (Uplink)PCH + AGCH (Downlink)
Remark : Configuration of logical channels and broadcast of shortmessages are managed by two independent OMC–R functions.
When a short message broadcast is started in a cell, thepresence of a channel object with a CBCH dependent on theconcerned bts object is checked. On the contrary, the SMS–CBfunction is not aware of changes made to that attribute.
Parameters listed in alphabetical orderNortel Networks Confidential 2–107
BSS Parameter Dictionary
Consequently, withdrawing a CBCH from a cell configurationwill implicitly stop any short message broadcast in the cellwithout the SMS–CB function knowing.
Note : The following counters have been multiplexed on TSs 0, 2, 4,and 6 for the Extended CCCH feature: C1026, C1027, C1028,C1029, C1030, C1031, C1033, C1604, C1605.
Comments : No recommended value is specified since this parameterdepends on the strategy of the operator.
chanState
Description : Whether the radio channel should be blocked
Value range : [locked / unlocked]
Object : channel – Set channel state
Type : DP
Checks : [A]: A BCCH or a CBCH, whether combined or not,cannot be blocked.
[A]: The parent btsSiteManager and bts objects areunlocked.
Notes : When a CBCH is defined for a cell, it always uses SDCCHno.2.
Run a Display channel state command to check that thechannel has switched to the specified state. Refer to thechannel state entry in the Dictionary.
chosenChannelAsscomp Class 1 V8
Description : Whether the “Chosen channel” element is used in the ASSIGNCOMPLETE messages (Phase II compliance)
Value range : [true / false]Object : signallingPoint
Default value : False
Type : DP
Checks : [M]: The parent bsc object is locked.
Nortel Networks Confidential2–108 Parameters listed in alphabetical order
PE/DCL/DD/0124411–9001–124
Standard 13.04/EN March 2002 GSM/BSS V13
chosenChannelCompL3Info Class 1 V8
Description : Whether the “Chosen channel” element is used in theCOMPLETE LAYER 3 INFORMATION messages (Phase IIcompliance)
Value range : [true / false]
Object : signallingPoint
Default value : False
Type : DP
Checks : [M]: The parent bsc object is locked.
chosenChannelHoPerf Class 1 V8
Description : Whether the “Chosen channel” element is used in theHANDOVER PERFORMED messages (Phase IIcompliance)
Value range : [true / false]
Object : signallingPoint
Default value : False
Type : DP
Checks : [M]: The parent bsc object is locked.
chosenChannelHoReq Class 1 V8
Description : Whether the “Chosen channel” element is used in theHANDOVER REQUEST ACKNOWLEDGE messages(Phase II compliance)
Value range : [true / false]
Object : signallingPoint
Default value : False
Type : DP
Checks : [M]: The parent bsc object is locked.
Parameters listed in alphabetical orderNortel Networks Confidential 2–109
BSS Parameter Dictionary
cic
Description : Circuit Identity Code = numbers of the PCM link and time slotused by a terrestrial circuit on the A interface, defined withregard to the MSC (cic = 32xmscPcmNumber +mscPcmTsNumber)
The cic is coded into 16 bits, as follows:
xxxxxxxxxxxnnnnn = (32xmscPcmNumber) + mscPcmTsNumber
Bits x identify the PCM link involved in the BSC/MSC linkwith regard to the MSC (mscPcmNumber), bits n identify thetime slot used on that PCM link with regard to the MSC(mscPcmTsNumber).
Value range : [0 to 65535]Object : xtp
Type : DP
Checks : [C]: A cic is unique to the parent bsc object.
[C]: The PCM TS used by the terrestrial circuit on theA interface is identical on MSC end(mscPcmTsNumber component) and BSC end(timeSlotNumber), and is not allotted to anotherxtp or signallingLink object dependent on theparent bsc object.
[C]: If PCM link no.3 is used on the A interface(pcmCircuitId), the TS number is in the range[1 to 27] if the PCM link is an E1 link and in therange [1 to 20] if the PCM link is a T1 link. Sincethe last four TSs on that link are not mapped on theAter interface, they cannot be used. Refer to thetranscoderMatrix entry in the Dictionary.
Restrictions : [M]: This attribute cannot be modified.
Nortel Networks Confidential2–110 Parameters listed in alphabetical order
PE/DCL/DD/0124411–9001–124
Standard 13.04/EN March 2002 GSM/BSS V13
circuitGroupBlock Class 1 V8
Description : Whether the CIRCUIT GROUP BLOCK and CIRCUITGROUP UNBLOCK messages are used (Phase IIcompliance)
If these messages are unused, the BLOCK and UNBLOCKmessages are used.
Value range : [false / true]
Object : signallingPoint
Feature : Unequipped circuit and circuit group block (UF1169.1 – V12)
Default value : False
Type : DP
Checks : [M]: The parent bsc object is locked.
[C/M]: The only accepted value in V10 and V11 is “false”.
Remark : Since the system accepts only one value in V10 and V11,changing it has no meaning.
circularFileId
Description : Identifier of a BSC circular file
BSC circular files are automatically created by the system: theFAULT files are created with the BSC, the PERF(observations) and TRACE (trace data) files are created whenthe BSC application database is built.
Value range : [majorFault / minorFault / observation (permanent andtemporary) / instrumentPanel]
Object : bscMdInterface – Circular file
Type : Id
Checks : [A]: The circular file is created.
Parameters listed in alphabetical orderNortel Networks Confidential 2–111
BSS Parameter Dictionary
circularFileState
Description : State of a circular file. When a circular file is closed, thespontaneous messages stored are not forwarded to theOMC–R agent.
This attribute is set by the system following a user Closecircular file or Open circular file command.
When a circular file is closed, the messages are stored until thefile is reopened. Some messages may be lost if the capacity ofthe file is reached.
Value range : [closed / opened]Object : bscMdInterface – Display circular file state
Type : DP
clear time
Description : To select alarms cleared at that time
Absolute time format entry forms are detailed in NTP < 130 >.
Do not fill in if this criterion is not to be selected.
Value range : [<date>,<time>]Object : Cleared alarm log – Filter
Type : DP
cleared by
Description : To select alarms ceased by a given user. Enter the user’s nameas defined in the user’s profile.
Do not fill in if this criterion is not to be selected.Object : Cleared alarm log – Filter
Type : DP
clearing cause
Description : To select alarms according to the cause of ceasing
Do not fill in if this criterion is not to be selected.
Value range : [user command / object enabled / object deleted / clear eventreceived / automatic purge / cleared on low threshold crossing/ circular file saturation]
Object : Cleared alarm log – Filter
Type : DP
Nortel Networks Confidential2–112 Parameters listed in alphabetical order
PE/DCL/DD/0124411–9001–124
Standard 13.04/EN March 2002 GSM/BSS V13
cnId V13
Description : Identifier of a ‘cn’ object class. This identifier is allocated bythe MD–R at object creation. The only value allocated by theMD–R is 0. This attribute cannot be modified. This attributeis relevant for BSC e3.
Value range : [0 to 0]
Object : cn
Type : DP
coderPoolList V13
Description : Current partitioning of the coder pool. This attribute isdynamically managed by the BSS. It is set to NULL at objectcreation. Value changes are not notified to the Manager. Thisattribute is relevant for TCU e3.
Value range : [0 to 65535]
Object : transcoder3GEqpt
Type : DP
codingScheme Class 2 V12
Description : Channel coding scheme that the MS (Mobile Station) shall usewhen transmitting data on UL.
Value range : [cs1, cs2]
Object : transceiver
Default value : cs1
Feature : GPRS (SV407 – V12)
Type : DP
Checks : [M]: The parent bsc object is unlocked and the btsobject is locked.
Note : cs1 (respectively cs2) is recommended for data blocks(respectively signaling blocks).
Parameters listed in alphabetical orderNortel Networks Confidential 2–113
BSS Parameter Dictionary
command classes
Description : List of no more than twenty-five authorized command classesthat define a user’s command domain. MMI commands grantaccess to OMC–R functions.
Each class defines a subset of commands (one of themprovides access to all MMI commands). The comprehensivelist of MMI commands, together with their class(es), can bedisplayed using the Display command classes command.
Value range : [0 to 2147483646]
Object : user profile
Type : DP
command line
Description : Command associated with the job. Follow the Line modesyntax.
If the job is meant to run a simple command, enter the sequencedescribing the command and its parameters.
If the job is meant to run a command file, enter the following:
Run–commandFile:object=(commandFile=/<directory>/<filename>);
The command file must be created in the specified directory.
The Line mode syntax is detailed in NTP < 130 >.
Value range : [case sensitive]
Object : job
Type : DP
command number
Description : Serial number of the command to abort. It is assigned by thesystem and is registered in session logs.
Every MMI command launched by the user is identified by aserial number assigned by the system. Open the user sessionlog consultation window and search for that number.
Object : commandFile – Abort
Type : DP
Nortel Networks Confidential2–114 Parameters listed in alphabetical order
PE/DCL/DD/0124411–9001–124
Standard 13.04/EN March 2002 GSM/BSS V13
commandFile
Description : Identifier (name) of a command file in the saving directory
Enter the file name only.
If the file exists in the selected directory, the user can eitheroverwrite its contents with the commands newly recorded orappend the new commands to the existing file (see toNTP < 130 >).
Value range : [case sensitive, 14 characters max]Object : commandFile – Create file
Type : Id
commandFile
Description : Saving name of the command file after being edited
Enter the file name only.
If the file is a new one, preselect the saving directory in the“Command file manager” window. If the file exists, it is savedin the same directory as the source file.
Value range : [case sensitive, 14 characters max]Object : Command file editing – Save
Type : Id
comment V11
Description : Text comment
Value range : [256 characters max]Object : report template
Type : DP
comment
Description : Additional information coming with the short message. It isnot broadcast.
Value range : [60 characters max]Object : short message
Type : DP
comments
Description : Additional information (such as creation date)
Object : software – Display markers
Type : DD
Parameters listed in alphabetical orderNortel Networks Confidential 2–115
BSS Parameter Dictionary
ComputeSyntheticCounters
Description : Whether synthetic counters are included in the observationreport
This parameter is significant only for permanent bsc andinstrument panel observation report display requests.
Value range : [enabled / disabled]Object : Display xxx report
Type : DP
concentAlgoExtMsRange Class 3 C15 V9
Description : MS to BTS distance below which a handover is requested fromthe large zone to the small zone if the level criteria is verified
Value range : [1 to 34] km (non–extended mode)[1 to 120] km (extended mode)
Object : handOverControl
Default value : 1
Condition : To define if the associated bts object describes a concentric,dualband or dualcoupling cell
Type : DP
Checks : [C/M]: concentAlgoExtMsRange ≤concentAlgoIntMsRange
[C/M]: The maximum distance is 34 km if the extendedcell attribute of the associated bts object is “false”.
[C/M]: The maximum distance is 120 km if the extendedcell attribute of the bts object is “true”.
[M]: The parent bsc object is unlocked.
Nortel Networks Confidential2–116 Parameters listed in alphabetical order
PE/DCL/DD/0124411–9001–124
Standard 13.04/EN March 2002 GSM/BSS V13
concentAlgoExtRxLev Class 3 C16 V9
Description : The level of the MS signal strength from below which ahandover is requested from the large zone to the small zone
Value range : [less than –110, –110 to –109, ... , –49 to –48, morethan –48] dBm
Object : handOverControl
Default value : – 95 to – 94
Condition : To define if the associated bts object describes a concentric,dualband or dualcoupling cell
Type : DP
Checks : [C/M]: concentAlgoExtRxLev ≤concentAlgoIntRxLev
[M]: The parent bsc object is unlocked.
concentAlgoIntMsRange Class 3 C17 V9
Description : MS to BTS distance from which a handover from the smallzone to the large zone will be requested
The following inequality, that is not checked by the system,must be true (refer to these entries in the Dictionary):
concentAlgoIntMsRange ≤ msRangeMax
Value range : [1 to 34] km (non–extended mode)[1 to 120] km (extended mode)
Object : handOverControl
Default value : 34
Condition : To define if the associated bts object describes a concentric,dualband or dualcoupling cell
Type : DP
Checks : [C/M]: concentAlgoIntMsRange ≥concentAlgoExtMsRange
[C/M]: The maximum distance is 34 km if the extendedcell attribute of the associated bts object is “false”.
[C/M]: The maximum distance is 120 km if the extendedcell attribute of the bts object is “true”.
[M]: The parent bsc object is unlocked.
Parameters listed in alphabetical orderNortel Networks Confidential 2–117
BSS Parameter Dictionary
concentAlgoIntRxLev Class 3 C18 V9
Description : Level of the MS signal strength below which a handover isrequested from the small zone to the large zone
Value range : [less than –110, –110 to –109, ... , –49 to –48, morethan –48] dBm
Object : handOverControl
Default value : less than –110
Condition : To define if the associated bts object describes a concentric,dualband or dualcoupling cell
Type : DP
Checks : [C/M]: concentAlgoIntRxLev ≥concentAlgoExtRxLev
[M]: The parent bsc object is unlocked.
Nortel Networks Confidential2–118 Parameters listed in alphabetical order
PE/DCL/DD/0124411–9001–124
Standard 13.04/EN March 2002 GSM/BSS V13
concentric cell Class 2 C19 V9
Description : Whether the cell is monozone, concentric, dualband ordualcoupling
A concentric, dualband, or dualcoupling cell describes acombination of two transmission zones, the outer (or large)zone and the inner (or small) zone. The inner zone is entirelyincluded in the outer zone.
A dualband cell is a particular type of concentric cell for whichGSM 900 and GSM1800 TRXs/DRXs coexist and share thesame BCCH.
A dualcoupling cell is a particular type of concentric cell forwhich the TRXs/DRXs are combined with two types ofcombiners.
For concentric configurations (concentric, dualband ordualcoupling), a TDMA frame belongs to one zone or theother, but never to both, and the frequencies used in each zoneare separated.
Value range : [monozone / concentric / dualband / dualcoupling]
monozone.......normal cell
concentric.......two concentric transmission zones
dualband.........two concentric transmissions zones withGSM 900 TRXs/DRXs for the one andGSM 1800 TRXs/DRXs for the other
dualcoupling..two concentric transmission zones withTRXs/DRXs combined with a one type ofcombiner for the one and with another typeof combiner for the other
Object : bts
Feature : Dualband cell management (TF875 – V12)
Default value : monozone
Type : DP
Checks : [M]: The parent bsc object is unlocked and the btsobject is locked.
Note : Dualband cells are only available for S8000 DRX transceiverarchitecture.
Dualcoupling cells are only available for BTSs equipped withnon mixed DCU4 or DRX transceiver architecture.
Parameters listed in alphabetical orderNortel Networks Confidential 2–119
BSS Parameter Dictionary
condition
Description : Condition for calling the counting mechanism when a counteris involved
The following fields can be combined in the logicalexpression:
Parameter Notification type Operators
administrativeState state change =
availabilityStatus state change =
bsc equipment name alarm =
bsc model alarm =
Cause alarm < = >
btsSiteManager model alarm =
bts equipment name alarm =
equipment processornumber
alarm < = >
faultNumber alarm < = >
operationalState state change =
perceived severity alarm =
postMortem alarm =
usageState state change =
The “postMortem” field can take two values, either “beforeBSC restart” or “after bsc restart”. They have the followingmeaning:
before BSC restart means that the notification issued by theBSC was received by the OMC–R agent without the BSChaving restarted (nominal conditions).
after BSC restart means that the notification was issued bythe BSC and the BSC was restarted before the OMC–Ragent received the notification. These notifications do nottrigger alarms.
Nortel Networks Confidential2–120 Parameters listed in alphabetical order
PE/DCL/DD/0124411–9001–124
Standard 13.04/EN March 2002 GSM/BSS V13
The following logical operators can be used in the logicalexpression:
& stands for the logical AND.
| stands for the logical OR.
! stands for the logical NOT.
Value range : [logical expression]Object : alarm criteria
Condition : To define if a Counter is associated with the criterion.
Type : DP
configRef Class 2
Description : Reference name of a DLU (Data Loading Unit) configurationfile. Check BSS upgrade file.
Value range : [1 to VVV]Object : btsSiteManager
Type : DP
Checks : [C/M]: The attribute value must be set according to astatic configuration file.
[M]: The parent bsc object is unlocked and thebtsSiteManager object is locked.
Note : If the attribute is nonzero, the user must check that the DLUconfiguration file exists on the concerned BSC disk, since nocheck is performed by the OMC–R.
The configRef is an ASCII-coded integer in base 32 thatallows to code the version of the DLU configuration file asseven characters (xxaYYYz).
The btsDescription parameter gives the transcription of theconfigRef parameter.
configRefList V13
Description : This attribute identifies the list of available configRef for abtsSiteManager EFT. For another object class instance, thisattribute is empty. This attribute is allocated by the MD–R atobject creation. This attribute cannot be modified by theManager.
Value range : [0 to 150]Object : executableSoftware
Type : DP
Parameters listed in alphabetical orderNortel Networks Confidential 2–121
BSS Parameter Dictionary
configurationType
Description : Type of configuration the alarm criterion belongs to
The manufacturer configuration is known as the referenceconfiguration. The operator configurations are known as thedaytime configuration, the nighttime configuration, and thespecific (or particular) configuration. Refer to the alarmcriteria entry in the Dictionary.
Value range : [manufacturer / operator]Object : alarm criteria
Type : DP
Checks : [M]: This attribute cannot be modified.
confusion Class 1 V8
Description : Whether the CONFUSION messages are used (Phase IIcompliance)
Value range : [false]Object : signallingPoint
Default value : False
Type : DP
Checks : [C/M]: The only accepted value is “false”.
[M]: The parent bsc object is locked.
Remark : Since the system accepts only one value for this attribute,changing it has no meaning.
Counter list V12
Description : Type of the counter list displayed
Value range : [default / all]
“default”: the default counter list
“all”: the whole counter listObject : report template
Type : DP
counter list filename V11
Description : Full pathname of the counter list file
Object : bscCounterList
Type : DP
Nortel Networks Confidential2–122 Parameters listed in alphabetical order
PE/DCL/DD/0124411–9001–124
Standard 13.04/EN March 2002 GSM/BSS V13
counterId
Description : Q3 name of a permanent BSS observation counter. See toNTP < 125 >.
Value range : [50 characters max, case sensitive]Object : mdWarning – detection function = “outOfRangeCounter”
Type : DP
counters V11
Description : List of the Q3 names of the counters eligible for observation,which are in the counter list filename
Object : bscCounterList
Type : DP
cpueNumber Class 1 C20 V12
Description : Number of the CPU/BIFP board chosen for managing theradio site and its related equipment.
BSC CPUE 0 CPUE 1
BSC 12000 “HC”,12000/6000types 3, 4, 5
BIFP0 BIFP 1
Value range : [noValue / 0 / 1]
“noValue”: let BSC determine BIFP board number onwhich the new site is attached
“0”: attach the new site to BIFP0
“1”: attach the new site to BIFP1Object : btsSiteManager
Default value : no value, 0
Type : DP
Feature : CPU/BIFP load sharing (AR874 – V12)
Checks : [C]: The btsSiteManager object is limited according tothe cpueNumber attribute value.
[C]: The transceiverEquipment object instancenumber is limited according to the cpueNumberattribute value.
[C/M]: This attribute can only be modified if the BSCBDA is not built.
Note : This parameter only applies to type 3 to type 5 BSCs.
Parameters listed in alphabetical orderNortel Networks Confidential 2–123
BSS Parameter Dictionary
cpueOccurrence
Description : Number of the CPU/BIFP board selected by the BSC formanaging the radio site and its common equipment.
This attribute is dynamically managed by the BSC.
Value range : [0 to 2]Object : btsSiteManager
Type : DD
cRC Class 2
Description : Whether the CRC (Cyclic Redundancy Check) test on PCMlinks is used by the DDTI board controlling the PCM link
pcmCircuit object dependent on a bsc object (Abis or Aterinterface):
If a CRC frame checking method is used, the DDTI board inthe BSC and the DTI board in the BTS to which the PCM linkis connected must be appropriately configured, as follows:
DDTI board: CS17 or CS18 jumper is ON (seeNTP < 22 >).
DTI board: CS17 jumper is ON (see BTS ReferenceManuals).
PCMI board: SW2 or SW3 jumper is ON (see BTSReference Manuals)
pcmCircuit object dependent on a transcoder object (Ainterface):
If a CRC frame checking method is used, the DDTI board inthe TCU to which the PCM link is connected must beappropriately configured: CS17 and CS18 jumpers are ON(see NTP < 16 >).
In case of mismatch, the DDTI configuration takes precedenceover the CRC state and a fault message is sent to the OMC–R.
Value range : [used / not used]Object : pcmCircuit
Default value : not used
Type : DP
Checks : [M]: The parent bsc is unlocked and the pcmCircuitobject is locked.
Nortel Networks Confidential2–124 Parameters listed in alphabetical order
PE/DCL/DD/0124411–9001–124
Standard 13.04/EN March 2002 GSM/BSS V13
creator V11
Description : Report template creator name
Value range : [30 characters max]Object : report template
Type : DP
criteriaEventType
Description : Type of the notifications handled by the alarm criterion
Selecting “alarmNotification” includes all Q3 alarmnotifications such as communicationAlarm,equipmentAlarm, environmentalAlarm,processingError-Alarm, and qualityOfServiceAlarm.
Selecting “stateChangeNotification” includes all Q3 statechange notifications.
Value range : [alarmNotification / stateChangeNotification]Object : alarm criteria
Type : DP
CTU cable V13
Description : The CTU (cable transition unit) provides the physical interfaceto the customer’s spans in the BSC e3 and the TCU e3.
Value range : [true / false]
True value: No break in the copper connection from the CTUto the IEM module of the LSA.
False value: The cable is improperly installed from the CTUto the IEM module of the LSA or some break in the copperconnection from the CTU and the IEM module of the LSA.
Object : iem
Type : DD
Feature : AR 1209 – V13.1
current log size
Description : Current log size expressed in bytes
Object : log – Display
Type : DP
Remark : The attributes of the log objects are not managed by the users
Parameters listed in alphabetical orderNortel Networks Confidential 2–125
BSS Parameter Dictionary
currentChannelHorqd Class 1 C21 V12
Description : Whether the “Current channel” element is used or not in theHANDOVER REQUIRED messages (Phase II compliance).
Value range : [false / true]
Object : signallingPoint
Default value : true
Type : DP
Checks : [M]: The parent bsc object is locked.
cypherModeReject Class 1 V8
Description : Whether the CYPHER MODE REJECT messages are used(Phase II compliance)
Value range : [true / false]Object : signallingPoint
Default value : False
Type : DP
Checks : [M]: The parent bsc object is locked.
Nortel Networks Confidential2–126 Parameters listed in alphabetical order
PE/DCL/DD/0124411–9001–124
Standard 13.04/EN March 2002 GSM/BSS V13
D
data mode 14.4 kbit/s Class 2 V11
Description : Whether data 14.4 kbit/s transmission rate is allowed
Value range : [disabled / enabled]Object : transcoderBoard
Default value : disabled
Type : DP
Checks : [M] : Related software object release must be V11+release.
[M] : The version attribute of the parent transcoderobject must be set at “TCB_2”.
[M] : The parent bsc object is unlocked and thetranscoderBoard is unlocked.
data non transparent mode Class 3 V11
Description : Set of transmission rates used for data non transparent modetransmission on the Radio interface (MS ↔ BTS) and Abisinterface (BTS ↔ BSC)
Value range : [9.6 / 14.4] (kbit/s)
Object : bts
Default value : 9,6
Type : DP
Checks : [M] : The parent bsc is unlocked.
[C/M]: The only allowed configurations are thefollowing:
• “9.6”
• “9.6” and “14.4”
Parameters listed in alphabetical orderNortel Networks Confidential 2–127
BSS Parameter Dictionary
data non transparent mode Class 3 V9
Description : Set of transmission rates used for data non transparent modetransmission on the Radio interface (MS ↔ BTS) and Abisinterface (BTS ↔ BSC)
Value range : [9.6 / 14.4] (kbit/s)
Object : signallingPoint
Default value : 9.6 kbit/s
Type : DP
Checks : [M] : The parent bsc is unlocked.
[C/M]: The only allowed configurations are thefollowing:
• “9.6”
• “9.6” and “14.4”
data transparent mode Class 3 V11
Description : Set of transmission rates used for data transparent modetransmission on the Radio interface (MS ↔ BTS) and Abisinterface (BTS ↔ BSC)
Value range : [“1.2/0.075” / 0.6 / 1.2 / 2.4 / 4.8 / 9.6 / 14.4] (kbs)
Object : bts
Type : DP
Checks : [M] : The parent bsc is unlocked.
[C/M]: The only allowed configurations are thefollowing:
• 1.2/0.075, 0.6, 1.2, 2.4, 4.8, and 9.6 (6 values)
• 1.2/0.075, 0.6, 1.2, 2.4, 4.8, 9.6, and 14.4 (7 values)
Nortel Networks Confidential2–128 Parameters listed in alphabetical order
PE/DCL/DD/0124411–9001–124
Standard 13.04/EN March 2002 GSM/BSS V13
data transparent mode Class 3 V9
Description : Set of transmission rates used for data transparent modetransmission on the Radio interface (MS ↔ BTS) and Abisinterface (BTS ↔ BSC)
Value range : [“1.2/0.075” / 0.6 / 1.2 / 2.4 / 4.8 / 9.6 / 14.4] (kbit/s)Object : signallingPoint
Default value :Type : DP
Checks : [M] : The parent bsc is unlocked.
[C/M]: The only allowed configurations are thefollowing:
• 1.2/0.075, 0.6, 1.2, 2.4, 4.8, and 9.6 (6 values)
• 1.2/0.075, 0.6, 1.2, 2.4, 4.8, 9.6, and 14.4 (7 values)
Data14_4OnNoHoppingTs Class 3 V12
Description : Whether data 14.4 kbit/s transmission rate is allowed at btslevel on the non hopping TSs
Value range : [disabled / enabled]Object : bts
Default value : disabled
Type : DP
Checks : [M] : The parent bsc object is unlocked.
date
Description : Date on which the observation report was created
Date format entry forms are detailed in NTP < 130 >.
Value range : [<date>]Object : Display daily report
Type : DP
date
Description : Date on which data to archive were recorded
Date format entry forms are detailed in NTP < 130 >.
Value range : [<date>]Object : md – Archive
Type : DP
Note : Archiving fault, observation, or trace data is not possible forthe current day.
Parameters listed in alphabetical orderNortel Networks Confidential 2–129
BSS Parameter Dictionary
date
Description : Date on which data to restore were recorded
Date format entry forms are detailed in NTP < 130 >.
Value range : [<date>]Object : md – Restore
Type : DP
date
Description : Date on which data to archive were recorded
Date format entry forms are detailed in NTP < 130 >.
Value range : [<date>]Object : omc – Archive/Restore
Type : DP
Note : Archiving fault, observation, or trace data is not possible forthe current day.
date
Description : Date on which data to restore were recorded
Date format entry forms are detailed in NTP < 130 >.
Value range : [<date>]Object : omc – Restore
Type : DP
day intervention
Description : Type of action associated with an alarm criterion in thedaytime configuration
Value range : [noAlarm / critical / major / minor]Object : alarm criteria
Type : DP
Day to be purged V10
Description : Date on which the data to purge were recorded
Date format entry forms are detailed in NTP < 130 >.
Value range : [<date>]Object : omc – Data purge
Type : DP
Nortel Networks Confidential2–130 Parameters listed in alphabetical order
PE/DCL/DD/0124411–9001–124
Standard 13.04/EN March 2002 GSM/BSS V13
dDTIIntState
Description : Internal state of the DDTI board controlling the PCM link
Value range : [working / fault]
working The board is correctly configured.. . . . . . . . .
fault The board configuration was. . . . . . . . . . . . unsuccessful.
Object : pcmCircuit
Type : DD
Note : This parameter is only available for BSC 2G
delayBetweenRetrans Class 2 D1 V8
Description : Number of occurences of a paging sub-group that separatestwo transmissions of the same paging message.
The following inequality, that is not checked by the system,must be true (refer to these entries in the Dictionary):
retransDuration ≥ (delayBetweenRetrans + 1) x nbOfRepeat
Value range : [0 to 22]Object : bts
Default value : 0
Type : DP
Checks : [M]: The parent bsc object is unlocked and the btsobject is locked.
deltaUtc
Description : Gap between the current OMC–R agent time and the GMTreference. Enter a positive value [+m] when the OMC–Ragent is located east of the Greenwich meridian and a negativevalue [–m] when it is located west.
Value range : [–1440 to +1440] minute
The range of possible values allows to update the OMC–Rreference time within ± 24 hours.
Object : md
Type : DP
Remark : Setting this attribute does not change the time displayed in thesystem “Session informations” window which refers to theworkstation internal clock.
Parameters listed in alphabetical orderNortel Networks Confidential 2–131
BSS Parameter Dictionary
detectionFunction
Description : Associated function
Value range : [excessiveAnomalyRate / outOfRangeCounter]Object : mdWarning
Type : DP
directedRetry Class 3D2 V9
Description : Minimum signal strength level received by the mobiles to begranted access to the neighbor cell, used in processingdirected retry handovers in BTS mode
Value range : [less than –110, –110 to –109, ... , –49 to –48, morethan –48] dBm
Object : adjacentCellHandOver
Default value : >–48 dBm
Type : DP
Checks : [M]: The parent bsc object is unlocked.
directedRetryModeUsed Class 3 D3 V9
Description : Specify how directed retry handovers are processed in a celleither directly by the BSC (microcells only) or by queryingthe BTS first
Value range : [bsc / bts]Object : bts
Default value : bts
Type : DP
Checks : [C/M]: The BSC mode is authorized if the cell is amicrocell (cellType) and the adjacent cellumbrella Ref attribute is defined.
[M]: The parent bsc object is unlocked.
Note : The micro cell should be entirely covered by the macro cell inorder to use efficiently the bsc mode.
The use of the bts mode is recommended in a hot spot whenthese are several micro cells under the umbrella. The bts modeallows the use of micro cells to rescue the umbrella cell andalso avoids a saturation of the umbrella cell.
The bts mode is also recommended for all other cases.
Nortel Networks Confidential2–132 Parameters listed in alphabetical order
PE/DCL/DD/0124411–9001–124
Standard 13.04/EN March 2002 GSM/BSS V13
directedRetryPrio D4 V12
Description : Defines the number priority for directed retry handovers
Value range : [0 to 17]
Object : bts
Feature : General protection against ping–pong handovers(TF821 – V12)
Type : DP
directory
Description : Name of the directory to create on the OMC–R agent disks forstoring an EFT containing a BSS software version
The directory name identifies the type and version of the BSSsoftware to be later stored. Refer to the eft entry in theDictionary.
If the directory exists on the OMC–R agent disks, the user iswarned.
Value range : [BSxabvcdefgh (BSC software) / XXXabcdef (others)]
Object : md – Create EFT dir
Type : DP
distHreqt Class 3 D5
Description : Number of distance measurements, used to compute theweighted average MS-to-BTS distance in handoveralgorithms
Value range : [1 to 16]
Object : handOverControl
Default value : 4
Type : DP
Checks : [C/M]: distHreqt is equal to the number of weights indistWtsList (refer to the next entry).
[M]: The parent bsc object is unlocked.
Parameters listed in alphabetical orderNortel Networks Confidential 2–133
BSS Parameter Dictionary
distWtsList Class 3 D6
Description : List of no more than sixteen weights, used to compute theaverage MS-to-BTS distance from distHreqt measurements
The L1M function balances distHreqt raw measurements withthe weights defined in the distWtsList list. Each measurementis partnered with one weight in the list. Weight/measurementassociations are set in the order which the weights arerecorded. The latest received measurement is alwayspartnered with the first weight in the list.
Super-average = [∑ (measurementi x weighti)] / 100, i = 1 to distHreqt
Value range : [0 to 100] %Object : handOverControl
Default value : 40 30 20 10
Type : DP
Checks : [C/M]: The number of weights in the list is equal todistHreqt and their sum equals 100.
[M]: The parent bsc object is unlocked.
diversity Class 2
Description : Whether reception diversity is allowed in a cell
Value range : [enabled / disabled]Object : bts
Default value : enabled
Type : DP
Checks : [M]: The parent bsc object is unlocked and the btsobject is locked.
dLPwrValue Class 3 V12
Description : Power reduction applied to PDCH compared to BCCH
Value range : [0 to 3]Object : transceiver
Default value : 0
Feature : GPRS (SV407 – V12)
Type : DP
Checks : [M]: The parent bsc object is unlocked.
Nortel Networks Confidential2–134 Parameters listed in alphabetical order
PE/DCL/DD/0124411–9001–124
Standard 13.04/EN March 2002 GSM/BSS V13
drxTimerMax Class 3 V12
Description : Maximum value allowed for mobile stations to requestnon–DRX mode after packet transfer mode
Value range : [0 (0s), 1 (1s), 2 (2s), 3 (4s), 4 (8s), 5 (16s), 6 (32s), 7 (64s)]
The deactivation value for the sub–feature TF1220.3 transfernon DRX mode is 0.
Object : transceiver
Default value : 0 s
Feature : GPRS (SV407 – V12, and TF1220 V12.4c)
Type : DP
Checks : [M]: The parent bsc object is unlocked.
dtxMode Class 3 D7
Description : MS control of the discontinuous transmission mechanism in acell
Discontinuous transmission is designed to lessen MS batteryconsumption and diminish interference by breaking off thetransmission when no data or speech are being transmitted.
Value range : [msMayUseDtx / msShallUseDtx / msShallNotUseDtx]
Object : bts
Default value : msMayUseDtx
Type : DP
Checks : [M]: The parent bsc object is unlocked.
Remark : The cellDtxDownlink attribute allows users to control the useof discontinuous transmission on the downlink. Refer to thisentry in the Dictionary.
Parameters listed in alphabetical orderNortel Networks Confidential 2–135
BSS Parameter Dictionary
duplex link state V10
Description : Active/passive chain link state
Value range : [working, fault]Object : bsc
Type : DD
duration
Description : Time delay before running the next command
The Sleep command can be inserted in a command file as manytimes as necessary.
Value range : [1 to 3600] seconds
Object : commandFile – Sleep command
Type : DP
dwAckTime Class3 (packetAckTime) V12
Description : Time defining the period for the acknowledgments fordownlink transfers
Value range : [1 to 64] steps 100 ms for downlink transfer (step size is100 msec)
Object : transceiver
Feature : GPRS (SV407 – V12 and TF1220 – V12.4c)
Type : DP
Checks : [M]: The parent bsc object is unlocked.
Nortel Networks Confidential2–136 Parameters listed in alphabetical order
PE/DCL/DD/0124411–9001–124
Standard 13.04/EN March 2002 GSM/BSS V13
E
early classmark sending Class 3 E1 V10
Description : Whether Early classmark sending procedure initiated by amultiband MS is allowed.
The information is broadcast to the mobiles at regular intervalson the cell BCCH (SYQ INFO 3).
Value range : [Not Allowed, Allowed]Object : bts
Default value : Not Allowed
Type : DP
Checks : [M] : The parent bsc object is unlocked
efd
Description : Identifier of an efd object defined with regard to the md object
Seven efd objects are automatically created for the md object,an “efdAlarm” type object, an “efdConfiguration” type object,an “efdObs” type object, an “efdSpecificNotif” type object, an“efdStateChange” type object, an “efdTrace” type object, andan “efdClass” type object. Refer to the efdType entry.
The administrativeState attribute of an efd object sets theconditions for forwarding the associated messages to theOMC–R manager.
Value range : [0 to 2147483646]Object : efd
Type : Id
Note : An efd object should be created in unlocked state.
Parameters listed in alphabetical orderNortel Networks Confidential 2–137
BSS Parameter Dictionary
efdType
Description : Type of the messages processed by the efd object
Value range : [efdAlarm / efdConfiguration / efdObs / efdSpecificNotif /efdStateChange / efdTrace / efdClass]
An “efdAlarm” type object tallies alarm notifications issuedby the OMC–R agent.
An “efdConfiguration” type object tallies object create and setmessages issued by the users and attribute value changemessages issued by the BSC.
An “efdObs” type object tallies observation messagescollected by the OMC–R agent.
An “efdSpecificNotif” type object allows users to define setsof specific notification messages to process such asendOfArchival, endOfRestore, beginningOfBdeArchival,downloadEnd, endOfBdeArchival, endOfBdaBuiding,endOfMarkingConsultation, or endOfSoftwareChange.
An “efdStateChange” type object tallies object state changenotifications.
An “efdTrace” type object tallies trace messages collected bythe OMC–R agent.
An “efdClass” type object tallies efd class objects creation anddeletion messages. Thus these notifications enable to identifythe external managers which are being connected to theMD–R.
Object : efd
Type : DP
Restrictions : [M]: This attribute cannot be modified.
Nortel Networks Confidential2–138 Parameters listed in alphabetical order
PE/DCL/DD/0124411–9001–124
Standard 13.04/EN March 2002 GSM/BSS V13
eft
Description : Name of an EFT (set of transferable files) containing a BSSsoftware version
The name of the EFT identifies the type and version of the BSSsoftware it contains. Refer to the eft entry related to thesoftware object in the Dictionary.
The Create EFT command validates EFT downloading on theOMC–R agent disks, in the matching directory created for thatpurpose. Refer to the directory entry in the Dictionary.
The software can then be dowloaded to the concerned BSCdisk with a Download command on the software object relatedto an object of the same type. Refer to the eft entry related tothe software object in the Dictionary.
Value range : [BSxabvcdefgh (BSC software) / XXXabcdef (others)]
Object : md – Create EFT / Delete EFT
Type : DP
Checks : [C]: If mergeEFT is “False”, the EFT does not exist inthe matching directory on the OMC–R agentdisks.
[D]: The EFT exists in the matching directory on theOMC–R agent disks and no software object refersto the software version contained in the EFT.
eft
Description : Name of an EFT (set of transferable files) containing a BSSsoftware version
The name of the EFT identifies the type and version of the BSSsoftware it contains. Refer to the eft entry related to thesoftware object in the Dictionary.
This command copies the EFT stored on the OMC–R managerdisks by a Read Gigatape command to the matching directoryon the OMC–R agent disks.
Value range : [BSxabvcdefgh (BSC software) / XXXabcdef (others)]
Object : omc – Download EFT to md
Type : DP
Checks : [A]: The EFT exists on the OMC–R manager disks.
Parameters listed in alphabetical orderNortel Networks Confidential 2–139
BSS Parameter Dictionary
eft
Description : Name of the EFT to download to the BSC disk. It must matchthe type of the parent object related to the software object.
The name of the EFT identifies the type and version of the BSSsoftware to donwload, as follows:
BSC software: Format = “BSxabvcdefgh”
Field Meaning Value
BSx Type of software x = [1 .. 3]
ab Version number [09 .. 32]
v Reserved
cd Sub-version number [01 .. 99]
ef Edition number [01 .. 99]
gh Revision factor [01 .. 99]
BTS and TCU software: Format = “XXXabcdef”
Field Meaning Value
XXX Type of software BCF : BCF / BC1 / BC2 / SBC / PICTRX : TRX / DRX / TR1 / PICTCB : TCB/TC1/TC2
ab Version number [08 .. 32]
c Sub-versionnumber
BCF : [A .. H]TRX : [A .. H]TCB : [A .. H]
Nortel Networks Confidential2–140 Parameters listed in alphabetical order
PE/DCL/DD/0124411–9001–124
Standard 13.04/EN March 2002 GSM/BSS V13
Field ValueMeaning
d Edition number BCF : [1 .. 8]TRX : [1 .. 8]TCB : [1 .. 8]
ef Revision factor BCF : [01 .. 32]TRX : [01 .. 32]TCB : [01 .. 64]
If downloading is successful, the system sets the value of thesWVersionNew attribute of the software object to the versionof the new software downloaded to the BSC disk.
Value range : [BSxabvcdefgh (BSC software) / XXXabcdef (others)]
Object : software – Download
Type : DP
Checks : [A]: The first three letters of the EFT name match thetype of the managed object related to the softwareobject. For a software-bsc object, themanufacturing release corresponds to thebscType attribute of the related bsc object.
[A]: Downloading of the EFT on the OMC–R agentdisks is validated. Refer to the eft entry related tothe md or omc object in the Dictionary.
[A]: No directory creation command is in-progress forthe EFT. Refer to the directory entry in theDictionary.
[A]: The parent bsc object is unlocked.
emergencyCallPriority Class 3 E2
Description : Index in the table allocPriorityTable for a TCH allocationrequest whose cause is “emergency call”
This priority is used in primo-allocations or when an SDDCHcannot be allocated for overload reasons.
Value range : [0 to 17]
Object : bts
Default value : 17
Type : DP
Checks : [M]: The parent bsc object is unlocked.
Parameters listed in alphabetical orderNortel Networks Confidential 2–141
BSS Parameter Dictionary
eMLPPThreshold Class 3 E3 V12
Description : Defines the minimum value that the eMLPP Precedence of anincoming call must have to be taken into account by the BSSwith inband signalling (paging and vbs/vgcs assignmentrequest)
Value range : [none / priority 4 / priority 3 / priority 2 / priority 1 / priority 0/ priority B / priority A]
Object : signallingPoint
Default value : none
Type : DP
Feature : ASCI (GSM–R V12)
Checks : [M] : The parent bsc object is unlocked.
encrypAlgoAsscomp Class 1 V8
Description : Whether the “Chosen encryption algorithm” element is usedin the ASSIGN COMPLETE messages (Phase II compliance)
Value range : [true / false]
Object : signallingPoint
Default value : False
Type : DP
Checks : [M]: The parent bsc object is locked.
encrypAlgoCiphModComp Class 1 V8
Description : Whether the “Chosen encryption algorithm” element is usedin the CIPHER MODE COMPLETE messages (Phase IIcompliance)
Value range : [true / false]
Object : signallingPoint
Default value : False
Type : DP
Checks : [M]: The parent bsc object is locked.
Nortel Networks Confidential2–142 Parameters listed in alphabetical order
PE/DCL/DD/0124411–9001–124
Standard 13.04/EN March 2002 GSM/BSS V13
encrypAlgoHoperf Class 1 V8
Description : Whether the “Chosen encryption algorithm” element is usedin the HANDOVER PERFORMED messages (Phase IIcompliance)
Value range : [true / false]
Object : signallingPoint
Default value : False
Type : DP
Checks : [M]: The parent bsc object is locked.
encrypAlgoHoreq Class 1 V8
Description : Whether the “Chosen encryption algorithm” element is usedin the HANDOVER REQUEST ACKNOWLEDGEmessages (Phase II compliance)
Value range : [true / false]
Object : signallingPoint
Default value : False
Type : DP
Checks : [M]: The parent bsc object is locked.
encryptionAlgorSupported Class 1
Description : Type of ciphering capability supported by the BTSs of a BSS.When no ciphering capability is supported, users’ calls are notcrypted.
Value range : [none / gsmEncryptionV1 (A5.1) / gsmEncryptionV2 (A5.2)]
Object : bsc
Default value : gsmEncryptionV1
Type : DP
Checks : [C/M]: Only one type of ciphering capability is defined.
[M]: The bsc object is locked.
Parameters listed in alphabetical orderNortel Networks Confidential 2–143
BSS Parameter Dictionary
End date
Description : To select call monitoring data recorded on that date and before.It is on or after Beginning date.
Do not fill in if information produced to the end should bedisplayed.
Value range : [mm/dd/yyyy hh:mm:ss]Object : Call monitoring – Display (SDO)
Type : DP
Checks : [A]: End date is on or after Beginning date.
end date
Description : Date on which data were last recorded in the log (default is thecurrent date). It is on or after start date.
Date format entry forms are detailed in NTP < 130 >.
Do not fill in if this criterion is not to be selected.
Value range : [<date>]
Object : System session log – Filter
Type : DP
Checks : [A]: end date is on or after start date.
End of probative Phase Type V11
Description : Whether the user validate or cancel the software change afternew EFT activation
See to NTP < 128 >.
Value range : [validate software change / cancel software change]Object : bsc – End of probative phase
Type : DP
Note : This parameter only applies to BSC Upgrades with prototypeBDA change (BSC Version Upgrade and BSC EditionUpgrade).
Nortel Networks Confidential2–144 Parameters listed in alphabetical order
PE/DCL/DD/0124411–9001–124
Standard 13.04/EN March 2002 GSM/BSS V13
end time
Description : Absolute time of final job run if the job is to be periodicallyrun over a limited period of time
Absolute time format entry forms are detailed in NTP < 130 >.
If date matches the date in start time, fill in time with a valueafter start time.
Value range : [<date>,<time>]
Object : job
Condition : To define when a job periodicity is defined and only if the joblife is limited (user’s choice).
Type : DP
Checks : [A]: end time is after start time.
end time
Description : End of system log reading on the requested end date (defaultis 24:00)
Absolute time format entry forms are detailed in NTP < 130 >.
Do not fill in if this criterion is not to be selected.
Value range : [<time>]
Object : System session log – Filter
Type : DP
Checks : [A]: If end date and start date are identical, end timeis after start time.
endAlarmFilter
Description : Condition for ceasing the alarm when no counter is involved
The fields that can be combined in the logical expression aredescribed under the startAlarmFilter entry in the Dictionary.
Value range : [logical expression]
Object : alarm criteria
Condition : To define if no counter is associated with the criterion.
Type : DP
Parameters listed in alphabetical orderNortel Networks Confidential 2–145
BSS Parameter Dictionary
endAlarmThreshold
Description : Minimum counting value in the reference period, below whichan end-of-alarm message is sent if the correspondingstart–of–alarm message was sent first. The value must bechecked by users.
This attribute defines a minimum value read at the end of thedefined refPeriod. It must be lower thanstartAlarmThreshold.
Threshold changes are effective when the OMC–R is restarted.
Value range : [0.00 to 2147483646]Object : mdWarning if detectionFunction = “excessiveAnomalyRate”
Type : DP
endAlarmThreshold
Description : Minimum (thresholdLow) / maximum (thresholdHigh)counting value in the reference period, above/below which anend of “lower threshold/upper threshold” alarm message issent if the corresponding start-of-alarm message was sentfirst. The value must be checked by users.
If thesholdType is “thresholdLow”, it defines a minimumvalue for a one minute reference period (or the countercollecting period for PCM unavailability counters), abovewhich the end of “lower threshold” alarm message is sent. Itmust be greater than startAlarmThreshold “low”.
If thesholdType is “thresholdHigh”, it defines a maximumvalue for a one minute reference period (or the countercollecting period for PCM unavailability counters), belowwhich the end of “upper threshold” alarm message is sent. Itmust be lower than startAlarmThreshold “high”.
Threshold changes are effective when the OMC–R is restarted.
Value range : [0.00 to 2147483646]Object : mdWarning if detectionFunction = “outOfRangeCounter”
Type : DP
Remark :
The threshold limits depend on the associated counter.
The BSS counter threshold crossing detection mechanismis described in NTP < 07 >.
Nortel Networks Confidential2–146 Parameters listed in alphabetical order
PE/DCL/DD/0124411–9001–124
Standard 13.04/EN March 2002 GSM/BSS V13
endCounterThreshold
Description : Maximum counting threshold when a counter is involved
Value range : [0 to 100]
Object : alarm criteria
Condition : To define if a counter is associated with the criterion.
Type : DP
endSearchTime
Description : Absolute time to end searching for the observation reports tocumulate. It is six hours before beginSearchTime at the most.
Observation data accumulating ends with the informationcontained in the first observation message collected in therequested period of time. Refer to the partneredbeginSearchTime entry in the Dictionary.
Absolute time format entry forms are detailed in NTP < 130 >.
Value range : [<date>,<time>]
Object : Display custom report
Type : DP
Checks : [A]: endSearchTime is before beginSearchTime.
[A]: The defined period is less than or equal to sixhours.
endSearchTime
Description : Absolute time to end searching for the observation report toedit (default is one hour before beginSearchTime)
The report displays the information contained in the lastobservation message generated in the requested period of time.Refer to the partnered beginSearchTime entry in theDictionary.
Absolute time format entry forms are detailed in NTP < 130 >.
Value range : [<date>,<time>]
Object : Display raw report
Type : DP
Checks : [A]: endSearchTime is before beginSearchTime.
Parameters listed in alphabetical orderNortel Networks Confidential 2–147
BSS Parameter Dictionary
endSearchTime
Description : Absolute time to end searching for the avalaible permanentobservations to list (default is twelve days beforebeginSearchTime)
The last listed report is the first observation report generatedin the requested period of time. Refer to the partneredbeginSearchTime entry in the Dictionary.
Absolute time format entry forms are detailed in NTP < 130 >.
Value range : [<date>,<time>]Object : List available permanent observations messages
Type : DP
Checks : [A]: endSearchTime is before beginSearchTime.
endSearchTime
Description : Absolute time to end searching for the avalaible permanentobservations to list (default is twelve days beforebeginSearchTime)
The last listed report is the first observation report generatedin the requested period of time. Refer to the partneredbeginSearchTime entry in the Dictionary.
Absolute time format entry forms are detailed in NTP < 130 >.
Value range : [<date>,<time>]Object : List available temporary observations messages
Type : DP
Checks : [A]: endSearchTime is before beginSearchTime.
endSearchTime
Description : Absolute time to end searching for the observation messagesto list (default is twelve days before beginSearchTime)
The last listed message is the first observation messagegenerated in the requested period of time. Refer to thepartnered beginSearchTime entry in the Dictionary.
Absolute time format entry forms are detailed in NTP < 130 >.
Value range : [<date>,<time>]Object : List observation messages
Type : DP
Checks : [A]: endSearchTime is before beginSearchTime.
Nortel Networks Confidential2–148 Parameters listed in alphabetical order
PE/DCL/DD/0124411–9001–124
Standard 13.04/EN March 2002 GSM/BSS V13
endSessionCriteriaType
Description : Definition of the criterion that will end a call path tracingsession
Value range : [duration / number (of calls) / oam (locking the callPathTraceobject)]
duration endSessionCriteriaDuration =. . . . . . . . . [5 to 1080] minutes
number endSessionCriteriaNbCall =. . . . . . . . . . [1 to 2500]
oam administrativeState = “locked”. . . . . . . . . . . .
Only one criterion is defined. When it is true, the callfollow–up session is stopped in the BSS. Refer to theusageState entry related to this object in the Dictionary.
Object : callPathTrace
Type : DP
Checks : [M] : The callPathTrace object is locked.
Note : The session is automatically restarted by unlocking the object,regardless of the end-of-session criterion.
enhancedTRAUFrameIndication E4 V12
Description : Whether the BTS uses the Enhanced TRAU Frame (EFT =executable Software) for TCU
Value range : [notAvailable / available / active]
Object : bsc
Type : DI
Feature : PCM error correction (FM660 – V12)
Notes : This attribute is set to “available” only if thetranscoderBoards of all the related TCUs are of TCB2board type and their software are V12.
This attribute is set to “active” only if thepcmErrorCorrection attribute of one bts object related tothe BSC is set to “1”.
Only BTSs equipped with non mixed DCU4 or DRXtransceiver architecture can support the Enhanced TRAUFrame.
Parameters listed in alphabetical orderNortel Networks Confidential 2–149
BSS Parameter Dictionary
equipment processor number
Description : To select a processor or an equipment in the preselected type
Consult the corresponding notification messages (“Equipmentnumber” field).
Do not fill in if neither bsc equipment name nor btsequipment name is defined or if this criterion is not to beselected.
Value range : [0 to 200]
Object : Alarm and notification logs – Filter
Type : DP
error concealment unit Class 2 V11
Description : Whether the Error Concealment Unit (ECU) is used. The ECUprovides a voice quality improvement on the uplink in badradio propagation conditions.
Value range : [not used, used]
Object : bts
Default value : used
Type : DP
Checks : [M] : The parent bsc object is unlocked and the btsobject is locked
errorCorrectionMethod Class 3
Description : Type of correction method used on the A interface
Value range : [basicRetr (only value accepted) / prevCyclRetr]
Object : signallingLinkSet
Default value : basicRetr
Type : DP
Checks : [C/M]: The only accepted value is “basicRetr”.
[M]: The parent bsc object is locked.
Remark : Since the system accepts only one value for this attribute,changing it has no meaning.
Nortel Networks Confidential2–150 Parameters listed in alphabetical order
PE/DCL/DD/0124411–9001–124
Standard 13.04/EN March 2002 GSM/BSS V13
exclusive interval of codano V12
Description : To select messages according to their fault number.
The filter can contain one (or several) intervals defining thefault numbers not to be retrieved. For example, interval 5~8enables to retrieve ALL the fault numbers except faultnumbers 5, 6, 7, and 8.
Value range : [0 to 65535 – 0 to 65535]
Object : Alarm and notification logs – Filter
Type : DP
exclusive list of codano V12
Description : To select messages that do not contain one (or several) givenfault number(s).
Value range : [0 to 65535]
Object : Alarm and notification logs – Filter
Type : DP
executableSoftwareId V13
Description : Identifier of a ‘executableSoftware’ object class. Thisidentifier is allocated by the MD–R at object creation, if notgiven by the Manager. This attribute cannot be modified.
Value range : [0 to 255]
Object : executableSoftware
Type : DP
executableSoftwareName V13
Description : Name of a software version. This attribute is allocated by theMD–R at object creation, if not given by the Manager. Thisattribute cannot be modified.
Value range : [0 to 12] String
Object : executableSoftware
Type : DP
Parameters listed in alphabetical orderNortel Networks Confidential 2–151
BSS Parameter Dictionary
extCommsInt
Description : State of the X.25 links set up from the BSC chain X.25 ports[working / fault]. Each port is identified with regard to themother SICX board
working The X.25 link is correctly initialized.. . . . . . . . .
fault An error was detected (SLS board. . . . . . . . . . . . faulty, etc.).
Value range : [0 to 65535]Object : bsc – Display chain information
Type : DD
Note : This parameter is only available for BSC 2G
extended cell Class 2 E5 V9
Description : Whether the cell is extended (up to 120 km large) or not
The cell working mode governs the upper limit of thefollowing attribute values (refer to theses entries in theDictionary):
callClearing, msRangeMax, andrndAccTimAdvThreshold attributes of the bts object
concentAlgoExtMsRange andconcentAlgoIntMsRange attributes of the associatedhandOverControl object if the bts object describes aconcentric cell
Value range : [true (extended) / false (normal)]Object : bts
Default value : false
Type : DP
Checks : [M]: If the attribute is changed to “true” and a CBCHis defined for the cell, this channel is carried by aradio time slot with an even identifier number.Refer to the channelType entry in the Dictionary.
[M]: The parent bsc object is unlocked and the btsobject is locked.
Note : In that mode, the radio time slots with odd identifier numbersare unknown to the BSC and the diversity functionality is notavailable in the cells.
Nortel Networks Confidential2–152 Parameters listed in alphabetical order
PE/DCL/DD/0124411–9001–124
Standard 13.04/EN March 2002 GSM/BSS V13
external alarm configuration Class 2 V9
Description : Configuration of the external alarm loops controlled by a BTS.Alarm loop “n” is monitored (not monitored) when the nth bitis set to 1 (0) in the binary field. The alarm mask isimmediately displayed in the hexadecimal field just below.The alarm mask can be set using the hexadecimal field as wellas the binary field.
The number of connectors per alarm board depends on the typeof the alarm boards installed in the BTS.
BTS Type of board Number of protectedexternal alarms
per cabinet
S2000 ALATO 4
S2000H/L SBCF 6
S4000 Indoor ALAT 4
S4000 Outdoor ALATO 4
S4000 Smart ALATO 4
S8000 ALCO 16
The correspondence between those 48 bits and the externalalarms of each site directly depends on three factors: the typeof BTS, the number of cabinets, and the convention fornumbering those cabinets.
S4000: 24 external alarms max., 6 cabinets – 4 externalsalarms per cabinet. Therefore 4 bitsby cabinets placed on the mask on thesame order of the numbering of thecabinets.Exemple: to unmask all the externalalarms of S4000 Indoor S22 thealarm mask would be:
“1111 0000 1111 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000”
Base cabinet1st cabinet of the 1st sector
Extension cabinet1st cabinet of 2nd sector
Extension cabinet2nd cabinet of 1er sector
Parameters listed in alphabetical orderNortel Networks Confidential 2–153
BSS Parameter Dictionary
S8000: 48 external alarms max., up to 3 cabinets in thefuture – 16 alarms per cabinet (16 bits percabinet).
S2000H/L: 18 external alarms max., up to 3 cabinets in thefuture – 6 alarms per cabinet (6 bits percabinet).
Value range : [48-bit register]Object : btsSiteManager
Default value : 48 bits equal to “0”
Type : DP
Checks : [M] : The parent bsc object is unlocked and thebtsSiteManager object is locked
external battery cabinet Class 2 V9
Description : Presence or absence of the optional equipment “ancillarybattery cabinet” in S8000 Outdoor
Value range : [Present / Absent]
Object : btsSiteManager
Type : DP
Checks : [M] : The parent bsc object is unlocked and thebtsSiteManager object is locked
externalTime
Description : Current OMC–R agent date and time
Absolute time format entry forms are detailed in NTP < 130 >.
Value range : [<date>,<time>]
Object : md
Type : DP
Remark : Setting this attribute does not change the time displayed in thesystem “Session informations” window which refers to theworkstation internal clock.
Nortel Networks Confidential2–154 Parameters listed in alphabetical order
PE/DCL/DD/0124411–9001–124
Standard 13.04/EN March 2002 GSM/BSS V13
F
Family V11
Description : Family of counters in which are chosen the counters to beobserved
The list of the available families depends on the Observedobject class and the observation type selected in the reporttemplate definition of the observation. See Tables hereafter.
Value range : [A interface / ABIS interface / Abis interface / BSC / BSCBSCB / BSC CPUM / BSC SICD / BSC TSCB / CCCHmonitoring / Channel mode / CPUE / Dedicated channelassignment / Directed retry / Establishment / Globalhandovers / Handovers / Inter–bss handovers / Intra–cellhandovers / Layer One Management / OMC interface /Releases of communications / SDCCH allocations / SMS /synthetic / TCH allocations]
Object : report template
Type : DP
Checks : [M] : Only one family type of counters can be selectedfor each observation report.
Observed object: bsc
Observation real time (ORT) A interfaceBSCsynthetic
Observation fast statistic(OFS)
A interfaceOMC interfaceReleases of communicationsChannel modeTCH allocationsBSCBSC SICDCPUEBSC CPUMABIS interfaceBSC BSCBBSC TSCBsynthetic
Parameters listed in alphabetical orderNortel Networks Confidential 2–155
BSS Parameter Dictionary
Observed object: bts
Observation real time (ORT) SDCCH allocationsTCH allocationsEstablishmentGlobal handovers
Observation fast statistic(OFS)
SDCCH allocationsTCH allocationsChannel modeIntra–bss handoversInter–bss handoversDedicated channel assign-mentGlobal handoversEstablishmentReleases of communicationsLayer One ManagementInterferencesDirected retrySMSAbis interfaceCCCH monitoringsynthetic
Observed object : transceiverZone
Observation real time (ORT) SDCCH allocationsTCH allocations
Observation fast statistic(OFS)
SDCCH allocationsTCH allocationsIntra–cell handovers
faultNumber
Description : To select messages with a given fault number
This parameter is a component of the specific problems filter.Refer to this entry in the Dictionary.
Value range : [0 to 40000]
Object : Alarm and notification logs – Filter
Type : DP
Nortel Networks Confidential2–156 Parameters listed in alphabetical order
PE/DCL/DD/0124411–9001–124
Standard 13.04/EN March 2002 GSM/BSS V13
fhsRef Class 2 F1
Description : Identifier of the frequencyHoppingSystem object that definesthe frequency hopping management parameters for the radiotime slot
Setting this attribute and the maio attribute allows the time slotto obey frequency hopping laws.
Value range : [0 to 63]
Object : channel
Condition : To define if the time slot hops in frequencies.
Type : DP
Checks : [C/M]: This attribute is undefined if frequency hopping isnot allowed for the parent bts object(btsIsHopping = “no hopping”) or thechannelType of the channel object is“mainBCCH”, “mainBCCHCombined”, or“bcchSdcch4CBCH”.
[C/M]: If the attribute is defined, the following ischecked:
• The maio attribute is also defined.
• The referenced frequencyHoppingSystem object iscreated for the parent bts object.
• Each frequency occurs once in the mobileAllocationlist and is allotted in the cellAllocation list of the parentbts object.
• The number of frequencies in the mobileAllocation listis greater than the maio attribute value.
• Concentric cell: The frequencies in themobileAllocation list are not used in the zone to whichthe parent transceiver object does not belong.
[M]: The parent bsc object is unlocked and the parentbts object is locked.
Parameters listed in alphabetical orderNortel Networks Confidential 2–157
BSS Parameter Dictionary
forced handover algo Class 3 F2 V9
Description : Minimum signal strength level received by the mobiles to begranted access to a neighbor cell in case of forced handover
Value range : [less than –110, –110 to –109, ..., –49 to –48, morethan –48] dBm
Object : handOverControl
Default value : less than –110
Type : DP
Checks : [M]: The parent bsc object is unlocked.
frequencyHoppingSystem
Description : Identifier of a frequencyHoppingSystem object that definesfrequency hopping management parameters for radio timeslots that obey frequency hopping laws. A bts object mayreference up to sixty-four objects of this type.
Refer to the hoppingSequenceNumber andmobileAllocation entries in the Dictionary.
Value range : [0 to 2147483646]Object : frequencyHoppingSystem
Type : Id
Checks : [C]: The associated bts object is created and thefrequencyHoppingSystem object is not createdfor that object.
[C]: The number of frequencyHoppingSystem objectscreated for a bts object is limited to sixty-four.
[C/D]: If the application database of the related BSC isbuilt, the parent bsc object is unlocked.
[M]: The parent bsc object is unlocked and theassociated bts object is locked.
[M/D]: The frequencyHoppingSystem object is created.
[D]: If the application database of the related BSC isnot built, it has been reset by an Off line reset BDAcommand.
[D]: No channel object dependent on the bts objectrefers to the frequencyHoppingSystem object(fhsRef attribute).
Nortel Networks Confidential2–158 Parameters listed in alphabetical order
PE/DCL/DD/0124411–9001–124
Standard 13.04/EN March 2002 GSM/BSS V13
G
geographical coordinates V11
Description : Definition of the geographical coordinates of the equipment inthe network
These coordinates are defined by a latitude and a longitude,each expressed by four fields.
Value range : Latitude is expressed by the four following fields:
Deg Lat [0 to 90] degrees. . . . . . . . .
Min Lat [0 to 59] minutes. . . . . . . . .
Hundrethof sec Lat [0 to 5999] hundredth second. . . . . . .
Direction Lat [North / South]. . . .
Longitude is expressed by the four following fields:
Deg Lon [0 to 180] degrees. . . . . . . . .
Min Lon [0 to 59] minutes. . . . . . . .
Hundrethof sec Lon [0 to 5999] hundredth second. . . . . . .
Direction Lon [East / West]. . . . Object : bsc
btsSiteManagermdtranscoder
Type : DI
geographical coordinates V12
Description : Definition of the geographical coordinates of the pcuSNequipment in the network
These coordinates are defined by a latitude and a longitude,each expressed by four fields.
Value range : Latitude is expressed by the four following fields:
Deg Lat [0 to 90] degrees. . . . . . . . .
Min Lat [0 to 59] minutes. . . . . . . . .
Hundreth ofsec Lat [0 to 5999] hundredth second. . . . . . . . .
Direction Lat [North / South]. . . .
Parameters listed in alphabetical orderNortel Networks Confidential 2–159
BSS Parameter Dictionary
Longitude is expressed by the four following fields:
Deg Lon [0 to 180] degrees. . . . . . . . .
Min Lon [0 to 59] minutes. . . . . . . .
Hundreth ofsec Lon [0 to 5999] hundredth second. . . . . . . . .
Direction Lon [East / West]. . . .
Object : pcusn
Feature : GPRS (SV407 – V12)
Type : DI
gprsAvgParam Class 3 V12
Description : This parameter is composed of the following attributes:
nAvgI
nAvgT
nAvgW
Refer to these entries in the NTP < 124 >.
gprsBtsExtendedConf V12
Description : This parameter is composed of the following attributes:
minNbrGprsTs
gprsPreemption
gprsPreemptionProtection
T3172
N3103
maxDwAssign
maxUpTbfP1P2Threshold
maxDnTbfP1P2Threshold
maxUpTbfPerTs
maxDnTbfPerTs
longTbfSizeThreshold
longTbfLossThroughput
nbrFreeTchBeforeAnticipation
Nortel Networks Confidential2–160 Parameters listed in alphabetical order
PE/DCL/DD/0124411–9001–124
Standard 13.04/EN March 2002 GSM/BSS V13
nbrFreeTchToEndAnticipation
btsSensitivityInnerZone
maxBsTransmitPowerInnerZone
reserved3
reserved4
reserved5
Refer to these entries in the NTP < 124 >.
gprsBtsLockExtendedConf V12
Description : This parameter is composed of the following attributes:
radioAllocator
msCapWeightActive
speechOnHoppingTs
Refer to these entries in the NTP < 124 >.
gprsCellActivation Class 3 V12
Description : Flag used to activate the GPRS at cell level
Value range : [disabled / enabled]
Object : bts
Feature : GPRS (SV407 – V12)
Default value : disabled
Type : DP
Checks : [M]: The parent bsc object is unlocked.
gprsPcuCrossConnectList V12
Description : This parameter is composed of the following attributes:
pcmNbr
nbrTch
Refer to these entries in this Dictionary.
Parameters listed in alphabetical orderNortel Networks Confidential 2–161
BSS Parameter Dictionary
gprsPcuLockExtendedConf Class 2 V12
Description : This parameter is composed of the following attributes:
reserved1
reserved2
reserved3
reserved4
reserved5
Refer to these entries in this Dictionary..
gprsPermittedAccess Class 3 V12
Description : It defines the Routing Area Color (3–bit length) of the cell. Ifthe MS receives different values of the Routing Area Colorfield in two different cells, it shall interpret the cell reselectioninformation as if the two cells belonged to different RA.
Value range : [0 to 7]Object : bts
Default value : 0
Feature : GPRS (SV407 – V12)
Type : DP
Checks : [M]: The parent bsc object is unlocked.
gprsPreemption Class 3 (gprsBtsExtendedConf) V12
Description : Set to yes, it allows the PCU to refuse GSM preemption overshared GSM/GPRS TS if GPRS resources are not sufficientto ensure the minimum bandwidth for each MS.
In the case of lack of GSM radio TS, the BSC has to allocateone shared GSM/GPRS radio TS to GSM and a preemptionprocedure is started. When one shared radio TS temporarilyallocated to GSM is released (end of GSM allocation due toend of call or handover), then a reallocation procedure isstarted to increase the GPRS capacity.
Value range : [yes / no]Object : bts
Feature : GPRS (TF1121 – V12)
Type : DP
Default value : yes
Checks : [M]: The parent bsc object is unlocked.
Nortel Networks Confidential2–162 Parameters listed in alphabetical order
PE/DCL/DD/0124411–9001–124
Standard 13.04/EN March 2002 GSM/BSS V13
gprsPreemptionProtection Class 3 (gprsBtsExtendedConf) V12
Description : Protection timer used by the BSC in order to reduce the loadin case of PCU TDMA TS Status Nack message receptionduring a preemption procedure. This message is sent by thePCU.
Value range : [1 to 60] second(s)Object : bts
Feature : GPRS (TF1121 – V12)
Default value : 10
Type : DP
Checks : [M]: The parent bsc object is unlocked.
Comments : None
gprsPriority Class 2 (gprsTranscvLockExtendedConf) V12
Description : Priorities that can be affected to the TDMA
Priority affected to the TDMA when allocating packetressources.
Value range : [p1 or p2 (hight GPRS priority)]Object : transceiver
Default value : p1
Feature : GPRS (TF1121 – V12)
Type : DP
Checks : [M]: The parent bsc object is unlocked and thetransceiver object is locked.
gprsTimerWaitPUAM Class 3 V12
Description : Waiting timer for the reception of the uplink assignment aftersending a PACKET RESOURCE REQUEST message
This timer is used on the MS side to define when to stopwaiting for Packet Uplink Assignment Message after sendingof a PACKET RESOURCE REQUEST message
Value range : [500ms, 1s, 2s, 4s]Object : bts
Default value : 0.5 s
Feature : GPRS (SV407 – V12)
Type : DP
Checks : [M]: The parent bsc object is unlocked.
Parameters listed in alphabetical orderNortel Networks Confidential 2–163
BSS Parameter Dictionary
gprsTimerWaitRLC Class 3 V12
Description : Waiting timer for release of the TBF after reception of the finalblock
This timer is used on the MS side to define when the MS hasreceived all the RLC data blocks. When the timer expires theMS releases the resources associated with the TBF and beginsto monitor its paging.
Value range : [500ms , 1s, 2s, 4s]
Object : bts
Default value : 0 s
Feature : GPRS (SV407 – V12)
Type : DP
Checks : [M]: The parent bsc object is unlocked.
gprsTranscvLockBtsExtendedConf Class 2 V12
Description : This parameter is composed of the following attributes:
gprsPriority
maxNbrPDAAssig
N3105max
maxNbrRLCEmptyBlock
maxNbrPUDWithoutVChange
reserved1
reserved2
reserved3
reserved4
reserved5
Refer to these entries in this Dictionary.
Nortel Networks Confidential2–164 Parameters listed in alphabetical order
PE/DCL/DD/0124411–9001–124
Standard 13.04/EN March 2002 GSM/BSS V13
H
HandOver from signalling channel Class 3 H1
Description : Authorization to perform intercell handovers on signallingchannels (SDCCH or TCH in signalling mode)
Value range : [enabled / disabled]
Object : handOverControl
Default value : disabled
Type : DP
Remark : The attribute was named TCH and sDCCHHandOver on theV8 OMC–R MMI.
handOverControl
Description : Identifier of a handOverControl object that defines handovermanagement parameters in a cell. A bts object may referenceone and only one object of this type.
Value range : [0 to 2147483646]
Object : handOverControl
Type : Id
Checks : [C]: The associated bts object is created and thehandOverControl object is not created for thatobject.
[M]: The parent bsc object is unlocked. If class 2attributes are modified, the associated bts object islocked.
[C/D]: If the application database of the related BSC isbuilt, the parent bsc object is unlocked and theassociated bts object is locked.
[M/D]: The handOverControl object is created.
[D]: The associated bts object is not referenced, exceptby a powerControl object.
[D]: If the application database of the related BSC isnot built, it has been reset by an Off line reset BDAcommand.
Parameters listed in alphabetical orderNortel Networks Confidential 2–165
BSS Parameter Dictionary
hardware configuration V11
Description : Type of architecture of the transceiverEquipment
Value range : [Dcu2 / Dcu4 / Drx]
Object : transceiverEquipment
Default value : Drx
Type : DP
hardwareRef Class 2
Description : Hardware reference of a site BCF. Check BSS upgrade file.
Value range : [0 to 65535]
Object : btsSiteManager
Type : DP
Checks : [M]: The parent bsc object is unlocked and thebtsSiteManager object is locked.
hardwareRef Class 2
Description : Hardware reference of a TRX/DRX. Check BSS upgrade file.
Value range : [0 to 65535]
Object : transceiverEquipment
Type : DP
Checks : [M]: The parent bsc object is unlocked and thetransceiverEquipment object is locked.
hardwareRef Class 2
Description : Hardware reference of a TCB. Check BSS upgrade file.
Value range : [0 to 65535]
Object : transcoderBoard
Type : DP
Checks : [M]: The parent bsc object is unlocked and thetranscoderBoard object is locked.
Nortel Networks Confidential2–166 Parameters listed in alphabetical order
PE/DCL/DD/0124411–9001–124
Standard 13.04/EN March 2002 GSM/BSS V13
hexa text V12
Description : Transcription in hexadecimal of the contents of a shortmessage.
The content of the hexa text parameter is displayed when usingthe command Display hexa. It cannot be modified by the user.Only the content of the text parameter can be modified by theuser.
Refer to the text (short message) entry in the Dictionary.
Value range : [chain of characters]Object : short message – Display hexa
Type : DI
hoMargin Class 3 H2
Description : Margin to use for PBGT handovers to avoid subsequenthandover, in PBGT formula
Value range : [–63 to 63] dBObject : adjacentCellHandOver
Default value : 4
Type : DP
Checks : [M]: The parent bsc object is unlocked.
hoMarginBeg Class 3 H3 V11
Description : Margin to be added to hoMargin until rxLevHreqave forearly handover mechanism in order to compensate the lack ofmeasurements
This parameter is coupled with hoMargin andrxLevHreqaveBeg.
Value range : [–63 to 63] dBObject : bts
Default value : 4
Type : DP
Checks : [M] : The parent bsc is unlocked.
[M] : This parameter is inhibited when set to 63 dB.
Note : This parameter shall be set such as hoMargin ≤hoMarginBeg
This parameter is only available for DCU4 or DRX transceiverarchitecture.
Parameters listed in alphabetical orderNortel Networks Confidential 2–167
BSS Parameter Dictionary
hoMarginDist Class 3 H4 V8
Description : Margin to be used for Distance Handovers
Value range : [–63 to 63] dB
Object : adjacentCellHandOver
Default value : –24 dB
Type : DP
Checks : [M]: The parent bsc object is unlocked.
hoMarginRxLev Class 3 H5 V8
Description : Margin to be used for signal strength Handovers
Value range : [–63 to 63] dB
Object : adjacentCellHandOver
Default value : –24 dB
Type : DP
Checks : [M]: The parent bsc object is unlocked.
hoMarginRxQual Class 3 H6 V8
Description : Margin to be used for Signal Quality Handovers
Value range : [–63 to 63] dBObject : adjacentCellHandOver
Default value : –24 dB
Type : DP
Checks : [M]: The parent bsc object is unlocked.
hoMarginTiering Class 3 V12
Description : Hysteresis between the uCirDLH and lCirDLH tieringthresholds to avoid ping–pong handovers (expressed in dB)
Value range : [0 to 63] dB
Object : handOverControl
Feature : Automatic Cell Tiering (TF995–V12)
Default value : 4 dB
Type : DP
Nortel Networks Confidential2–168 Parameters listed in alphabetical order
PE/DCL/DD/0124411–9001–124
Standard 13.04/EN March 2002 GSM/BSS V13
hoMarginTrafficOffset Class 3 H7 V12
Description : Minimum signal strength margin with the serving cell thatallows to select the best neighbor cell when a handover istriggered for overload reasons
Value range : [0 to 63] dB
Object : adjacentCellHandOver
Default value : 0 dB
Feature : Handover for traffic reasons (TF132 – V12)
Type : DP
Checks : [C/M]: This attribute must be in the range [0 63].
[C/M]: When set to “0”, the handovers for traffic reasonsare not allowed in the adjacent cell.
[M]: The parent bsc object is unlocked.
Note : This attribute only applies to BTSs equipped with non mixedDCU4 or DRX boards.
HOPingpongCombination Class3 H8 V12
Description : List of couples of causes (HOInitialCause andHONonEssentialCause) indicating the causes of ping–ponghandovers in the overlapping areas
The following causes are defined with regard to theneighboring cell:
HOInitialCause indicates the essential handover causewhich leads to enter the neighbor cell (cause of incominghandover).
HONonEssentialCause indicates the non–essentialhandover cause which leads to leave the cell (cause ofoutgoing handover).
This parameter defines the combination for which theHOPingpongTimeRejection attribute is used.
Parameters listed in alphabetical orderNortel Networks Confidential 2–169
BSS Parameter Dictionary
Value range : [rxQual, rxLev, distance, powerBudget, capture,directedRetry, OaM, traffic, all, allCapture, allPowerBudget]
Object : adjacentCellHandOver
Type : DP
Feature : General protection against ping–pong handovers(TF821–V12)
Checks : [M]: The parent bsc object is unlocked.
Restrictions : For the moment the essential and non essential causes takeninto account are the following:
Only rxQual and rxLev causes apply to HOInitialCause.
Only powerBudget and capture causes apply toHONonEssentialCause.
Notes : The HOPingpongCombination list can hold up to 4 couplesof causes.
allCapture cause (only applying toHONonEssentialCause)matches the capture cause for allthe micro–cells belonging to the current macro–cell . Thiscause has to be used in order to prevent ping–ponghandovers between micro– and macro–layers.
allPowerBudget cause (only applying toHONonEssentialCause) matches the powerBudget causefor all the neighboring cells of the current cell. This causeis used in order to restore the “Minimum time betweenhandovers” (feature TF218).
HOPingpongTimeRejection Class 3 H9 V12
Description : Time before a new handover attempt can be triggered
Refer to bsc object timeBetweenHOConfiguration and btsobject bts time between HO configuration attributes in thisDictionary of Parameters for this timer activation.
Refer to adjacentCellHandOver objectHOPingpongCombination attribute in this Dictionary ofParameters for the combinations for which this timer applies.
To avoid ping–pong handovers this new timer is started aftera successful handover. Up to the expiration of this timer, thereceipt of HANDOVER INDICATION message is ignored.
Nortel Networks Confidential2–170 Parameters listed in alphabetical order
PE/DCL/DD/0124411–9001–124
Standard 13.04/EN March 2002 GSM/BSS V13
Value range : [0 to 60] s
Object : adjacentCellHandOver
Default value : [30 sec]
Feature : General protection against pingpong handovers (TF821–V12)
Checks : [M]: The parent bsc object is unlocked.
hoppingSequenceNumber Class 2 F3
Description : Hopping sequence number used by a radio time slot whichobeys frequency hopping laws.
Select different HSNs for nearby cells that use the same set offrequencies.
Value range : [0 to 63]
Object : frequencyHoppingSystem
Type : DP
Checks : [M]: If the frequencyHoppingSystem object isreferenced by a channel object (fhsRef attributedefined), the parent bsc object is unlocked and theassociated bts object is locked.
HOSecondBestCellConfiguration Class 3 H10 V9
Description : Number of neighbor cells in which the BSC immediatelyattempts to perform a new handover when the previoushandover attempt failed with return to the old channel
Giving the attribute a value greater than 2 allows the BSC torenew the handover request without waiting for a new set ofradio measurements (the first attempt is included in thiscount). The same list of neighbor eligible cells is used toprocess the request (no new list is provided by the BTS).
Value range : [1 to 3]
Object : bsc
Default value : 3
Type : DP
Checks : [M]: The parent bsc object is unlocked.
Parameters listed in alphabetical orderNortel Networks Confidential 2–171
BSS Parameter Dictionary
hoTraffic Class 3 H11 V12
Description : Whether handovers for traffic reasons at bsc level are allowed.
Value range : [disabled / enabled]Object : bsc
Default value : disabled
Type : DP
Feature : Handover for traffic reasons (TF132 – V12)
Checks : [M]: The bsc object is unlocked.
Note : Enabling this parameter allows the related BTSs with DCU4or DRX transceiver architecture handle handovers for trafficreasons.
hoTraffic Class 3 H12 V12
Description : Whether handovers for traffic reasons at bts level are allowed.
Value range : [disabled / enabled]Object : bts
Default value : enabled
Type : DP
Feature : Handover for traffic reasons (TF132 – V12)
Checks : [M]: The parent bsc object is unlocked.
Note : This attribute is only available for DCU4 or DRX transceiverarchitecture.
Nortel Networks Confidential2–172 Parameters listed in alphabetical order
PE/DCL/DD/0124411–9001–124
Standard 13.04/EN March 2002 GSM/BSS V13
I
identifier
Description : Identifier of a short message. It allows MSs to identify theshort message and discard it if already received.
Short message identifiers are assigned by the networkoperator.
Value range : [0 to 65535]Object : short message
Type : DP
identifier
Description : Name of a BSS software application followed by its versionnumber
Refer to the eft entry related to the software object in theDictionary where the name formats are explained.
Value range : [XXXabcdef]Object : software – Display markers
Type : DD
identifier
Description : Name of a BSC database configuration file followed by itsversion number
Refer to the eft entry related to the software object in theDictionary where the name formats are explained.
Value range : [BSxabvcdefgh]Object : software–bsc – Display markers
Type : DD
iemId V13
Description : Identifier of the ‘iem’ object class. This identifier is allocatedby the MD–R at object creation, depending on the shelf andslot numbers indicated by the BSC. This attribute cannot bemodified. This attribute is relevant for BSC e3 and TCU e3.
Value range : [0 to 2147483646]Object : iem
Type : DP
Parameters listed in alphabetical orderNortel Networks Confidential 2–173
BSS Parameter Dictionary
iMSIAttachDetach Class 2
Description : Whether MS attachment/detachment is allowed. Allowingenables the system to take into account temporary MS absenceto prevent unsuccessful call attempts.
Value range : [allowed / not allowed]Object : bts
Default value : allowed
Type : DP
Checks : [M]: The parent bsc object is unlocked and the btsobject is locked.
inactivity timeout
Description : Maximum time between two user commands, over which thesystem induces an automatic logout procedure
Value range : [2 to 2147483646] (5) minuteObject : user profile
Type : DP
Remark : Moving the mouse inside an MMI window on the terminalscreen resets the counter.
inclusive interval of codano V12
Description : To select messages according to their fault number. Thefiltering list can contain one (or several) interval(s).
For example, interval 5~8 enables to retrieve fault numbers5, 6, 7, and 8.
Do not fill in if this criterion is not to be selected.
Value range : [0 to 65535 – 0 to 65535]Object : Alarm and notification logs – Filter
Type : DP
inclusive list of codano V12
Description : To select messages according to their fault number. The filtercan contain one (or several) fault number(s).
Do not fill in if this criterion is not to be selected.
Value range : [0 to 65535]Object : Alarm and notification logs – Filter
Type : DP
Nortel Networks Confidential2–174 Parameters listed in alphabetical order
PE/DCL/DD/0124411–9001–124
Standard 13.04/EN March 2002 GSM/BSS V13
incomingHandOver Class 3
Description : Whether incoming handovers are allowed in a cell
Value range : [enabled / disabled]Object : handOverControl
Default value : enabled
Type : DP
Checks : [M]: The parent bsc object is unlocked.
inhibitRequest
Description : Whether the SS7 channel should be inhibited
Value range : [true / false]Object : signallingLink – Set inhibit
Type : DP
Checks : [M]: The parent bsc object and the signallingLinkobject are unlocked.
Remark : An inhibit request may have no immediate effect and can evenbe refused. Run a Display all command on the signallingLinkobjet to display the resource state of the SS7 channel andcheck that the system has applied the request(signallingLinkResState).
inId V13
Description : Identifier of an ‘in’ object class. This identifier is allocated bythe MD–R at object creation. The only value allocated by theMD–R is 0. This attribute cannot be modified.
Value range : [0 to 0]Object : in
Type : DP
interBscDirectedRetry Class 3 I1 V9
Description : Whether inter-bss directed retry handovers are allowed ina BSS
Value range : [allowed / not allowed]Object : bsc
Default value : allowed
Type : DP
Checks : [M]: The bsc object is unlocked.
Note : Queuing must also be activated at BSC level.
Parameters listed in alphabetical orderNortel Networks Confidential 2–175
BSS Parameter Dictionary
interBscDirectedRetryFromCell Class 3 I2 V9
Description : Whether inter-bss directed retry handovers are allowed in acell
Value range : [allowed / not allowed]
Object : bts
Default value : allowed
Type : DP
Checks : [M]: The parent bsc object is unlocked.
Note : Queueing must also be activated at BSC level.
interCellHOExtPriority Class 3 I3
Description : Index in the allocPriorityTable that defines the processingpriority of incoming inter-bss handovers in a cell
This priority is used when radio resource allocation queueingis not requested by the MSC or not authorized in the BSS (referto the “bscQueueingOption” entry in the Dictionary).
Value range : [0 to 17]
Object : bts
Default value : 17
Type : DP
Checks : [M]: The parent bsc object is unlocked.
interCellHOIntPriority Class 3 I4
Description : Index in the allocPriorityTable that defines the processingpriority of incoming intra-bss handovers in a cell
This priority is always used, whether radio resource allocationqueueing is authorized in the BSS or not.
Value range : [0 to 17]
Object : bts
Default value : 17
Type : DP
Checks : [M]: The parent bsc object is unlocked.
Nortel Networks Confidential2–176 Parameters listed in alphabetical order
PE/DCL/DD/0124411–9001–124
Standard 13.04/EN March 2002 GSM/BSS V13
interferenceType Class 3 V12
Description : Type of interference created by neighbour cell
Value range : [notApplicable / adjacent / coChannel]
Object : adjacentCellHandOver
Default value : notApplicable
Feature : Automatic Cell Tiering (TF995–V12)
Type : DP
Checks : [M]: The parent bsc object is unlocked.
interferer cancel algo usage Class 2 I5 V10
Description : Correlation ratio of the input signals received from the normaland diversity antennas. This ratio enables to adapt the SPUsoftware (the interferer cancellation algorithm) to thepropagation conditions. Correlation ratio = 0 means that theinterferer cancellation algorithm is inactive.
Value range : [0 to 100] %
Object : bts
Default value : 0
Type : DP
Checks : [M] : The parent bsc object is unlocked and the btsobject is locked
internal DMUX alarm state
Description : State of the BSC chain equipment controlled by the ECI boardby means of alarm loops
Value range : The following is a list of equipment in alphabetical order:
Control bayextractor [all working / one failed]. . . . . . . . .
Control bay extractorpower supply [all working / one failed]. . . .
EQP fans [all working / one failed]. . . . . . . .
MPU converters [all working / one failed]. . .
MPU converter
Parameters listed in alphabetical orderNortel Networks Confidential 2–177
BSS Parameter Dictionary
(other channel) [all working / one failed]. . . .
MPU fan powersupply [all working / one failed]. . . . . . . . . . .
MPU fans [all working / one failed]. . . . . . . .
RCB0 [present / absent]. . . . . . . . . . .
RCB1 [present / absent]. . . . . . . . . . .
RCB2 [present / absent]. . . . . . . . . . .
Right MPUconverter [all working / one failed]. . . . . . . .
SWD converter [all working / one failed]. . .
BSC 2000
EQPD converter [all working / one failed]. . .
EQPM converter [all working / one failed]. .
EQPM EQPD fan [all working / one failed]. .
BSC 12000/6000
EQPD0 converter [all working / one failed]. .
EQPD0 EQPD1EQPI shelves fans [all working / one failed].
EQPD1 converter [all working / one failed]. .
EQPI converter [all working / one failed]. . .
EQPT fans [all working / one failed]. . . . . . .
EQPT and SWGshelf fans [all working / one failed]. . . . . . . .
RCB3 [present / absent]. . . . . . . . . . .
RCB4 [present / absent]. . . . . . . . . . .
Object : bsc – Display chain information
Type : DD
Note : This parameter is only available for BSC 2G
Nortel Networks Confidential2–178 Parameters listed in alphabetical order
PE/DCL/DD/0124411–9001–124
Standard 13.04/EN March 2002 GSM/BSS V13
internal DMUX state
Description : Internal state of the BSC chain ECI board
Value range : [working / fault]
working The board has been successfully. . . . . . . . . initialized.
fault A fault was detected on the board.. . . . . . . . . . . .
Object : bsc – Display chain information
Type : DD
Note : This parameter is only available for BSC 2G
internal PCM states
Description : State of the internal PCM links of the BSC chain. Each link isidentified by a serial number: [0 to 15] (BSC type 1), [0 to 31](BSC types 2, 3, 4), [0 to 63] (BSC type 5.).
Value range : [working / fault]
working The internal PCM link is working.. . . . . . . . .
fault A fault was detected on the link.. . . . . . . . . . . .
Object : bsc – Display chain information
Type : DD
internal switching matrix
Description : State of the BSC chain switching unit
Value range : [working / fault)]
working The switching boards are correctly. . . . . . . . . initialized.
fault A fault was detected on a switching. . . . . . . . . . . . board.
Object : bsc – Display chain information
Type : DD
Parameters listed in alphabetical orderNortel Networks Confidential 2–179
BSS Parameter Dictionary
interOmuEtherlinkOper V13
Description : Operational state of the inner OMU Ethernet link.
This attribute is dynamically managed by the BSS.
Value changes are not notified to the manager.
ISO operational state
This attribute is relevant for 3G BSC.
Value range : [disabled / enabled]
Object : cn
Type : DD
Feature : AR 1209 – V13.1
intraBscDirectedRetry Class 3 I6 V9
Description : Whether intra-bss directed retry handovers are allowed in aBSS
Value range : [allowed / not allowed]
Object : bsc
Default value : allowed
Type : DP
Checks : [M]: The bsc object is unlocked.
Note : Queueing must also be activated at BSC level.
intraBscDirectedRetryFromCell Class 3 I7 V9
Description : Whether intra-bss directed retry handovers are allowed in acell
Value range : [allowed / not allowed]
Object : bts
Default value : allowed
Type : DP
Checks : [M]: The parent bsc object is unlocked.
Note : Queueing must also be activated at BSC level.
Nortel Networks Confidential2–180 Parameters listed in alphabetical order
PE/DCL/DD/0124411–9001–124
Standard 13.04/EN March 2002 GSM/BSS V13
intraCell Class 3 I8
Description : Whether intra-bts handovers on TCH are allowed in a cell forinterference reasons or Cell Tiering reasons
Value range : [cellTieringHandover/ intraCellHandover / handoverNotAllowed]
cellTieringHandover: the intra–bts handovers are allowedfor CellTiering reason
intraCellHandover: the intra–bts handovers are allowed forinterference reason
handoverNotAllowed: the intra bts handovers are notallowed
Object : handOverControl
Feature : Automatic Cell Tiering (TF995–V12)
Default value : handoverNotAllowed
Type : DP
Checks : [M]: The parent bsc object is unlocked.
intraCellHOIntPriority Class 3 I9
Description : Index in the allocPriorityTable that defines the processingpriority of an intra-bts handover in a cell
This priority is always used, whether radio resource allocationqueueing is authorized in the BSS or not.
Value range : [0 to 17]Object : bts
Default value : 17
Type : DP
Checks : [M]: The parent bsc object is unlocked.
intraCellQueueing Class 3 I10
Description : Whether intra-bts handover requests are queued for a cell. Thisparameter is significant only when queuing radio resourceallocation requests is allowed in the BSS.
Refer to the bscQueueingOption entry in the Dictionary.
Value range : [enabled / disabled]Object : bts
Default value : disabled
Type : DP
Checks : [M]: The parent bsc object is unlocked.
Parameters listed in alphabetical orderNortel Networks Confidential 2–181
BSS Parameter Dictionary
intraCellSDCCH Class 3 I11 V8
Description : Whether intra-bts handovers on SDCCH are authorized in acell for interference reasons
Value range : [enabled / disabled]
Object : handOverControl
Default value : disabled
Type : DP
Checks : [M]: The parent bsc object is unlocked.
Nortel Networks Confidential2–182 Parameters listed in alphabetical order
PE/DCL/DD/0124411–9001–124
Standard 13.04/EN March 2002 GSM/BSS V13
J
job
Description : Identifier (name) of a job on the OMC–R
Value range : [case sensitive, unlimited number of characters]. The . and /characters are forbidden.
Object : job
Type : Id
Checks : [M/D]: The job is created on the OMC–R.
jobResult
Description : Identifier (name) of the associated job on the OMC–R
A result file stores the commands that are executed and thesystem responses to those commands during the associated jobsuccessive runs, beginning with the first run.
Value range : [case sensitive]
Object : jobResult
Type : Id
Parameters listed in alphabetical orderNortel Networks Confidential 2–183
BSS Parameter Dictionary
L
label
Description : Label of an archive cartridge
When a label is set, all information already stored on thecartridge is lost.
Value range : [case sensitive, 64 characters max]Object : md, omc – Display label
md, omc – Set labelmd, omc – Archivemd, omc – Restoremd, omc – Display archive list
Type : DP
language
Description : Language in which a short message is broadcast
The information is used in the data coding scheme when theshort message is broadcast.
Value range : [German / English / Italian / French / Spanish / Dutch / Danish/ Portuguese / Finnish / Norwegian / Data / Multi ByteCharacter Set / unspecified]
Object : short message
Type : DP
Nortel Networks Confidential2–184 Parameters listed in alphabetical order
PE/DCL/DD/0124411–9001–124
Standard 13.04/EN March 2002 GSM/BSS V13
lapdConcentration
Description : Whether information concentration is authorized on a LAPDlink
Value range : [enabled / disabled]
Object : lapdLink
Type : DP
Feature : GPRS (SV407 – V12)
Checks : [C]: The attribute value can be “enabled”or “disabled”if the link carries BTS signaling on the Abisinterface in a BSS that manages BTS LAPDsignaling concentration.
[C]: The attribute value is “enabled” if the link carriesTCU signaling on the Ater interface.
[C]: The attribute value is “disabled” if the link carriesPCU signaling on the Agprs interface.
Restrictions : [M]: This attribute cannot be modified.
Note : This parameter is only available for BSC 2G
Parameters listed in alphabetical orderNortel Networks Confidential 2–185
BSS Parameter Dictionary
lapdLink
Description : Identifier of an lapdLink object defined with regard to a bscobject
In all MMI commands, an LAPD link can be referenced by“bscName.lapdLink” where bscName is a permanent attributeof the parent bsc object that identifies it by name.
Value range : [0 to 2147483646]
Object : lapdLink
Type : Id
Checks : [C]: The number of LAPD links per BSC is limited to841. Fourteen links can be assigned to the TCUson the Ater interface or to the PCU on the Agprsinterface, 147 links can be assigned to the radiosites on the Abis interface, and the remaininglinks can be assigned to the TRX/DRXs on theAbis interface, with two links per TRX/DRX.
[C]: The software object related to the parent bsc objectis created.
[C]: The number of lapdLlink objects dependent on thesame bsc object that use the samelapdTerminalNumber is limited tomaxTeiPerLapdCh (static configuration data).
[C]: All lapdLlink objects dependent on the same bscobject that use the same lapdTerminalNumberhave identical associatedInterface andlapdConcentration attributes.
[C/D]: If the application database of the related BSC isbuilt, the parent bsc object is unlocked.
[D]: If the application database of the related BSC isnot built, it has been reset by an Off line reset BDAcommand.
[D]: No btsSiteManager, transceiverEquipment, ortranscoder objects refer to the lapdLink object.
Remark : An lapdLink object has no administrativeState of its own; itsoperationalState depends on the administrativeState of theparent bsc object.
Nortel Networks Confidential2–186 Parameters listed in alphabetical order
PE/DCL/DD/0124411–9001–124
Standard 13.04/EN March 2002 GSM/BSS V13
lapdLinkCallPLoad V13
Description : Number of ‘lapdLink’ object instances used by the CallProcessing on the Ater interface. This attribute isdynamically managed by the BSS. It is set to NULL at objectcreation. Value changes are not notified to the Manager.
Value range : [0 to 65535]Object : transcoder3GEqpt
Type : DP
lapdLinkOMLRef Class 2
Description : Identifier of the lapdLink object with sapi = OML referencedby the btsSiteManager object
Value range : [0 to 2147483646]Object : btsSiteManager
Type : DP
Checks : [C/M]: The referenced lapdLink object depends on thesame bsc object as the btsSiteManager object, itis assigned to the Abis interface(associatedInterface), its sapi attribute value is“OML”.
[C/M]: The number of objects dependent on a bsc objectthat refer to lapdLink objects using the samelapdTerminalNumber is limited tomaxTeiPerLapdCh (static configuration data).
[C]: The number of LAPD channels used by a site andthe related TRX/DRXs is limited tomaxLapdChPerBtsSM (static configurationdata).
[C/M]: If the lapdLink object lapdConcentrationattribute value is “enabled”, the definedlapdTerminalNumber is used by no more thanfour btsSiteManager objects dependent on thesame bsc object.
[C/M]: If the lapdLink object lapdConcentrationattribute value is “disabled”, the definedlapdTerminalNumber is not used.
[M]: The parent bsc object is unlocked and thebtsSiteManager object is locked.
Parameters listed in alphabetical orderNortel Networks Confidential 2–187
BSS Parameter Dictionary
lapdLinkOMLRef Class 2
Description : Identifier of the lapdLink object with sapi = OML referencedby the transceiverEquipment object
Value range : [0 to 2147483646]Object : transceiverEquipment
Type : DP
Checks : [C]: The number of LAPD channels used by a site andits related TRX/DRXs is limited tomaxLapdChPerBtsSM (static configurationdata).
[C/M]: The referenced lapdLink objects depend on thesame bsc object as the transceiverEquipmentobject, they are assigned to the Abis interface(associatedInterface), they use the samelapdTerminalNumber, their sapi attributematches the type of use (“OML” or “RSL”).
[C/M]: The number of btsSiteManager andtransceiverEquipment objects dependent on a bscobject that refer to lapdLink objects using thesame lapdTerminalNumber is limited tomaxTeiPerLapdCh (static configuration data).
[M]: The parent bsc object is unlocked, the parentbtsSiteManager object and thetransceiverEquipment object are locked.
lapdLinkOMLRef Class 0
Description : Identifier of the lapdLink object with sapi = OML referencedby the transcoder object
Value range : [0 to 2147483646]Object : transcoder
Type : DP
Checks : [C/M]: The referenced lapdLink object depends on thesame bsc object as the transcoder object, it isassigned to the Ater interface(associatedInterface = “Ater”), its sapi attributevalue is “OML”.
[M]: The application database of the parent BSC is notbuilt (bdaState = “not built”).
Note : This parameter is only available for BSC 2G
Nortel Networks Confidential2–188 Parameters listed in alphabetical order
PE/DCL/DD/0124411–9001–124
Standard 13.04/EN March 2002 GSM/BSS V13
lapdLinkRSLRef Class 2
Description : Identifier of the lapdLink object with sapi = RSL referencedby the transceiverEquipment object
Value range : [0 to 2147483646]
Object : transceiverEquipment
Type : DP
Checks : [C]: The number of LAPD channels used by a site andits related TRX/DRXs is limited tomaxLapdChPerBtsSM (static configurationdata).
[C/M]: The referenced lapdLink objects depend on thesame bsc object as the transceiverEquipmentobject, they are assigned to the Abis interface(associatedInterface), they use the samelapdTerminalNumber, their sapi attributematches the type of use (“OML” or “RSL”).
[C/M]: The number of btsSiteManager andtransceiverEquipment objects dependent on a bscobject that refer to lapdLink objects using thesame lapdTerminalNumber is limited tomaxTeiPerLapdCh (static configuration data).
[M]: The parent bsc object is unlocked, the parentbtsSiteManager object and thetransceiverEquipment object are locked.
Parameters listed in alphabetical orderNortel Networks Confidential 2–189
BSS Parameter Dictionary
lapdTerminalNumber Class 0 L1
Description : BSC SICD port assigned to the LAPD link
lapdTerninalNumber = 4 x number of the mother SICD4board [0 to 9] + port number [0 to 3]
lapdTerninalNumber = 8 x number of the mother SICD8board [0 to 4] + port number [0 to 7]
Value range : [0 to 7] (BSC type 1)[0 to 15] (BSC type 2)[0 to 23] (BSC type 3)[0 to 31] (BSC type 4)[0 to 39] (BSC type 5)
Note : For BSC e3 value range = [0 to inf]Object : lapdLink
Default value :
Feature : GPRS (SV407 – V12)
Type : DP
Checks : [C/M] : The number of SICD ports in a BSC depends onits type, knowing that a SICD board manages fourports and a SICD8V board manages eight ports.
BSC type T1 T2 T3 T4 T5
SICD ports 8 16 24 32 40
[M] : If the port is used by an Abis interface LAPD link,it cannot be used for TCU and PCU signaling.
[M] : If the port is used by an Ater interface LAPD link,it cannot be used for BTS and PCU signaling.
[M] : If the port is used by an Agprs interface LAPDlink, it cannot be used for BTS and TCU signaling.
[M]: The number of btsSiteManager andtransceiverEquipment objects dependent on a bscobject that refer to lapdLink objects using thesame lapdTerminalNumber is limited tomaxTeiPerLapdCh (static configuration data).
[M]: The application database of the parent BSC is notbuilt (bdaState = “not built”).
Nortel Networks Confidential2–190 Parameters listed in alphabetical order
PE/DCL/DD/0124411–9001–124
Standard 13.04/EN March 2002 GSM/BSS V13
layer3MsgCyphModComp Class 1 V8
Description : Whether the “Layer 3 message” element is used in theCYPHER MODE COMPLETE messages (Phase IIcompliance)
Value range : [true / false]Object : signallingPoint
Default value : False
Type : DP
Checks : [M]: The parent bsc object is locked.
Level to process
Description : Identifier of a set of SDO resultant data files. Level 1 identifiesthe latest set produced by the SDO machine.
As many as three sets of resultant data files created from thesame workstation can exist in the SDO machine. Any one canbe selected for report display or purge purposes.
Value range : [1, 2, 3]Object : Call monitoring – Display/Management) (SDO)
Type : DP
Checks : [A]: The set of files exists in the SDO machine.
lightning protection Class 2 V9
Description : Presence or absence of the optional equipment “lightningarrester” in S8000 Outdoor
Value range : [Present / Absent]Object : btsSiteManager
Type : DP
Checks : [M] : The parent bsc object is unlocked and thebtsSiteManager object is locked
line
Description : Line number of the first command to run (default is 1)
Every command in a command file is assigned a line number.Line no.1 corresponds to the first recorded command, line no.ncorresponds to the last recorded command.
Value range : [1 to 2147483646]Object : commandFile – Run
Type : DP
Parameters listed in alphabetical orderNortel Networks Confidential 2–191
BSS Parameter Dictionary
locationAreaCode Class 3
Description : Code of a location area of the neighbor cell in the PLMN
Value range : [0 to 65535]
Object : adjacentCellHandOver
Type : DP
Checks : [C/M]: A CGI is unique in the set including a serving celland its neighbor cells.
[M]: The parent bsc object is unlocked.
locationAreaCode Class 3
Description : Code of a location area of the neighbor cell in the PLMN
Value range : [0 to 65535]
Object : adjacentCellReselection
Type : DP
Checks : [C/M]: A CGI is unique in the set including a serving celland its neighbor cells.
[M]: The parent bsc object is unlocked.
locationAreaCode Class 2
Description : Code of a location area in the PLMN
A CGI (Cell Global Identifier) is unique in a location area. Itidentifies a cell in the PLMN and includes four fields:cellIdentity (CI), locationAreaCode (LAC),mobileCountryCode (MCC), and mobileNetworkCode(MNC).
Value range : [0 to 65535]
Object : bts
Type : DP
Checks : [C/M]: A CGI is unique in the set including a serving celland its neighbor cells.
[M]: The parent bsc object is unlocked and the btsobject is locked.
Nortel Networks Confidential2–192 Parameters listed in alphabetical order
PE/DCL/DD/0124411–9001–124
Standard 13.04/EN March 2002 GSM/BSS V13
log
Description : Identifier of a log object defined with regard to the md object.It is assigned by the OMC–R agent.
The current alarm log is no.1. Current observations logs arecreated inascending numerical order each time a newmdScanner object is created. Current trace logs are created inascending numerical order each time a new callPathTrace ortraceControl object is created.
A restored log is created each time a Restore command on themd object related to faults, observations, or trace data is run.
Value range : [0 to 2147483646]
Object : log
Type : Id
Checks : (on observation and trace logs)
[D]: The observation or the associated trace function isstopped.
Restrictions : [D]: The log object describing the current alarm logcannot be deleted.
Notes : The log objects are created by the OMC–R agent and canbe deleted by users under certain conditions (see above).
The attributes of the log objects are not managed by users.
logFullAction
Description : Action taken by the OMC–R agent in case of storage directorycapacity threshold overflow
The value “wrap” means that messages may be purged; thevalue “halt” means that further messages are not saved. Referto the capacityAlarmThreshold entry in the Dictionary.
Value range : [wrap (alarm log) / halt (observation or trace log)]
Object : log – Display
Type : DP
Note : The attributes of the log objects are not managed by users.
Parameters listed in alphabetical orderNortel Networks Confidential 2–193
BSS Parameter Dictionary
longTbfLossThroughput Class 3 (gprsBtsExtendedConf) V12
Description : Loss of throughput for long TBF in percentage of allocatedbandwidth. Prioritize normal transfer over long data transfer.
Value range : [0 to 100] in %
Object : bts
Feature : GPRS (SV407 – V12)
Type : DP
Default value : 0
Checks : [M]: The parent bsc object is unlocked.
longTbfSizeThreshold Class 3 (gprsBtsExtendedConf) V12
Description : Threshold for long TBF size, in Kbytes. This parameter is usedin the functionality which penalizes long TBF.
Value range : [1 to 65535]
Object : bts
Feature : GPRS (SV407 – V12)
Type : DP
Default value : 100
Checks : [M]: The parent bsc object is unlocked.
lRxLevDLH Class 3 L2
Description : Signal strength threshold in BTS-to-MS direction, belowwhich a handover may be triggered
Value range : [less than –110, –110 to –109, ... , –49 to –48, morethan –48] dBm
Object : handOverControl
Default value : –101 to –100 dBm (GSM 900)–99 to –98 dBm (GSM1800/1900)
Type : DP
Checks : [M]: The parent bsc object is unlocked.
Nortel Networks Confidential2–194 Parameters listed in alphabetical order
PE/DCL/DD/0124411–9001–124
Standard 13.04/EN March 2002 GSM/BSS V13
lRxLevDLP Class 3 L3
Description : Signal strength threshold in BTS-to-MS direction, belowwhich the power control function increases power. It is lowerthan uRxLevDLP.
Value range : [less than –110, –110 to –109, ... , –49 to –48, morethan –48] dBm
Object : powerControl
Default value : –95 to –94 dBm
Type : DP
Checks : [M]: lRxLevDLP + powerIncrStepSize ≤ uRxLevDLP
[M]: uRxLevDLP – powerRedStepSize ≥ lRxLevDLP
[M]: The parent bsc object is unlocked.
Note : The powerIncrStepSize, powerRedStepSize, anduRxLevDLP parameters are ignored when the BTS uses theadvanced “one shot” power control algorithm.
lRxLevULH Class 3 L4
Description : Signal strength threshold in MS-to-BTS direction, belowwhich a handover may be triggered
Value range : [less than –110, –110 to –109, ... , –49 to –48, morethan –48] dBm
Object : handOverControl
Default value : –101 to –100 dBm (GSM 900)–99 to –98 dBm (GSM 1800/1900)
Type : DP
Checks : [M]: The parent bsc object is unlocked.
Parameters listed in alphabetical orderNortel Networks Confidential 2–195
BSS Parameter Dictionary
lRxLevULP Class 3 L5
Description : Signal strength threshold in MS-to-BTS direction, belowwhich the power control function increases power. It is lowerthan uRxLevULP.
Value range : [less than –110, –110 to –109, ... , –49 to –48, morethan –48] dBm
Object : powerControl
Default value : –95 to –94 dBm
Type : DP
Checks : [M]: lRxLevULP + powerIncrStepSize ≤ uRxLevULP
[M]: uRxLevULP – powerRedStepSize ≥ lRxLevULP
[M]: The parent bsc object is unlocked.
Note : The powerIncrStepSize, powerRedStepSize, anduRxLevULP parameters are ignored when the BTS uses theadvanced “one shot” power control algorithm.
lRxQualDLH Class 3 L6
Description : Bit error rate threshold in BTS-to-MS direction, above whichan inter cell handover may be triggered
Value range : [less than 0.2, 0.2 to 0.4, 0.4 to 0.8, ... , 6.4 to 12.8, morethan 12.8] %
Object : handOverControl
Default value : 1.6 to 3.2 %
Type : DP
Feature : Intracell handover enhancements (TF819 – V12)
Checks : [M]: The parent bsc object is unlocked.
Nortel Networks Confidential2–196 Parameters listed in alphabetical order
PE/DCL/DD/0124411–9001–124
Standard 13.04/EN March 2002 GSM/BSS V13
lRxQualDLP Class 3 L7
Description : Bit error rate threshold in BTS-to-MS direction, above whichthe power control function increases power. It is greater thanor equal to uRxQualDLP.
Value range : [less than 0.2, 0.2 to 0.4, 0.4 to 0.8, ... , 6.4 to 12.8, morethan 12.8] %
Object : powerControl
Default value : 0.4 to 0.8
Type : DP
Checks : [C/M]: lRxQualDLP ≥ uRxQualDLP[M]: The parent bsc object is unlocked.
Note : The uRxQualDLP parameter is ignored when the BTS usesthe advanced “one shot” power control algorithm.
lRxQualULH Class 3 L8
Description : Bit error rate threshold in MS-to-BTS direction, above whichan inter cell handover may be triggered
Value range : [less than 0.2, 0.2 to 0.4, 0.4 to 0.8, ... , 6.4 to 12.8, morethan 12.8] %
Object : handOverControl
Default value : 1.6 to 3.2 %
Type : DP
Feature : Intracell handover enhancements (TF819 – V12)
Checks : [M]: The parent bsc object is unlocked.
lRxQualULP Class 3 L9
Description : Bit error rate threshold in MS-to-BTS direction, above whichthe power control function increases power. It is greater thanor equal to uRxQualULP.
Value range : [less than 0.2, 0.2 to 0.4, 0.4 to 0.8, ... , 6.4 to 12.8, morethan 12.8] %
Object : powerControl
Default value : 0.4 to 0.8
Type : DP
Checks : [C/M]: lRxQualULP ≥ uRxQualULP[M]: The parent bsc object is unlocked.
Note : The uRxQualULP parameter is ignored when the BTS usesthe advanced “one shot” power control algorithm.
Parameters listed in alphabetical orderNortel Networks Confidential 2–197
BSS Parameter Dictionary
lsaRcId V13
Description : Identifier of the ‘lasRc’ object class. This identifier isallocated by the MD–R at object creation, depending on theshelf and slot numbers indicated by the BSC. This attributecannot be modified. This attribute is relevant for BSC e3 andTCU e3.
Value range : [0 to 2147483646]Object : lsaRc
Type : DP
lsaRc Reference V13
Description : Pointer to the associated ‘lsaRc’ object instance.
This attribute cannot be modified. It is set at ‘iem’ creation asindicated by the BSS.
Value range : [0 to 2147483646]Object : iem
Feature : AR 1209 – V13.1
Nortel Networks Confidential2–198 Parameters listed in alphabetical order
PE/DCL/DD/0124411–9001–124
Standard 13.04/EN March 2002 GSM/BSS V13
M
machine name
Description : Name of the machine (terminal or server), as defined in itsprofile for a terminal, in which the job is run (default is thelogged-in user’s terminal). Enter “server” for the OMC–Rserver console.
Value range : [case sensitive]Object : job
Type : DP
Checks : [C/M]: The machine is authorized to run jobs.
machine name
Description : Name of the machine, as defined in its profile for a terminal,in which the associated job was run (“server” identifies theOMC–R server)
Object : jobResult
Type : DD
mainNetworkBand
Description : Indicates the main network band.
Value range : [900/1800] network band
maio Class 2 M1
Description : Index in the list of frequencies allotted to a radio time slotwhich obeys frequency hopping laws.
Setting this attribute, together with the fhsRef attribute, allowsthe time slot to obey frequency hopping laws.
This offset allows to differentiate channel objects thatreference frequencyHoppingSystem objects with identicalattributes (orthogonality principle).
Value range : [0 to N–1] N is the number of frequencies (≤ 64) allotted to thetime slot.
Object : channel
Type : DP
Checks : [C/M]: The attribute is in the range [0 to 63].
Parameters listed in alphabetical orderNortel Networks Confidential 2–199
BSS Parameter Dictionary
[C/M]: It is undefined if frequency hopping is not allowedfor the parent bts object (btsIsHopping = “nohopping”) or the channelType of the channelobject is “mainBCCH”, “mainBCCHCombined”,or “bcchSdcch4CBCH”.
[C/M]: If the attribute is defined, the fhsRef attribute isalso defined.
[C/M]: If the attribute is defined, its value is lower than thenumber of frequencies defined in themobileAllocation list (attribute of the referencedfrequencyHoppingSystem object).
[M]: The parent bsc object is unlocked and the parentbts object is locked.
managedObjectClass
Description : Object class referenced
Value range : [adjacentCellHandOver / adjacentCellReselection / bsc /bscMdInterface / bts / btsSiteManager / callPathTrace /channel / efd / frequencyHoppingSystem / handOverControl/ lapdLink / log / md / mdScanner / mdWarning / pcmCircuit/ powerControl / signallingLink / signallingLinkSet /signallingPoint / software / traceControl / transceiver /transceiverEquipment / transceiverZone / transcoder /transcoderBoard / xtp]
Object : alarmRecord,mdScanReportRecord,observationFileReadyRecord,stateChangeRecord,traceFileReadyRecord,traceLogRecord
Type : DP
managedObjectInstance
Description : Identification of an object in the class
Object : alarmRecord,mdScanReportRecord,observationFileReadyRecord,stateChangeRecord,traceFileReadyRecord,traceLogRecord
Type : DP
Nortel Networks Confidential2–200 Parameters listed in alphabetical order
PE/DCL/DD/0124411–9001–124
Standard 13.04/EN March 2002 GSM/BSS V13
Manager address type
Description : OMC–R manager address type
Value range : [internal / external]Object : efd – Display
Type : DP
Checks : [C/M]: This attribute is not managed by users
Manager addresses
Description : Addresses of the OMC–R manager that receives the messages.They are provided by the manager.
Object : efd – Display
Type : DP
Restrictions : [C/M]: This attribute is not managed by users.
managerServer
Description : Name of the active OMC–R agent server. It is provided by theOMC–R agent.
This server is referred to as the “NMC” server in the Q3 namesof the permanent md observation counters related to theOMC–R agent active server.
Object : md – Display
Type : DP
manufacturerIntervention
Description : Type of action associated with an alarm criterion in themanufacturer configuration
Value range : [noAlarm / critical / major / minor]Object : alarm criteria
Type : DP
Parameters listed in alphabetical orderNortel Networks Confidential 2–201
BSS Parameter Dictionary
marking type
Description : Type of software to consult
Selecting “prom” allows to display the software applicationsloaded in PROMs in the selected BSS entity. Selecting “soft”allows to display the software applications loaded in theprocessors of the selected BSS entity.
Value range : [prom / soft]
Object : software – Display markers
Type : DP
max log size
Description : Maximum log size expressed in bytes
Object : log – Display
Type : DP
Remark : The attributes of the log objects are not managed by the users
maxAdjCHOARMPerBts
Description : Maximum number of neighbor cells associated with a servingcell for handover and reselection management (static OMC–Rconfiguration data)
Value range : [32]
Object : OMC–R
Type : DS
maxBscPerNetwork
Description : Maximum number of BSCs handled by an OMC–R (staticOMC–R configuration data)
Value range : [20]Object : OMC–R
Type : DS
Nortel Networks Confidential2–202 Parameters listed in alphabetical order
PE/DCL/DD/0124411–9001–124
Standard 13.04/EN March 2002 GSM/BSS V13
maxBsTransmitPowerInnerZone Class 3 (gprsBtsExtendedConf) V12
Description : Maximum level of BTS transmission power in the inner zoneof a dual–band cell
Value range : [2 to 51]
Object : bts
Feature : GPRS (SV407 – V12)
Default value : 2, 10
Type : DP
Checks : [M]: The parent bsc object is unlocked.
maxBtsPerBtsSM
Description : Maximum number of radio cells controlled by a site (staticOMC–R configuration data)
Value range : [6 (BTS “conventional”) / 4 (others)]
Object : OMC–R
Type : DS
maxBtsPerNetwork
Description : Maximum number of radio cells controlled by an OMC–R(static OMC–R configuration data)
Value range : [3200]
Object : OMC–R
Type : DS
maxDnTbfP1P2Threshold Class 3 (gprsBtsExtendedConf) V12
Description : Maximum number of downlink TBF on a P1 TDMA beforeselection of P2 TDMA
Value range : [1 to 32]
Object : bts
Feature : GPRS (SV407 – V12)
Default value : 16
Checks : [M]: The parent bsc object is unlocked.
Parameters listed in alphabetical orderNortel Networks Confidential 2–203
BSS Parameter Dictionary
maxDnTbfPerTs Class 3 (gprsBtsExtendedConf) V12
Description : Maximum number of downlink TBF per TDMA on a timeslotbasis
Value range : [1 to 8]
Object : bts
Feature : GPRS (SV407 – V12)
Type : DP
Default value : 8
Checks : [M]: The parent bsc object is unlocked.
maxDwAssign Class 3 (gprsBtsExtendedConf) V12
Description : Maximum number of Immediate Assignment messages persecond.
Value range : [1 to 32] blocks
Object : bts
Feature : GPRS (SV407 – V12)
Type : DP
Default value : 8
Checks : [M]: The parent bsc object is unlocked.
Because no TS partitioning is implemented in GPRS V12.4 brelease, the number of maximum TBF establishment cannotexceed the number of TS configured in the cell.Recommended value has to be set to the number of PDTCHconfigured in the cell.
maxFileSize
Description : Maximum size of the call path tracing data file in the BSC
Value range : [30 to 500] kbytes
Object : callPathTrace
Type : DP
Checks : [M]: The callPathTrace object is locked.
Nortel Networks Confidential2–204 Parameters listed in alphabetical order
PE/DCL/DD/0124411–9001–124
Standard 13.04/EN March 2002 GSM/BSS V13
maximum acknowledgment time
Description : To select messages acknowledged at that time or before
Absolute time format entry forms are detailed in NTP < 130 >.
Do not fill in if this criterion is not to be selected.
Value range : [<date>,<time>]Object : Alarm logs – Filter
Type : DP
Checks : [A]: It is after minimum acknowledgment time whenfilled in.
maximum alarm number
Description : To select alarms with a number lower than or equal to that one
Do not fill in if this criterion is not to be selected.
Value range : [0 to 2147483646]Object : Alarm logs – Filter
Type : DP
Checks : [A]: It is greater than or equal to minimum alarmnumber when filled in.
maximum clear time
Description : To select alarms cleared at that time or before
Absolute time format entry forms are detailed in NTP < 130 >.
Do not fill in if this criterion is not to be selected.
Value range : [<date>,<time>]Object : Cleared alarm log – Filter
Type : DP
Checks : [A]: It is after minimum clear time when filled in.
maximum event time
Description : To select messages issued at that time or before
Absolute time format entry forms are detailed in NTP < 130 >.
Do not fill in if this criterion is not to be selected.
Value range : [<date>,<time>]Object : Alarm and notification logs – Filter
Type : DP
Checks : [A]: It is after minimum event time when filled in.
Parameters listed in alphabetical orderNortel Networks Confidential 2–205
BSS Parameter Dictionary
maximum MD notification number
Description : To select OMC–R agent notifications with a number lowerthan or equal to that one
Do not fill in if this criterion is not to be selected.
Value range : [0 to 2147483646]Object : Alarm and notification logs – Filter
Type : DP
Checks : [A]: It is greater than or equal to minimum MDnotification number when filled in.
maximum OMC notification number
Description : To select OMC–R manager notifications with a number lowerthan or equal to that one
Do not fill in if this criteria is not to be selected.
Value range : [0 to 2147483646]Object : Alarm and notification logs – Filter
Type : DP
Checks : [A]: It is greater than or equal to minimum OMCnotification number when filled in.
maximum reception time
Description : To select messages received at that time or before
Absolute time format entry forms are detailed in NTP < 130 >.
Do not fill in if this criterion is not to be selected.
Value range : [<date>,<time>]Object : Alarm and notification logs – Filter
Type : DP
Checks : [A]: It is after minimum reception time whenfilled in.
maxLapdChPerBtsSM
Description : Maximum number of LAPD channels used by a radio site(static OMC–R configuration data)
Value range : [6]Object : OMC–R
Type : DS
Nortel Networks Confidential2–206 Parameters listed in alphabetical order
PE/DCL/DD/0124411–9001–124
Standard 13.04/EN March 2002 GSM/BSS V13
maxNbrConsMess V13
Description : Maximum number of messages stored in the BSC log files.This number is allocated by the MD–R at object creation.This attribute can be modified only if the ‘bsc’ object instanceis locked.
Value range : [1 to 7]Object : bscLog
Type : DP
maxNbOfCells Class 2
Description : Maximum number of radio cells controlled by a site
Value range : [1 to maxBtsPerBtsSM]Object : btsSiteManager
Type : DP
Checks : [C/M]: The number of cells controlled by a site is limitedto maxBtsPerBtsSM (refer to this entry in theDictionary).
[M]: This number is greater than or equal to the numberof bts objects created for the btsSiteManagerobject.
[M]: The parent bsc object is unlocked and thebtsSiteManager object is locked.
maxNbrPDAAssig Class 2 (gprsTranscvLockExtendedConf) V12
Description : Maximum number of:
Polling request messsages sent on PDCH after immediateassigment message has been sent on CCCH.
PDAS messages on old TS when changing TS allocationbefore going into failure.
Value range : [1 to 10]Object : transceiver
Default value : 5
Feature : GPRS (SV407 – V12)
Type : DP
Checks : [M]: The parent bsc object is unlocked and thetransceiver object is locked.
Parameters listed in alphabetical orderNortel Networks Confidential 2–207
BSS Parameter Dictionary
maxNbrPUDWithoutVchange Class 2 (NN0002Max) gprsTranscvLockExtendedConf V12
Description : Maximum number of PUAN (Packet Uplink Ack/Nack)consecutively sent without V(A) has changed (respectively,maximum number of PDAN (Packet Downlink Ack/Nack)consecutively sent without V(Q) has changed).
Value range : [1 to 255]Object : transceiver
Default value : 10
Feature : GPRS (SV407 – V12)
Type : DP
Checks : [M]: The parent bsc object is unlocked and thetransceiver object is locked.
maxNbrRLCEmptyBlock Class 2 (N3101Max)(gprsTranscvLockExtendedConf) V12
Description : Maximum number of USF where no data is received in the ULdirection
Value range : [1 to 255]Object : transceiver
Default value : 10
Feature : GPRS (SV407 – V12)
Type : DP
Checks : [M]: The parent bsc object is unlocked and thetransceiver object is locked.
maxNumberRetransmission Class 3 M2
Description : Maximum number of RACH burst retransmissions allowed ina call in case of non–system response
The information is broadcast to the mobiles at regular intervalson the cell BCCH. It defines the maximum number of times amobile can renew access requests to the BTS on RACH.
Value range : [one / two / four / seven]Object : bts
Default value : two
Type : DP
Checks : [M]: The parent bsc object is unlocked.
Nortel Networks Confidential2–208 Parameters listed in alphabetical order
PE/DCL/DD/0124411–9001–124
Standard 13.04/EN March 2002 GSM/BSS V13
maxPcmCPerBtsSM
Description : Maximum number of PCM links used by a radio site on theAbis interface (static OMC–R configuration data)
Value range : [6]
Object : OMC–R
Type : DS
maxPcmCPerTranscd
Description : Maximum number of PCM links used by a remote transcoderon the A interface (static OMC–R configuration data)
Value range : [4]
Object : OMC–R
Type : DS
maxRACH Class 3 V12
Description : Maximum number of RACH messages accepted by the PCUper second
Value range : [0 to 15] blocks
Range to be considered at the MMI is [0 to 15], which meansfor the PCU from 1 to 16 RACH per second.
Object : bts
Default value : 0
Feature : GPRS (SV407 – V12)
Type : DP
Checks : [M]: The parent bsc object is unlocked.
maxRowCount
Description : Maximum number of information lines per table to access. “0”means accessing all data. The default value is “1000”.
Value range : [0 to 1000]
Object : Trace data display
Type : DP
Parameters listed in alphabetical orderNortel Networks Confidential 2–209
BSS Parameter Dictionary
maxSigLPerSigLS
Description : Maximum number of SS7 channels linked to a BSC (staticOMC–R configuration data)
Value range : [2 (BSC 6000 types 1, 2) 4 (BSC 6000 types 3, 4, 5) 2 (BSC 12000 type 1) 4 (BSC 12000 types 2, 3, 4) 6 (BSC 12000 type 5)]
Object : OMC–R
Type : DS
maxTeiPerLapdCh
Description : Maximum number of TEI addresses allotted to a LAPDterminal (static OMC–R configuration data)
It defines the maximum number of LAPD links that can use thesame SICD port in the BSC (lapdTerminalNumber attributeof the lapdLink objects).
Value range : [15]Object : OMC–R
Type : DS
maxTranscdBPerTranscd
Description : Maximum number of transcoding boards housed in a remotetranscoder (static OMC–R configuration data)
Value range : [10 in a GSM 900, E–GSM, GSM–R or 1800 network8 in a GSM 1900 network]
Object : OMC–R
Type : DS
maxTranscdPerBsc
Description : Maximum number of remote transcoders linked to a BSC(static OMC–R configuration data)
Value range : [7 (BSC 6000) / 12 (BSC 12000) for E1 PCMs 9 (BSC 6000 / 14 (BSC 12000) for T1 PCMs]
Object : OMC–R
Type : DS
Nortel Networks Confidential2–210 Parameters listed in alphabetical order
PE/DCL/DD/0124411–9001–124
Standard 13.04/EN March 2002 GSM/BSS V13
maxUpTbfP1P2Threshold Class 3 (gprsBtsExtendedConf) V12
Description : Maximum number of uplink TBF on a P1 TDMA beforeselection of P2 TDMA
Value range : [1 to 32]Object : bts
Feature : GPRS (SV407 – V12)
Type : DP
Default value : 16
Checks : [M]: The parent bsc object is unlocked.
maxUpTbfPerTs Class 3 (gprsBtsExtendedConf) V12
Description : Maximum number of uplink TBF per TDMA on a timeslotbasis
Value range : [1 to 8]Object : bts
Feature : GPRS (SV407 – V12)
Type : DP
Default value : 8
Checks : [M]: The parent bsc object is unlocked.
md
Description : Identifier of the md object that describes the OMC–R agent.It is enforced by the system.
The md object is unique to the OMC–R. It is created when thesystem is started.
Value range : [1]Object : md
Type : Id
MD notification number
Description : To select OMC–R agent notifications with a given number
Value range : [0 to 2147483646]Object : Alarm and notification logs – Filter
Type : DP
Parameters listed in alphabetical orderNortel Networks Confidential 2–211
BSS Parameter Dictionary
mdArchive
Description : Whether archiving the observation messages processed isallowed
The value of this attribute is “not archived” whenmdScannerType = “performance monitor” (instrument panelobservation) and “archived” otherwise.
Value range : [archived / not archived]
Object : mdScanner
Type : DP
Checks : [M]: This attribute cannot be modified.
mdConfirm
Description : Whether the observation messages processed should beacknowledged
The value of this attribute is “not confirmed” whenmdScannerType = “performance monitor” (instrument panelobservation) and “confirmed” otherwise.
Value range : [confirmed (yes) / not confirmed (no)]
Object : mdScanner – Display
Type : DP
Checks : [C/M]: This attribute is not managed by users.
mdFileName
Description : Name of an observation file containing an elementary report.Refer to the naming rules to NTP < 07 >.
Object : mdScanReportRecord
Type : DP
Nortel Networks Confidential2–212 Parameters listed in alphabetical order
PE/DCL/DD/0124411–9001–124
Standard 13.04/EN March 2002 GSM/BSS V13
mdGranularityPeriod
Description : Recovery period of the observation messages by the OMC–Ragent
Value range :[5, 10, 15] minutes permanent general md. . . . . . .
[15, 30, 60] minutes permanent general bsc (BSC). . . . . .
[15, 30, 60] minutes Fast Statistic Observation. . . . . . (OFS)
[1440] minutes General Statistic Observation. . . . . . . . . . (OGS)
[5, 10, 15] minutes Diagnostic Observation. . . . . . . (ODIAG)
[1, 2, 3, 4, 5] minutes performance monitor (Real. . . . . Time Observation (ORT))
[5, 10, 15, 30, 60] minutes Temporary Observation (TO). Object : mdScanner
Type : DP
Checks : [C/M]: The number of temporary observations running atthe same time with a 5–minute recovery period inthe BSSs managed on the OMC–R is limitedto 50.
[C/M]: The number of instrument panel observationsrunning at the same time with a 1–minute recoveryperiod is limited to 10.
Restrictions : [M]: This attribute cannot be modified ifmdScannerType = “temporary xxx”. Stop theobservation if necessary by deleting the concernedmdScanner object and create it back with a newobservation period.
mdGranularityPeriod
Description : Recovery period of the observation messages by the OMC–Ragent
Value range :[5, 10, 15] minutes permanent general md. . . . . . .
[15, 30, 60] minutes permanent general bsc. . . . . . (GPO–BSC)
[15, 30, 60] minutes Fast Statistic Observation. . . . . . (OFS)
Parameters listed in alphabetical orderNortel Networks Confidential 2–213
BSS Parameter Dictionary
[1440] minutes General Statistic. . . . . . . . . . Observation (OGS)
[15] minutes Diagnostic Observation. . . . . . . . . . . . (ODIAG)
[1, 2, 3, 4, 5] minutes performance monitor. . . . . (Instrument Panel (IPO) orReal Time Observation(ORT))
[5, 10, 15, 30, 60] minutes Temporary Observation. (TO)
Object : mdScanReportRecord
Type : DP
mdGranularityPeriod
Description : Recovery period of the observation messages by the OMC–Ragent
Value range :
[5, 10, 15] minutes permanent general md. . . . . . .
[15, 30, 60] minutes permanent general bsc. . . . . . (GPO–BSC)
[15, 30, 60] minutes Fast Statistic Observation. . . . . . (OFS)
[1440] minutes General Statistic. . . . . . . . . . Observation (OGS)
[15] minutes Diagnostic Observation. . . . . . . . . . . . (ODIAG)
[1, 2, 3, 4, 5] minutes performance monitor. . . . . (Instrument Panel (IPO) orReal Time Observation(ORT))
[5, 10, 15, 30, 60] minutes Temporary Observation. (TO)
Object : observationFileReadyRecord
Type : DP
Nortel Networks Confidential2–214 Parameters listed in alphabetical order
PE/DCL/DD/0124411–9001–124
Standard 13.04/EN March 2002 GSM/BSS V13
mdId
Description : Identifier of the md object that describes the OMC–R agent.It is enforced by the system.
This attribute allows users to identify the md object on theOMC–R.
Value range : [1]Object : md – Display
Type : DP
Checks : [M]: This attribute is not managed by users.
mdLog
Description : Whether the observation messages processed are saved on theOMC–R agent disks
The value of this attribute is “not logged” whenmdScannerType = “performance monitor” (instrument panelobservation) and “logged” otherwise.
Value range : [logged / not logged]
Object : mdScanner
Type : DP
Checks : [M]: This attribute cannot be modified.
mdObjectList
Description : Identification of the observed object. It depends on the type ofthe defined observation.
mdScannerType mdObjectList
permanent general md md
permanent general bsc bsc
general statistic (OGS) bsc
fast statistic (OFS) bsc
performance monitor (IPO) bsc
real time (ORT) bsc
temporary interference* bsc & btsSiteManager& bts
temporary signallingLink* bsc & signallingLink
Parameters listed in alphabetical orderNortel Networks Confidential 2–215
BSS Parameter Dictionary
mdScannerType mdObjectList
temporary pcmCircuit* bsc & pcmCircuit
temporary handOver* bsc & btsSiteManager& bts
temporary Abis Interface bts* bsc & btsSiteManager& bts
diagnostic (ODIAG) bsc, bts, signallingLink,transcoder3G,transcoderEqpt,pcmPort,transceiverEqpt &btsSiteManager
* This type only applies to V12 bsc’sObject : mdScanner
Type : DP
Restrictions : [M]: This attribute cannot be modified.
mdObjectList
Description : Identification of the observed object. It depends on the type ofthe defined observation.
Object : Display xxx report
Type : DP
mdObjectList
Description : Identification of the observed object. It depends on the type ofthe defined observation.
Object : List observation messages
Type : DP
������
Description : Identifier of an mdScanner object defined with regard to themd object
The mdScanner object class describes the OMC–R agent andBSS observations. These objects are managed by the OMC–R“Performance Management” function.
Value range : [0 to 2147483646]Object : mdScanner
Type : Id
Nortel Networks Confidential2–216 Parameters listed in alphabetical order
PE/DCL/DD/0124411–9001–124
Standard 13.04/EN March 2002 GSM/BSS V13
Checks : (performed only when the object describes a BSSobservation)
[C/M/D]: The application database of the BSC is not beingbuilt.
[C/M/D]: If the application database of the BSC is not built,temporary observations cannot be managed.
[C/M/D]: If the application database of the BSC is built, theBSS/OMC–R link is established and no audit isin-progress in the BSC.
Remark : Deleting an mdScanner object that describes a temporaryobservation is always possible if the observation duration haselapsed (stopTime = 0) and the stop TGE has been sent to theBSC.
mdScannerType
Description : Type of the observation
Value range : [general Statistic (V11+) / fast Statistic (V11+) / real Time(V11+) / diagnostic (V11+) / permanent general bsc (V10) /permanent general md / permanent general manager /performance monitor (IPO V10) / temporary interference /temporary signallingLink / temporary pcmCircuit (V10) /temporary handOver (V10) / temporary pair of bts (V8) /temporary Abis Interface bts]
Object : Display xxx report
Type : DP
mdScannerType
Description : Type of the observation
Value range : [general Statistic (V11+) / fast Statistic (V11+) / real Time(V11+) / diagnostic (V11+) / permanent general bsc (V10) /permanent general md / permanent general manager /temporary interference / temporary signallingLink /temporary pcmCircuit (V10) / temporary handOver (V10) /temporary pair of bts (V8) / temporary Abis Interface bts]
Object : List observation messages
Type : DP
Parameters listed in alphabetical orderNortel Networks Confidential 2–217
BSS Parameter Dictionary
mdScannerType
Description : Type of the observation
Value range : [general Statistic (V11+) / fast Statistic (V11+) / real Time(V11+) / permanent general bsc / permanent general md /permanent general manager / performance monitor(instrument panel) (V10)]
Object : Load formulae
Type : DP
mdScannerType
Description : Type of the observation
Value range : [general Statistic (V11+) / fast Statistic (V11+) / real Time(V11+) / diagnostic (V11+) / permanent general md /permanent general manager / temporary interference /temporary signallingLink / temporary pair of bts (V8) /temporary Abis Interface bts]
Object : mdScanner
Type : DP
Checks : [C]: The defined observation is not running.
Restrictions : [M]: This attribute cannot be modified.
Notes : The permanent general md observation is unique to theOMC–R.
The permanent general bsc and Instrument Panelobservations are unique to a BSS (V10).
The OGS is unique to a BSS (V11+).
The OFS is unique to a BSS (V11+).
The ORT is unique to a BSS (V11+).
A temporary observation of a given type or ODIAG (V11+)is unique to a BSS.
Nortel Networks Confidential2–218 Parameters listed in alphabetical order
PE/DCL/DD/0124411–9001–124
Standard 13.04/EN March 2002 GSM/BSS V13
mdStorageDuration
Description : Storage duration of the observation messages processed on theOMC–R agent disks
Observation messages are kept on the OMC–R agent disks fora limited period of time, provided the mdLog attribute of theassociated log object is “logged”. They are automaticallypurged at regular intervals. The user will have to archive theobservation data, should data analysis occur after the purgetime set by static configuration.
Value range : [N] hour. N is a static configuration data.
Since instrument panel observation messages are not kept,N equals zero for the log objects that describe theseobservations.
Object : mdScanner
Type : DP
Restrictions : [C/M]: This attribute is not managed by users.
mdTransferMode
Description : Service used by the OMC–R agent to transmit the observationmessages processed to the OMC–R manager
Value range : [FTAM (permanent general md and bsc observations) / CMIS(others)]
Object : mdScanner – Display
Type : DP
Restrictions : [C/M]: This attribute is not managed by users.
mdWarning
Description : Identifier of a mdWarning object defined with regard to the mdobject
The mdWarning object class describes the processingconditions of BSS alarms of “outOfRangeCounter” and“excessiveAnomalyRate” type. These objects are managed bythe OMC–R “Fault Management” function.
Value range : [0 to 2147483646]Object : mdWarning
Type : Id
Parameters listed in alphabetical orderNortel Networks Confidential 2–219
BSS Parameter Dictionary
measurementProcAlgorithm Class 2 V12
Description : Whether the new L1M interface is used
Value range : [L1MV1, L1MV2]
L1MV1: the older L1M is used
L1MV2: the newer L1M is usedObject : bts
Default value : L1MV1
Feature : L1M evolutions for advanced features support (TF1089–V12)
Type : DP
Checks : [M] : The parent bsc object is unlocked and the btsobject is locked.
mergeEft
Description : Whether the EFT should be merged in an existing EFT
The attribute value can only be “True” if the EFT contains asite BCF software.
If the EFT exists on the OMC–R agent disks, the followingapply:
If mergeEFT = “True”, the EFT is updated with the newDLU files.
If mergeEFT = “False”, the command is refused.
Value range : [true / false]Object : md – Create EFT
Type : DP
mergeEft
Description : Whether the EFT should be merged in an existing EFT
The attribute value can only be “True” if the EFT contains asite BCF software.
If the EFT exists on the OMC–R agent disks, the followingapply:
If mergeEFT = “True”, the EFT is updated with the newDLU files.
If mergeEFT = “False”, the command is refused.
Value range : [true / false]Object : md – Validate EFT
Type : DP
Nortel Networks Confidential2–220 Parameters listed in alphabetical order
PE/DCL/DD/0124411–9001–124
Standard 13.04/EN March 2002 GSM/BSS V13
mergeEft
Description : Whether the EFT should be merged in an existing EFT
The attribute value can only be “True” if the EFT contains asite BCF software.
If the EFT exists on the OMC–R agent disks, the followingapply:
If mergeEFT = “True”, the EFT is updated with the newDLU files.
If mergeEFT = “False”, the command is refused.
Value range : [true / false]Object : omc – Download and validate EFT from gigatape to md
Type : DP
microCellCaptureTimer Class 3 M3 V8
Description : Time used to confirm a capture (signal strength stability) whenusing microcell Algorithm type A
Value range : [0 to 255] multiple of <runHandOver>Object : adjacentCellHandOver
Default value : 0
Condition : To define if A handover algorithm is activated
Type : DP
Checks : [C]: This attribute is defined if the described neighborcell is a microcell (cellType = “microType”).
[M]: The parent bsc object is unlocked.
microCellStability Class 3 M4
Description : Strength Level Stability Criterion for Capture Algorithm A
Value range : [0 to 255] dBObject : adjacentCellHandOver
Default value : 10
Condition : To define if A handover algorithm is activated
Type : DP
Checks : [C]: This attribute is defined if the described neighborcell is a microcell (cellType = “microType”).
[M]: The parent bsc object is unlocked.
Parameters listed in alphabetical orderNortel Networks Confidential 2–221
BSS Parameter Dictionary
minimum acknowledgment time
Description : To select messages acknowledged at that time or after
Absolute time format entry forms are detailed in NTP < 130 >.
Do not fill in if this criterion is not to be selected.
Value range : [<date>,<time>]Object : Alarm logs – Filter
Type : DP
Checks : [A]: It is before maximum acknowledgment timewhen filled in.
minimum alarm number
Description : To select alarms with a number greater than or equal to that one
Do not fill in if this criterion is not to be selected.
Value range : [0 to 2147483646]Object : Alarm logs – Filter
Type : DP
Checks : [A]: It is lower than or equal to maximum alarmnumber when filled in.
minimum clear time
Description : To select alarms cleared at that time or after
Absolute time format entry forms are detailed in NTP < 130 >.
Do not fill in if this criterion is not to be selected.
Value range : [<date>,<time>]Object : Cleared alarm log – Filter
Type : DP
Checks : [A]: It is before maximum clear time when filled in.
minimum event time
Description : To select messages issued at that time or after
Absolute time format entry forms are detailed in NTP < 130 >.
Do not fill in if this criterion is not to be selected.
Value range : [<date>,<time>]Object : Alarm and notification logs – Filter
Type : DP
Checks : [A]: It is before maximum event time when filled in.
Nortel Networks Confidential2–222 Parameters listed in alphabetical order
PE/DCL/DD/0124411–9001–124
Standard 13.04/EN March 2002 GSM/BSS V13
minimum MD notification number
Description : To select OMC–R agent notifications with a number greaterthan or equal to that one
Do not fill in if this criterion is not to be selected.
Value range : [0 to 2147483646]Object : Alarm and notification logs – Filter
Type : DP
Checks : [A]: It is lower than or equal to maximum MDnotification number when filled in.
minimum OMC notification number
Description : To select OMC–R manager notifications with a numbergreater than or equal to that one
Do not fill in if this criterion is not to be selected.
Value range : [0 to 2147483646]
Object : Alarm and notification logs – Filter
Type : DP
Checks : [A]: It is lower than or equal to maximum OMCnotification number when filled in.
minimum reception time
Description : To select messages received at that time or after
Absolute time format entry forms are detailed in NTP < 130 >.
Do not fill in if this criterion is not to be selected.
Value range : [<date>,<time>]Object : Alarm and notification logs – Filter
Type : DP
Checks : [A]: It is before maximum reception time whenfilled in.
Parameters listed in alphabetical orderNortel Networks Confidential 2–223
BSS Parameter Dictionary
minNbOfTDMA Class 2 M5
Description : Minimum number of TDMA frames that must be working inorder for the cell itself to be working.
The frame carrying the cell BCCH must be among them andis successfully configured.
Value range : [1 to 16]Object : bts
Default value : 1
Type : DP
Checks : [M]: This number is less than or equal to the number oftransceiver objects (TDMA frames) created forthe bts object.
[M]: The parent bsc objet is unlocked and the bts objectis locked.
minNbrGprsTs Class 3 (gprsBtsExtendedConf) V12
Description : Minimum number of TS dedicated to GPRS in the cell
Value range : [0 to 127]Object : bts
Feature : GPRS (TF1121 – V12)
Type : DP
Default value : 0
Checks : [M]: The parent bsc object is unlocked.
missDistWt Class 3 M6
Description : Weight applied to missing Distance measurement
The missing measurement is replaced by the latest receivedraw measurement weighed by this corrective factor whencalculating the average MS-BTS distance.
The range of permitted values makes missing distancemeasurements not favored.
Value range : [100 to 200] %Object : handOverControl
Default value : 110
Type : DP
Checks : [M]: The parent bsc objet is unlocked.
Nortel Networks Confidential2–224 Parameters listed in alphabetical order
PE/DCL/DD/0124411–9001–124
Standard 13.04/EN March 2002 GSM/BSS V13
missRxLevWt Class 3 M7
Description : Weight applied in case of missing signal strengthmeasurement report
The missing measurement is replaced by the latest computedarithmetic average, or by the latest received raw measurementif no average value is available, weighed by this correctivefactor when calculating the average signal strength in the cell.
Selecting the greatest value makes missing strengthmeasurements not favored.
Value range : [0 to 100] %Object : handOverControl
Default value : 90
Type : DP
Checks : [M]: The parent bsc objet is unlocked.
missRxQualWt Class 3 M8
Description : Weight applied to missing Quality measurement
The missing measurement is replaced by the latest computedarithmetic average, or by the latest received raw measurementif no average value is available, weighed by this correctivefactor when calculating the average bit error rate in the radiolink.
The range of permitted values makes missing qualitymeasurements not favored.
Value range : [100 to 200] %Object : handOverControl
Default value : 110
Type : DP
Checks : [M]: The parent bsc objet is unlocked.
mmsId V13
Description : Identifier of the ‘mms’ object class. This identifier is allocatedby the MD–R at object creation, depending on the shelf andslot numbers indicated by the BSC. This attribute cannot bemodified. This attribute is relevant for BSC e3 and TCU e3.
Value range : [0 to 2147483646]Object : mms
Type : DP
Parameters listed in alphabetical orderNortel Networks Confidential 2–225
BSS Parameter Dictionary
mmsUsage V13
Description : Indicates whether the MMS is private (i.e. associated to anOMU) ; or shared–mirrored (associated to the Control Node)
This attribute cannot be modified. It is set by the MD–R atMMS creation.
Value range : [0 (Shared) to 1 (Private)]Object : mms
Type : DP
Feature : AR 1209 – V13.1
mobileAllocation Class 2 M9
Description : List of up to sixty-four frequencies allotted in the networkfrequency band to a radio time slot which obeys frequencyhopping laws
Value range : [1 to 124] (GSM 900 network / Extended GSM network),[0 to 1023] (GSM–R),[512 to 885] (GSM 1800 network),[512 to 810] (GSM 1900 network)
Object : frequencyHoppingSystem
Type : DP
Checks : [C/M]: Each frequency occurs once in the list and isallotted to the parent bts object (cellAllocation).
[M]: If the frequencyHoppingSystem object isreferenced by a channel object dependent on theassociated bts object, the parent bsc object isunlocked and the associated bts object is locked.
mobileCountryCode Class 3
Description : Code of the PLMN home country
Refer to the next entry.
Value range : [0 to 999]Object : adjacentCellHandOver
Type : DP
Checks : [C]: This code is identical to the mobileCountryCodeattribute of the parent bsc object when it is definedfor that object.
[C/M]: A CGI is unique in the set including a serving celland its neigbor cells.
[M]: The parent bsc object is unlocked.
Nortel Networks Confidential2–226 Parameters listed in alphabetical order
PE/DCL/DD/0124411–9001–124
Standard 13.04/EN March 2002 GSM/BSS V13
mobileCountryCode Class 3
Description : Code of the PLMN home country
Refer to the next entry.
Value range : [0 to 999]
Object : adjacentCellReselection
Type : DP
Checks : [C]: This code is identical to the mobileCountryCodeattribute of the parent bsc object when it is definedfor that object.
[C/M]: A CGI is unique in the set including a serving celland its neigbor cells.
[M]: The parent bsc object is unlocked.
mobileCountryCode Class 1
Description : Code of the PLMN home country. It must be defined when theMSC does not manage cell global identifiers (CGI).
Refer to the next entry.
Value range : [0 to 999]Object : bsc
Condition : To define when MSC does not manage cell global identifiers(CGI).
Type : DP
Checks : [M]: The bsc object is locked.
Parameters listed in alphabetical orderNortel Networks Confidential 2–227
BSS Parameter Dictionary
mobileCountryCode Class 2
Description : Code of the PLMN home country
A CGI (Cell Global Identifier) is unique within a location area.It identifies a cell unambiguously in the PLMN and includesfour fields: cellIdentityCode (CI), locationAreaCode(LAC), mobileCountryCode (MCC), andmobileNetworkCode (MNC).
Value range : [0 to 999]
Object : bts
Type : DP
Checks : [C]: This code is identical to the mobileCountryCodeattribute of the parent bsc object when it is definedfor that object.
[C/M]: A CGI is unique in the set including a serving celland its neigbor cells.
[M]: The parent bsc object is unlocked and the btsobject is locked.
mobileNetworkCode Class 3
Description : Code of the PLMN in the country
Refer to the next entry.
Value range : [0 to 999]Object : adjacentCellHandOver
Type : DP
Checks : [C]: This code is identical to the mobileNetworkCodeattribute of the parent bsc object when it is definedfor that object.
[C/M]: A CGI is unique in the set including a serving celland its neigbor cells.
[M]: The parent bsc object is unlocked.
Nortel Networks Confidential2–228 Parameters listed in alphabetical order
PE/DCL/DD/0124411–9001–124
Standard 13.04/EN March 2002 GSM/BSS V13
mobileNetworkCode Class 3
Description : Code of the PLMN in the country
Refer to the next entry.
Value range : [0 to 999]
Object : adjacentCellReselection
Type : DP
Checks : [C]: This code is identical to the mobileNetworkCodeattribute of the parent bsc object when it is definedfor that object.
[C/M]: A CGI is unique in the set including a serving celland its neigbor cells.
[M]: The parent bsc object is unlocked.
mobileNetworkCode Class 1
Description : Code of the PLMN in the country. It must be defined when theMSC does not manage cell global identifiers (CGI).
Refer to the next entry.
Value range : [0 to 999]
Object : bsc
Type : DP
Checks : [M]: The bsc object is locked.
mobileNetworkCode Class 2
Description : Code of the PLMN in the country
A CGI (Cell Global Identifier) is unique within a location area.It identifies a cell unambiguously in the PLMN and includesfour fields: cellIdentityCode (CI), locationAreaCode(LAC), mobileCountryCode (MCC), andmobileNetworkCode (MNC).
Value range : [0 to 999]
Object : bts
Type : DP
Parameters listed in alphabetical orderNortel Networks Confidential 2–229
BSS Parameter Dictionary
Checks : [C]: This code is identical to the mobileNetworkCodeattribute of the parent bsc object when it is definedfor that object.
[C/M]: A CGI is unique in the set including a serving celland its neigbor cells.
[M]: The parent bsc object is unlocked and bts object islocked.
modeModifyMandatory Class 3 M10 V9
Description : Whether a CHANNEL MODE MODIFY message should besent to the mobile after a directed retry handover in the BSS
Value range : [used (yes) / not used (no)]
Object : bsc
Default value : not used
Type : DP
Checks : [C/M]: The attribute value can only be “used” if directedretry handovers are allowed at BSC level. Referto the interBscDirectedRetry andintraBscDirectedRetry entries in theDictionary.
[M]: The bsc object is unlocked.
monitoredObjectClass
Description : Class of the serving object for the notifications processed
Value range : [adjacentCellHandOver / adjacentCellReselection / bsc / bts /btsSiteManager / channel / frequencyHoppingSystem /handOverControl / lapdLink / pcmCircuit / pcu / pcusn /powerControl / signallingLink / signallingLinkSet /signallingPoint / software / transceiver /transceiverEquipment / transceiverZone / transcoder /transcoderBoard / xtp]
Object : mdWarning
Type : DP
Nortel Networks Confidential2–230 Parameters listed in alphabetical order
PE/DCL/DD/0124411–9001–124
Standard 13.04/EN March 2002 GSM/BSS V13
monitoredObjectInstance
Description : Identification of a serving object in the class
They identify the object that issued the processednotifications. Enter the concerned object identificationsequence.
Object : mdWarning
Type : DP
monitoredSpecificProblemsList
Description : List of the specific problems taken into account in the process
This parameter allows to filter the processed notificationsaccording to the following criteria: cause number, faultnumber, and processor number.
Value range : [(cause, faultNumber) pair]
Object : mdWarning if detectionFunction = “excessiveAnomalyRate”
Type : DP
month
Description : Month on which the observation report was created
Date format entry forms are detailed in NTP < 130 >.
Value range : [<date>]
Object : Display busiest day of the month report
Type : DP
msBtsDistanceInterCell Class 3 M11
Description : Whether inter-bts handovers are allowed in a cell for distancereasons
Value range : [enabled / disabled]
Object : handOverControl
Default value : enabled
Type : DP
Checks : [M]: the parent bsc object is unlocked.
Parameters listed in alphabetical orderNortel Networks Confidential 2–231
BSS Parameter Dictionary
msCapWeightActive Class 2 (gprsBtsLockExtendedConf) V12
Description : It specifies whether the Weight Fair Allocation algorithm isused or not
Value range : [yes / no]
Object : bts
Feature : GPRS (SV407 – V12)
Default value : yes
Type : DP
Checks : [M]: The parent bsc object is unlocked and the btsobject is locked.
msRangeMax Class 3 M12
Description : Maximum MS-to-BTS distance beyond which a handovermay be triggered. It can be set to 1 for a microcell and is lessthan callClearing in all cases.
If the associated serving cell is a concentric cell, the followinginequality, that is not checked by the system, must be true(refer to this entry in the Dictionary):
msRangeMax ≥ concentAlgoExtMsRange
Value range : [1 to 34] km (non–extended mode)[1 to 120] km (extended mode)
Object : handOverControl
Default value : 34 in non–extended mode, 89 in extended mode
Type : DP
Checks : [C/M]: msRangeMax < callClearing (associated btsobject attribute)
[C/M]: The maximum distance is limited to 34 km if theextended cell attribute of the associated bts objectis “false”.
[C/M]: The maximum distance is 120 km if the extendedcell attribute of the bts object is “true”.
[M]: The parent bsc object is unlocked.
Nortel Networks Confidential2–232 Parameters listed in alphabetical order
PE/DCL/DD/0124411–9001–124
Standard 13.04/EN March 2002 GSM/BSS V13
msTxPwrMax Class 3 M13
Description : Maximum MS transmission power in a serving cell. It is equalto msTxPwrMaxCCH in a GSM 900 network.
Value range : [5 to 43, by steps of 2] dBm (GSM 900, GSM–R, E–GSM, andGSM 900 – GSM 1800 networks)[0 to 36, by steps of 2] dBm (GSM 1800, andGSM 1800 – GSM 900 networks)[0 to 33] dBm (GSM 1900 network)
Object : bts
Default value : Typical value of 33 dBm for GSM 900 handhelds and 30 dBmfor GSM 1800 and 1900 handhelds
Type : DP
Checks : [C/M]: GSM 900 networks: msTxPwrMax =msTxPwrMaxCCH
[M]: The parent bsc object is unlocked.
Note : The msTxPwrMax values [displayed by the OMC–R] /[typed by the OMC–R operator] are encoded values. Thecorresponding maximum MS transmission powers in a servingcell are compliant to GSM Rec 05.05, that is to say:
[5 to 39] dBm (GSM 900 network)
msTxPwrMax2ndBand Class 2 M14 V12
Description : Maximum MS transmission power in the band 1 of thedualband cell depending on the network type (BCCH is onlydefined in band 0)
Value range : [0 to 36, by steps of 2] dBm (GSM 900 – GSM 1800 network)[5 to 43, by steps of 2] dBm (GSM 1800 – GSM 900 network)
Object : bts
Default value : Typical value of 33 dBm for GSM 900 handhelds, 30 dBm forGSM 1800 and 1900
Type : DP
Feature : Dualband cell management (TF875 – V12)
Parameters listed in alphabetical orderNortel Networks Confidential 2–233
BSS Parameter Dictionary
Checks : [C/M]: The attribute value is within the range [0 to 36] andeven when the bts object standardIndicatorattribute is “gsmdcs”.
[C/M]: The attribute value is within the range [5 to 43] andodd when the bts object standardIndicatorattribute is “dcsgsm”.
[M]: The parent bsc object is unlocked and theassociated bts object is locked.
Note : The msTxPwrMax values [displayed by the OMC–R] /[typed by the OMC–R operator] are encoded values. Thecorresponding maximum MS transmission powers in a servingcell are compliant to GSM Rec 05.05, that is to say:
[5 to 39] dBm (GSM 900 network)
[0 to 36] dBm (GSM 1800 network)
msTxPwrMaxCCH Class 3M15
Description : Maximum MS transmission power in a cell CCCH
The BSC relays the information to the mobiles in the AbisCELL MODIFY REQUEST message.
Value range : [5 to 43, by steps of 2] dBm (GSM 900, GSM–R, E–GSM, andGSM 900 – GSM 1800 networks)[0 to 36, by steps of 2] dBm (GSM 1800 andGSM 1800 – GSM 900 networks) [0 to 33] dBm (GSM 1900 network)
Object : bts
Default value : Typical value of 33 dBm for GSM 900 handhelds, 30 dBm forGSM 1800 and 1900
Type : DP
Checks : [M]: The parent bsc object is unlocked.
Remark : If the cell is used as a neighbor cell of another serving cell inthe network, msTxPwrMaxCCH must be identical to themsTxPwrMaxCell power defined for the correspondingadjacentCellHandOver object (the values must be checked byusers).
Note : The msTxPwrMax values [displayed by the OMC–R] /[typed by the OMC–R operator] are encoded values. Thecorresponding maximum MS transmission powers in a servingcell are compliant to GSM Rec 05.05, that is to say:
[5 to 39] dBm (GSM 900 network)
Nortel Networks Confidential2–234 Parameters listed in alphabetical order
PE/DCL/DD/0124411–9001–124
Standard 13.04/EN March 2002 GSM/BSS V13
msTxPwrMaxCell Class 3 M16
Description : Maximum MS transmission power in a neighbor cell. It isequal to msTxPwrMaxCCH when the cell is declared as aserving cell on the network (the value must be checked byusers).
Value range : [5 to 43, by steps of 2] dBm (GSM 900, GSM–R, E–GSM, andGSM 900 – GSM 1800 networks)[0 to 36, by steps of 2] dBm (GSM 1800 networkand GSM 1800 – GSM 900) [0 to 33] dBm (GSM 1900 network)
Object : adjacentCellHandOver
Default value : Typical value of 33 dBm for GSM 900 handhelds and 30 dBmfor GSM 1800 and 1900 handhelds
Type : DP
Checks : [M]: The parent bsc object is unlocked.
Remark : If the cell is used as a neighbor cell of another serving cell inthe network, msTxPwrMaxCell should be identical to themsTxPwrMaxCCH power defined for the correspondingadjacentCellHandOver object (the values must be checked byusers).
Note : The msTxPwrMax values [displayed by the OMC–R] /[typed by the OMC–R operator] are encoded values. Thecorresponding maximum MS transmission powers in a servingcell are compliant to GSM Rec 05.05, that is to say:
[5 to 39] dBm (GSM 900 network)
[0 to 36] dBm (GSM 1800 network)
Parameters listed in alphabetical orderNortel Networks Confidential 2–235
BSS Parameter Dictionary
multi band reporting Class 3 M17 V10
Description : Minimum number of cells that multiband MSs must report intheir radio measurements in each frequency band
Value range : [the six strongest cells / the strongest cell out band / the twostrongest cells out band / the three strongest cells out band]
six strongest allowed cells irrespective of their frequencyband
the strongest allowed cell outside the current frequencyband
the two strongest allowed cells outside the currentfrequency band
the three strongest allowed cells outside the currentfrequency band
Object : bts
Default value : the six strongest cells
Type : DP
Checks : [M] : The parent bsc object is unlocked
multiple site V8
Description : Identifier of a multiple site object defined with regard to a bscobject
Value range : [0 to 65535]
Object : multiple site
Type : Id
Checks : [C]: The multiple site object is not created for theparent bsc object.
[C/M]: The btsSiteManager objects in thebtsSiteManagerList list are created for the parentbsc object and are not referenced by anothermultiple site object.
[M/D]: The multiple site object is created and the currentbtsSiteManager objects referenced in thebtsSiteManagerList list are locked.
Nortel Networks Confidential2–236 Parameters listed in alphabetical order
PE/DCL/DD/0124411–9001–124
Standard 13.04/EN March 2002 GSM/BSS V13
multipleVocoders Class 1 V8
Description : Whether the BSC can be linked to one or other MSC that usedifferent speech coding protocols
An MSC uses either the GSM protocol or the JTC protocol.“False” means that only the GSM protocol is compatible.
Value range : [true / false]Object : bsc
Default value : True
Type : DP
Checks : [M]: The bsc object is locked.
muxNumber Class 3 V12
Description : pcuSN mux identification
Value range : [noMux / oneMux / twoMux]
Object : pcusn
Feature : GPRS (SV407 – V12)
Type : DP
Parameters listed in alphabetical orderNortel Networks Confidential 2–237
BSS Parameter Dictionary
N
N3103 Class 3 (gprsBtsExtendedConf) V12
Description : Maximum number of repetition of a PUAN (Packet UplinkAck/Nack) message
Value range : [1 to 64]Object : bts
Default value : 5
Feature : GPRS (SV407 – V12)
Type : DP
Checks : [M]: The parent bsc object is unlocked.
N3105max Class 2 (gprsTranscvLockBtsExtendedConf) V12
Description : Maximum number of consecutive RLC data blocks sent by thePCU with a valid RRBP and not having been acknowledgedby the MS
Value range : [1 to 64]Object : transceiver
Default value : 4
Feature : GPRS (SV407 – V12)
Type : DP
Checks : [M]: The parent bsc object is unlocked and thetransceiver object is locked.
nAvgl Class 3 (gprsAvgParam) V12
Description : Signal strength filter used for MS output power control
It specifies the “Interference signal strength filter” constant forpower control. NAVG –I = 2 (k/2) with k = nAvgI.
Value range : [0 to 15]Object : bts
Default value : 0
Feature : GPRS (SV407 – V12)
Type : DP
Checks : [M]: The parent bsc object is unlocked.
Nortel Networks Confidential2–238 Parameters listed in alphabetical order
PE/DCL/DD/0124411–9001–124
Standard 13.04/EN March 2002 GSM/BSS V13
nAvgT Class 3 (gprsAvgParam) V12
Description : Signal strength filter used for MS output power control, whichspecifies the “Signal strength filter period” for power controlin packet transfer mode. TAVG –T = 2 (k/2) /6 with k = nAvgT.
Value range : [0 to 25]Object : bts
Feature : GPRS (SV407 – V12)
Type : DP
Checks : [M]: The parent bsc object is unlocked.
nAvgW Class 3 (gprsAvgParam) V12
Description : Signal strength filter used for MS output power control, whichspecifies the “Signal strength filter period” for power controlin packet idle mode. TAVG –W = 2 (k/2) /6 with k = nAvgW.
Value range : [0 to 25]Object : bts
Feature : GPRS (SV407 – V12)
Type : DP
Checks : [M]: The parent bsc object is unlocked.
Note : Tavg_w has no impact on frequency measurements andcomputations done by the MS, which is always equal to thefrequency of paging blocks decoding.
nbOfRepeat Class 2 N1 V8
Description : Maximum number of times that paging messages are repeatedto mobiles that belong to the same paging sub–group
It is set to “3” in former BSS versions (static configurationparameter).
The following inequality, that is not checked by the system,must be true (refer to these entries in the Dictionary):
retransDuration ≥ (delayBetweenRetrans + 1) x nbOfRepeat
Value range : [0 to 22]Object : bts
Default value : 3
Type : DP
Checks : [M]: The parent bsc object is unlocked and the btsobject is locked.
Parameters listed in alphabetical orderNortel Networks Confidential 2–239
BSS Parameter Dictionary
nbrFreeTchBeforeAnticipation Class 3 (gprsBtsExtendedConf) V12
Description : Attribute reserved for future use
Value range : [0]Object : bts
Default value : 0
Feature : GPRS (SV407 – V12)
Type : DP
Checks : [M]: The parent bsc object is unlocked.
nbrFreeTchToEndAnticipation Class 3 (gprsBtsExtendedConf) V12
Description : Attribute reserved for future use
Value range : [0]
Object : bts
Default value : 0
Feature : GPRS (SV407 – V12)
Type : DP
Checks : [M]: The parent bsc object is unlocked.
nbrTch Class 2 (gprsPcuCrossConnectList) V12
Description : Number of TSs used for each Agprs PCM link
Value range : [0 to 31]
Object : pcu
Default value : 0
Feature : GPRS (SV407 – V12)
Type : DP
Checks : [M]: The parent bsc object is unlocked and the pcuobject is locked.
Note : This parameter is only available for BSC 2G
Nortel Networks Confidential2–240 Parameters listed in alphabetical order
PE/DCL/DD/0124411–9001–124
Standard 13.04/EN March 2002 GSM/BSS V13
NCHPosition Class2 N2 V12
Description : Defines the number of blocks and position of the first block forNCH
Value range : [0 block1 block, first block 01 block, first block 11 block, first block 21 block, first block 31 block, first block 41 block, first block 51 block, first block 62 blocks, first block 02 blocks, first block 12 blocks, first block 22 blocks, first block 32 blocks, first block 42 blocks, first block 53 blocks, first block 03 blocks, first block 13 blocks, first block 23 blocks, first block 33 blocks, first block 44 blocks, first block 04 blocks, first block 14 blocks, first block 24 blocks, first block 35 blocks, first block 05 blocks, first block 15 blocks, first block 26 blocks, first block 06 blocks, first block 17 blocks, first block 0]
Object : bts
Default value : 0 block
Type : DP
Feature : (GSM–R V12)
Checks : [M] : The parent bsc object is unlocked and the btsobject is locked.
Note : NCHPosition – noOfBlocksForAccessGrant relationaccording to channelType attribute
Parameters listed in alphabetical orderNortel Networks Confidential 2–241
BSS Parameter Dictionary
channelType NCHPosition noOfBlocksForAccessGrant
mainBCCH 1 block, first block 0 to 62 blocks, first block 0 to 53 blocks, first block 0 to 44 blocks, first block 0 to 35 blocks, first block 0 to 26 blocks, first block 0 to 17 blocks, first block 0
>1>2>3>4>5>6= 7
mainBCCHCombined 1 block, first block 02 blocks, first block 0
1 < value ≤ 2= 2
network protocolUsed V13
Description : Indicates which protocol is used (X.25 or IP). This attributeis modified by the Manager. Value changes are notified to theManager. This attribute can be modified only if the‘bscMdInterface’ object instance is locked.
Value range : [X25 / IP]Object : bscMdInterface
Type : DP
networkColourCode Class 3
Description : Color code of the mobile network. The (BCC,NCC) pair formsthe cell BSIC.
Value range : [0 to 7]
Object : adjacentCellHandOver
Type : DP
Checks : [M]: Each defined (baseColourCode,bCCHFrequency, networkColourCode)combination is unique in the set including aserving cell and its neighbor cells.
[M]: The parent bsc object is unlocked.
Nortel Networks Confidential2–242 Parameters listed in alphabetical order
PE/DCL/DD/0124411–9001–124
Standard 13.04/EN March 2002 GSM/BSS V13
networkColourCode Class 2
Description : Color code of the mobile network. It allows countries withcommon borders to allocate BCCs and BCCH frequencies attheir own convenience in international border areas. The(BCC,NCC) pair forms the cell BSIC.
The information is broadcast on the cell SCH.
The Base Station Identity Code (BSIC) is a six-bit code: bits6–5–4 = NCC (PLMN color code), bits 3–2–1 = BCC (Basestation color code). Outside border areas, the NCC bits can beused to increase the number of BCC possibilities.
Value range : [0 to 7]
Object : bts
Type : DP
Checks : [M]: Each defined (baseColourCode,bCCHFrequency, networkColourCode)combination is unique in the set including aserving cell and its neighbor cells.
[M]: The parent bsc object is unlocked and the btsobject is locked.
Remark : The NCC should not be confused with the MCC (MobileCountry Code) nor the MNC (Mobile Network Code), whichare part of the CGI (Cell Global Identifier).
networkIndicator Class 1
Description : Identifier of the SS7 network
Value range : [nationalUse/internationalUse]
Object : signallingLinkSet
Type : DP
Checks : [C/M]: The only value accepted by the system is“nationalUse”.
[M]: The parent bsc object is locked.
Remark : Since the system accepts only one value for this attribute,changing it has no meaning. To change its value, consultNTP < 34 >.
Parameters listed in alphabetical orderNortel Networks Confidential 2–243
BSS Parameter Dictionary
networkIndicator Class 1
Description : Identifier of the SS7 network
Value range : [nationalUse]Object : signallingPoint
Type : DP
Checks : [C/M]: The only value accepted by the system is“nationalUse”.
[M]: The parent bsc object is locked.
Remark : Since the system accepts only one value for this attribute,changing it has no meaning. To change its value, consultNTP < 34 >.
Note : This parameter is only available for BSC 2G
new name
Description : New name to give to the short message. It is different from thecurrent short message identifier.
Value range : [case sensitive, 20 characters max]Object : short message – Rename
Type : DP
Checks : [A]: It is different from the current short messageidentifier.
[A]: It does not exist on the OMC–R.
new password 1st try
Description : User’s new password to use in the next login request. It beginswith a letter, contains at least one non–alphabetical characteramong the first eight characters, and is case sensitive. It is notdisplayed.
Value range : [6 characters min]Object : user profile – Change password
Type : DP
Checks : [A]: It begins with a letter and contains onenon–alphanumerical character among the firsteight characters.
[A]: It is at least six-character long.
[A]: It is different from the N previous occurrences (Nis set in static configuration data).
Nortel Networks Confidential2–244 Parameters listed in alphabetical order
PE/DCL/DD/0124411–9001–124
Standard 13.04/EN March 2002 GSM/BSS V13
new password 2nd try
Description : Second definition of the user’s new password that will not bevalidated unless it is exactly the same as new password 1st
try. It is not displayed.
Refer to the new password 1st try entry in the dictionary.
The new password is validated when opening a new session
Value range : [case sensitive]
Object : user profile – Change password
Type : DP
Checks : [A]: It begins with a letter and contains onenon–alphanumerical character among the firsteight characters.
[A]: It is at least six-character long.
[A]: It is different from the N previous occurrences(N is set in static configuration data).
new power control algorithm Class 3 N3 V9
Description : Algorithm used by the BTS to control power in a cell
The “step by step” value refers to the standard power controlalgorithm.
The “one shot” value refers to the advanced power controlalgorithm.
The “enhanced one shot “ value refers to the advanced poweralgorithm used in connection with the handOverControlobject rxLevHreqaveBeg attribute used in the early handovermechanism.
Value range : [step by step / one shot / enhanced one shot]
Object : bts
Feature : Fast power control at TCH assignment (TF975 – V12)
Default value : one shot
Type : DP
Checks : [M] : The parent bsc object is unlocked.
Note : The “enhanced one shot” attribute value can only apply to nonmixed DCU4 or DRX transceiver architecture.
Parameters listed in alphabetical orderNortel Networks Confidential 2–245
BSS Parameter Dictionary
next execution time
Description : Date and time of next job run
Value range : [<date> <time>]
Object : job – Display
Condition : This parameter is significant and displayed only when a jobrun periodicity is defined.
Type : DD
night intervention
Description : Type of action associated with an alarm criterion in thenighttime configuration
Value range : [noAlarm / critical / major / minor]
Object : alarm criteria
Type : DP
noOfBlocksForAccessGrant Class 2 N4
Description : Number of CCCH blocks not used for paging
A BCCH is combined when it shares the same radio time slotwith four SDCCHs which can include a CBCH (refer to thechannelType entry in the Dictionary). In that case, theattribute value is no greater than to 2 (the value must bechecked by users).
Value range : [0 to 2] if the cell uses a combined BCCH,[1 to 7] otherwise.“0” means that PCH blocks are used for sending immediateassignment messages as and when needed.
Object : bts
Default value : 0
Type : DP
Checks : [M]: This number is greater than zero if thechannelType of one of the channel objectsdependent on the bts object is “sdcch8CBCH”(refer to this entry in the Dictionary).
[M]: The parent bsc object is unlocked and the btsobject is locked.
Nortel Networks Confidential2–246 Parameters listed in alphabetical order
PE/DCL/DD/0124411–9001–124
Standard 13.04/EN March 2002 GSM/BSS V13
noOfMultiframesBetweenPaging Class 2 N5
Description : Number of occurences of a paging sub-group
The greater this number, the greater the number of pagingsub-groups.
Value range : [2 to 9] multi-frame of fifty-one framesObject : bts
Default value : 6
Type : DP
Checks : [M]: The parent bsc object is unlocked and the btsobject is locked.
notAllowedAccessClasses Class 3 N6
Description : List of mobile access classes that are forbidden in the cell,except case of congestion.
This attribute, together with the emergencyCallRestrictedattribute, allows to control access to a cell according to theservice classes authorized.
Value range : List of mobile access class:
[0 to 9]: user classes
[11 to 15]: operator classesObject : bts
Default value : Leave the field empty
Type : DP
Checks : [M]: The parent bsc object is unlocked.
Remark : General conditions mobiles are granted access to a cell areallotted at subscription time.
notification number
Description : Reference number of the associated notification
Value range : [0 to 2147483646]Object : alarmRecord,
mdScanReportRecord,observationFileReadyRecord,stateChangeRecord,traceFileReadyRecord,traceLogRecord
Type : DP
Parameters listed in alphabetical orderNortel Networks Confidential 2–247
BSS Parameter Dictionary
notification type
Description : To select messages according to the type of the notifications
Do not fill in if this criterion is not to be selected.
Value range : [attributeValueChange / communicationsAlarm /environmentalAlarm / equipmentAlarm / objectCreation /objectDeletion / processingErrorAlarm /qualityOfServiceAlarm / stateChange / specific]
Object : Alarm and notification logs – Filter
Type : DP
number of records
Description : Number of records
Object : log – Display
Type : DP
Remark : The attributes of the log objects are not managed by the users
numberOfEnabledHDLCPorts V13
Description : Number of ‘enabled’ HDLC ports in the TMU or IEM module.
Operational State of the HDLC channels in the TMU/IEMmodules.
Operational State of the HDLC channels in the TMU/LSAmodules. The global Operational State of the HDLC feature isgiven by the number of ports/channels with an individualoperational state set to ‘enabled’.
This attribute is dynamically managed by the BSS. It is set toNULL at ‘iem’ or ‘tmu’ object instance creation. Valuechanges are not notified to the Manager.
This attribute is relevant for BSC e3.
Value range : [0 to 65535]
Object : iem, tmu
Type : DD
Feature : AR 1209 – V13.1
Nortel Networks Confidential2–248 Parameters listed in alphabetical order
PE/DCL/DD/0124411–9001–124
Standard 13.04/EN March 2002 GSM/BSS V13
numberOfPwciSamples Class 3 V12
Description : Minimum number of PwCI samples required to reach areliable distribution (representative of the real distribution inthe whole cell) * 1000
Value range : [0 to 60]
Object : handOverControl
Default value : 20
Feature : Automatic Cell Tiering (TF995–V12)
Type : DP
Checks : [M]: The parent bsc object is unlocked.
numberOfSlotsSpreadTrans Class 3 N7
Description : Number of radio time slots over which RACH transmissionaccess are spread in a random way to avoid collisions
The information is broadcast to the mobiles at regular intervalson the cell BCCH.
In the event of non–system response, the mobile will renew theRACH bursts after a randomly defined period that varies withnumberOfSlotsSpreadTrans.
MS Phase 1
Fixed Delay
1st access 2nd access
Time0250 or 350 ms
Variable delay from 0 to(numberOfSlotsSpreadTrans –1) slots
The time T between two transmissions of the same RACHburst is the following:
T= [D + (N+1) x 4.615]ms where
D is the maximum system response pending time:
N is the randomly number generated by the mobile in the
Parameters listed in alphabetical orderNortel Networks Confidential 2–249
BSS Parameter Dictionary
range [0 to numberOfSlotsSpreadTrans–1]
4.615 ms is the time occupied by a time slot.
MS Phase 2
Fixed Delay
1st access 2nd access
Time0S TS RACH
Variable delay from 0 to(numberOfSlotsSpreadTrans –1) slots
The time T between two transmissions of the same RACHburst is the following (whichever is the BCCH, combined ornot):
T= 4.615 x [S+(N + 1)] ms where
S is a parameter depending on the BCCH configuration andon the value of numberOfSlotsSpreadTrans (see tablehereafter)
N is the randomly number generated by the mobile in therange [0 to numberOfSlotsSpreadTrans–1]
4.615 ms is the time occupied by a time slot.
NumberOfSlotsSpreadTransS on not
combinedBCCH
S oncombined
BCCH
3, 8, 14, 50 55 41
4, 9, 16 76 52
5, 10, 20 109 58
6, 11, 25 163 86
7, 12, 32 217 11
Value range : [3 to 12 / 14 / 16 / 20 / 25 / 32 / 50] time slotsObject : bts
Default value : 32
Type : DP
Checks : [M]: The parent bsc object is unlocked.
Nortel Networks Confidential2–250 Parameters listed in alphabetical order
PE/DCL/DD/0124411–9001–124
Standard 13.04/EN March 2002 GSM/BSS V13
Note : The choice will depend on the quantities of GSM phase 1 andGSM phase 2 mobiles.
For Mobile phase 1, numberOfSlotsSpreadTrans = 50 leadsto the lower double allocation rate.
For Mobile phase 2, numberOfSlotsSpreadTrans = 6, 7, 11,12, 25, 32 (respectively 5, 10, 20) for BCCH combined(respectively BCCH not combined) leads to the lower doubleallocation rate.
Therefore, for a network that handles a combination of bothtypes of mobiles, numberOfSlotsSpreadTrans should be setto 32 (default value).
numberOfTCHFreeBeforeCongestion Class 3 N8 V9
Description : Minimum number of free TCHs which triggers the beginningof the TCH congestion phase and the beginning of the trafficoverload condition (this parameter takes also into account thepreempted PDTCH)
Value range : [0 to infinite]Object : bts
Default value : 0
Type : DP
Checks : [M]: The parent bsc object is unlocked.
[C/M]: numberOfTCHFreeBeforeCongestion ≤numberOfTCHFreeToEndCongestion
numberOfTCHFreeToEndCongestion Class 3 N9 V9
Description : Threshold that gives the number of free TCHs, which triggersthe end of TCH congestion phase and the end of the trafficoverload condition (this parameter takes also into account thepreempted PDTCH)
Value range : [0 to infinite]Object : bts
Default value : 0
Type : DP
Checks : [M]: The parent bsc object is unlocked.
[C/M]: numberOfTCHFreeToEndCongestion ≥numberOfTCHFreeBeforeCongestion
Parameters listed in alphabetical orderNortel Networks Confidential 2–251
BSS Parameter Dictionary
numberOfTCHQueuedBeforeCongestion Class 3 N10 V9
Description : Maximum number of TCH allocation requests queued whichtriggers the beginning of the TCH congestion phase and thebeginning of the traffic overload condition
Value range : [0 to infinite]
Object : bts
Default value : 0
Type : DP
Checks : [M]: The parent bsc object is unlocked.
[C/M]: numberOfTCHQueuedBeforeCongestion ≥numberOfTCHQueuedToEndCongestion
numberOfTCHQueuedToEndCongestion Class 3 N11 V9
Description : Maximum number of TCH allocation requests queued whichtriggers the end of TCH congestion phase and the end of thetraffic overload condition
Value range : [0 to infinite]Object : bts
Default value : 0
Type : DP
Checks : [M]: The parent bsc object is unlocked.
[C/M]: numberOfTCHQueuedToEndCongestion ≤numberOfTCHQueuedBeforeCongestion
Nortel Networks Confidential2–252 Parameters listed in alphabetical order
PE/DCL/DD/0124411–9001–124
Standard 13.04/EN March 2002 GSM/BSS V13
O
objectClass
Description : Q3 object class
Value range : [adjacentCellHandOver / adjacentCellReselection /alarmRecord / bsc / bscCounterList / bscMdInterface / bts /btsSiteManager / callPathTrace / channel / efd /frequencyHoppingSystem / handOverControl / lapdLink / log/ md / mdScanner / mdScanReportRecord / mdWarning /network / observationFileReadyRecord / pcmCircuit /powerControl / signallingLink / signallingLinkSet /signallingPoint / software / stateChangeRecord / traceControl/ traceFileReadyRecord / traceLogRecord / transceiver /transceiverEquipment / transceiverZone / transcoder /transcoderBoard / xtp]
Object : alarmRecord,mdScanReportRecord,observationFileReadyRecord,stateChangeRecord,traceFileReadyRecord,traceLogRecord
Type : DP
objectInstance
Description : Scope of an alarm criteria. It covers all network objects whenundefined.
Object : alarm criteria
Type : DP
Parameters listed in alphabetical orderNortel Networks Confidential 2–253
BSS Parameter Dictionary
Object Filter List V12
Description : To select messages issued by one or several objects, and theirsubtree (optional).
The Object Filter List parameter includes the followingcomponents: objects and scope.
Click the Modify button to enter the names of the objects tobe selected.
The scope enables to select the subtree of an object.
Value range : objects [adjacentCellHandOver / adjacentCellReselection /alarmRecord / bsc / bscCounterList / bscMdInterface / bts /btsSiteManager / callPathTrace / channel / efd /frequencyHoppingSystem / handOverControl / lapdLink / log/ md / mdScanner / mdScanReportRecord / mdWarning /network / observationFileReadyRecord / omc / pcmCircuit /pcu / pcusn / powerControl / signallingLink /signallingLinkSet / signallingPoint / software /stateChangeRecord / traceControl / traceFileReadyRecord /traceLogRecord / transceiver / transceiverEquipment /transceiverZone / transcoder / transcoderBoard / xtp]
Object : Alarm and notification logs – Filter
Type : DP
objects
Description : To select messages issued by one or several objects (50 objectsmax), enter the concerned object classe(s). This field has to beempty to select all object classes.
Do not fill in if this criterion is not to be selected.
If a class is selected, the user may select one or more objectscreated in that class. If no object is selected, all messagesissued by all objects created in the class are displayed.
Nortel Networks Confidential2–254 Parameters listed in alphabetical order
PE/DCL/DD/0124411–9001–124
Standard 13.04/EN March 2002 GSM/BSS V13
Value range : [adjacentCellHandOver / adjacentCellReselection /alarmRecord / bsc / bscCounterList / bscMdInterface / bts /btsSiteManager / callPathTrace / channel / efd /frequencyHoppingSystem / handOverControl / lapdLink / log/ md / mdScanner / mdScanReportRecord / mdWarning /network / observationFileReadyRecord / omc / pcmCircuit /pcu / pcusn / powerControl / signallingLink /signallingLinkSet / signallingPoint / software /stateChangeRecord / traceControl / traceFileReadyRecord /traceLogRecord / transceiver / transceiverEquipment /transceiverZone / transcoder / transcoderBoard / xtp]
Object : Alarm and notification logs – Filter
Type : DP
objects assigned
Description : List of the BSSs assigned to the relay. Fill in the list with bscobject identifiers or names.
Value range : [1 to 255]Object : relay
Type : DP
Remark : A BSS can be assigned to several relays at the same time.
observation type V11
Description : Type of the observation
Value range : [general Statistic / fast Statistic / real Time /diagnostic]Object : bscCounterList
Type : DP
observation type V11
Description : Type of the observation
Value range : [Observation real time / Observation fast statistic /Performance monitor]
Object : report template
Type : DP
Observed counters V11
Description : List of counters (Q3 names) chosen for observation
Object : report template
Value range : [list of Q3 counter names]Type : DP
Parameters listed in alphabetical orderNortel Networks Confidential 2–255
BSS Parameter Dictionary
Observed object class V11
Description : Class of object the user wants to observe
Value range : [bsc / btsSiteManager / bts / pcmCircuit /adjacentCellHandOver / transceiverZone /transceiverEquipment (V12 only) / omc (V12 only) /md (V12 only) / machine (V12 only)]
Object : report template
Type : DP
occupationState
Description : Whether the PCM TS used by the terrestrial circuit is occupiedby an SS7 channel
This attribute is significant provided the xtp object isunlocked.
Value range : [preempted / notPreempted]
preempted The terrestrial circuit is mapped on a. . . . . . . . time slot occupied by an SS7 channelon the Ater interface.
notPreempted The PCM time slot is available for the. . . . . traffic.
Object : xtp
Type : DD
Note : This parameter is only available for BSC 2G
offsetLoad Class 3 O1 V12
Description : Load offset applied by the bsc to the cell selection process
Value range : [0 to 63] dB
Object : adjacentCellHandOver
Default value : 0
Feature : Handover decision according to adjacent cell priority and load(TF716 – V12)
Type : DP
Checks : [C/M]: This attribute must be in the range [0 to 63].
[M]: The parent bsc object is unlocked.
Nortel Networks Confidential2–256 Parameters listed in alphabetical order
PE/DCL/DD/0124411–9001–124
Standard 13.04/EN March 2002 GSM/BSS V13
Notes : When set to “0”, no offset is effective.This parameter is set to “0” for the cells that do not belongto the related bsc object.
offsetPriority Class 3 O2 V12
Description : Priority offset applied by the bsc to the cell selection process
Value range : [1 to 5]Object : adjacentCellHandOver
Default value : 1
Type : DP
Feature : Handover decision according to adjacent cell priority and load(TF716 – V12)
Checks : [C/M]: This attribute must be in the range [1 to 5].
[M]: The parent bsc object is unlocked.
Note : “1” is the highest priority.
OMC notification number
Description : To select OMC–R manager notifications with a given number
Do not fill in if this criterion is not to be selected.
Value range : [0 to 2147483646]Object : Alarm and notification logs – Filter
Type : DP
omuId V13
Description : Identifier of the ‘omu’ object class. This identifier is allocatedby the MD–R at object creation, depending on the shelf andslot numbers indicated by the BSC. This attribute cannot bemodified. This attribute is relevant for BSC e3 and TCU e3.
Value range : [0 to 2147483646]Object : omu
Type : DP
on error
Description : Whether to stop running commands when an applicative erroris detected by the system (stop)
Value range : [stop / continue]Object : commandFile – Run
Type : DP
Parameters listed in alphabetical orderNortel Networks Confidential 2–257
BSS Parameter Dictionary
operationalState V13
Description : ISO state
Value range : [enabled / disabled]
The state parameter combinations for the atmRm object are asfollows:
administrative State operationalState availabilityStatus
{} disabled notInstalled
{} disabled {}
{} disabled failed
{} disabled dependency
{} enabled {}
Object : atmRm
Feature : BSC/TCU e3: AR 1209
Type : DD
operationalState
Description : ISO state
Value range : [enabled / disabled]
The state parameter combinations for the bsc object are asfollows:
administrativeState
operationalState
availabilityStatus
Meaning
locked disabled {} The BSC has just been created orlocked.
unlocked disabled {} The BSC is in restart or BDA buildphase.
unlocked disabled dependency The BSS/OMC–R link is not createdor the BSC database is not built.
unlocked disabled failed The BSC refuses every command,including resetting.
unlocked enabled {} The BSS/OMC–R link and theassociations with the BSC areestablished, and the BSC database isbuilt.
Object : bsc
Type : DD
Nortel Networks Confidential2–258 Parameters listed in alphabetical order
PE/DCL/DD/0124411–9001–124
Standard 13.04/EN March 2002 GSM/BSS V13
operationalState
Description : ISO state
Value range : [enabled / disabled]
The state parameter combinations for the bscMdInterfaceobject are as follows:
administrativeState
operationalState
availabilityStatus
Meaning
locked disabled {} The BSS/OMC–R link has beenlocked by a user.
unlocked disabled {} The link has just been created andthe connection is not established yet(initial state).
unlocked disabled dependency The link is down.
unlocked disabled failed The connection cannot bereestablished.
unlocked enabled {} The connection is established.
Object : bscMdInterface
Type : DD
operationalState
Description : ISO state
Value range : [enabled / disabled]
The state parameter combinations for the bts object are asfollows:
administrativeState
operationalState
availabilityStatus
Meaning
locked disabled {} The cell has just been created orlocked.
unlocked disabled dependency The radio site is not working or theTDMA frames are not correctlyconfigured.
unlocked enabled {} The radio site is working and thenumber of TDMA frames correctlyconfigured for the cell is reached.
shuttingDown
enabled busy The radio cell is being releasedfollowing a soft release command.
Object : bts
Type : DD
Parameters listed in alphabetical orderNortel Networks Confidential 2–259
BSS Parameter Dictionary
operationalState
Description : ISO state
Value range : [enabled / disabled]
The state parameter combinations for the btsSiteManagerobject are as follows:
administrativeState
operational State
availabilityStatus
Meaning
locked disabled {} The site has just been created orlocked.
unlocked disabled {} Downloading in the site BCF isin-progress.
unlocked disabled dependency
The PCM link used for the site LAPDsignaling is faulty.
unlocked disabled failed Loss of Level 3 dialogue orconfiguration Abis message notcorrectly acknowledged ordownloading problem
unlocked enabled {} The PCM is available for LAPDsignaling, the Level 3 dialogue isestablished, and the configuration andAbis connection with the site BCF areOK.
Object : btsSiteManager
Type : DD
operationalState
Description : ISO state. “disabled” means that the BSC cannot send themessages to the OMC–R agent.
Value range : [enabled / disabled]
The state parameter combinations for the callPathTrace objectare as follows:
administrativeState
operationalState
usageState Meaning
locked enabled idle Call path tracing has just started inthe BSC or has been stopped by theoperator.
unlocked enabled busy Call path tracing is in-progress andmessages are forwarded to theOMC–R agent.
Nortel Networks Confidential2–260 Parameters listed in alphabetical order
PE/DCL/DD/0124411–9001–124
Standard 13.04/EN March 2002 GSM/BSS V13
administrativeState
MeaningusageStateoperationalState
unlocked enabled idle Call path tracing is stopped(end-of-session criterion is true).
unlocked disabled Call path tracing is in-progress butmessages are not forwarded to theOMC–R agent.
Object : callPathTrace
Type : DD
operationalState V13
Description : ISO state
Value range : [enabled / disabled]
The state parameter combinations for the cc object are asfollows:
operationalState availabilityStatus
disabled notInstalled
disabled {}
disabled failed
disabled dependency
enabled online
Object : cc
Feature : BSC/TCU e3: AR 1209
Type : DD
operationalState V13
Description : ISO state
Value range : [enabled / disabled]
The state parameter combinations for the cem object are asfollows:
administrative State operationalState availabilityStatus
{} disabled notInstalled
{} disabled {}
Parameters listed in alphabetical orderNortel Networks Confidential 2–261
BSS Parameter Dictionary
administrative State availabilityStatusoperationalState
{} disabled failed
{} disabled dependency
{} enabled {}
Object : cem
Feature : BSC/TCU e3: AR 1209
Type : DD
operationalState V13
Description : ISO state
Value range : [enabled / disabled]
The state parameter combinations for the cn object are asfollows:
administrative State operationalState availabilityStatus
{} disabled {}
{} disabled failed
{} disabled degraded
{} enabled online
Object : cn
Feature : BSC/TCU e3: AR 1209
Type : DD
operationalState
Description : ISO state
Value range : [enabled / disabled]Object : efd
Type : DD
operationalState V13
Description : ISO state
Value range : [enabled / disabled]
The state parameter combinations for the g3BscEqp object areas follows:
Nortel Networks Confidential2–262 Parameters listed in alphabetical order
PE/DCL/DD/0124411–9001–124
Standard 13.04/EN March 2002 GSM/BSS V13
administrative State operationalState availabilityStatus
{} disabled {}
{} enabled {}
{} disabled dependency
Object : g3BscEqp
Feature : BSC/TCU e3: AR 1209
Type : DD
operationalState V13
Description : ISO state
Value range : [enabled / disabled]
The state parameter combinations for the g3Transcoder objectare as follows:
administrative State operationalState availabilityStatus
{} disabled {}
{} disabled failed
{} disabled dependency
{} enabled degraded
{} enabled {}
Object : g3TranscoderEqpt
Feature : BSC/TCU e3: AR 1209
Type : DD
operationalState V13
Description : ISO state
Value range : [enabled / disabled]
The state parameter combinations for the iem object are asfollows:
administrative State operationalState availabilityStatus
{} disabled not installed
{} disabled {}
{} disabled failed
Parameters listed in alphabetical orderNortel Networks Confidential 2–263
BSS Parameter Dictionary
administrative State availabilityStatusoperationalState
{} disabled dependency
{} enabled {}
Object : iem
Feature : BSC/TCU e3: AR 1209
Type : DD
operationalState V13
Description : ISO state
Value range : [enabled / disabled]
The state parameter combinations for the in object are asfollows:
operationalState availabilityStatus
disabled dependency
disabled {}
enabled degraded
disabled {}
enabled failed
Object : in
Feature : BSC/TCU e3: AR 1209
Type : DD
operationalState
Description : ISO state
Value range : [enabled / disabled]
The state parameter combinations for the lapdLink object areas follows:
operationalState
availabilityStatus
Meaning
disabled dependency Loss of Level 1
disabled failed SICD board faulty or TSCB faulty (Ater LAPD link) orBSCB faulty (Abis LAPD link)
enabled {} The Level 1 is established and the SICDs, RCBs, andrelated internal PCMs are working.
Object : lapdLink
Type : DD
Nortel Networks Confidential2–264 Parameters listed in alphabetical order
PE/DCL/DD/0124411–9001–124
Standard 13.04/EN March 2002 GSM/BSS V13
operationalState
Description : ISO state
Value range : [enabled / disabled]
The state parameter combinations for the log object are asfollows:
operationalState
availabilityStatus
Meaning
disabled {} The disk message saving partition is full (current alarmlog).
disabled logFull The disk message saving partition is full (currentobservation or trace log).
enabled {} The messages are actually saved in the partition.
Object : log
Type : DD
operationalState V13
Description : ISO state
Value range : [enabled / disabled]
The state parameter combinations for the lsaRc object are asfollows:
operationalState availabilityStatus
disabled dependency
disabled {}
enabled degraded
disabled {}
enabled failed
Object : lsaRc
Feature : BSC/TCU e3: AR 1209
Type : DD
Parameters listed in alphabetical orderNortel Networks Confidential 2–265
BSS Parameter Dictionary
operationalState
Description : ISO state. “disabled” means that the BSC cannot send themessages to the OMC–R agent.
Value range : [enabled / disabled]
The state parameter combinations for the mdScanner objectare as follows:
operationalState
availabilityStatus
Meaning
disabled {} The observation is running but the messages cannot beforwarded to the OMC–R agent.
disabled {offDuty} The observation is stopped and the messages cannotbe forwarded to the OMC–R agent.
enabled {} The observation is running and the messages areforwarded to the OMC–R agent.
enabled {offDuty} The observation is stopped and the messages areforwarded to the OMC–R agent.
Object : mdScanner
Type : DD
operationalState V13
Description : ISO state
Value range : [enabled / disabled]
The state parameter combinations for the mms object are asfollows:
administrative State operationalState availabilityStatus
locked {} {}
Object : mms
Feature : BSC/TCU e3: AR 1209
Type : DD
operationalState V13
Description : ISO state
Value range : [enabled / disabled]
The state parameter combinations for the omu object are asfollows:
Nortel Networks Confidential2–266 Parameters listed in alphabetical order
PE/DCL/DD/0124411–9001–124
Standard 13.04/EN March 2002 GSM/BSS V13
administrative State operationalState availabilityStatus
locked {} {}
Object : omu
Feature : BSC/TCU e3: AR 1209
Type : DD
operationalState
Description : ISO state
Value range : [enabled / disabled]
The state parameter combinations for the pcmCircuit objectare as follows:
administrativeState
operationalState
availabilityStatus
Meaning
locked disabled {} The PCM has just been created orlocked.
unlocked disabled dependency The TCU is faulty (A interfacePCMs).
unlocked disabled failed The DDTI board or the internal PCMpartner is faulty, or the connection isdown.
unlocked enabled {} The DDTI board and the internalPCM partner are working and theconnection is established.
Object : pcmCircuit
Type : DD
Parameters listed in alphabetical orderNortel Networks Confidential 2–267
BSS Parameter Dictionary
operationalState V12
Description : ISO state
Value range : [enabled / disabled]
The state parameter combinations for the pcu object are asfollows:
administrativeState
operationalState
availabilityStatus
Meaning
locked disabled {} The PCU has just been created orlocked.
unlocked disabled dependency The Level 2 is not established or theconnection with the BSC is down(external PCM).
unlocked enabled {} The PCU is working.
Object : pcu
Feature : GPRS (SV407 – V12)
Type : DP
operationalState V12
Description : ISO state
Value range : [enabled / disabled]
The state parameter combinations for the pcu object are asfollows:
operationalState
availabilityStatus
Meaning
disabled {} The pcusn has just been created.
disabled dependency The pcusn object does not work, or the PCM link doesnot work.
enabled {} The pcusn object is working.
Object : pcusn
Feature : GPRS (SV407 – V12)
Type : DP
Nortel Networks Confidential2–268 Parameters listed in alphabetical order
PE/DCL/DD/0124411–9001–124
Standard 13.04/EN March 2002 GSM/BSS V13
operationalState
Description : ISO state
Value range : [enabled / disabled]
The state parameter combinations for the signallingLinkobject are as follows:
administrativeState
operationalState
availabilityStatus
Meaning
locked disabled {} The SS7 link has just been createdor locked.
unlocked disabled dependency The PCM carrying the SS7 link isfaulty or there is no MTP2 messagebetween the BSC and the MSC.
unlocked disabled failed The CCS7 board is faulty.
unlocked enabled {} The PCM and CCS7 board areworking and MTP2 messages areexchanged between the BSC and theMSC.
Object : signallingLink
Type : DD
operationalState V13
Description : ISO state
Value range : [enabled / disabled]
The state parameter combinations for the sw8kRm object areas follows:
administrative State operationalState availabilityStatus
{} disabled not installed
{} disabled {}
{} disabled failed
{} disabled dependency
{} enabled {}
Object : sw8kRm
Feature : BSC/TCU e3: AR 1209
Type : DD
Parameters listed in alphabetical orderNortel Networks Confidential 2–269
BSS Parameter Dictionary
operationalState V13
Description : ISO state
Value range : [enabled / disabled]
The state parameter combinations for the tmu object are asfollows:
administrative State operationalState availabilityStatus
locked disabled not installed
unlocked disabled {}
{} disabled failed
{} disabled dependency
{} enabled degraded
{} enabled {}
Object : tmu
Feature : BSC/TCU e3: AR 1209
Type : DD
operationalState
Description : ISO state. “disabled” means that the BSC cannot send themessages to the OMC–R agent.
Value range : [enabled / disabled]
The state parameter combinations for the traceControl objectare as follows:
administrativeState
operationalState
Meaning
locked enabled Call tracing has not started or has been stopped,and the messages are forwarded to the OMC–Ragent.
locked disabled Call tracing has been stopped and the messagescannot be forwarded to the OMC–R agent.
unlocked enabled Call tracing is in-progress in the BSC and themessages are forwarded to the OMC–R agent.
unlocked disabled Call tracing is in-progress but the messages cannotbe forwarded to the OMC–R agent.
Object : traceControl
Type : DD
Nortel Networks Confidential2–270 Parameters listed in alphabetical order
PE/DCL/DD/0124411–9001–124
Standard 13.04/EN March 2002 GSM/BSS V13
operationalState
Description : ISO state
Value range : [enabled / disabled]
The state parameter combinations for the transceiver objectare as follows:
operationalState
availabilityStatus
Meaning
disabled dependency The parent cell is not working or no TRX/DRX isavailable for the TDMA frame.
disabled failed The BTS has refused the TDMA frame configuration oris using the partnered TRX/DRX for BCCH fillingpurposes.
enabled {} The parent cell is working, a TRX/DRX is available forthe TDMA frame, and the BTS has accepted the TDMAframe configuration.
Object : transceiver
Type : DD
operationalState
Description : ISO state
Value range : [enabled / disabled]
The state parameter combinations for thetransceiverEquipment object are as follows:
administrativeState
operationalState
availabilityStatus
Meaning
locked disabled {} The TRX/DRX has just been created orlocked.
unlocked disabled {} Downloading in the TRX/DRX isin-progress.
unlocked disabled dependency The parent radio site or the parent cell orthe PCM link partner is not working.
unlocked disabled failed The TRX/DRX is assigned to BCCH fil-ling by the BTS or loss of Level 3 dial-ogue or Abis configuration message notcorrectly acknowledged or downloadingproblem or status regression.
Parameters listed in alphabetical orderNortel Networks Confidential 2–271
BSS Parameter Dictionary
administrativeState
MeaningavailabilityStatus
operationalState
unlocked enabled {} The parent cell is working, a PCM isavailable fo the TRX/DRX, and the Level3 dialogue is established.
shuttingDown
enabled {} The TRX/DRX is being releasedfollowing a soft release command.
Object : transceiverEquipment
Type : DD
operationalState
Description : ISO state
Value range : [enabled / disabled]
The state parameter combinations for the transcoder object areas follows:
administrativeState
operationalState
availabilityStatus
Meaning
locked disabled {} The TCU has just been created orlocked.
unlocked disabled dependency The SICD, RCB, TSCB, or internalPCM partner is faulty or the Level 2is not established or the connectionwith the BSC is down (externalPCM).
unlocked enabled {} The TCU is working.
Object : transcoder
Type : DD
operationalState
Description : ISO state
Value range : [enabled / disabled]
The state parameter combinations for the transcoderBoardobject are as follows:
administrativeState
operationalState
availabilityStatus
Meaning
locked disabled {} The TCB has just been created orlocked.
unlocked disabled {} Downloading in the TCB isin-progress.
Nortel Networks Confidential2–272 Parameters listed in alphabetical order
PE/DCL/DD/0124411–9001–124
Standard 13.04/EN March 2002 GSM/BSS V13
administrativeState
MeaningavailabilityStatus
operationalState
unlocked disabled dependency The parent TCU is not working.
unlocked disabled failed The UTE board or internal PCMpartner is faulty or downloadingproblem or a severe error wasdetected.
unlocked enabled {} The TCB is working.
Object : transcoderBoard
Type : DD
operationalState V13
Description : ISO state
Value range : [enabled / disabled]
The state parameter combinations for the trm object are asfollows:
administrative State operationalState availabilityStatus
locked disabled not installed
unlocked disabled {}
{} disabled failed
{} disabled dependency
{} enabled {}
Object : trm
Feature : BSC/TCU e3: AR 1209
Type : DD
operationalState
Description : ISO state
Value range : [enabled / disabled]
The state parameter combinations for the xtp object are asfollows:
administrativeState
operationalState
usageState
availabilityStatus
Meaning
locked disabled idle {} The CIC has just beencreated or locked.
unlocked disabled idle dependency The PCM link partneris faulty.
Parameters listed in alphabetical orderNortel Networks Confidential 2–273
BSS Parameter Dictionary
administrativeState
MeaningavailabilityStatus
usageState
operationalState
unlocked disabled idle failed The CIC is preempted.
unlocked enabled idle {} The CIC is workingand traffic-free.
unlocked enabled busy {} The CIC is workingand traffic-busy.
shuttingDown
enabled busy {} The CIC is beingreleased following asoft release command.
Object : xtp
Type : DD
otherServicesPriority Class 3 O3
Description : Index in the table allocPriorityTable for a TCH allocationrequest (in signaling mode) whose cause is “other services”
This priority is used in primo-allocations or when an SDDCHcannot be allocated for overload reasons.
Value range : [0 to 17]
Object : bts
Default value : 17
Type : DP
output classes
Description : List of authorized output classes that define a terminal outputdomain. Output classes grant access to various types of data.
Value range : [login window / OMC–R browser / alarm window /performance monitor]
When the “login window” class is authorized, the “Login”window is automatically displayed on the terminal screenoutside work sessions.
Object : terminal profile
Type : DP
Nortel Networks Confidential2–274 Parameters listed in alphabetical order
PE/DCL/DD/0124411–9001–124
Standard 13.04/EN March 2002 GSM/BSS V13
output classes
Description : List of authorized output classes that define a user’s outputdomain. Output classes grant access to various types of data.
Value range : [OMC–R browser / alarm window / performance monitor /command file manager / security manager / SMS–CBmanager / description window / job scheduler window / alarmlog window / system session log window / call traces window/ Unix window / notification log window / notificationwindow / relay manager/ alarm criteria]
The “notification log window” class gives access to the systemnotification log, while the “notification window” class givesaccess to the user notification log.
Object : user profile
Type : DP
owner
Description : Name of the user who created the command file on theOMC–R
Value range : [case sensitive]
Object : commandFile
Type : DP
Parameters listed in alphabetical orderNortel Networks Confidential 2–275
BSS Parameter Dictionary
P
packetAckTime Class 3 V12
Description : This parameter is composed of the following attributes:
dwAckTime
upAckTime
The deactivation value is 64 for both of them.
Refer to these entries in this Dictionary.
pagingOnCell Class 3 P1 V9
Description : Enable or disable paging requests in a cell
Value range : [enabled / disabled]Object : bts
Default value : enabled
Type : DP
Checks : [M] : The parent bsc object is unlocked.
pan Class 3 V12
Description : This parameter is composed of the following attributes:
panInc
panDec
panMax
Refer to these entries in this Dictionary.
panDec Class 3 (pan) V12
Description : The MS counter N3102 is decremented by panDec each timePUAN timer expires
Value range : [0 (4s), 1 (8s), 2 (12s), 3 (16s), 4 (20s), 5 (24s), 6 (28s), 7 (32s)]Object : bts
Default value : 0
Feature : GPRS (SV407 – V12)
Type : DP
Checks : [M]: The parent bsc object is unlocked.
Note : If the MS counter equals “0”, an abnormal release isperformed.
Nortel Networks Confidential2–276 Parameters listed in alphabetical order
PE/DCL/DD/0124411–9001–124
Standard 13.04/EN March 2002 GSM/BSS V13
panInc Class 3 (pan) V12
Description : The MS counter N3102 is incremented by panInc each timea PUAN message which allows the transmit window to goforward is received
Value range : [0 (4s), 1 (8s), 2 (12s), 3 (16s), 4 (20s), 5 (24s), 6 (28s), 7 (32s)]
Object : bts
Default value : 0
Feature : GPRS (SV407 – V12)
Type : DP
Checks : [M]: The parent bsc object is unlocked.
Note : If the MS counter equals “0”, an abnormal release isperformed.
panMax Class 3 (pan) V12
Description : Maximum value of the counter N3102 (used in case of blockacknowledgment time out), set by the MS at each cellreselection
Value range : [0 (4s), 1 (8s), 2 (12s), 3 (16s), 4 (20s), 5 (24s), 6 (28s), 7 (32s)]
Object : bts
Default value : 0
Feature : GPRS (SV407 – V12)
Type : DP
Checks : [M]: The parent bsc object is unlocked.
Note : If the MS counter equals “0”, an abnormal release isperformed.
parameter(s)
Description : List of parameters to define when running the command file
Their generic format is $XXX, where $ identifies such aparameter and XXX is a string of uppercase, alphanumericalcharacters that does not contain spaces.
Object : commandFile
Type : DP
Parameters listed in alphabetical orderNortel Networks Confidential 2–277
BSS Parameter Dictionary
partialRecordCriteriaType
Description : Criterion that defines the type of partial records to generate inthe BSC
Value range : [event type / numbered / timed / no partial]
event type The BSC generates partial records. . . . . . . . each time a handover is successful(partialRecordCriteriaEvent–Type = “handover”).
numbered The BSC generates partial records. . . . . . . . every <N> successful handovers(partialRecordCriteriaNb–Event = [1 to 64]).
timed The BSC generates partial records. . . . . . . . . . . every<N> seconds (partialRecord–Criteria–Timer = [1 to 60]).
no partial The BSC does not generate partial. . . . . . . . records.
If “no partial” is selected, trace data are only recorded at theend of each traced call. If the traceControl object is lockedbefore the end of a call, all related data are lost.
Object : traceControl
Type : DP
Checks : [M]: The traceControl object is locked.
particular intervention
Description : Type of action associated with an alarm criteria in the specificconfiguration
Value range : [noAlarm / critical / major / minor]Object : alarm criteria
Type : DP
password
Description : User’s current password as defined in the user’s profile. It isnot displayed.
Value range : [case sensitive]Object : user profile – Change password
Type : DP
Nortel Networks Confidential2–278 Parameters listed in alphabetical order
PE/DCL/DD/0124411–9001–124
Standard 13.04/EN March 2002 GSM/BSS V13
password
Description : User’s password. It begins with a letter, contains at least onenon–alphabetical character among the first eight characters,and is case sensitive.
Value range : [6 characters min]Object : user profile – Create/Set
Type : DP
Checks : [C/M]: The password begins with a letter and contains onenon-alphanumerical character among the firsteight characters.
[C/M]: The password is at least six–character long.
password duration
Description : Maximum time during which the user’s current password isvalid
Value range : [2 to 2147483646] days
When a password validity duration runs out, the passwordmust be changed on opening the next work session. The user’saccess to MMI commands is barred until the password ischanged. Refer to the password status entry.
Object : user profile
Type : DP
pcmCircuit
Description : Identifier of a pcmCircuit object defined with regard to a bscobject (Abis,Ater, or Agprs interface). It is related to thenumber of the DDTI board to which the PCM described linkis physically connected in the BSC.
PCM links are identified by the DDTI boards to which they areconnected in the BSC. A PCM link connected to DDTI boardno.i has a reference equal to “2i” or “2i+1” (each boardmanages two links at a time). See to NTP < 22 >, which givethe relationship between the number of a board and its physicallocation in the BSC equipment cabinet.
When the PCM link is allotted to a site on the Abis interface,it is also identified by a reference number defined with regardto the site (pcmCircuitBtsSiteManager). Refer to thebscSitePcmList entry in the Dictionary.
Parameters listed in alphabetical orderNortel Networks Confidential 2–279
BSS Parameter Dictionary
Value range : [0 to 47]Object : pcmCircuit (Abis, Ater, and Agprs interfaces)
Feature : GPRS (SV407 – V12)
Type : Id
Checks : [C]: The maximum number of external PCM linksallotted to a BSC depends on its type andarchitecture:
BSC 12000/6000T1 T2 T3 T4 T5
external PCMs 12 20 28 40 48
[C]: The number of external PCM links allotted to aBSC on the Ater interface depends on the numberof TCUs linked to the BSC (one TCU uses onelink).
[C]: The software object related to the parent bsc objectis created.
[C/D]: If the application database of the related BSC isbuilt, the parent bsc object is unlocked.
[D]: If the application database of the related BSC isbuilt, the pcmCircuit object is locked.
[D]: If the application database of the related BSC isnot built, it has been reset by an Off line reset BDAcommand.
[D]: No btsSiteManager object (Abis PCM) ortranscoder object (Ater PCM) or pcu object(Agprs PCM) refers to the pcmCircuit object.
[D]: No mdScanner object describing a temporaryobservation refers to the pcmCircuit object (noobservation is running on the concerned PCM).
pcmCircuit
Description : Identifier of a pcmCircuit object defined with regard to atranscoder object (A interface). It is related to the number ofthe TDTI board to which the PCM described link is physicallyconnected in the TCU.
PCM links are identified by the TDTI boards to which they arephysically connected in the TCU.
Nortel Networks Confidential2–280 Parameters listed in alphabetical order
PE/DCL/DD/0124411–9001–124
Standard 13.04/EN March 2002 GSM/BSS V13
PcmCircuit TDTI N° Port N°0 0 0
1 1 0
2 1 1
3 2 0
2 1
Unused
Value range : [0 to 3]Object : pcmCircuit (A interface)
Type : Id
Checks : [C]: The number of PCM links connected to a remotetranscoder on the A interface is limited tomaxPcmCTPerTranscd (static configurationdata).
[C]: The parent transcoder object is created.
[C]: <maxTranscdBPerTranscd> transcoderBoardobjects are created for the parent transcoderobject.
[C/D]: If the application database of the related BSC isbuilt, the parent bsc object is unlocked.
[D]: If the application database of the related BSC isbuilt, the pcmCircuit object is locked.
[D]: If the application database of the related BSC isnot built, it has been reset by an Off line reset BDAcommand.
[D]: No signallingLink or xtp object refers to thepcmCircuit object.
pcmCircuitBsc
Description : Identifier of a PCM link (pcmCircuit object) used by a radiosite defined with regard to the BSC. It is related to the numberof the DDTI board to which the link is physically connectedin the BSC.
Refer to the bscSitePcmList entry in the Dictionary, whichdefines the relationship between these two attributes.
Value range : [0 to 2147483646]Object : btsSiteManager
Type : DP
Parameters listed in alphabetical orderNortel Networks Confidential 2–281
BSS Parameter Dictionary
pcmCircuitBtsSiteManager
Description : Identifier of the PCM link defined with regard to the BTS. Itis related to the number of the DTI or PCMI board to whichthe link is physically connected in the BTS.
Refer to the bscSitePcmList entry in the Dictionary, whichdefines the relationship between these two attributes.
Value range : [0 to 5]Object : btsSiteManager
Type : DP
pcmCircuitId
Description : Identifier of the PCM link used by a LAPD link
Since all radio sites have a switching facility, the BSC candirectly allocate the PCM link that supports a LAPD link.
Value range : [0 to 47]Object : lapdLink
Type : DD
pcmCircuitId Class 2
Description : Identifier of the PCM link used by an SS7 channel on the Ainterface, defined with regard to the TCU
Value range : [0 to 3]Object : signallingLink
Type : DP
Checks : [C/M]: The pcmCircuit object is created for thetranscoder object referenced by thesignallingLink object (transcoderId).
[C/M]: If the described link is PCMA no.3, the time slotused by the SS7 channel (timeSlotNumber) is inthe range [1 to 27] if the PCM link is an E1 link andin the range [1 to 20] if the PCM link is a T1 link.Since the last four time slots of that link are notmapped on the Ater interface, they are unusable(refer to the transcoderMatrix entry in theDictionary).
[M]: The parent bsc object is unlocked and thesignallingLink object is locked.
Nortel Networks Confidential2–282 Parameters listed in alphabetical order
PE/DCL/DD/0124411–9001–124
Standard 13.04/EN March 2002 GSM/BSS V13
pcmCircuitId Class 2
Description : Identifier of the PCM link used by a TCU on the Ater interface,defined with regard to the BSC
Value range : [0 to 47]
Object : transcoder
Type : DP
Checks : [C/M]: The pcmCircuit object is created for the parent bscobject.
[C/M]: It is not used on the Abis interface by abtsSiteManager object nor on the Ater interface byanother transcoder object dependent on the sameparent bsc object.
[M]: The parent bsc object is unlocked, and thetranscoder object and the signallingLink objectsthat refer to it are locked.
Note : This parameter is only available for BSC 2G
pcmCircuitId Class 2
Description : Identifier of the PCM link used by a terrestrial circuit on theA interface, defined with regard to the TCU
Value range : [0 to 3]
Object : xtp
Type : DP
Checks : [C/M]: The pcmCircuit object is created for thetranscoder object referenced by the xtp object(transcoderId).
[C/M]: If the described link is PCMA no.3, the time slotused by the terrestrial circuit (timeSlotNumber)is in the range [1 to 27] if the PCM link is an E1link and in the range [1 to 20] if the PCM link isa T1 link. Since the last four time slots of that linkare not mapped on the Ater interface, they areunusable (refer to the transcoderMatrix entry inthe Dictionary).
[M]: The parent bsc object is unlocked and the xtpobject is locked.
Parameters listed in alphabetical orderNortel Networks Confidential 2–283
BSS Parameter Dictionary
pcmErrorCorrection Class 2 P2 V12
Description : Whether the bts uses the new ETF (Enhanced TRAU Frame)frame (set to “1”) or the ETSI “Rec 08.60” frame (set to “0”).
Value range : [0 / 1]Object : bts
Default value : 1
Type : DP
Feature : PCM error correction (FM660 – V12)
Checks : [C/M] This attribute can be set to “1” only ifenhancedTRAUFrameIndication attribute isset to “available” or “active”
[M]: The parent bsc is unlocked and the bts object islocked.
Note : This parameter is only available for BTSs equipped with nonmixed DCU4 or DRX transceiver architecture.
pcmNbr Class 2 (gprsPcuCrossConnectList) V12
Description : Number of the PCM used for Agprs interface
Value range : [0 to 47]Object : pcu
Default value : 0
Feature : GPRS (SV407 – V12)
Type : DP
Checks : [M]: The parent bsc object is unlocked and the pcuobject is locked.
Note : This parameter is only available for BSC 2G
pcmTimeSlotNumber Class 2 V8
Description : Scheduled time slot of a radio site on the Abis interface
Value range : [1 to 31] if the PCM link is an E1 link[1 to 24] if the PCM link is a T1 link
Object : btsSiteManager
Type : DP
Checks : [C/M]: The scheduled time slot is masked in thebstSiteManager object radioSiteMask, so itcannot be allotted by the BSC.
[M]: The parent bsc object is unlocked and thebtsSiteManager object is locked.
Nortel Networks Confidential2–284 Parameters listed in alphabetical order
PE/DCL/DD/0124411–9001–124
Standard 13.04/EN March 2002 GSM/BSS V13
Notes : The relation “scheduled time slot = teiBtsSiteManager + 1”is always true at BTS level.
It can be false at BSC level provided a PCM switchingmatrix is used between the BSC and the BTS; otherwise, itis true.
pcmType Class 3
Description : Interface on which the PCM link is used
Value range : [pcmA / pcmAbis / pcmAter / pcmAgprs]
Object : pcmCircuit
Feature : GPRS (SV407 – V12)
Type : DP
Checks : [M]: If the current attribute value is “pcmA”, nosignallingLink or xtpobject refers to that object(pcmTimeSlotNumber).
[M]: If the current attribute value is “pcmAbis”, nobtsSiteManager object refers to that object(bscSitePcmList).
[M]: If the current attribute value is “pcmAter”, notranscoder object refers to that object(pcmCircuitId).
[M]: If the current attribute value is “pcmAgprs”, nopcu object refers to that object(bscPcuPcmRefList).
[M]: “pcmAbis” is forbidden for pcmCircuitId equals0, 2, 4, or 6.
[M]: The parent bsc object is unlocked.
pcu V12
Description : Identifier of a pcu object defined with regard to a bsc object
Value range : [0 to 2147483646]
Object : pcu
Feature : GPRS (SV407 – V12)
Type : Id
Parameters listed in alphabetical orderNortel Networks Confidential 2–285
BSS Parameter Dictionary
pcuLapdEqptRefList Class 2 V12
Description : List of LAPD equipment numbers used by the pcu object
Value range : [0 to 12] values in the range [0 to + infinite]
Object : pcu
Feature : GPRS (SV407 – V12)
Type : DP
Checks : [C/M]: All the referred LAPD equipment object instancesof this attribute must exist
[C/M]: The sapi attribute of the referred lapdLink objectinstances must have been set to ’OML’. TheassociatedInterface attribute of the referredlapdLink object instances must have been set to’Agprs’.
[C/M]: A lapdLink object instance can be referred by onlyone pcu object instance
[M]: The parent bsc object is unlocked and the pcuobject is locked.
Note : This parameter is only available for BSC 2G
pcusn V12
Description : Identifier of a pcusn object
Value range : [0 to 255]
Object : pcusn
Feature : GPRS (SV407 – V12)
Type : Id
pcuSNName V12
Description : Reference name of a PCUSN object on the OMC–R.
It begins with a letter and is case sensitive.
Value range : [30 characters max]
Object : pcusn
Type : DP
Checks : [C/M]: The name of a pcuSN is unique to the OMC–R.
Nortel Networks Confidential2–286 Parameters listed in alphabetical order
PE/DCL/DD/0124411–9001–124
Standard 13.04/EN March 2002 GSM/BSS V13
pcuSNReserved1 Class 3 V12
Description : Attribute reserved for future use
Value range : [–32768 to 32767]
Object : pcusn
Feature : GPRS (SV407 – V12)
Type : DP
pcuSNReserved2 Class 3 V12
Description : Attribute reserved for future use
Value range : [–32768 to 32767]
Object : pcusn
Feature : GPRS (SV407 – V12)
Type : DP
penaltyTime Class 3 P3 V8
Description : Timer used by an idle mobile before reselecting a cell (C2criterion)
When a mobile places the cell on the list of strongest carriers,it starts a timer that stops after penaltyTime seconds. Thistimer is reset when the mobile removes the cell from the list.
For the entire timer duration, the reselection criterion (C2) isassigned a negative temporaryOffset value.
Refer to the cellReselectOffset entry in the Dictionary.
Value range : [20 to 640, by steps of 20] seconds. The value “640” isreserved and indicates that the temporary offset is ignored inthe reselection criterion (C2) calculation. It also changes thesign in the C2 formula.
Object : bts
Feature : AR 264
Default value : 20
Type : DP
Checks : [M] : The parent bsc object is unlocked.
Parameters listed in alphabetical orderNortel Networks Confidential 2–287
BSS Parameter Dictionary
perceived severity
Description : To select messages according to the priority
The alarm processing priority provides an indication of howit is perceived that the capability of the managed object hasbeen affected. Refer to the alarmPriority entry in theDictionary where the priority levels are explained.
Value range : [cleared / critical / indeterminate / major / minor / warning]
Do not fill in if this criterion is not to be selected.Object : Alarm and notification logs – Filter
Type : DP
periodCCCHLoadIndication Class 3
Description : Periodicity at which the BTS sends the CCCH payload to theBSC (“9.2” is the only value accepted)
Value range : [0.00 to 2147483646] secondObject : bts
Type : DP
Checks : [C/M]: The only value accepted by the system is “9.2”.
[M]: The parent bsc object is unlocked.
Remark : Since the system accepts only one value for this attribute,changing it has no meaning.
periodicity
Description : Time between two runs if the job is to be periodically run
Value range : [1 to 2147483646] minute(s)Object : job
Condition : To define if it is a periodic job.
Type : DP
plmnPermitted Class 3
Description : List of NCC of the PLMNs on which MSs are allowed to takemeasurements for handovers. Listening to the PLMN towhich the cell belongs must be authorized.
Value range : [0 to 7]Object : bts
Default value :Type : DP
Checks : [M] : The parent bsc object is unlocked.
Nortel Networks Confidential2–288 Parameters listed in alphabetical order
PE/DCL/DD/0124411–9001–124
Standard 13.04/EN March 2002 GSM/BSS V13
PODType
Description : Type of the BSC or BTS involved, as defined in the PhysicalObjects Dictionary
Value range : [BSC1GT / BSC2GT / BTSoutdoor / BTSindoor / BTSmicro/ BTSsmart / BTSoutdoor2G]
Object : alarm criteria
Type : DP
pointCode Class 1
Description : MSC identifier in the SS7 network (Destination Point Code)
Value range : in ETSI SS7 protocol [0 to 16383]
in ANSI SS7 protocol [0 to 16777215]
Object : signallingLinkSet
Type : DP
Checks : [M] : The parent bsc object is locked.
pointCode Class 1
Description : BSC identifier in the SS7 network (Origin Point Code)
Value range : in ETSI SS7 protocol [0 to 16383]
in ANSI SS7 protocol [0 to 16777215]
Object : signallingPoint
Type : DP
Checks : [M] : The parent bsc object is locked.
portEthernetOperational V13
Description : Operational state of the OMU external Ethernet port.
ISO operational state (enabled/disabled).
This attribute is dynamically managed by the BSS. Valuechanges are not notified to the Manager.
This attribute is relevant for BSC e3.
Value range : [enabled/disabled]Object : omu
Type : DD
Feature : AR 1209 – V13.1
Parameters listed in alphabetical orderNortel Networks Confidential 2–289
BSS Parameter Dictionary
portEthernetStatus V13
Description : Availability status of the OMU module external Ethernet port.
ISO availability status ({}, {dependency}, {failed}).
This attribute is dynamically managed by the BSS. Valuechanges are not notified to the Manager.
This attribute is relevant for BSC e3.
Value range : [{} / {dependency} / {failed}]
Object : omu
Type : DD
Feature : AR 1209 – V13.1
port0X25Status V13
Description : Operational state of the OMU module external X.25 port 0
ISO operational state (enabled/disabled).
This attribute is dynamically managed by the BSS. Valuechanges are not notified to the Manager.
This attribute is relevant for BSC e3.
Value range : [{} / {dependency} / {failed}]Object : omu
Type : DD
Feature : AR 1209 – V13.1
port1X25Status V13
Description : Availability status of the OMU external X.25 port 1.
ISO availability status ({}, {dependency}, {failed}).
This attribute is dynamically managed by the BSS.
Value changes are not notified to the Manager.
This attribute is relevant for BSC e3.
Value range : [{} / {dependency} / {failed}]
Object : omu
Type : DD
Feature : AR 1209 – V13.1
Nortel Networks Confidential2–290 Parameters listed in alphabetical order
PE/DCL/DD/0124411–9001–124
Standard 13.04/EN March 2002 GSM/BSS V13
portChosen Class 2
Description : Number of the SUN port to use on the OMC–R end
Value range : [port0 / port1 / automaticChoice (selection by the OMC–Ragent)]
If the port is not uniquely selected, it will be dynamicallyassigned by the OMC–R agent.
Selecting “automaticChoice” is recommended since it allowsthe OMC–R agent to reconfigure the port currently used whena problem occurs.
Object : bscMdInterface
Type : DP
Checks : [M] : The bscMdInterface object is locked.
portUsed
Description : Number of the SUN port currently used
Value range : [port0 / port1]
This dynamic attribute identifies the OMC–R port currentlyused. It can be different from portChosen since the OMC–Ragent switches the transport connection with a BSC over to theother port as and when needed.
No information is displayed unless the BSS/OMC–R link isestablished.
Object : bscMdInterface
Type : DD
positionInShelf V13
Description : Indicates the position of a module in a shelf
Value range : [1 to 15]
Object : atmRm, cc, cem, iem, lsaRc, mms, omu, sw8kRm, tmu, trm
Type : DD
Feature : AR 1209 – V13.1
Parameters listed in alphabetical orderNortel Networks Confidential 2–291
BSS Parameter Dictionary
powerBudgetInterCell Class 3 P4
Description : Authorization to perform intercell handovers for powerbudget
Value range : [enabled / disabled]
Object : handOverControl
Default value : enabled
Type : DP
Checks : [M] : The parent bsc object is unlocked.
powerClass
Description : Transmission power class of a TDMA frame
Value range : [powerClass5 (GSM 900 network, GSM–R network, E–GSM,or GSM 900 – GSM 1800 network)powerClass1 (GSM 1800 network, GSM 1900 network,or GSM 1800 –GSM 900 network)]
Object : transceiver
Default value : powerClass1
Type : DP
Checks : [C]: The attribute value complies with the type ofnetwork in which the TDMA frame is used. Referto the standardIndicator entry in the Dictionary(attribute of the parent bts object).
Restrictions : [M]: This attribute cannot be modified.
Nortel Networks Confidential2–292 Parameters listed in alphabetical order
PE/DCL/DD/0124411–9001–124
Standard 13.04/EN March 2002 GSM/BSS V13
powerControl
Description : Identifier of a powerControl object that defines the powercontrol management parameters in a cell. A bts object mayreference one and only one object of this type.
Value range : [0 to 2147483646]
Object : powerControl
Type : Id
Checks : [C]: The associated bts object is created and thepowerControl object is not created for that object.
[C/D]: If the application database of the related BSC isbuilt, the parent bsc object is unlocked and theassociated bts object is locked.
[M]: The parent bsc object is unlocked.
[M/D]: The powerControl object is created.
[D]: The associated bts object is not referenced, exceptby an handOverControl object.
[D]: If the application database of the related BSC isnot built, it has been reset by an Off line reset BDAcommand.
powerControlIndicator Class 3 P5
Description : Whether MS signal strength measurements includemeasurements on BCCH
BCCH measurements must not be included when thefollowing two conditions are met:
The radio channel hops at least on two differentfrequencies, including the BCCH frequency.
Power control on the downlink is used.
Value range : [include BCCH measurements / do not include BCCHmeasurements]
Object : bts
Default value : include BCCH measurements
Type : DP
Checks : [M] : The parent bsc object is unlocked.
Parameters listed in alphabetical orderNortel Networks Confidential 2–293
BSS Parameter Dictionary
powerDownlink V8
Description : Power gain in the BTS-to-MS direction used by the speechprocessing algorithm in a TCB
This parameter is a component of the algorithm Used attribute.Refer to this entry in the Dictionary.
Value range : [–15 to +15] dBType : DP
Object : transcoderBoard
Default value : 0
powerIncrStepSize Class 3 P6
Description : Step for increasing MS or BTS txpwr when using step by stepalgorithm
Value range : [2, 4, 6] dBObject : powerControl
Default value : 4 dB
Type : DP
Checks : [M]: lRxLevDLP + powerIncStepSize ≤ uRxLevDLP.
[M]: lRxLevULP + powerIncStepSize ≤ uRxLevULP.
[M]: The parent bsc object is unlocked.
Note : This parameter is significant only when the BTS uses thestandard “step by step” power control algorithm.
powerRedStepSize Class 3 P7
Description : Step for reducing MS or BTS txpwr when using step by stepalgorithm
Value range : [2, 4] dBObject : powerControl
Default value : 2 dB
Type : DP
Checks : [M]: uRxLevDLP – powerRedStepSize ≥ lRxLevDLP.
[M]: uRxLevULP – powerRedStepSize ≥ lRxLevULP.
[M]: The parent bsc object is unlocked.
Note : This parameter is significant only when the BTS uses thestandard “step by step” power control algorithm.
Nortel Networks Confidential2–294 Parameters listed in alphabetical order
PE/DCL/DD/0124411–9001–124
Standard 13.04/EN March 2002 GSM/BSS V13
powerUplink V8
Description : Power gain in the MS-to-BTS direction used by the speechprocessing algorithm in a TCB
This parameter is a component of the algorithm Used attribute.Refer to this entry in the Dictionary.
Value range : [–15 to +15] dBType : DP
Object : transcoderBoard
Default value : 0
preemptionAuthor Class 3 P8 V12
Description : Defines the preemption management
Value range : [forbiddenauthorizedWithReleaseauthorizedForcedHO]
Object : signallingPoint
Default value : forbiden
Type : DP
Feature : ASCI (GSM–R V12)
Checks : [M] : The parent bsc object is unlocked.
Note : authorizedForcedHO option is not available.
preSynchroTimingAdvance Class 3 P9 V10
Description : Pre–defined timing advance used in a pre–synchronizedhandover procedure between the serving cell and thisneighbor cell.
This value of timing advance is used when the parameter“synchronized” is set to “pre sync HO with timing advance”.The operator defines a predefined timing advance when aphase 2 MS goes from the serving cell to this neighbor cellapproximately at the same place (railway, highway).
Value range : [1 to 35] (km)Object : adjacentCellHandOver
Default value : Refer to parameter synchronized
Type : DP
Checks : [M] : The parent bsc object is unlocked.
Parameters listed in alphabetical orderNortel Networks Confidential 2–295
BSS Parameter Dictionary
priority Class 2 P10
Description : Priority level of a TDMA frame.
Among the set of TDMA frames attached to a cell, the onecarrying the cell BCCH must always be allotted the highestpriority [0].
At least <minNbOfTDMA> TDMA frames related to a cell(refer to this entry in the Dictionary) must be successfullyconfigured for the cell to be working. They include the TDMAframe carrying the cell BCCH and those with the highestpriority(ies).
If this is true when the cell is brought into service, then, the cellwill be working. Otherwise, its operationalState will be“disabled” and its availabilityStatus will be “{dependency}”.
Value range : [0 to 255]
Object : transceiver
Type : DP
Checks : [M]: The parent bsc object is unlocked and theassociated bts object is locked.
privateMmsOmuRef V13
Description : Pointer to the associated ‘omu’ object instance for privateMMS, NULL for shared–mirrored MMS.
This attribute cannot be modified.
It is set by the MD–R at MMS creation.
Value range : [0 to 2147483646]
Object : mms
Type : DP
Feature : AR 1209 – V13.1
probable cause
Description : To select messages according to the numerical value of the ISOprobableCause field
Do not fill in if this criterion is not to be selected.
The following table indicates the messages displayedaccording to the probable cause.
Nortel Networks Confidential2–296 Parameters listed in alphabetical order
PE/DCL/DD/0124411–9001–124
Standard 13.04/EN March 2002 GSM/BSS V13
Alarm type Probable cause Value
Communications Execution failure of a MD request by the BSCCall establishment errorCommunication protocol error
6245
Communication subsystem failureCorrupt dataDegraded signal
69
12
DTE–DCE interface errorLAN errorLocal node transmission error
132527
Loss of frameLoss of signalReceive failure
282940
Remote node transmission errorTransmit failure
4254
Environmental External alarm loopEnclosure door openFire detected
581418
Heating, ventilation, or cooling systemMaterial supply exhausted
2130
Equipment Equipment absentEquipment malfunctionHeating, ventilation, or cooling system problem
601521
Input/output device errorInput device errorMaterial supply exhausted
232430
Power problemProcessor problemReceive failure
353740
Receiver failureStorage capacity problemTemperature unacceptable
414950
Timing problemTransmit failureTransmitter failure
525455
ProcessingError Cause of restart or switchoverNo responseApplication subsystem failure
59612
Configuration or customization errorCorrupt dataFile error
79
17
Out of memoryQueue size exceededSoftware error
323946
Parameters listed in alphabetical orderNortel Networks Confidential 2–297
BSS Parameter Dictionary
Alarm type ValueProbable cause
Software program abnormally terminatedSoftware program errorStorage capacity problem
474849
Underlying resource unavailableVersion mismatch
5657
QualityOfService ShutdownCongestionPerformance degraded
638
34
Queue size exceededResource at or nearing capacityResponse time excessive
394344
Retransmission rate excessiveThreshold crossed
4551
Value range : [1 to 150]
Object : Alarm and notification logs – Filter
Type : DP
processorLoadSupConf Class 3 L10 V8
Description : Threshold used in the load control algorithm by the BSC
The table hereafter gives the % of the theorical load usablevalues for each type of board.
value OMU (level 1, 2, 3) Other boards Comments
0 80–90–100 80–90–100 nominal value
1 80–90–100 90–100–100 permissive value
2 80–90–100 75–85–95 restrictive value
3 100–100–100 100–100–100 simplex mode (see Note 1)
4 80–90–100 80–90–100 nominal value (see Note 2)
5 80–90–100 90–100–100 permissive value (see Note 2)
6 80–90–100 75–85–95 restrictive value (see Note 2)
7 80–90–100 50–60–70 exceptional value (see Note 3)
Nortel Networks Confidential2–298 Parameters listed in alphabetical order
PE/DCL/DD/0124411–9001–124
Standard 13.04/EN March 2002 GSM/BSS V13
value CommentsOther boardsOMU (level 1, 2, 3)
8 80–90–100 80–90–100 reserved value (see Note 4)
9 80–90–100 90–100–100 reserved value (see Note 4)
Note 1: This value must be used when the operator wantsto decrease the impact induced by the simplexmode.
Note 2: For these attribute values (4, 5, and 6), the CPUweighing factor of the OMU board is morerestrictive than for the attribute values 0 to 2, andthis factor must be used in case of high load on thisboard.
Note 3: This value must be used in case of exceptionalevents, in order to manage high blocking rate onthe Air and A interface.
Note 4: The thresholds of these two sets of parameters aremodifiable by using the “BSC data config”functionality.
Value range : [0 to 9] (V11–)[0] (V12)
Object : bsc
Feature : BSC overload management (FM877 – V12)
Default value : 1
Type : DP
Checks : [M] : The bsc object is unlocked.
Remark : C1400, C1506, C1803, C1834, and C1835 counters allow tocheck BSC overload problems.
This parameter was used in the previous releases only tocontrol the load on the BSC CPU boards.
Parameters listed in alphabetical orderNortel Networks Confidential 2–299
BSS Parameter Dictionary
R
rACHLoadAveragingSlots Class 3
Description : Number of RACH access on which RACH measurements areperformed (2000 is the only value accepted)
Value range : [0 to 65535]Object : bts
Type : DP
Checks : [C/M]: The only value accepted by the system is “2000”.
[M]: The parent bsc object is unlocked.
Remark : Since the system accepts only one value for this attribute,changing it has no meaning.
radChanSelIntThreshold Class 3 R1 V8
Description : Maximum interference level on free radio channels, belowwhich the channels are ranged in the group of allocationpriority channels
The information is used to first allocate the free channels withthe lowest interference level. The levels depend on thethresholdInterference attribute value defined for the cell.Refer to this entry in the Dictionary.
The BSC distributes the free radio channels among twogroups:
The first group contains the list of channels with a measuredaveraged interference level equal to or lower than thedefined level.
The second group contains the list of channels with ameasured averaged interference level higher than thedefined level, and recently released channels for which nomeasurement is available.
Four resource pools are defined for each SDCCH or TCH typeof channel:
low interference level radio channels that are authorized tohop
low interference level radio channels that are notauthorized to hop
Nortel Networks Confidential2–300 Parameters listed in alphabetical order
PE/DCL/DD/0124411–9001–124
Standard 13.04/EN March 2002 GSM/BSS V13
high interference level radio channels that are authorized tohop
high interference level radio channels that are notauthorized to hop
Channels are allocated cyclically inside each pool.
dBm– 128 0
Level 0 Level 1 Level 2 Level 3 Level 4
– 108 – 106 – 104 – 102
THRESHOLDINTERFER-ENCE = 1
THRESHOLDINTERFER-ENCE = 2
THRESHOLDINTERFER-ENCE = 3
THRESHOLDINTERFER-ENCE = 4
radChanSelIntThreshold = 0
radChanSelIntThreshold =1
radChanSelIntThreshold = 2
radChanSelIntThreshold = 3
radChanSelIntThreshold = 4
Value range : [0 to 4]
Object : handOverControl
Default value : 1
Type : DP
Checks : [M] : The parent bsc object is unlocked.
radioAllocator Class 2 (gprsBtsLockExtendedConf) V12
Description : Radio allocator type used in the cell
Value range : [voice + dataCircuit,voice + dataCircuit + packetData]
Object : bts
Feature : GPRS (TF1121 – V12)
Default value : voice + dataCircuit
Type : DP
Checks : [M]: The parent bsc object is unlocked and the btsobject is locked.
Parameters listed in alphabetical orderNortel Networks Confidential 2–301
BSS Parameter Dictionary
radioLinkTimeOut Class 2
Description : Maximum value of the counter (S) associated with thedownlink SACCH messages, beyond which the radio link iscut off. It is lower than or equal to t3109.
Mobiles comply with system operating conditions when thecounter (S) is assigned a value lower than or equal to t3109.
If the receiver is unable to decode a downlink SACCHmessage (BTS-to-MS direction), the counter is decreasedby 1. If the message is received, the counter is increased by 2.When the counter goes down to zero, the radio link is declared“faulty”.
decoded expected but not decodedradio link failure
4
0
Value range : [4 to 64, by steps of 4] SACCH frames (1 unit = 480 ms onTCHs, 470 ms on SDCCHs)
Object : bts
Default value : 20 SACCH
Type : DP
Checks : [C/M]: radioLinkTimeOut ≤ t3109.
[M]: The parent bsc object is unlocked and the btsobject is locked.
Notes : The rlf1 attribute serves the same goal on the uplink.
The system does not check that the values of the twoattributes are consistent.
Nortel Networks Confidential2–302 Parameters listed in alphabetical order
PE/DCL/DD/0124411–9001–124
Standard 13.04/EN March 2002 GSM/BSS V13
radioSiteMask Class 2
Description : Definition of the PCM time slots that can be used by a site. TSn is masked when bit n is set to 0, it can be used when bit n isset to 1 in the binary field. The alarm mask is immediatelydisplayed in the hexadecimal field just below. The alarm maskcan be set using the hexadecimal field as well as the binaryfield. TS 0 (least significant bit) is always masked since itcannot be used.
The mask defines the time slots that can be used in each PCMlink allotted to a given radio site. Time slot allocation ismanaged by the BSC; a time slot available on a site can be usedeither by a radio time slot for traffic purposes or by a LAPDlink which does not carry the link with the site BCF forsignaling.
A PCM E1 link carries thirty-two time slots. TheradioSiteMask of a site using E1 links is as follows:
radioSiteMask = xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx0
| | | | |
TS31 23 15 7 TS0
A PCM T1 link carries twenty-four time slots. TheradioSiteMask of a site using T1 links is as follows:
radioSiteMask = 0000000xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx0
| | | | |
TS31 23 15 7 TS0
Sites that do not share PCM links may be assigned the full set.
In a BTS chain, the scheduled time slots of each radio site mustbe allotted in ascending order (TS1, TS2, TS3, etc.), beginningwith the site closest to the BSC. Refer to thepcmTimeSlotNumber entry.
Value range : [32-bit mask]
Object : btsSiteManager
Type : DP
Checks : [C/M]: TS 0 cannot be assigned.
[C/M]: If PCM T1 links are used, TSs 25 to 31 cannot beassigned.
Parameters listed in alphabetical orderNortel Networks Confidential 2–303
BSS Parameter Dictionary
[C/M]: The radioSiteMask of all sites sharing a samePCM link (drop and insert connections) aredissociated.
[M]: The scheduled time slot of the radio site(pcmTimeSlotNumber) is masked [0] since itcannot be used.
[M]: The parent bsc object is unlocked and thebtsSiteManager object is locked.
radioSiteName
Description : Reference name of a multiple site object on the OMC–R. Itbegins with a letter and is case sensitive.
The name of a multiple site can be used in all MMI commandsto reference the multiple site on the OMC–R.
Value range : [30 characters max]
Object : multiple site
Type : DP
Checks : [C/M]: The name of a multiple site is unique to theOMC–R.
radResSupBusyTimer Class 3 R2 V8
Description : Maximum time that SDCCH or TCH can be continuouslyoccupied without generating an alarm
Value range : [1 to 18] hours
Object : bsc
Default value : 3
Type : DP
Checks : [M]: The bsc object is unlocked.
Nortel Networks Confidential2–304 Parameters listed in alphabetical order
PE/DCL/DD/0124411–9001–124
Standard 13.04/EN March 2002 GSM/BSS V13
radResSupervision Class 3 R3 V8
Description : Indicates whether radio resources are controlled at the celllevel (both busy resources and free resources)
When no control is performed, no alarm related to the use ornon-use of an SDCCH or TCH is generated. Refer to theradResSupBusyTimer and radResSupFreeTimer entries inthe Dictionary.
Value range : [true / false]
Object : bts
Default value : true
Type : DP
Checks : [M]: The parent bsc object is unlocked.
Note : radResSupBusyTimer and radResSupFreeTimer can be setautomatically by the OMC–R calendar function.
The activation of this feature does not induce any signaling orCPU overload. Only the BSS–OMC–R link is overloaded ata rate of radResSupBusyTimer or radResSupFreeTimer.
radResSupFreeTimer Class 3 R4 V8
Description : Maximum time an SDCCH or TCH can be continuously freewithout generating an alarm
Value range : [1 to 18] hours
Object : bsc
Default value : 18
Type : DP
Checks : [M]: The bsc object is unlocked.
reception time
Description : To select messages received at that time
Absolute time format entry forms are detailed in NTP < 130 >.
Do not fill in if this criterion is not to be selected.
Value range : [<date>,<time>]Object : Alarm and notification logs – Filter
Type : DP
Parameters listed in alphabetical orderNortel Networks Confidential 2–305
BSS Parameter Dictionary
Record reference
Description : Identifier of a user call as recorded in a call monitoring datafile
Value range : [0 to 63]Object : Call monitoring – Display (SDO)
Type : DP
Checks : [A]: It is in the range [0 to 63].
[A]: This parameter is mandatory when a user callreport (Events option) or a radio measurementsreport (Measurements option) is requested.
[A]: It can be undefined when a synthesis report(Synthesis option) is requested. In that case, asummary of all user recorded calls is displayed.
redundantPcmNumber
Description : Number of the redundant PCM link defined on BSC end
This dynamic attribute is displayed provided thebtsSiteManager object redundantPcmPresence attributevalue is “true”.
Value range : [0 to 47]Object : btsSiteManager
Type : DD
Remark : A redundant link is not normally used for traffic or signallingconnections.
redundantPcmPresence Class 2
Description : Presence of a redundant PCM link on a radio site
Value range : [true / false]Object : btsSiteManager
Type : DP
Checks : [M]: If the attribute value is “true”, the objectbscSitePcmList attribute includes two items, oneidentifies the PCM active link, and the otheridentifies the PCM redundant link.
[M]: The parent bsc object is unlocked and thebtsSiteManager object is locked.
Nortel Networks Confidential2–306 Parameters listed in alphabetical order
PE/DCL/DD/0124411–9001–124
Standard 13.04/EN March 2002 GSM/BSS V13
refPeriod
Description : Reference counting period when a counter is involved
Value range : [0 to 345600] seconds
Object : alarm criteria
Condition : To define if a counter is associated with the criteria.
Type : DP
refPeriod
Description : Reference counting period used by the“excessiveAnomalyRate” function
This attribute is not used by the detection“outOfRangeCounter” function. In that case, the referenceperiod is set as follows:
For cumulative counters, the thresholds define total valuesnot to be reached during a one minute reference period.
For load or value counters, the thresholds define maximumor minimum average values not to be reached during a 1minute reference period, except for the PCM unavailabilitycounters for which they define total values not to be reachedduring the reference observation period.
The BSS observation counter threshold crossing detectionmechanism is described in NTP < 07 >.
Value range : [0 to 2147483646] minutes
Object : mdWarning if detectionFunction = “excessiveAnomalyRate”
Type : DP
relatedSoftwares V13
Description : This attribute identifies the list of software that are separatelyidentifiable. This list represents the unit of software that isready to be used by the equipment. This attribute is allocatedby the MD–R at object creation. This attribute cannot bemodified by the Manager.
Value range : [0 to 10]
Object : executableSoftware
Type : DP
Parameters listed in alphabetical orderNortel Networks Confidential 2–307
BSS Parameter Dictionary
relay
Description : Identifier of a BSS alarm relay which activates an externalalarm loop when the counter of immediate unacknowledgedalarms shows a nonzero value for one of the BSSs assigned tothe relay
BSS relays are used to transfer the state of the associated BSSimmediate action alarm counters to remote sites.
A BSS relay can be associated with several BSCs. Conversely,a BSC can be simultaneously assigned to several relays.
Value range : [4 to 64]Object : relay
Type : Id
Reminder : OMC–R relays are used to transfer the state of system alarmcounters to remote sites and are not managed by users.
remoteSsuState
Description : State of the remote subsystem (BSSAP)
Value range : [inService / outOfService]
inService The MSC BSSAP service is working. . . . . . . . . for the BSC.
outOfService The MSC BSSAP service is not. . . . . . working.
Object : signallingLinkSet
Type : DD
repetition rate
Description : Periodicity of short message broadcasting
Each concerned BSC repeatedly sends the selected shortmessage to the BTSs covering the selected cells at therepetition rate defined by the user.
Each BTS repeatedly broadcasts the short message to allmobiles under its control, using the same repetition rate.
Value range : [2 sec / 30 sec / 1 min / 2 min / 4 min / 8 min / 16 min / 32 min]Object : short message – Start broadcast
Type : DP
Nortel Networks Confidential2–308 Parameters listed in alphabetical order
PE/DCL/DD/0124411–9001–124
Standard 13.04/EN March 2002 GSM/BSS V13
Report range V11
Description : Time period chosen over which the counter values are read.
Value range : [5 min / 15 min / 30 min / 60 min / 2 hours / 6 hours / 12 hours/ 24 hours]
Object : report template
Type : DP
Notes : The authorized values for OFS observation type are 60 min,2 hours, 6 hours, 12 hours, and 24 hours.The authorized values for ORT and Performance Monitorobservation types are 5 min, 15 min, 30 min, 60 min, and2 hours.
report template V11
Description : Identifier of the report template object defined with regard tothe bsc object
Value range : [30 characters max]Object : report template
Type : DP
reportObjLevel
Description : Level of the report to edit. Level of the report to edit
Fill in only when editing a permanent bsc report. Examples:“bsc = all” or “bsc = 1 & bsc = 2”.
Value range : [adjacentCellHandOver / bsc / bts / transceiverZone /hardwareTcu3G]
Object : Display xxx report
Type : DP
Checks : [A]: If specific objects are entered, they all belong tothe same class.
reserved1 Class 2 (gprsPcuLockExtendedConf) V12
Description : Attribute reserved for future use
Value range : [0 to 255]Object : pcu
Feature : GPRS (SV407 – V12)
Type : DP
Checks : [M]: The parent bsc object is unlocked and the pcuobject is locked.
Parameters listed in alphabetical orderNortel Networks Confidential 2–309
BSS Parameter Dictionary
reserved1 Class 2 (gprsTranscvLockExtendedConf) V12
Description : Attribute reserved for future use
Value range : [0 to 255]Object : transceiver
Default value :
Feature : GPRS (SV407 – V12)
Type : DP
Checks : [M]: The parent bsc object is unlocked and thetransceiver object is locked.
reserved2 Class 2 (gprsPcuLockExtendedConf) V12
Description : Attribute reserved for future use
Value range : [0 to 255]
Object : pcu
Feature : GPRS (SV407 – V12)
Type : DP
Checks : [M]: The parent bsc object is unlocked and the pcuobject is locked.
reserved2 Class 2 (gprsTranscvLockExtendedConf) V12
Description : Attribute reserved for future use
Value range : [0 to 255]Object : transceiver
Default value :
Feature : GPRS (SV407 – V12)
Type : DP
Checks : [M]: The parent bsc object is unlocked and thetransceiver object is locked.
Nortel Networks Confidential2–310 Parameters listed in alphabetical order
PE/DCL/DD/0124411–9001–124
Standard 13.04/EN March 2002 GSM/BSS V13
reserved3 (T3168) Class 3 (gprsBtsExtendedConf) V12
Description : This timer is used at the MS side to define when to stop waitingfor the Packet UL Assignment message after sending aPacket Resource Request message.
Value range : [0 (500 msec)1 (1000 msec)2 (1500 msec)3 (2000 msec)4 (2500 msec)5 (3000 msec)6 (3500 msec)7 (4000 msec)]
Object : bts
Feature : GPRS (SV407 – V12)
Type : DP
Default value : 0
Checks : [M]: The parent bsc object is unlocked.
reserved3 Class 2 (gprsPcuLockExtendedConf) V12
Description : Attribute reserved for future use
Value range : [0 to 255]Object : pcu
Feature : GPRS (SV407 – V12)
Type : DP
Checks : [M]: The parent bsc object is unlocked and the pcuobject is locked.
reserved3 Class 2 (gprsTranscvLockExtendedConf) V12
Description : Attribute reserved for future use
Value range : [0 to 255]Object : transceiver
Feature : GPRS (SV407 – V12)
Type : DP
Checks : [M]: The parent bsc object is unlocked and thetransceiver object is locked.
Parameters listed in alphabetical orderNortel Networks Confidential 2–311
BSS Parameter Dictionary
reserved4 (T3192) Class 3 (gprsBtsExtentedConf) V12
Description : Wait for DL TBF release after reception of the final block. Thistimer T3192 is used on the MS side to define when the MSreceived all the RLC data blocks. When the timer expires, theMS releases the resources associated with the TBF and beginsto monitor its paging group (DRX mode).
Value range : [0 (500 msec)1 (1000 msec)2 (1500 msec)3 (0 msec)4 (80 msec)5 (120 msec)6 (160 msec)7 (200 msec)]
Object : bts
Feature : GPRS (SV407 – V12)
Type : DP
Default value : 0
Checks : [M]: The parent bsc object is unlocked.
reserved4 Class 2 (gprsPcuLockExtendedConf) V12
Description : Attribute reserved for future use
Value range : [0 to 255]Object : pcu
Feature : GPRS (SV407 – V12)
Type : DP
Checks : [M]: The parent bsc object is unlocked and the pcuobject is locked.
reserved4 Class 2 (gprsTranscvLockExtendedConf) V12
Description : Attribute reserved for future use
Value range : [0 to 255]Object : transceiver
Default value :
Feature : GPRS (SV407 – V12)
Type : DP
Checks : [M]: The parent bsc object is unlocked and thetransceiver object is locked.
Nortel Networks Confidential2–312 Parameters listed in alphabetical order
PE/DCL/DD/0124411–9001–124
Standard 13.04/EN March 2002 GSM/BSS V13
reserved5 Class 3 (gprsBtsExtendedConf) V12
Description : Attribute reserved for future use
This parameter allows to configure the MAC mode to be usedin UL direction.
Value range : [0 to 255]
In V12.4c release, only “USF” is provided.
“0 = USF”. Value 0 selected: USF
Object : bts
Default value : 0
Feature : GPRS (SV407 – V12)
Type : DP
Checks : [M]: The parent bsc object is unlocked.
reserved5 Class 2 (gprsPcuLockExtendedConf) V12
Description : Attribute reserved for future use
Value range : [0 to 255]
Object : pcu
Feature : GPRS (SV407 – V12)
Type : DP
Checks : [M]: The parent bsc object is unlocked and the pcuobject is locked.
reserved5 Class 2 (gprsTranscvLockExtendedConf) V12
Description : Attribute reserved for future use
Value range : [0 to 255]
Object : transceiver
Default value :
Feature : GPRS (SV407 – V12)
Type : DP
Checks : [M]: The parent bsc object is unlocked and thetransceiver object is locked.
Parameters listed in alphabetical orderNortel Networks Confidential 2–313
BSS Parameter Dictionary
resetCircuitRepeat Class 1 V8
Description : Whether the RESET CIRCUIT message is repeated onbssMap19 timer elapse if the acknowledgment message wasnot received from the MSC (Phase II compliance)
Value range : [false]Object : signallingPoint
Default value : False
Type : DP
Checks : [C/M]: The only accepted value is “false”.
[M]: The parent bsc object is locked.
Remark : Since the system accepts only one value for this attribute,changing it has no meaning.
retransDuration Class 2 R5 V8
Description : Maximum number of occurrences of a same paging sub-groupthat separates the first and the last transmissions of the samepaging message.
Value range : [0 to 22]Object : bts
Default value : 10
Type : DP
Checks : [M]: The parent bsc object is unlocked and the btsobject is locked.
[C/M]: retransDuration ≥ (delayBetweenRetrans + 1)x nbOfRepeat
retry on error
Description : Whether commands are rerun when the system detects anapplication error
This parameter has priority over the on error parameter. Whenits value is “True”, the errored command is rerun; when it is“False”, the on error parameter is analyzed.
The errors involved, the time between reruns, and themaximum number of reruns are defined in static configurationdata.
Value range : [true / false] (default is False)Object : commandFile – Run
Type : DP
Nortel Networks Confidential2–314 Parameters listed in alphabetical order
PE/DCL/DD/0124411–9001–124
Standard 13.04/EN March 2002 GSM/BSS V13
rlf1 Class 2 R6 V8
Description : Value to compute the initial and maximum value of the (CT)counter used in the BTS radio link control algorithm
The FP runs the following algorithm to monitor the uplinkSACCHs (MS-to-BTS direction):
The CT counter is reset to zero when the FP receives aCHANNEL ACTIVATION message.
On each occurence of an uplink SACCH, the followingoccurs:
• if the channel is decoded and CT = 0, then CT = 4 * rlf1 + 4
• if the channel is decoded and CT ≠ 0, then CT = min(rlf1, CT+rlf2)
• if the channel is not decoded, then CT = max (0,CT–rlf3)
When the CT counter goes down to zero, the radio link isbroken and the BTS sends a CONNECTION FAILUREINDICATION message to the BSC.
Value range : [0 to 15]Object : bts
Default value : 4
Type : DP
Checks : [M]: The parent bsc object is unlocked and the btsobject is locked.
Notes : The radioLinkTimeOut attribute serves the same goal onthe downlink.The system does not check that the values of the twoattributes are consistent.
rlf2 Class 2 R7 V8
Description : Step value by which the (CT) counter is increased by the radiolink control algorithm when an uplink SACCH is decoded
Refer to the rlf1 entry.
Value range : [1 to 4] SACCH framesObject : bts
Default value : 2
Type : DP
Checks : [M]: The parent bsc object is unlocked and the btsobject is locked.
Parameters listed in alphabetical orderNortel Networks Confidential 2–315
BSS Parameter Dictionary
rlf3 Class 2 R8 V8
Description : Step value by which the (CT) counter is decreased by the radiolink control algorithm when an uplink SACCH is not decoded
Refer to the rlf1 entry.
Value range : [1 to 4] SACCH framesObject : bts
Default value : 1
Type : DP
Checks : [M]: The parent bsc object is unlocked and the btsobject is locked.
rmpConfState
Description : State of radio measurement processing in the TDMA frame
Value range : [configured / not configured / not significant]
configured: The CURRENT CELL PARAMETER,NEIGHBOUR CELL PARAMETER (and EXTENDEDNEIGHBOUR CELL PARAMETER when more thansixteen defined neighbor cells) messages have beenacknowledged by the BTS.
not configured: The messages have not been acknowledgedby the BTS. If a CURRENT CELL PARAMETER messageis not acknowledged, the notification 1258 “Non responseduring the configuration of the remote L1M” is issued. If aNEIGHBOUR CELL PARAMETER or EXTENDEDNEIGHBOUR CELL PARAMETER message is notacknowledged, the notification 1259 “Negativeacknowledgement of a distant L1M command” is issued.
not significant: The BTS has not sent the messages to theBSC (either the TDMA frame is not working or SYS INFOwas not acknowledged).
Object : transceiver
Type : DD
Nortel Networks Confidential2–316 Parameters listed in alphabetical order
PE/DCL/DD/0124411–9001–124
Standard 13.04/EN March 2002 GSM/BSS V13
rndAccTimAdvThreshold Class 3 R9 V8
Description : MS-to-BTS distance beyond which mobile access requests toa cell are refused.
It defines the maximum timing advance value accepted.
The effective timing advance value is broadcast in theCHANNEL REQUIRED message sent by the BTS to the BSC.If it is above the user defined threshold, the BSC ignores therequest.
Value range : [2 to 35] km (non–extended mode)[2 to 120] km (extended mode)
Object : bts
Default value : 35 (non–extended cell), 90 (extended cell)
Type : DP
Checks : [C/M]: The maximum distance is 35 km if the bts objectextended cell attribute is “false”.
[C/M]: The maximum distance is 120 km if the extendedcell attribute of the bts object is “true”.
[M]: The parent bsc object is unlocked.
Note : The number of access requests that are refused for that reasonis accounted by the BSC (permanent bsc observationcounter 1161/6) and fed back to the OMC–R.
routingArea Class 2 V12
Description : GPRS Cell Global Identifier (locationAreaCode + cellIdentity+ routingArea)
Value range : [0 to 255]
Object : bts
Default value : 0
Feature : GPRS (SV407 – V12)
Type :
Checks : [M]: The parent bsc object is unlocked and the parentbts is locked.
Note : A Routing Area is necessarily included in a Location Area.
Parameters listed in alphabetical orderNortel Networks Confidential 2–317
BSS Parameter Dictionary
runCallClear Class 3 R10
Description : Number of “Measurement Results” messages that must bereceived before the call clearing algorithm in a cell istriggered
Value range : [1 to 31] SACCH frames (1 unit = 480 ms on TCHs, 470 mson SDCCHs)
Object : bts
Default value : 16
Checks : [M]: The parent bsc object is unlocked.
runHandOver Class 3 R11
Description : Number of “Measurement Results” messages that must bereceived before the handover algorithm in a cell is triggered.
Value range : [1 to 31] SACCH frames (1 unit = 480 ms on TCHs, 470 mson SDCCHs)
Object : bts
Default value : 1
Type : DP
Checks : [M]: The parent bsc object is unlocked.
runPwrControl Class 3 R12
Description : Number of “Measurement Results” messages that must bereceived before the power control algorithm in a cell istriggered.
Value range : [1 to 31] SACCH frames (1 unit = 480 ms on TCHs, 470 mson SDCCHs)
Object : bts
Default value : 4
Type : DP
Checks : [M]: The parent bsc object is unlocked.
Nortel Networks Confidential2–318 Parameters listed in alphabetical order
PE/DCL/DD/0124411–9001–124
Standard 13.04/EN March 2002 GSM/BSS V13
rxLevAccessMin Class 3 R13
Description : Minimum signal strength level received by the mobiles forbeing granted access to a cell. The information is sent to MSprior to registering.
As an example, a threshold level of –104 dBm corresponds toan acceptable BER of approximately 10–2 (minimumrecommended value).
Value range : [less than –110, –110 to –109, ... , –49 to –48, morethan –48] dBm
Object : bts
Default value : less than –110 dBm
Type : DP
Checks : [M]: The parent bsc object is unlocked.
rxLevDLIH Class 3 R14
Description : Maximum interference level in BTS-to-MS direction, beyondwhich an intra cell handover may be triggered
Value range : [less than –110, –110 to –109, ... , –49 to –48, morethan –48] dBm
Object : handOverControl
Default value : –85 to –84 dBm
Type : DP
Checks : [M]: The parent bsc object is unlocked.
Parameters listed in alphabetical orderNortel Networks Confidential 2–319
BSS Parameter Dictionary
rxLevDLPBGT Class 3 R15 V11
Description : Downlink signal strength threshold above which handoversfor power budget are inhibited
In certain issues, the operator may want to prevent handoverfor power budget in case of the received level in the servingcell is good enough so that a handover would not improve thesituation.
This parameter shall be set such as rxLevDLPBGT ≥lRxLevDLH.
Value range : [less than –110, –110 to –109,..., –49 to –48, morethan –48] dBm
Object : adjacentCellHandOver
Default value : more than –48
Type : DP
Checks : [M] : The parent bsc object is unlocked
Notes : This parameter shall be disabled by setting it to its defaultvalue: more than –48 (dBm).
This parameter is only available for DCU4 or DRXtransceiver architecture. It shall be disabled for DCU2architecture.
rxLevHreqave Class 3 R16
Description : Number of signal strength measurements performed on aserving cell, used to compute arithmetic strength averages inhandover and power control algorithms
Value range : [1 to 10] number of measurement results
Object : handOverControl
Default value : 8
Type : DP
Checks : [M] : The parent bsc object is unlocked.
Nortel Networks Confidential2–320 Parameters listed in alphabetical order
PE/DCL/DD/0124411–9001–124
Standard 13.04/EN March 2002 GSM/BSS V13
rxLevHreqaveBeg Class3 R17 V11
Description : Number of measurement reports on current cell for signalstrength arithmetic average for early handover mechanism
Refer to the rxLevHreqave entry in the Dictionary. Thisparameter is coupled with hoMarginBeg andrxNCellHreqaveBeg use.
Value range : [1 to 10]
Object : handOverControl
Default value : 2
Type : DP
Checks : [M] : The parent bsc is unlocked.
Notes : This parameter shall be set such as rxLevHreqaveBeg ≤rxLevHreqave.This parameter is only available for DCU4 or DRXtransceiver architecture.
rxLevHreqt Class 3 R18
Description : Number of arithmetic averages taken into account to computethe weighted average signal strength in handover and powercontrol algorithms. Each is calculated from rxLevHreqavesignal strength measurements on a serving cell.
Value range : [1 to 16]
Object : handOverControl
Default value : 1
Type : DP
Checks : [C/M]: It is equal to the number of weights inrxLevWtsList (refer to this entry in theDictionary).
[M]: The parent bsc object is unlocked.
Parameters listed in alphabetical orderNortel Networks Confidential 2–321
BSS Parameter Dictionary
rxLevMinCell Class 3 R19
Description : Minimum signal strength level received by MS for beinggranted access to a neighbor cell
Value range : [less than –110, –110 to –109, ... , –49 to –48, morethan –48] dBm
Object : adjacentCellHandOver
Default value : –95 to –94 dBm (GSM 900), –93 to –92 (GSM 1800)
Type : DP
Checks : [M]: The parent bsc object is unlocked.
rxLevULIH Class 3 R20
Description : Maximum interference level in MS-to-BTS direction, beyondwhich an intra cell handover may be triggered
Value range : [less than –110, –110 to –109, ... , –49 to –48, morethan –48] dBm, without Uplink Mapping Feature activated.[less than –117, ... , more than –42] dBm, when the UplinkMapping Feature is used.
Object : handOverControl
Feature : Uplink Mapping (TF 876)
Default value : –85 to –84 dBm
Type : DP
Checks : [M]: The parent bsc object is unlocked.
Nortel Networks Confidential2–322 Parameters listed in alphabetical order
PE/DCL/DD/0124411–9001–124
Standard 13.04/EN March 2002 GSM/BSS V13
rxLevWtsList Class 3 R21
Description : Values of weights to be used for signal strength weighedaverage
The L1M function first calculates rxLevHreqave arithmeticaverages from raw measurements, and balances rxLevHreqtaverages among those with the weights defined inrxLevWtsList.
Each arithmetic average is partnered with one weight in thelist. Weight/average associations are set in the order which theweights are recorded. The latest computed arithmetic averageis always partnered with the first weight in the list.
Super-average = [∑ (averagei x weighti)] / 100,i = 1 to rxLevHreqt
Value range : [0 to 100] %
Object : handOverControl
Default value : 100
Type : DP
Checks : [M]: The number of weights in the list is equal torxLevHreqt and their sum equals 100.
[M]: The parent bsc object is unlocked.
Parameters listed in alphabetical orderNortel Networks Confidential 2–323
BSS Parameter Dictionary
S
sapi
Description : Service Access Point Indicator that defines the type of LAPDlink use
Value range : [RSL / OML]Object : lapdLink
Type : DP
Restrictions : [M]: This attribute cannot be modified.
scannerId
Description : Identifier of the mdScanner object describing the observation
Value range : [0 to 2147483646]
“0” identifies the OMC–R permanent manager observation.For a BSS observation or the OMC–R agent permanentobservation, this parameter must match the reference numberof an mdScanner object.
Object : Display xxx report
Type : DP
Checks : [A]: If the request concerns a BSS observation or theOMC–R agent permanent observation, therelated mdScanner object is created.
scannerId
Description : Identifier of the mdScanner object describing the observation
Value range : [0 to 2147483646]
“0” identifies the OMC–R permanent manager observation.For a BSS observation or the OMC–R agent permanentobservation, this parameter must match the reference numberof an mdScanner object.
Object : List observation messages
Type : DP
Checks : [A]: If the request concerns a BSS observation or theOMC–R agent permanent observation, therelated mdScanner object is created.
Nortel Networks Confidential2–324 Parameters listed in alphabetical order
PE/DCL/DD/0124411–9001–124
Standard 13.04/EN March 2002 GSM/BSS V13
sequenceNumber
Description : Trace record identification number
Object : traceFileReady
Type : DP
serial number
Description : 3 fields (geographical scope, message code, update number)which identify a particular message from the source and typeindicated by the Message Identifier and are altered every timethe message with a given Message Identifier is changed
Value range : [geographical scope, message code, update number]
geographical scope. .[immediate cell widenormal PLMN widenormal location area widenormal cell wide]
message code [0 to 1023]. . . . .
differentiate messages from same source and type (sameMessage Identifier)
update number [0 to 15]. . . .
differentiate older and newer versions of the same message
Object : short message – Display broadcast characteristics
Type : DP
Parameters listed in alphabetical orderNortel Networks Confidential 2–325
BSS Parameter Dictionary
serial number
Description : 3 fields (geographical scope, message code, update number)which identify a particular message from the source and typeindicated by the Message Identifier and are altered every timethe message with a given Message Identifier is changed
Value range : [geographical scope, message code, update number]
geographical scope. .[immediate cell widenormal PLMN widenormal location area widenormal cell wide]
message code [0 to 1023]. . . . .
differentiate messages from same source and type (sameMessage Identifier)
update number [0 to 15]. . . .
differentiate older and newer versions of the same message
Object : short message – Display broadcast characteristics
Type : DP
session context saving mode V10
Description : Session context saving mode
Value range : [automatic when logout / on user request]
Object : user profile
Type : DP
shelfNumber V13
Description : Indicates the position of a module in a shelf
Value range : [0 to 1]Object : atmRm, cc, cem, iem, lsaRc, mms, omu, sw8kRm, tmu, trm.
Type : DP
Feature : AR 1209 – V13.1 – V13.1
Nortel Networks Confidential2–326 Parameters listed in alphabetical order
PE/DCL/DD/0124411–9001–124
Standard 13.04/EN March 2002 GSM/BSS V13
short message
Description : Identifier (name) of a short message on the OMC–R
A message name identifies the short message on the OMC–R;it is not relayed to the BSC during broadcasting. It can bechanged by the Rename command (see the new name entry inthe Dictionary).
Setting a short message characteristics does not affect thecurrent broadcast of the message. The change will be effectivewhen a new broadcast command is launched.
A short message broadcasting is identified on the OMC–R bya unique serial number assigned by the system whenbroadcasting is initiated (refer to this entry in the Dictionary).
Value range : [case sensitive, 20 characters max]
Object : short message
Type : Id
Checks : C]: The name of a short message is unique to theOMC–R.
[M]: The short message is created.
[D]: The short message is not being broadcast.
sicBoardsInt
Description : State of the BSC chain SIC boards. Each board is identified byits type [SICD / SICX / CCS7] and a number in the type.
Value range : [working / fault]
working The SIC board was correctly. . . . . . . . . initialized.
fault An error has been detected on the. . . . . . . . . . . . board.
The number of SICX, SICD, and CCS7 boards in a BSCdepends on its hardware architecture. Refer to the bscTypeentry in the Dictionary.
Object : bsc – Display chain information
Type : DD
Note : This parameter is only available for BSC 2G
Parameters listed in alphabetical orderNortel Networks Confidential 2–327
BSS Parameter Dictionary
signallingLink
Description : Identifier of a signallingLink object defined with regard to asignallingLinkSet object
Value range : [0 to 2147483646]
Object : signallingLink
Type : Id
Checks : [C]: The number of signaling links controlled by aBSC is limited to maxSigLPerSigLS (staticconfiguration data).
[C/M]: The referenced pcmCircuit object(pcmCircuitId) is assigned to the A interface anddepends on the same transcoder object(transcoderId) as the signallingLink object.
[C/M]: The referenced PCM,TS pair (pcmCircuitId andtimeSlotNumber) is not already assigned to asignallingLink or xtp object dependent on thesame transcoder object, and the time slot is notmapped on the TS used by the OMC channel onthe Ater interface.
[C/M]: If the SS7 link uses PCMA link no.3(pcmCircuitId), the timeSlotNumber is in therange [1 to 27] if the PCM link is an E1 link or inthe range [1 to 20] if the PCM link is a T1 link.Since the last four time slots of that link are notmapped on the Ater interface, they are unusable(refer to the transcoderMatrix entry in theDictionary).
[C/D]: If the application database of the related BSC isbuilt, the parent bsc object is unlocked.
[D]: If the application database of the related BSC isbuilt, the signallingLink object is locked.
[D]: If the application database of the related BSC isnot built, it has been reset by an Off line reset BDAcommand.
[D]: No mdScanner object refers to the signallingLinkobject (no observation is running on that object).
Nortel Networks Confidential2–328 Parameters listed in alphabetical order
PE/DCL/DD/0124411–9001–124
Standard 13.04/EN March 2002 GSM/BSS V13
signallingLinkResState
Description : SS7 channel resource state
Value range : [blocked / inhibited / inhibitedLocal / inhibitedDistant /inhibitedLocalDistant / inhibitedBlocked /notInhibitedNotBlocked]
inhibited state enforced by a user. . . . . . . . . . . . . SetInhibit command
inhibitedLocal state enforced by a user. . . . . . . .
inhibitedDistant state enforced by the MSC. . . . . . .
inhibitedLocalDistant state enforced by a user and the. . MSC
blocked state enforced by the MSC. . . . . . . . . . . . . . following a loss of dialoguebetween MTP2 and MTP3
Object : signallingLink
Type : DD
signallingLinkSet
Description : Identifier of a signallingLinkSet object describing aBSC–MSC link on MSC end
Value range : [0 to 2147483646]
Object : signallingLinkSet
Type : Id
Checks : [C]: The signallingLinkSet object is not created for theparent signallingPoint object.
[C]: If the application database of the related BSC isbuilt, the parent bsc object is unlocked.
[D]: The application database of the related BSC hasbeen reset by an Off line reset BDA command.
Parameters listed in alphabetical orderNortel Networks Confidential 2–329
BSS Parameter Dictionary
signallingPoint
Description : Identifier of a signallingPoint object describing a BSC–MSClink on BSC end
Value range : [0 to 2147483646]
Object : signallingPoint
Type : Id
Checks : [C]: The signallingPoint object is not created for theparent bsc object.
[C]: The software object related to the parent bsc objectis created.
[C]: If the application database of the related BSC isbuilt, the parent bsc object is unlocked.
[D]: The application database of the related BSC hasbeen reset by an Off line reset BDA command.
signallingPointType
Description : Whether the BSC–MSC link acts as an STP (SignalingTransfer Point)
Value range : [STP / noSTP (only value accepted)]Object : signallingPoint
Default value : noSTP
Type : DP
Checks : [C/M]: The only value accepted by the system is“noSTP”.
Remark : Since the system accepts only one value for this attribute,changing it has no meaning.
Nortel Networks Confidential2–330 Parameters listed in alphabetical order
PE/DCL/DD/0124411–9001–124
Standard 13.04/EN March 2002 GSM/BSS V13
signallingTerminalNumber Class 2
Description : Number of the CCS7 port used by an SS7 channel in the BSC= 2 x number of the mother CCS7 board [0 to 1] + port number[0 to 1]
Value range : [0 to 1] (BSC 6000 types 1, 2),[0 to 3] (BSC 6000 types 3, 4, 5),[0 to 1] (BSC 12000 type 1),[0 to 3] (BSC 12000 types 2, 3, 4),[0 to 5] (BSC 12000 type 5).
Object : signallingLink
Type : DP
Checks : [C/M]: The port number is one-of-a-kind to the BSC (aCCS7 port controls one and only one SS7 link).
[M]: The parent bsc object is unlocked and thesignallingLink object is locked.
Note : This parameter is only available for BSC 2G
sigPReserved1 Class 3 S1 V12
Description : Reduction factor used to reduce the BSC capacity, so as toadjust the BSC capacity to the MSC.
Value range : [–32768 to 32767]
Only 0 to 9 values are taken into account.
Object : signallingPoint
Feature : BSC capacity control (FM1251.1 – V12)
Default value : 0
Type : DP
Checks : [M]: The parent bsc object is unlocked.
Notes : If the sigPReserved1 parameter is set to 0, the number ofRAD_CNX contexts is not reduced, and the BSC capacityis full.
If the sigPReserved1 parameter is set to 9, the number ofRAD_CNX contexts is reduced, and the BSC capacity isreduced by 90%.
Parameters listed in alphabetical orderNortel Networks Confidential 2–331
BSS Parameter Dictionary
sigPReserved2 Class 3 S2 V12
Description : Attribute reserved for future use
Value range : [–32768 to 32767]Object : signallingPoint
Default value : 0
Type : DP
Checks : [M]: The parent bsc object is unlocked.
siteGsmFctList Class 2 S3
Description : List of up to 14 elements that identify the GSM functionsconfigured in a site BCF
Value range : [entityMgt / download / siteMgt / abisSig / abisTraf / rfTrans/ rfRecep / cellMgt / fhMgt / tdmaMgt / tsMgt / gsmTime /car0Fil / freqMgt]
Routing modeThe routing mode of the messages handled by the GSMfunctions, which enables the Abis interface to identify theGSM entity to which the messages are sent, and the maximumresponse time of each GSM function are summarized in thefollowing table.
GSM function Routing mode Response time
Withoutcentralized O&M
With centralizedO&M
GSM entityManagement
relative tei bcf 10 seconds
download ing relative tei relative tei 32 seconds
site Management relative tei bcf 120 seconds
abis SignallingManagement
bcf bcf 120 seconds
abis TrafficManagement
bcf bcf 120 seconds
radio frequencyTransmission
bcf bcf 120 seconds
radio frequencyReception
not implemented none 0 second
cell Management bcf bcf 120 seconds
frequency hoppingManagement
relative tei bcf 30 seconds
Nortel Networks Confidential2–332 Parameters listed in alphabetical order
PE/DCL/DD/0124411–9001–124
Standard 13.04/EN March 2002 GSM/BSS V13
GSM function Response timeRouting mode
With centralizedO&M
Withoutcentralized O&M
tdma Management relative tei bcf 30 seconds
time slot Management relative tei bcf 30 seconds
gsmTime not implemented none 0 second
carrier 0 Filling not implemented none 0 second
frequency Management bcf bcf 120 seconds
Object : btsSiteManager
Default value : site Mgt/abisSig
Type : DP
Checks : [C/M]: Each function occurs once in the list.
[C/M]: The “entityMgt”, “download”, “tdmaMgt”, and“tsMgt” functions are included in the list.
[C/M]: The “freqMgt” function is only allowed for a BTSusing cavity coupling.
[M]: The “fhMgt” function is included in the list if btsobjects dependent on the btsSiteManager objectare authorized to hop (btsIsHopping ).
[M]: The parent bsc object is unlocked and thebtsSiteManager object is locked.
Note : The GSM functions whose routing mode is “not implemented”must not be included in the list. See the preceding table.
The GSM entities managing these GSM functions are BCF andTRX.
siteName
Description : Reference name of a radio site on the OMC–R. It begins witha letter and is case sensitive.
The name of a site can be used in all MMI commands toreference the site on the OMC–R.
Value range : [30 characters max]
Object : btsSiteManager
Type : DP
Checks : [C/M]: The name of a site is unique to the OMC–R.
Parameters listed in alphabetical orderNortel Networks Confidential 2–333
BSS Parameter Dictionary
slc Class 2
Description : Code of an SS7 channel. It is identical on BSC and MSC ends.
Value range : [0 to 15]Object : signallingLink
Type : DP
Checks : [C/M]: The code of an SS7 link is one-of-a-kind to theBSC.
[M]: The parent bsc object is unlocked and thesignallingLink object is locked.
small to large zone HO priority Class 3 V9
Description : External priority of inter-zone handovers from the inner zoneto the outer zone in a concentric cell
This attribute is defined if the associated bts object describesa concentric cell.
Value range : [0 to 17]Object : handOverControl
Default value : 17
Condition : To define if the associated bts object describes a concentric cell
Type : DP
Checks : [M]: The parent bsc object is unlocked.
smoke detector Class 2 V9
Description : Presence or absence of the optional equipment “smokedetector” in S4000 Oudoor, S4000 Smart or S8000 Outdoor
Value range : [Present / Absent]
Object : btsSiteManager
Type : DP
Checks : [M] : The parent bsc object is unlocked and thebtsSiteManager object is locked
Nortel Networks Confidential2–334 Parameters listed in alphabetical order
PE/DCL/DD/0124411–9001–124
Standard 13.04/EN March 2002 GSM/BSS V13
smsCB Class 3
Description : Whether broadcasting of short messages in unacknowledgedmode is authorized in a cell
Value range : [used / unused]
Object : bts
Default value : used
Type : DP
Checks : [M]: The attribute value is “used” if the channelTypeof one of the channel objects dependent on the btsobject is “bcchSdcch4CBCH” or“sdcch8CBCH”.
[M]: The parent bsc object is unlocked.
Remark : Configuration of logical channels and broadcast of shortmessages are managed by two separate OMC–R functions.
When a short message broadcast is started, the presence of aCBCH in the channelType of a channel object dependent ona concerned bts object is checked.
However, the SMS–CB function is not aware of changes madeto that attribute.
Consequently, withdrawing a CBCH from the configurationwill stop any short message broadcast in the concerned cellwithout the SMS–CB function knowing.
Parameters listed in alphabetical orderNortel Networks Confidential 2–335
BSS Parameter Dictionary
software
Description : Identifier of a software object
The software object class allows users to manage the softwarereleases of bsc objects (BSC), btsSiteManager objects (BCF),transceiverEquipment objects (TRX), and transcoderBoardobjects (TCB). Software objects are managed by the OMC–R“Software Management” function.
The software objects have four attributes:sWVersionBackUp, sWVersionFallback, sWVersionNew,and sWVersionRunning. They are managed by the systemaccording to the following user commands: Download,Activate new version, and Return to previous version.
Value range : [0 to 2147483646]Object : software
Type : Id
Checks : Checks common to all software objects:
[C]: The software object is not created for the parentmanaged object.
[C]: The sWVersionRunning attribute is defined(nonzero value).
[D]: If the application database of the related BSC isnot built, it has been reset by an Off line reset BDAcommand.
Additional checks performed on the software-bsc object:
[C]: The sWVersionRunning attribute matches thebscType of the bsc object.
[C/D]: If the application database of the related BSC isbuilt, the bsc object is locked.
[D]: All objects dependent on the bsc object aredeleted.
Additional checks performed on the software-btsSiteManagerobject:
[C/D]: If the application database of the related BSC isbuilt, the parent bsc object is unlocked and thebtsSiteManager object is locked.
[D]: All objects dependent on the btsSiteManagerobject are deleted.
Nortel Networks Confidential2–336 Parameters listed in alphabetical order
PE/DCL/DD/0124411–9001–124
Standard 13.04/EN March 2002 GSM/BSS V13
Additional check performed on thesoftware-transceiverEquipment object:
[C/D]: If the application database of the related BSC isbuilt, the parent bsc object is unlocked, the parentbts object is locked, and the transceiverEquipmentobject is locked.
Additional check performed on the software-transcoderBoardobject:
[C/D]: If the application database of the related BSC isbuilt, the parent bsc object is unlocked and thetranscoderBoard object is locked.
softwareLabel V13
Description : This attribute is a Manager comment about the relatedsoftware. This attribute is modified by the Manager. Valuechanges are notified to the Manager.
Value range : [0 to 80]
Object : executableSoftware
Type : DP
source indicator
Description : To select messages according to the source of the operation
Do not fill in if this criterion is not to be selected.
Value range : [resource operation / management operation / unknown]
Object : Alarm and notification logs – Filter
Type : DP
specific problems
Description : To select messages according to a (cause, fault number) pair
This parameter allows to select a fault number with one ormore associated causes. Refer to these entries in theDictionary.
Do not fill in if this criterion is not to be selected.
Object : Alarm and notification logs – Filter
Type : DP
Parameters listed in alphabetical orderNortel Networks Confidential 2–337
BSS Parameter Dictionary
speechMode Class 3 V8
Description : List of the speech algorithms associated with channel usemodes in the cell
The “full rate” value refers to the standard algorithm. The“enhanced full rate” value only applies when all the TCUslinked to the BSC are equipped with TCB2 boards (refer to theversion entry in the Dictionary).
Value range : [full rate / enhanced full rate]
Object : bts
Default value : full rate
Type : DP
Checks : [C/M]: The “full rate” value is mandatory; it must bedefined in the list.
[C/M]: The “enhanced full rate” value is defined in the listif at least one of the TCUs linked to the BSC isequipped with TCB2 boards.
[M]: The parent bsc object is unlocked.
speechMode Class 3 V8
Description : List of the speech algorithms associated with channel usemodes on the A interface
The “full rate” value refers to the standard algorithm. The“enhanced full rate” value only applies when all the TCUslinked to the BSC are equipped with TCB2 boards.
Value range : [full rate / enhanced full rate]
Object : signallingPoint
Default value : full rate
Type : DP
Checks : [C/M]: The “full rate” value is mandatory; it must bedefined in the list.
[C/M]: The “enhanced full rate” value is defined in the listif at least one of the TCUs linked to the BSC isequipped with TCB2 boards.
[M]: The parent bsc object is unlocked.
Nortel Networks Confidential2–338 Parameters listed in alphabetical order
PE/DCL/DD/0124411–9001–124
Standard 13.04/EN March 2002 GSM/BSS V13
speechOnHoppingTs Class 3 (gprsBtsLockExtendedConf) V12
Description : Attribute reserved for future use
Value range : [true, false]Object : bts
Feature : GPRS (SV407 – V12)
Type : DP
Default value : false
Checks : [M]: The parent bsc object is unlocked.
speechVersionAsscomp Class 1 S4 V12
Description : Whether the “Speech version” element is used or not in theASSIGN COMPLETE messages (Phase II compliance).
Value range : [false / true]Object : signallingPoint
Default value : true
Type : DP
Checks : [M]: The parent bsc object is locked.
speechVersionHoperf Class 1 S5 V12
Description : Whether the “Speech version” element is used or not in theHANDOVER PERFORMED messages (Phase IIcompliance)
Value range : [false / true]Object : signallingPoint
Default value :
Type : DP
Checks : [M]: The parent bsc object is locked.
speechVersionHoreq Class 1 S6 V12
Description : Whether the “Speech version” element is used in theHANDOVER REQUEST ACKNOWLEDGE messages(Phase II compliance)
Value range : [false / true]Object : signallingPoint
Default value : true
Type : DP
Checks : [M]: The parent bsc object is locked.
Parameters listed in alphabetical orderNortel Networks Confidential 2–339
BSS Parameter Dictionary
speechVersionHorqd Class 1 S7 V12
Description : Whether the “Speech version” element is used or not in theHANDOVER REQUIRED messages (Phase II compliance).
Value range : [false / true]
Object : signallingPoint
Default value : true
Type : DP
Checks : [M]: The parent bsc object is locked.
standard indicator AdjC Class 3 S8 V10
Description : Type of network in which this neighbor cell is working
Value range : [gsm / extended gsm / dcs1800 / pcs1900 / R gsm /gsmdcs (V12) / dcsgsm (V12)]
Object : adjacentCellHandover
Feature : Dualband cell management (TF875 – V12)
Default value : gsm
Type : DP
Checks : [M]: The parent bsc object is unlocked.
Note : “gsmdcs” and “dcsgsm” are only available for S8000 DRXtransceiver architecture.
standard indicator AdjC Class 3S9 V10
Description : Type of network in which this neighbor cell is working
Value range : [gsm / extended gsm / dcs1800 / pcs1900 / R gsm /gsmdcs (V12) / dcsgsm (V12)]
Object : adjacentCellReselection
Default value : gsm
Type : DP
Feature : Dualband cell management (TF875 – V12)
Checks : [M]: The parent bsc object is unlocked.
Note : “gsmdcs” and “dcsgsm” are only available for S8000 DRXtransceiver architecture.
Nortel Networks Confidential2–340 Parameters listed in alphabetical order
PE/DCL/DD/0124411–9001–124
Standard 13.04/EN March 2002 GSM/BSS V13
standardIndicator Class 2 V9
Description : Type of network in which the cell is working
From the value given to this attribute, the OMC–R determinesthe network frequency band and the frequencies that can beused by all radio entities (cells and radio time slots) in therelated site.
Value range : [gsm / extended gsm / dcs1800 / pcs1900 / R gsm /gsmdcs (V12) / dcsgsm (V12)]
Object : bts
Type : DP
Feature : Dualband cell management (TF875 – V12)
Checks : [M]: The parent bsc object is unlocked and the btsobject is locked.
GSM 900 network (gsm)
The GSM 900 frequency band is 2*25 MHz wide and includes124 pairs of carrier frequencies, numbered [1 to 124], whichare 200 kHz apart:
Uplink direction (MS–to–BTS) = 890 to 915 MHz
Downlink direction (BTS–to–MS) = 935 to 960 MHz
A frequency N corresponds to the following Uplinkfrequency:
f1 = 890 + 0.2xN MHz where N = [1 to 124]
For the Downlink frequency there is the following shift:
f2 = f1 + 45 MHz
EXTENDED GSM network (extended gsm)
The extended GSM frequency band is 2*35 MHz wide andincludes 174 pairs of carrier frequencies, numbered [0 to 124]and [975 to 1023], which are 200 kHz apart:
Uplink direction (MS–to–BTS) = 880 to 915 MHz
Downlink direction (BTS–to–MS) = 925 to 960 MHz
A frequency N corresponds to the following Uplinkfrequency:
f1 = 880.2 + 0.2x(N – 975) MHz where N = [975 to 1023]
f1 = 890 + 0.2xN MHz where N = [0 to 124]
Parameters listed in alphabetical orderNortel Networks Confidential 2–341
BSS Parameter Dictionary
For the Downlink frequency there is the following shift:
f2 = f1 + 45 MHz
Note : The extended GSM frequency band defined hereabove is thedefinition of the ETSI.
GSM–R network (R gsm)
The GSM–R frequency band is 2*39 MHz wide and includes194 pairs of carrier frequencies, numbered [0 to 124] and [955to 1023], which are 200 kHz apart:
Uplink direction (MS–to–BTS) = 876 to 915 MHz
Downlink direction (BTS–to–MS) = 921 to 960 MHz
A frequency N corresponds to the following Uplinkfrequency:
f1 = 876.2 + 0.2x(N – 955) MHz where N = [955 to 1023]
f1 = 890 + 0.2xN MHz where N = [0 to 124]
For the Downlink frequency there is the following shift:
f2 = f1 + 45 MHz
Note : The GSM–R frequency band defined hereabove is thedefinition of the ETSI.
GSM 1800 network (dcs1800)
The GSM 1800 frequency band is 2*75 MHz wide andincludes 374 pairs of carrier frequencies, numbered [512 to885], which are 200 kHz apart:
Uplink direction (MS–to–BTS) = 1710 to 1785 MHz
Downlink direction (BTS–to–MS) = 1805 to 1880 MHz
A frequency N corresponds to the following Uplinkfrequency:
f1 = 1710.2 + 0.2x(N – 512) MHz where N = [512 to 885]
For the Downlink frequency there is the following shift:
f2 = f1 + 95 MHz
GSM 1900 network (pcs1900)
The GSM 1900 frequency band is 2*60 MHz wide andincludes 299 pairs of carrier frequencies, numbered [512 to810], which are 200 kHz apart:
Uplink direction (MS–to–BTS) = 1850 to 1910 MHz
Nortel Networks Confidential2–342 Parameters listed in alphabetical order
PE/DCL/DD/0124411–9001–124
Standard 13.04/EN March 2002 GSM/BSS V13
Downlink direction (BTS–to–MS) = 1930 to 1990 MHz
A frequency N corresponds to the following Uplinkfrequency:
f1 = 1850.2 + 0.2x(N – 512) MHz where N = [512 to 810]
For the Downlink frequency there is the following shift:
f2 = f1 + 80 MHz
GSM 900 – GSM 1800 network (gsmdcs)
The primary band is GSM 900 (see above GSM 900 Networkparagraph).
The secondary band is GSM 1800 (see above GSM 1800Network paragraph).
GSM 1800 – GSM 900 network (dcsgsm)
The primary band is GSM 1800 (see above GSM 1800Network paragraph).
The secondary band is GSM 900 (see above GSM 900 Networkparagraph).
Note : “gsmdcs” and “dcsgsm” are only available for S8000 DRXtransceiver architecture.
standbyStatus V13
Description : ISO State
Value range : [hotStandby / coldStandby / providingService]
Object : atmRm, cem, iem, lsaRc, omu, sw8kRm
Type : DD
Feature : AR 1209 – V13.1
start date
Description : Date on which data were first recorded in the log (default is thecurrent date)
Date format entry forms are detailed in NTP < 130 >.
Value range : [<date>]
Object : System session log – Filter
Type : DP
Parameters listed in alphabetical orderNortel Networks Confidential 2–343
BSS Parameter Dictionary
start time
Description : Absolute time of first job run (default is the current date andtime)
Absolute time format entry forms are detailed inNTP < 130 >.
If date matches the current date, set time to a value at least oneminute after the current time.
Value range : [<date>,<time>]Object : job
Type : DP
start time
Description : Start of system log reading on the requested start date (defaultis 00:00)
Time format entry forms are detailed in NTP < 130 >.
Do not fill in if this criterion is not to be selected.
Value range : [<time>]
Object : System session log – Filter
Type : DP
Nortel Networks Confidential2–344 Parameters listed in alphabetical order
PE/DCL/DD/0124411–9001–124
Standard 13.04/EN March 2002 GSM/BSS V13
startAlarmFilter
Description : Condition for triggering an alarm when no counter is involved
The following fields can be combined in the logicalexpression:
Parameter Notification type Operators
administrativeState state change =
availabilityStatus state change =
bsc equipment name alarm =
bsc model alarm =
Cause alarm < = >
btsSiteManager model alarm =
bts equipment name alarm =
equipment processor number alarm < = >
faultNumber alarm < = >
operationalState state change =
perceived severity alarm =
postMortem alarm =
usageState state change =
The following logical operators can be used in the logicalexpression:
& stands for the logical AND.
| stands for the logical OR.
! stands for the logical NOT.
The “postMortem” field can take two values, either “beforeBSC restart” or “after BSC restart”. They have the followingmeaning:
before BSC restart means that the notification issued by theBSC was received by the OMC–R agent without the BSChaving restarted (nominal conditions).
Parameters listed in alphabetical orderNortel Networks Confidential 2–345
BSS Parameter Dictionary
after BSC restart means that the notification was issued bythe BSC, then, the BSC was restarted before the OMC–Ragent received the notification. These notifications do nottrigger alarms.
Value range : [logical expression]
Object : alarm criteria
Condition : To define if no counter is associated to the criterion.
Type : DP
startAlarmThreshold
Description : Maximum counting value in the reference period, abovewhich a start-of-alarm message is sent. The value must bechecked by users.
This attribute defines a maximum value read at the end of thedefined refPeriod. It must be greater thanendAlarmThreshold.
Threshold changes are effective when the OMC–R is restarted.
Value range : [0.00 to 2147483646]
Object : mdWarning if detectionFunction = “excessiveAnomalyRate”
Type : DP
startAlarmThreshold
Description : Minimum (thresholdLow) / maximum (thresholdHigh)counting value in the reference period, below/above which astart of “lower threshold/upper threshold” alarm message issent. The value must be checked by users.
If thesholdType = “thresholdLow”, this attribute defines aminimum value for a one minute reference period (or thecounter collecting period for PCM unavailability counters),below which a start of “lower threshold” alarm message issent. It must be lower than startAlarmThreshold “low”.
If thesholdType = “thresholdHigh”, this attribute defines amaximum value for a one minute reference period (or thecounter collecting period for PCM unavailability counters),above which a start of “upper threshold” alarm message is sent.It must be greater than startAlarmThreshold “high”.
Threshold changes are effective when the OMC–R is restarted.
Nortel Networks Confidential2–346 Parameters listed in alphabetical order
PE/DCL/DD/0124411–9001–124
Standard 13.04/EN March 2002 GSM/BSS V13
Value range : [0.00 to 2147483646]
Object : mdWarning if detectionFunction = “outOfRangeCounter”
Type : DP
Remark :
The treshold limits depend on the associated counter.
The BSS counter threshold crossing detection mechanismis described in NTP < 07 >.
startCounterThreshold
Description : Minimum counting threshold when a counter is involved
Value range : [0 to 100]
Object : alarm criteria
Condition : To define when a counter is associated with the criterion.
Type : DP
startTime
Description : Date and time at which files were restored on the OMC–Ragent disks
Value range : [<date> <time>]
Object : log – Display
Condition : This attribute is significant and displayed only when the logobject describes a log restored on the OMC–R agent disks.
Type : DP
startTime
Description : Date and time at which the temporary observation started
This information is provided by the system and indicates theexact time when the observation counters are collected for thefirst time.
Value range : [<date> <time>]
Object : mdScanner – Display
Type : DI
Parameters listed in alphabetical orderNortel Networks Confidential 2–347
BSS Parameter Dictionary
stopTime
Description : Date and time at which the OMC–R agent will purge therestored files
Value range : [<date> , <time>]
Object : log – Display
Condition : This attribute is significant and displayed only when the logobject describes a log restored on the OMC–R agent disks.
Type : DP
stopTime
Description : Date and time at which the temporary observation will stop
Absolute time format entry forms are detailed in NTP < 130 >.
Value range : [<date>,<time>]
Object : mdScanner – Create temporary observation
Type : DP
Checks : [C]: stopTime – startTime > mdGranularityPeriodminutes
[C]: stopTime – startTime < 1440 minutes (24 hours)
Restrictions : [M]: This attribute cannot be modified. Stop theobservation if necessary by deleting the mdScanner objectand restart it by creating a new mdScanner object with theappropriate attributes.
subChanId
Description : AGCH subchannel number: Do not fill in when thechannelType of the radio time slot is “tchFull” or“mainBCCH”
Value range : [0 to 7] when channelType = “sDCCH” or “sdch8CBCH”,[0 to 3] otherwise
Object : channel – Set channel state
Type : DP
Checks : [A]: The parent btsSiteManager and bts objects areunlocked.
Reminder : A BCCH or a CBCH cannot be blocked.
Nortel Networks Confidential2–348 Parameters listed in alphabetical order
PE/DCL/DD/0124411–9001–124
Standard 13.04/EN March 2002 GSM/BSS V13
subject
Description : Identifier (name) of a user message in the OMC–R
It is displayed in the “Inter-user message manager” window ofthe message addressees and allows them to identify themessage before reading.
Value range : [40 characters max]Object : user message
Type : Id
Suffix
Description : Optional string of characters to add to the name of the callmonitoring data files when saved in the OMC–R
When a suffix is defined, a call monitoring data file transferredto the OMC–R by running the Transfer command is savedunder the name “SDO_CM_BSCnnn_<Suffix>.yyyymmdd”,where “nnn” identifies the BSC hosting the data file (if bsc =5, then nnn is read “005”) and “yyyymmdd” is the file savingdate. See to NTP < 07 >.
Value range : [10 characters max]Object : Call monitoring – Transfer (SDO)
Type : DP
summary
Description : Text explaining the goal of the command file
Object : commandFile
Type : DP
Parameters listed in alphabetical orderNortel Networks Confidential 2–349
BSS Parameter Dictionary
supportingTransceiverEquipment
Description : Identifier of the TRX associated with the TDMA frame by theBSC
This dynamic attribute allows the user to know theTDMA–TRX/DRX association established by the BSC. It isdisplayed provided the transceiver object operationalState is“enabled”. Refer to this entry in the Dictionary.
If the TRX/DRX is declared faulty because of a frequencyloss, the system takes the following actions:
attempt to reconfigure the associated TDMA frame on theredundant TRX/DRX
if there is no redundant TRX/DRX, reconfiguration of theTDMA frame on another TRX/DRX if its priority is higherthan the priority of the TDMA frame currently configured
If the associated TDMA frame cannot be reconfigured forsome reason, all frames that were using the frequency lost bythe TRX/DRX will be disturbed.
Value range : [0 to 2147483646]Object : transceiver
Type : DD
Remark : Only BTSs using cavity coupling manage dynamicreconfiguration of hopping frequencies.
sw8kRmId V13
Description : Identifier of the ‘sw8kRm’ object class. This identifier isallocated by the MD–R at object creation, depending on theshelf and slot numbers indicated by the BSC. This attributecannot be modified. This attribute is relevant for BSC e3 andTCU e3.
Value range : [0 to 2147483646]Object : sw8kRm
Type : DP
Nortel Networks Confidential2–350 Parameters listed in alphabetical order
PE/DCL/DD/0124411–9001–124
Standard 13.04/EN March 2002 GSM/BSS V13
sWVersionBackUp
Description : Reference number of the backup software release. It isidentical to sWVersionRunning.
Refer to the sWVersionRunning entry in the Dictionary.
Value range : [Bsxabvcdefgh (BSC software) / XXXabcdef (others)]Object : software
Type : DP
sWVersionFallBack
Description : Reference number of the previous software release. It isupdated following a version change command.
Refer to the sWVersionRunning entry in the Dictionary.
This attribute is undefined when the object is created.
As a result of an Activate new version command, the systemupdates the sWVersionFallBack attribute with the referenceof the software release previously running in the related BSSentity.
As a result of a Return to previous version command, thesystem sets the sWVersionFallBack attribute undefined.
Value range : [Bsxabvcdefgh (BSC software) / XXXabcdef (others)]Object : software
Type : DP
sWVersionNew
Description : Reference number of the new software release. It is updatedfollowing a download or version change command.
Refer to the sWVersionRunning entry in the Dictionary.
This attribute is undefined when the object is created.
As a result of an Activate new version command, the systemsets the sWVersionNew attribute undefined.
As a result of a Download or Return to previous versioncommand, the system updates the sWVersionNew attributewith the reference of the software release downloaded or thatwas presently running in the related BSS entity.
Value range : [Bsxabvcdefgh (BSC software) / XXXabcdef (others)]Object : software
Type : DP
Parameters listed in alphabetical orderNortel Networks Confidential 2–351
BSS Parameter Dictionary
sWVersionRunning
Description : Reference number of the software release currently running.It is defined by the user at object creation time and is updatedfollowing version change commands.
This parameter identifies the type and version of the softwarecurrently running in the related BSS entity. Check the BSSdelivery descriptor file to fill it in when creating the softwareobject.
As a result of an Activate new version or Return to previousversion command, the system updates thesWVersionRunning attribute with the reference of thesoftware release newly activated in the related BSS entity.
The following tables show the reference number formats foreach type of BSS entity driven by software.
BSC software: Format = “BSxabvcdefgh”
Field Meaning Value
BSx Type of software x = [1 .. 3]
ab Version number [09 .. 32]
v Reserved
cd Sub-version number [01 .. 99]
ef Edition number [01 .. 99]
gh Revision factor [01 .. 99]
BTSs and all TCUs software: Format = “XXXabcdef”
Field Meaning Value
XXX Type of software BCF : BCF/BC1/BC2TRX : TRX/DRXTCB : TCB
ab Version number [08 .. 32]
c Sub-version number BCF : [A .. H]TRX : [A .. H]TCB : [A .. H]
d Edition number BCF : [1 .. 8]TRX : [1 .. 8]TCB : [1 .. 8]
ef Revision factor BCF : [01 .. 32]TRX : [01 .. 32]TCB : [01 .. 64]
Nortel Networks Confidential2–352 Parameters listed in alphabetical order
PE/DCL/DD/0124411–9001–124
Standard 13.04/EN March 2002 GSM/BSS V13
Value range : [Bsxabvcdefgh (BSC software) / XXXabcdef (others)]
Object : software
Type : DP
Checks : [C]: The attribute is defined (nonzero value).
[C]: The first three letters of the reference numbermatch the type of the managed object related to thesoftware object.
[C]: For a software-bsc object, the version numbercomplies with the bscType of the parent bscobject.
synchronized Class 3 S1S2
Description : Whether the neighbor cell and the associated serving cell aresynchronous, that is attached to the same BTS
Value range : [not synchronized cells / synchronized cells /pre sync HO with timing advance / pre sync HO,default timing advance]
“not synchronized cells”: the neighbor cell and the servingcell are not attached to the same BTS.
“synchronized cells”: the neighbor cell and the serving cellare attached to the same BTS
“pre sync HO with timing advance”: the handoverprocedure between the neighbor cell and the serving cell ispre–synchronized with the GSM Real Time Differencebetween the neighbor cell and the serving cell in the“HANDOVER COMMAND” message
“pre sync HO, default timing advance”: a pre–definedtiming advance is used in the pre–synchronized handoverprocedure between the serving cell and the neighbor cell.Refer to “preSynchroTimingAdvance” parameter.
Object : adjacentCellHandOver
Default value : not synchronized cells
Type : DP
Checks : [M]: The parent bsc object is unlocked.
Parameters listed in alphabetical orderNortel Networks Confidential 2–353
BSS Parameter Dictionary
synchronizing PCM V10
Description : Synchronizing PCM choice (on Ater interface)
Value range : [synchro mic 0, synchro mic 2, synchro mic 4, synchro mic 6,synchro internal clock]
Object : bsc
Type : DD
syntheticFaultNumber
Description : Synthetic fault number to assign to the alarm when a counteris involved
Value range : [39500 to 39549]Object : alarm criteria
Condition : To define when a counter is associated to the criterion.
Type : DP
Checks : [C/M]: The number is in the range [39500 to 39549].
system state
Description : State of the configurable BSC boards and state of the traffic tothe MSC
Value range : The following is a list of equipment in alphabetical order:
active – passive link [opened / closed]
bsc [simplex / duplex]. . . . . . . . . . . . .
chain [active / passive]. . . . . . . . . . . .
chain [ready / not ready]. . . . . . . . . . . .
ECI DDTI ALA SWM initialisation [allowed / not allowed]
reset MSCL [in progress / not in progress]. . . . . . .
other chain [ready / not ready]. . . . . . .
Object : bsc – Display chain information
Type : DD
Nortel Networks Confidential2–354 Parameters listed in alphabetical order
PE/DCL/DD/0124411–9001–124
Standard 13.04/EN March 2002 GSM/BSS V13
T
t3101 Class 3 T1
Description : BSC timer triggered during the immediate assignmentprocedure. Use the suggested system value.
It is set on transmission of CHANNEL ACTIVATION by theBSC and canceled on receipt of ESTABLISH INDICATIONsent by the BTS.
Value range : [2 to 255] seconds
Object : bts
Default value : 3
Type : DP
Checks : [M]: The parent bsc object is unlocked.
t3103 Class 3 T2
Description : BSC timer triggered during the handover procedure. Use thesuggested system value.
It is set on transmission of HANDOVER COMMAND by theBSC and canceled on receipt of either HANDOVERCOMPLETE or HANDOVER FAILURE sent by the MS(intra-bss handover), or CLEAR COMMAND sent by theMSC (inter-bss handover). At expiry of T3103, the channel isreleased.
Value range : [2 to 255] seconds (t3103 < bssMapT8)
Object : bts
Default value : 5 seconds
Type : DP
Checks : [C/M]: t3103 < bssMapT8 (attribute of the parent bscobject )
[M]: The parent bsc object is unlocked.
Parameters listed in alphabetical orderNortel Networks Confidential 2–355
BSS Parameter Dictionary
t3107 Class 3 T3
Description : BSC timer triggered during the assignment commandprocedure. Use the suggested system value.
It is set on transmission of ASSIGN COMMAND by the BSCand canceled on receipt of either ASSIGN COMPLETE orASSIGN FAILURE sent by MS.
Value range : [2 to 255] seconds
Object : bts
Default value : 10 seconds
Type : DP
Checks : [M]: The parent bsc object is unlocked.
t3109 Class 3 T4
Description : BSC timer triggered during the SACCH deactivationprocedure. Use the suggested system value.
It is set on receipt of DEACTIVATE SACCHACKNOWLEDGE sent by the BTS and canceled on receiptof RELEASE INDICATION sent by the BTS. If the timerexpires, a RF CHANNEL RELEASE message is sent to theBTS and a RF CHANNEL RELEASE ACK is expected.
Mobiles comply with system operating conditions when thecounter (S) associated with SACCH messages is assigned avalue below or equal to t3109.
Value range : [2 to 255] seconds (t3109 ≥ radioLinkTimeout)Object : bts
Default value : 12 seconds
Type : DP
Checks : [C/M]: t3109 ≥ radioLinkTimeout
[M]: The parent bsc object is unlocked.
Nortel Networks Confidential2–356 Parameters listed in alphabetical order
PE/DCL/DD/0124411–9001–124
Standard 13.04/EN March 2002 GSM/BSS V13
t3111 Class 3 T5
Description : BSC timer triggered during the radio resource clearingprocedure. Use the suggested system value.
It is set on receipt of RELEASE INDICATION sent by theBTS. On elapse, the BSC sends RF CHANNEL RELEASE.
Value range : [1 to 255] seconds
Object : bts
Default value : 2 seconds
Type : DP
Checks : [M]: The parent bsc object is unlocked.
t3122 Class 3 T6
Description : Minimum time that mobiles must wait before issuing achannel allocation request when an immediate assignment hasfailed.
Value range : [0 to 255] seconds
Object : bts
Default value : 10 seconds
Type : DP
Checks : [M]: The parent bsc object is unlocked.
T3172 Class 3 (gprsBtsExtendedConf) V12
Description : Value of the timer started by the mobile on reception of aPacket Access Reject message (in seconds)
Value range : [1 to 255]
Object : bts
Feature : GPRS (SV407 – V12)
Type : DP
Default value : 5
Checks : [M]: The parent bsc object is unlocked.
Parameters listed in alphabetical orderNortel Networks Confidential 2–357
BSS Parameter Dictionary
target Bda V11
Description : Target BDA for the On–line reset command
See to NTP < 130 >.
Value range : [running / new / old]
“running” for “BDA Edition” reset on–line (i.e. basic BDAchange without prototype BDA change)
“new” or “old” for “BDA Version” reset on line (i.e. BSCupgrades with prototype BDA change)
Object : bsc – On–line reset
Type : DP
Note : For a V10 BSC this parameter is not requested for the On–linereset command.
teiBtsSiteManager Class 2
Description : TEI address of the site BCF in the LAPD protocol
In a BTS chain, the TEI addresses must be allocated inascending order (TEI0, TEI1, TEI2, etc.), beginning with theBTS closest to the BSC.
In a BTS loop configuration, the TEI addresses must beallocated in ascending order (TEI0, TEI1, TEI2, etc.),beginning with the BTS directly linked to the BSC that usesDTI board no.0 for the Abis link input.
The following TEI values 3, 7, 11, 15, 19, 23 , and 27 areforbidden when T1 PCMs on Abis interface are used.
The relationship between internal E1 PCM TSs (DTI, PCMIor CPCMI) or BSC (DDTI) and external PCM TSs is thefollowing:
E1 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
T1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
E1 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31
T1 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
E1 PCM TSs 4, 8, 12, 16, 20, 24, and 28 are not mapped ontoT1 PCM TSs. The scheduled or “rendez–vous” TSs(=teiBtsSiteManager +1) cannot be defined on these internalE1 PCM TSs
Nortel Networks Confidential2–358 Parameters listed in alphabetical order
PE/DCL/DD/0124411–9001–124
Standard 13.04/EN March 2002 GSM/BSS V13
Value range : [0 to 15]Object : btsSiteManager
Type : DP
Checks : [C/M]: The number of TEI addresses allotted to a LAPDchannel is limited to maxTeiPerLapdCh (staticconfiguration data).
[M] : The parent bsc object is unlocked and thebtsSiteManager object is locked.
teiLapdLink
Description : TEI address of the LAPD link in the LAPD protocol. It isupdated by the OMC–R agent according to the TEI addressallotted by the user to the entity (BCF, TRX/DRX, TCU)using the LAPD link.
Value range : [0 to 127]Object : lapdLink – Display
Type : DP
Restrictions : [C/M]: This attribute is not managed by users.
teiTransceiverEqpt Class 2
Description : TEI address of the TRX/DRX in the LAPD protocol
For more information on BTS TEI numbering rules, see toNTP < 07 >.
Value range : [32 to 39] (monosectorial site), [32 to 47] (bisectorial site),[32 to 55] (trisectorial site), [32 to 63] (hexasectorial site)
Object : transceiverEquipment
Type : DP
Checks : [C/M]: The number of TEI addresses allotted to a LAPDchannel is limited to maxTeiPerLapdCh (staticconfiguration data).
[C/M]: The TEI address is not assigned to anothertransceiverEquipment object dependent on thesame bts object.
[M]: No mdScanner object refers to thetransceiverEquipment object (no observation isrunning on the TRX/DRX or the parent cell).
[M]: The parent bsc object is unlocked, the parent btsobject and the transceiverEquipment object arelocked.
Parameters listed in alphabetical orderNortel Networks Confidential 2–359
BSS Parameter Dictionary
teiTranscoder Class 2
Description : TEI address of the TCU in the LAPD protocol
Value range : [0 to 126]Object : transcoder
Type : DP
Checks : [C/M]: The TEI address is not assigned to anothertranscoder object dependent on the same bscobject.
[M]: The parent bsc object is unlocked and thetranscoder object is locked.
[C/M]: 0≤ teiTranscoder ≤ 126
temporaryOffset Class 3T7 V8
Description : Negative offset applied during Penalty Time for reselecting acell (C2 criterion)
This negative offset is applied during the entire penaltyTimeduration and allows to prevent speeding mobiles fromselecting the cell. Refer to the cellReselectOffset entry in theDictionary.
Value range : [0 to 70, by steps of 10] dB
Object : bts
Feature : AR 264
Default value : 70
Type : DP
Checks : [M] : The parent bsc object is unlocked.
terminal name
Description : Name of a terminal as defined in its profile (default is thelogged-in user’s terminal)
Do not fill in if this criterion is not to be selected.
Value range : [case sensitive]Object : System session log – Filter
Type : DP
Checks : [A]: The terminal is known to the OMC–R.
Nortel Networks Confidential2–360 Parameters listed in alphabetical order
PE/DCL/DD/0124411–9001–124
Standard 13.04/EN March 2002 GSM/BSS V13
terminal profile
Description : Identifier (name) of an OMC–R terminal
Value range : [case sensitive, 1 character min]Object : terminal profile
Type : Id
Checks : [C]: The name of a terminal is unique to the OMC–R.
[M/D]: The terminal profile object is created.
text
Description : Comment to display before running the next command
The Echo : text = blah blah blah command can be insertedanywhere in a command file, and as many times as necessary.The text is displayed as it is in session logs when the commandfile is run.
Value range : [unlimited number of characters]Object : commandFile – Echo command
Type : DP
text
Description : Contents of a short message. It is broadcast as it is.
Value range : [93 characters max]Object : short message
Type : DP
text
Description : Contents of a user message. It is sent as it is.
Value range : [unlimited number of characters]Object : user message
Type : DP
TFH or RWM Class 2 V9
Description : Presence or absence of the optional equipment “microwaveterminal” in S4000 Outdoor
Value range : [Present / Absent]Object : btsSiteManager
Type : DP
Checks : [M] : The parent bsc object is unlocked and thebtsSiteManager object is locked
Parameters listed in alphabetical orderNortel Networks Confidential 2–361
BSS Parameter Dictionary
thresholdCCCHLoadIndication Class 3
Description : Threshold used by the BTS to inform the BSC about a CCCHcongestion (104 is the only value accepted)
Value range : [0 to 2147483646] dB
Object : bts
Type : DP
Checks : [C/M]: The only value accepted by the system is “104”.
[M]: The parent bsc object is unlocked.
Remark : Since the system accepts only one value for this attribute,changing it has no meaning.
thresholdInterference Class 2 T8
Description : List of four thresholds defined in ascending order, used to sortidle channels on the basis of measured interference levels
This attribute, together with the averagingPeriod attribute,allows to manage interferences in a radio cell. Theclassification is used by the radio resource allocator.
The interference processing algorithm for a cell is as follows:
For each idle radio channel, the BTS permanently measuresthe signal strength level RXLEV.
When averagingPeriod “Measurement results” messageshave been received, the L1M function in the BTS calculatesinterference level averages, sorts the idle channelsaccording to the five defined interference levels (Level 0corresponds to the lowest interference level), and sends theinformation to the BSC.
Nortel Networks Confidential2–362 Parameters listed in alphabetical order
PE/DCL/DD/0124411–9001–124
Standard 13.04/EN March 2002 GSM/BSS V13
dBm– 128 0
Level 0 Level 1 Level 2 Level 3 Level 4
– 108 – 106 – 104 – 102
thresholdInterference = 1
thresholdInterference = 2
thresholdInterference = 3
thresholdInterference = 4
radChanSelIntThreshold = 0
radChanSelIntThreshold =1
radChanSelIntThreshold = 2
radChanSelIntThreshold = 3
radChanSelIntThreshold = 4
The BSC tallies the interference levels and, if the temporary“interference” observation is running for the bsc object,sends the channelIdleLevelMax and channelIdleLevelEchcounters every <mdGranularityPeriod> minutes to theOMC–R agent.
Refer also to C1619 permanent observation counters.
Value range : [–128 to 0] dBm
Object : handOverControl
Default value : –100 –90 –80 –70
Type : DP
Checks : [C/M]: The thresholds are defined in ascending order.
[M]: The parent bsc object is unlocked and theassociated bts object is locked.
thresholdType
Description : Type of thresholds managed
The startAlarmThreshold and endAlarmThresholdattribute values, which trigger permanent BSS observationcounter threshold overflow messages, depend on the type ofthresholds managed by the mdWarning object. Refer to theseentries in the Dictionary.
Value range : [thresholdLow / thresholdHigh]
Object : mdWarning if detectionFunction = “outOfRangeCounter”
Type : DP
Parameters listed in alphabetical orderNortel Networks Confidential 2–363
BSS Parameter Dictionary
timeBetweenHOConfiguration Class 3 T9 V9
Description : Whether the HOPingpongTimeRejection timer can be usedin a BSS when processing handovers
Refer to bts object bts time between HO configuration andadjacentCellHandOver object HOPingpongTimeRejectionattributes in this Dictionary of Parameters.
Value range : [used / not used]Object : bsc
Feature : General protection against pingpong handovers(TF821 – V12)
Default value : used
Type : DP
Checks : [M]: The bsc object is unlocked.
timerPeriodicUpdateMS Class 3 T10
Description : Time between two location update requests
Value range : [0 to 255] 1/10th of hour. “0” means that no periodic locationupdate is requested.
Object : bts
Default value : 60
Type : DP
Checks : [M]: The parent bsc object is unlocked.
Remark : The operator must be aware that the input of low values for thisattribute causes an important traffic load during the locationupdate procedures. For instance, entering the value “1” forthis attribute leads to that all Mobiles will execute an updateof their LAC every 6 minutes.
timeSlotNumber
Description : PCM time slot used by a LAPD link
Since all radio sites house a switching facility, the BSC candirectly map the LAPD link onto a PCM time slot.
Value range : [1 to 24] (GSM 1900 network)[1 to 31] (other networks)
Object : lapdLink
Type : DD
Remark : The LAPD link with a radio site BCF always uses TSn =pcmTimeSlotNumber (radio site scheduled time slot). Referto this entry in the Dictionary.
Nortel Networks Confidential2–364 Parameters listed in alphabetical order
PE/DCL/DD/0124411–9001–124
Standard 13.04/EN March 2002 GSM/BSS V13
timeSlotNumber Class 2
Description : PCM time slot used by an SS7 channel on the A interface
Value range : [1 to 24] (GSM 1900 network)[1 to 31] (other networks)
Object : signallingLink
Type : DP
Checks : [C/M]: The time slot is not already assigned on the Ainterface to a signallingLink or xtp objectdependent on the same bsc object and is notmapped on the TS used by the OMC channel onthe Ater interface.
[C/M]: If the SS7 link uses PCMA link no.3(pcmCircuitId), the time slot is in the range[1 to 27] if the PCM link is an E1 link or in therange [1 to 20] if the PCM link is a T1 link. Sincethe last four time slots of that link are not mappedon the Ater interface, they are unusable (refer tothe transcoderMatrix entry in the Dictionary).
[M]: The parent bsc object is unlocked and thesignallingLink object is locked.
timeSlotNumber
Description : PCM time slot used by a terrestrial circuit on the A interface
Value range : [1 to 24] (GSM 1900 network)[1 to 31] (other networks)
Object : xtp
Type : DP
Checks : [C]: The time slot is identical to the mscPcmTsNumbercomponent of the xtp object cic attribute (refer tothis entry in the Dictionary).
[C]: The time slot is not already assigned on the Ainterface to an xtp or signallingLink objectdependent on the same bsc object, and is notmapped on the TS used by the OMC channel onthe Ater interface.
Parameters listed in alphabetical orderNortel Networks Confidential 2–365
BSS Parameter Dictionary
[C]: If the terrestrial circuit uses PCMA link no.3(pcmCircuitId), the time slot is in the range[1 to 27] if the PCM link is an E1 link or in therange [1 to 20] if the PCM link is a T1 link. Sincethe last four time slots of that link are not mappedon the Ater interface, they are unusable (refer tothe transcoderMatrix entry in the Dictionary).
Restrictions : [M]: This attribute cannot be modified due to itsrelationship with the mscPcmTsNumber component of thecic attribute.
tmuId V13
Description : Identifier of the ‘tmu’ object class. This identifier is allocatedby the MD–R at object creation, depending on the shelf andslot numbers indicated by the BSC. This attribute cannot bemodified. This attribute is relevant for BSC e3 and TCU e3.
Value range : [0 to 2147483646]Object : tmu
Type : DP
traceConstraintList
Description : List of logical expressions that allow to filter the informationto display. The following filter criteria are used: [bsPower /bssTraceType / bssTraceTypeUsed / establishmentCause /hoCauseClass / hoClauseValue / hoRrResult / mobileId /msPower / pcm / recordingEntity / rrCause / timeSlot /timingAdvance / tracedBts / traceRecId / traceReferenceCrit/ trStartTime / trStopTime. / trxIdrxId]
See to NTP < 130 >.
Object : Trace data display
Type : DP
Nortel Networks Confidential2–366 Parameters listed in alphabetical order
PE/DCL/DD/0124411–9001–124
Standard 13.04/EN March 2002 GSM/BSS V13
traceControl V8
Description : Identifier of a traceControl object defined with regard to themd object
It describes the Call tracing function of a BSC.
A traceControl object is created in locked state. Unlock theobjet to start collecting data in the related BSC.
Value range : [0 to 2147483646]
Object : traceControl
Type : Id
Checks : [C]: The traceControl object is not created for the mdobject.
[C/M/D]: The application database of the related BSC isnot being built.
[C/M/D]: If the application database of the related BSC isbuilt, the BSS/OMC–R link is established and noaudit is in-progress in the BSC.
[M/D]: The traceControl object is created.
traceDayAccessed
Description : Date of data recording
Date format entry forms are detailed in NTP < 130 >.
Setting this parameter limits the display to trace data recordedon the specified day.
Value range : [<date>]
Object : Trace data display
Type : DP
traceFileName
Description : Name of a call tracing or call path tracing data file on theOMC–R agent disks. The naming rules are described inNTP < 07 >.
Object : traceFileReadyRecord
Type : DP
Parameters listed in alphabetical orderNortel Networks Confidential 2–367
BSS Parameter Dictionary
traceInfoRequested
Description : List of information to display with respect to the type
See to NTP < 129 >.
Value range : [abisInfo / bsicInfo / bssMapInfo / btsInfo / ChannelInfo /cicInfo / dtapInfo / handoverInfo / manufacturerExtInfo Aand Ater / manufacturerExtInfo Abis / measurementInfo /msClassmarkInfo / powerControlInfo / rrInfo /timingAdvanceInfo / trxInfo / txPowerInfo]
Object : Trace data display
Type : DP
traceReference
Description : Reference of a trace message received from the MSC
Value range : [0 to 63] (Phase I)[0 to 65535] (Phase II)
Object : traceFileReadyRecord
Type : DP
traffic PCM allocation priority Class 2 T11 V9
Description : Allocation priority of a TDMA frame on the covering sitePCMs
This attribute is used in case of Abis PCM reconfiguration.
Value range : [0 to 255]Object : transceiver
Type : DP
Checks : [M]: The parent bsc object is unlocked and the parentbts object is locked.
Note : “0” should be assigned to the highest priority frame(s).
transcdBReserved1 Class 3 T12 V12
Description : Attribute reserved for future use
Value range : [–32768 to 32767]Type : DP
Object : transcoderBoard
Default value : 0
Checks : [M]: The parent bsc object is unlocked.
Nortel Networks Confidential2–368 Parameters listed in alphabetical order
PE/DCL/DD/0124411–9001–124
Standard 13.04/EN March 2002 GSM/BSS V13
transcdBReserved2 Class 3 T13 V12
Description : Attribute reserved for future use
Value range : [–32768 to 32767]
Type : DP
Object : transcoderBoard
Default value : 0
Checks : [M]: The parent bsc object is unlocked.
transceiver
Description : Identifier of a transceiver object defined with regard to a btsobject
It defines the parent transceiver object.
Value range : [0 to 15]
Object : channel
Type : Id
Checks : [C]: The transceiver object is created.
transceiver
Description : Identifier of a transceiver object defined with regard to a btsobject
By definition, a TDMA frame is related to a cell, a cell isrelated to a site, and a site is related to a BSC.
In all MMI commands, a transceiver object can be referred toby the sequence “siteName.cellName.transceiver”, wheresiteName and cellName respectively identify the coveringsite and cell by name.
A TDMA frame is brought in service on the network atcreation time. It is working when the parent bts object isunlocked.
Value range : [0 to 15]
Object : transceiver
Type : Id
Parameters listed in alphabetical orderNortel Networks Confidential 2–369
BSS Parameter Dictionary
Checks : [C]: The maximum number of TDMA framescontrolled by a BSC depends on its type andhardware version, as shown in the followingtable:
BSC 12000/6000T1 T2 T3 T4 T5
120 120 160 160 160
[C]: The number of TDMA frames per cell is limitedto 16, regardless of the type of the BSC thatcontrols the cell.
[C]: The handOverControl and powerControl objectsare created for the parent bts object.
[C]: If the parent bts object describes a concentric cell,two transceiverZone objects are created for thatobject.
[C/D]: If the application database of the related BSC isbuilt, the parent bsc object is unlocked and theparent bts object is locked.
[D]: If the application database of the related BSC isnot built, it has been reset by an Off line reset BDAcommand.
transceiver equipment class Class 2 V9
Description : Class of a TRX/DRX
The class of a TRX/DRX sets, among others, its maximumtransmission power. The attribute possible values have thefollowing meaning:
Class 1 corresponds to GSM 900 class 5 or GSM 1800/1900class 1 (20W to 40W transmitters).
Class 2 corresponds to GSM 900 class 6 which is notsupported or GSM 1800/1900 class 2 (10W to 20Wtransmitters).
Nortel Networks Confidential2–370 Parameters listed in alphabetical order
PE/DCL/DD/0124411–9001–124
Standard 13.04/EN March 2002 GSM/BSS V13
Value range : [0 (reserved) / 1 / 2]
Object : transceiverEquipment
Type : DP
Checks : [M]: Concentric cell: If the TRX/DRX is partneredwith a TDMA frame, its class matches theTRX/DRX class allotted to the zone to which theTDMA frame belongs (refer to the next entry).
[M]: The parent bsc object is unlocked and thetransceiverEquipment object is locked.
transceiver equipment class V9
Description : Class of the TRX/DRXs partnered with the TDMA frames ofthe zone
The class of a TRX/DRX sets, among others, its maximumtransmission power. Refer to the previous entry.
Value range : [1 / 2]
Object : transceiverZone
Type : DP
Restrictions : [M]: This attribute cannot be modified.
Note : The transceiverZone objects are only created for bts objectsthat describe concentric cells.
transceiver zone Ref Class 2 V9
Description : Identifier of the transceiverZone object that defines the zoneto which a TDMA frame belongs in a concentric cell
Value range : [0 (large or outer zone) / 1 (small or inner zone)]
Object : transceiver
Condition : To define if the covering cell is concentric
Type : DP
Checks : [C]: The referenced transceiverZone object is createdfor the parent bts object.
[M]: The parent bsc object is unlocked and the parentbts object is locked.
Parameters listed in alphabetical orderNortel Networks Confidential 2–371
BSS Parameter Dictionary
transceiverEquipment
Description : Identifier of a transceiverEquipment object defined withregard to a bts object
It defines the related transceiverEquipment object.
Value range : [0 to 15]
Object : software
Type : Id
Checks : [C]: The transceiverEquipment object is created.
transceiverEquipment
Description : Identifier of a transceiverEquipment object defined withregard to a bts object
By definition, a TRX/DRX is related to a cell, a cell is relatedto a site, and a site is related to a BSC.
In all MMI commands, a transceiverEquipment object can bereferred to by the sequence“siteName.cellName.transceiverEquipment”, wheresiteName and cellName respectively identify the coveringsite and cell by name.
Value range : [0 to 15]
Object : transceiverEquipment
Type : Id
Checks : [C]: The number of TRX/DRXs per site is limited to24, regardless of the type of the BSC that controlsthe site.
[C]: The number of TRX/DRXs per cell is limited to16, regardless of the type of the BSC that controlsthe cell.
[C]: The handOverControl and powerControl objectsare created for the parent bts object.
[C]: The referenced lapdLink objects(lapdLinkOMLRef and lapdLinkRSLRef) arecreated for the parent bsc object.
[C]: If the application database of the related BSC isbuilt, the parent bsc object is unlocked and theparent bts object is locked.
Nortel Networks Confidential2–372 Parameters listed in alphabetical order
PE/DCL/DD/0124411–9001–124
Standard 13.04/EN March 2002 GSM/BSS V13
[D]: If the application database of the related BSC isbuilt, the parent bsc object is unlocked, the parentbtsSiteManager and bts objects are locked, and thetransceiverEquipment object is locked.
[D]: If the application database of the related BSC isnot built, it has been reset by an Off line reset BDAcommand.
[D]: No traceControl or callPathTrace object refers tothe transceiverEquipment object (the BSC Calltracing or Call path tracing function does notmonitor that object).
transceiverZone V9
Description : Identifier of a transceiverZone object that describes the largezone or the small zone of a concentric cell
The transceiverZone objects are only significant for the btsobjects that describe concentric cells. Two transceiverZoneobjects are created for each created concentric bts object; onedescribes the large or outer transmission zone, and the otherdescribes the small or inner transmission zone.
Value range : [0 (large or outer zone) / 1 (small or inner zone)]
Object : transceiverZone
Type : Id
Checks : [C]: The associated bts object is created and thetransceiverZone object is not created for thatobject.
[C]: The number of transmission zones in a concentriccell equals 2. Each transceiverZone object isone-of-a-kind to the associated bts object.
[C/D]: If the application database of the related BSC isbuilt, the parent bsc object is unlocked and theassociated bts object is locked.
[M]: The parent bsc object is unlocked.
[D]: If the application database of the related BSC isnot built, it has been reset by an Off line reset BDAcommand.
[D]: No transceiver object refers to thetransceiverZone object.
Parameters listed in alphabetical orderNortel Networks Confidential 2–373
BSS Parameter Dictionary
transcoder2GEqptId V13
Description : Identifier of the ‘transcoder2GEqpt’ object class. Thisidentifier is allocated by the MD–R at object creation. Theonly value allocated by the MD–R is 0. This attribute cannotbe modified. This attribute is relevant for TCU 2G.
Value range : [1 to 255]
Object : transcoder2GEqpt
Type : DP
transcoder3GEqptId V13
Description : Identifier of the ‘transcoder3GEqpt’ object class. Thisidentifier is allocated by the MD–R at object creation. Theonly value allocated by the MD–R is 0. This attribute cannotbe modified. This attribute is relevant for TCU e3.
Value range : [0 to 0]
Object : transcoder3GEqpt
Type : DP
transcoder
Description : Identifier of a transcoder object defined with regard to a bscobject
It defines the parent transcoder object.
Value range : [0 to 6] (BSC 6000, E1 PCM network),[0 to 8] (BSC 6000, T1 PCM network),[0 to 11] (BSC 12000, E1 PCM network),[0 to 13] (BSC 12000, T1 PCM network).
Object : pcmCircuit (A interface)
Type : Id
Checks : [C]: The transcoder object is created.
Nortel Networks Confidential2–374 Parameters listed in alphabetical order
PE/DCL/DD/0124411–9001–124
Standard 13.04/EN March 2002 GSM/BSS V13
transcoder
Description : Identifier of a transcoder object defined with regard to a bscobject
Value range : [0 to 6] (BSC 6000, E1 PCM network),[0 to 8] (BSC 6000, T1 PCM network),[0 to 11] (BSC 12000, E1 PCM network),[0 to 13] (BSC 12000, T1 PCM network)[0 to 33] (BSC 30000, E1 PCM network)[0 to 33] (BSC 30000, T1 PCM network).
Object : transcoder
Type : Id
Checks : [C]: The number of remote transcoders linked to a BSCis limited to maxTranscdPerBsc (staticconfiguration data).
[C]: The software object related to the parent bsc objectis created.
[C]: The referenced lapdLink object(lapdLinkOMLRef) is created for the parent bscobject.
[C]: If the application database of the related BSC isbuilt, the parent bsc object is unlocked.
[D]: If the application database of the related BSC isbuilt, the parent bsc object is unlocked and thetranscoder object is locked.
[D]: If the application database of the related BSC isnot built, it has been reset by an Off line reset BDAcommand.
transcoder
Description : Identifier of a transcoder object defined with regard to a bscobject
It defines the parent transcoder object.
Value range : [0 to 6] (BSC 6000, E1 PCM network),[0 to 8] (BSC 6000, T1 PCM network),[0 to 11] (BSC 12000, E1 PCM network),[0 to 13] (BSC 12000, T1 PCM network).
Object : transcoderBoard
Type : Id
Checks : [C]: The transcoder object is created.
Parameters listed in alphabetical orderNortel Networks Confidential 2–375
BSS Parameter Dictionary
transcoderAlarmList V13
Description : This attribute is relevant only for BSC 2G. Activation state ofthe internal alarm loops of the transcoder. The manager mayeither display it (in French) without previous decoding, ordecode provided raw data for displaying in English. Thisattribute is dynamically managed by the BSS. Value changesare not notified to the Manager.
Value range : [KO/OK]Object : transcoder2GEqpt
Type : DP
transcoderAlarmMask Class 3
Description : Configuration of external alarms in a TCU [xx]: The externalalarm loop is monitored (not monitored) when bit 0 is set to1 (0), bit 1 indicates whether operating anomalies of the TCUexternal clock are notified (1) or not (0) to the OMC–R.
Object : transcoder
Default value : 11
Type : DP
Checks : [M]: The parent bsc object is unlocked.
Note : This parameter is only available for BSC 2G
Nortel Networks Confidential2–376 Parameters listed in alphabetical order
PE/DCL/DD/0124411–9001–124
Standard 13.04/EN March 2002 GSM/BSS V13
transcoderBoard
Description : Identifier of a transcoderBoard object defined with regard toa transcoder object
Value range : [0 to 7] (GSM 1900 network)[0 to 9] (other networks)
Object : transcoderBoard
Type : Id
Checks : [C]: The number of transcoding boards housed in aTCU is limited to maxTranscdBPerTranscd(static configuration data).
[C]: If the application database of the related BSC isbuilt, the parent bsc object is unlocked.
[D]: If the application database of the related BSC isbuilt, the parent bsc object is unlocked and thetranscoderBoard object is locked.
[D]: If the application database of the related BSC isnot built, it has been reset by an Off line reset BDAcommand.
transcoderBoard
Description : Identifier of a transcoderBoard object defined with regard toa transcoder object
It defines the related transcoderBoard object.
Value range : [0 to 7] (GSM 1900 network)[0 to 9] (other networks)
Object : software-transcoderBoard
Type : Id
Checks : [C]: The transcoderBoard object is created.
transcoderBoardIntState
Description : TCB internal state
Value range : [working / fault]
working The board is working.. . . . . . . . .
fault An error was detected on the board.. . . . . . . . . . . .
Object : transcoderBoard
Type : DD
Parameters listed in alphabetical orderNortel Networks Confidential 2–377
BSS Parameter Dictionary
transcoderId Class 2
Description : Identifier of the remote transcoder linked to the PCM link thatcarries the SS7 channel on the A interface
Value range : [0 to 13]
Object : signallingLink
Type : DP
Checks : [C/M]: The referenced transcoder object is created and thepcmCircuit object used by the signallingLinkobject (pcmCircuitId) is related to that object.
[M]: The parent bsc object is unlocked and thesignallingLink object is locked.
transcoderId Class 2
Description : Identifier of the remote transcoder linked to the PCM link thatcarries the terrestrial circuit on the A interface
Value range : [0 to 13]
Object : xtp
Type : DP
Checks : [C/M]: The referenced transcoder object is created and thepcmCircuit object used by the xtp object(pcmCircuitId) is related to that object.
[M]: The parent bsc object is unlocked and the xtpobject is locked.
transcoderIntPcmIntState
Description : State of the TCU internal PCM links. Each link is identifiedby a serial number n = [0 to 15].
Value range : [0 to 15] [working / fault]
working The internal PCM is working.. . . . . . . . .
fault An error was detected on the PCM. . . . . . . . . . . . link.
Object : transcoder
Type : DD
Note : This parameter is only available for BSC 2G
Nortel Networks Confidential2–378 Parameters listed in alphabetical order
PE/DCL/DD/0124411–9001–124
Standard 13.04/EN March 2002 GSM/BSS V13
transcoderMatrix
Description : Configuration of the TCU switching matrix = mapping PCMAter TS <=> PCM A TS
This attribute describes the relation between the TSs of thefour PCM A links used by the TCU (A interface) and the TSsof the PCM Ater link used by the TCU (Ater interface). Thefollowing tables show the correspondence when PCM E1 orT1 links are used.
Object : transcoder – Display
Type : DP
Restrictions : [C/M]: This attribute is not managed by users.
PCM E1 links
TS PCMAter
PCM A TS PCM A
1 (LAPDchannel)
– no equivalence
23456789
00000000
1 2 3 45 6 7 89 10 11 1213 14 15 1617 18 19 2021 22 23 2425 26 27 2829 30 31
91011121314151617
111111111
12 3 4 56 7 8 910 11 12 1314 15 16 1718 19 20 2122 23 24 2526 27 28 2930 31
Parameters listed in alphabetical orderNortel Networks Confidential 2–379
BSS Parameter Dictionary
TS PCMAter
TS PCM APCM A
171819202122232425
222222222
1 23 4 5 67 8 9 1011 12 13 1415 16 17 1819 20 21 2223 24 25 2627 28 29 3031
25262728293031–
33333333
1 2 34 5 6 78 9 10 1112 13 14 1516 17 18 1920 21 22 2324 25 26 2728 29 30 31
PCM T1 links
TS PCMAter
PCM A TS PCM A
1 (LAPDchannel)
– no equivalence
234567
000000
1 2 3 45 6 7 89 10 11 1213 14 15 1617 18 19 2021 22 23 24
89
10111213
111111
1 2 3 45 6 7 89 10 11 1213 14 15 1617 18 19 2021 22 23 24
Nortel Networks Confidential2–380 Parameters listed in alphabetical order
PE/DCL/DD/0124411–9001–124
Standard 13.04/EN March 2002 GSM/BSS V13
TS PCMAter
TS PCM APCM A
141516171819
222222
1 2 3 45 6 7 89 10 11 1213 14 15 1617 18 19 2021 22 23 24
2021222324–
333333
1 2 3 45 6 7 89 10 11 1213 14 15 1617 18 19 2021 22 23 24
transcvEReserved1 Class 3 T14 V12
Description : Attribute reserved for future use
Value range : [–32768 to 32767]
Object : transceiverEquipment
Type : DP
Checks : [M]: The parent bsc object is unlocked.
transcvEReserved2 Class 3 T15 V12
Description : Attribute reserved for future use
Value range : [–32768 to 32767]
Object : transceiverEquipment
Type : DP
Checks : [M]: The parent bsc object is unlocked.
trmId V13
Description : Identifier of the ‘trm’ object class. This identifier is allocatedby the MD–R at object creation, depending on the shelf andslot numbers indicated by the BSC. This attribute cannot bemodified. This attribute is relevant for BSC e3 and TCU e3.
Value range : [0 to 2147483646]
Object : trm
Type : DP
Parameters listed in alphabetical orderNortel Networks Confidential 2–381
BSS Parameter Dictionary
tSCBNumber V13
Description : This attribute is significant only for BSC 2G. This attributeindicates which is the number of the TSCB (TranscoderSignalling Concentration Board) board, managing thesignalling for transcoders, and the number of the BSCB (BTSsignalling Concentration Board) board, managing thesignalling for BTS. This board is redundant at BSC level.
Value range : [0 to 13]Object : bsc2GEqpt
Type : DP
tSCBUse V13
Description : This attribute is significant only for BSC 2G. xSCB BoardsUse: indicates the internal state and LAPD mapping for eachcreated TSCB and BSCB board. This attribute is dynamicallymanaged by the BSS. Value changes are notified to theManager.
Value range : [0 to 14]
Object : bsc2GEqpt
Type : DP
tsConfiguration V8
Description : Configuration of the radio TDMA frame time slots
This dynamic attribute indicates, for each time slot, thereconfiguration state, the type of logical channel supported,the frequency channel used (absoluteRFChannelNo) if thetime slot does not hop, the list of frequency channels used(mobileAllocation), the maio, and thehoppingSequenceNumber if the time slot hops.
Nortel Networks Confidential2–382 Parameters listed in alphabetical order
PE/DCL/DD/0124411–9001–124
Standard 13.04/EN March 2002 GSM/BSS V13
When frequency hopping is used if “reconfiguration state” is“true“, it means that BSC has recalculated the frequencyhopping law following the loss of one or several TRX (defenceof TDMA carrying the BCCH. If “reconfiguration state” is“false”, it means that the TDMA configuration is the originalone.
When frequency hopping is not used, this boolean has nomeaning and would be set to “false”.
Value range : [true / false]Object : transceiver
Type : DD
Remark : Since the time slots are reconfigured after each dynamicreconfiguration of the hopping frequencies, the data can bedifferent from those defined by the user when creating thechannel objects.
txPowerMaxReduction Class 2
Description : Maximum transmission power level allowed in a TDMAframe (attenuation versus bsTxPowerMax) per transceiver
Value range : [0 to 30 by step of 2] dB. “0” is the only value accepted.
Object : transceiver
Default value : 0
Type : DP
Checks :
[C/M]: The only value accepted by the system is 0 dB.
[M]: The parent bsc object is unlocked and thetransceiver object is locked.
Remark : Since the system accepts only one value for this attribute,changing it has no meaning.
Parameters listed in alphabetical orderNortel Networks Confidential 2–383
BSS Parameter Dictionary
type
Description : Type of data to archive or restore
Value range : [faults / observations / trace data / backup / other data]
Fault data are stored in the “/MD/notif” partition on theOMC–R agent disks.
Observation data are stored in the “/MD/obs” partition onthe OMC–R agent disks.
Trace data are stored in the “/MD/trace_function” partitionon the OMC–R agent disks.
Backup data are stored on the OMC–R agent disks.
Other data files are defined in the “/MD/config” partitionon the OMC–R agent disks.
Object : md – Archive
Type : DP
type
Description : Type of data to archive or restore
Value range : [faults / observations / trace data / backup / other data]
Fault data are restored to the “/MD/restored/notif” partitionon the OMC–R agent disks.
Observation data are restored to the “/MD/restored/obs”partition on the OMC–R agent disks.
Trace data are restored in the“/MD/restored/trace_function” partition on the OMC–Ragent disks.
Other data files are restored to their source directory on theOMC–R agent disks.
Object : md – Restore
Type : DP
Nortel Networks Confidential2–384 Parameters listed in alphabetical order
PE/DCL/DD/0124411–9001–124
Standard 13.04/EN March 2002 GSM/BSS V13
type
Description : Type of data to archive or restore
Value range : [faults / observations / trace data / backup / other data]
Fault data are stored in the “/CMN/base/save_rest”partition on the OMC–R manager disks.
Observation data are stored in the “/OMC/obs” partition onthe OMC–R manager disks.
Trace data are stored in the “/CMN/base/save_rest”partition on the OMC–R manager.
Backup data are stored on the OMC–R manager disks.
Other data files are defined in the “/OMC/data” partition onthe OMC–R manager disks.
Object : omc – Archive
Type : DP
type
Description : Type of data to archive or restore
Value range : [faults / observations / trace data / backup / other data]
Fault data are restored to the “/CMN/base/save_rest”partition on the OMC–R manager disks.
Observation data are restored to the “/OMC/obs” partitionon the OMC–R manager disks.
Trace data are restored to the “/CMN/base/save_rest”partition on the OMC–R manager disks.
Other data files are restored to their source directory“/OMC/data” on the manager disks.
Object : omc – Restore
Type : DP
Parameters listed in alphabetical orderNortel Networks Confidential 2–385
BSS Parameter Dictionary
type V11
Description : Type of observation report
Value range : [single observed instance / several observed instance]
single observed instance .several observed. . . . . . . counters on a singleobject
several observed instance single counter. . . . . . . observed on severalobjects
Object : report template
Type : DP
Type of data to be purged V10
Description : Type of the OMC data to be purged
Value range : [traceData]
Object : omc – Data purge
Type : DP
Type of display V11
Description : Choice of the observation counter display mode
Value range : [Chart / Table / Text]Object : report template
Type : DP
Nortel Networks Confidential2–386 Parameters listed in alphabetical order
PE/DCL/DD/0124411–9001–124
Standard 13.04/EN March 2002 GSM/BSS V13
U
unequippedCircuit Class 1 V8
Description : Whether the UNEQUIPPED CIRCUIT messages are used(Phase II compliance)
Value range : [false / true]
Object : signallingPoint
Feature : Unequipped circuit and circuit group block (UF1169.1 – V12)
Default value : False
Type : DP
Checks : [C/M]: The only accepted value is “false” in V10 and V11.
[M]: The parent bsc object is locked.
Remark : Since the system accepts only one value for this attribute inV10 and V11, changing it has no meaning.
unknownNCellWarning Class 3
Description : Whether feedback of measurements performed by mobiles onneighbor cells that are unknown to the BSC is allowed
When feedback of measurements is enabled, notificationswith codano 1260 are generated. These notifications indicatethat measurements are performed on cells which use the sameBCCH as a neigbor cell of the serving cell but have differentBSICs.
Value range : [enabled / disabled]
Object : bts
Default value : disabled
Type : DP
Checks : [M]: The parent bsc object is unlocked.
Parameters listed in alphabetical orderNortel Networks Confidential 2–387
BSS Parameter Dictionary
unmasked users alarms Class 2 V9
Description : Configuration of the user (unprotected) external alarm loopscontrolled by the BTS. When an alarm is unmasked, it meansthe relevant equipment is monitored by the BTS. There are 6user alarms per cabinet
on the S8000 Outdoor (up to 18 user alarms = 3 cabinets * 6user alarms per cabinet).
on the S8002 BTS (up to 6 user alarms = 1 cabinet * 6 useralarms)
A user alarm is used when an external equipment is insertedin the BTS (for instance a microwave terminal) and does notrequire a new DLU.
Value range : [All masked, Base 1, Base 1 to 2, Base 1 to 3, Base 1 to 4, Base1 to 5, Base 1 to 6, Base 1 to 6 Ext0 1, Base 1 to 6 Ext0 1 to 2,Base 1 to 6 Ext0 1 to 3, Base 1 to 6 Ext0 1 to 4, Base 1 to 6 Ext01 to 5, Base 1 to 6 Ext0 1 to 6, Base 1 to 6 Ext0 1 to 6 Ext1 1to 2, Base 1 to 6 Ext0 1 to 6 Ext1 1 to 4, Base 1 to 6 Ext0 1 to6 Ext1 1 to 6]
For instance:
Base 1: the first user alarm in the Base cabinet is unmasked
Base 1 to 2: the first and second user alarm in the Basecabinet are unmasked
Base 1 to 6 Ext0 1: The 6 user alarms in the Base cabinet andthe first one in the Extension cabinet 0 are unmasked
Object : btsSiteManager
Type : DP
Checks : [M] : The parent bsc object is unlocked and thebtsSiteManager object is locked
upAckTime Class3 (packetAckTime) V12
Description : Time defining the period for the acknowledgments for ULtransfers
Value range : [1 to 64] steps 100 ms for uplink transfer (step size is500 msec)
Object : transceiver
Feature : GPRS (SV407 – V12 and TF1220 – V12.4c)
Type : DP
Checks : [M]: The parent bsc object is unlocked.
Nortel Networks Confidential2–388 Parameters listed in alphabetical order
PE/DCL/DD/0124411–9001–124
Standard 13.04/EN March 2002 GSM/BSS V13
upgradeStatus V13
Description : Stands whether an upgrade has currently been performed, isstill in progress or not.
This attribute is dynamically managed by the BSS.
Value changes are notified to the manager.
Value range : [notInProgress / inProgress / performed]
Object : atmRm, cc, cem, iem, omu, sw8kRm, tmu, trm.
Type : DD
Feature : AR 1209 – V13.1
uplinkMappingChannelNumber Class 2 U1 V12
Description : Channel number used for uplink mapping as the monitored TS
Value range : [1 to 7]
Object : bts
Default value : 7
Type : DP
Feature : Uplink mapping (TF876 – V12)
Checks : [M]: The parent bsc object is unlocked and the btsobject is locked.
[C/M]: The attribute must contain an even value in case ofan extended cell (2, 4, 6). In case of a multi CCCHcell it must contain an odd value (1, 3, 5, 7).
uplinkMappingFreq Class 2 U2 V12
Description : Frequency (f0) used for uplink mapping
Value range : [0 to 1023]
Object : bts
Default value : 0
Type : DP
Feature : Uplink mapping (TF876 – V12)
Checks : [M]: The parent bsc object is unlocked and the btsobject is locked.
Parameters listed in alphabetical orderNortel Networks Confidential 2–389
BSS Parameter Dictionary
uplinkMappingMeasurementMode
Description : This attribute is relevant from V11 BTS.
This attribute indicates if the uplink mapping is active (TRUE)or inactive (FALSE) on the BTS.
Once active BTS sends collected data to BSC.
This attribute is modified by the Manager.
This attribute can be modified only if the ‘bts’ object instanceis locked.
This attribute can be modified only if the ‘bsc’object instanceis unlocked.
Value range : [false / true]
Type : DP
uplinkMappingProcessingMode Class 3 U3 V12
Description : Whether uplink mapping is active on the BSC or not
Value range : [disabled / enabled]
Object : bsc
Default value : disabled
Type : DP
Feature : Uplink mapping (TF876 – V12)
Checks : [M]: The bsc object is unlocked.
uplinkPowerControl Class 3U4 V8
Description : Whether power control in the MS-to-BTS direction isauthorized at cell level
Value range : [enabled / disabled]
Object : powerControl
Default value : enabled
Type : DP
Checks : [M]: The parent bsc object is unlocked.
Nortel Networks Confidential2–390 Parameters listed in alphabetical order
PE/DCL/DD/0124411–9001–124
Standard 13.04/EN March 2002 GSM/BSS V13
uRxLevDLP Class 3 U5
Description : Upper strength threshold for BTS txpwr decrease for step bystep algorithm
It is greater than lRxLevDLP.
Value range : [less than –110, –110 to –109, ... , –49 to –48, morethan –48] dBm
Object : powerControl
Default value : –85 to –84 dBm
Type : DP
Checks : [M]: lRxLevDLP + powerIncrStepSize ≤ uRxLevDLP
[M]: uRxLevDLP – powerRedStepSize ≥ lRxLevDLP
[M]: The parent bsc object is unlocked.
Note : This parameter is significant only when the BTS uses thestandard “step by step” power control algorithm.
uRxLevULP Class 3 U6
Description : Upper strength threshold for MS txpwr decrease for step bystep algorithm
It is greater than lRxLevULP.
Value range : [less than –110, –110 to –109, ... , –49 to –48, morethan –48] dBm
Object : powerControl
Default value : –85 to –84 dBm
Type : DP
Checks : [M]: lRxLevULP + powerIncrStepSize ≤ uRxLevULP
[M]: uRxLevULP – powerRedStepSize ≥ lRxLevULP
[M]: The parent bsc object is unlocked.
Note : This parameter is significant only when the BTS uses thestandard “step by step” power control algorithm.
Parameters listed in alphabetical orderNortel Networks Confidential 2–391
BSS Parameter Dictionary
uRxQualDLP Class 3 U7
Description : Upper quality threshold to reduce BTS txpwr for step by stepalgorithm
It is lower than or equal to lRxQualDLP.
Value range : [less than 0.2, 0.2 to 0.4, 0.4 to 0.8, ... , 6.4 to 12.8, morethan 12.8] %
Object : powerControl
Default value : 0.2 to 0.4
Type : DP
Checks : [M]: uRxQualDLP ≤ lRxQualDLP
[M]: The parent bsc object is unlocked.
Note : This parameter is significant only when the BTS uses thestandard “step by step” power control algorithm.
uRxQualULP Class 3 U8
Description : Upper quality threshold to reduce MS txpwr for step by stepalgorithm
It is lower than or equal to lRxQualULP.
Value range : [less than 0.2, 0.2 to 0.4, 0.4 to 0.8, ... , 6.4 to 12.8, morethan 12.8] %
Object : powerControl
Default value : 0.2 to 0.4
Type : DP
Checks : [M]: uRxQualULP ≤ lRxQualULP
[M]: The parent bsc object is unlocked.
Note : This parameter is significant only when the BTS uses thestandard “step by step” power control algorithm.
Nortel Networks Confidential2–392 Parameters listed in alphabetical order
PE/DCL/DD/0124411–9001–124
Standard 13.04/EN March 2002 GSM/BSS V13
usageState
Description : Activity state of the Call path tracing function in the BSC
Refer to the endSessionCriteriaType entry in the Dictionaryand the operationalState entry related to the callPathTraceobject which describes the possible state parametercombinations for this type of object.
Value range : [idle / busy ]
idle The PCM time slot that conveys the. . . . . . . . . . . . . terrestrial circuit is traffic-free.
busy The PCM time slot conveys the. . . . . . . . . . . . terrestrial circuit is working andcarrying traffic.
Object : callPathTrace
Type : DD
������ � �
Description : ISO state
Refer to the operationalState entry related to the xtp objectwhich describes the possible state parameter combinations forthis type of object.
Value range : [idle / busy / active]
idle The PCM time slot that conveys the. . . . . . . . . . . . . terrestrial circuit is traffic-free.
busy The PCM time slot conveys the. . . . . . . . . . . . terrestrial circuit is working andcarrying traffic.
active The PCM time slot that conveys the. . . . . . . . . . . terrestrial circuit is active.
Object : xtp
Type : DD
use default list V11
Description : Whether default counter list has to be used
Value range : [yes]Object : bscCounterList
Type : DP
Parameters listed in alphabetical orderNortel Networks Confidential 2–393
BSS Parameter Dictionary
user name
Description : Name of an OMC–R user as defined in the user’s profile(default is the logged-in user’s name)
Do not fill in if this criterion is not to be selected.
Value range : [case sensitive]
Object : System session log – Filter
Type : DP
Checks : [A]: The related user profile object is created on theOMC–R.
user profile
Description : Identifier (name) of an OMC–R user
Value range : [case sensitive, 2 characters min]
Object : user profile
Type : Id
Checks : [C]: The name of a user is one-of-a-kind to theOMC–R.
[M/D]: The user profile object is created.
username
Description : Name of the OMC–R user, as defined in the user’s profile, whocreated the job
Value range : [case sensitive]
Object : job
Type : DD
username
Description : Name of the OMC–R user, as defined in the user’s profile, whocreated the associated job
Value range : [case sensitive]
Object : jobResult
Type : DD
Nortel Networks Confidential2–394 Parameters listed in alphabetical order
PE/DCL/DD/0124411–9001–124
Standard 13.04/EN March 2002 GSM/BSS V13
V
version Class 2 V8
Description : Version number of the remote transcoder TCBs
Version 1 TCB software only manages the FR (Full Rate)service.Version 2 TCB software manages both FR and EFR(Enhanced Full Rate) services.
The following apply:
All TCBs in a given TCU are the same version.
All TCUs in a BSS must be equipped with Version 2 TCBsfor the EFR service to be provided.
Value range : [TCB_1 / TCB_2]Object : transcoder
Default value : TCB_2
Type : DP
Checks : [M]: The attribute value is “TCB_2” if thespeechMode attribute of the dependenttranscoderBoard objects contains “enhanced fullrate”.
[M]: The parent bsc object is unlocked and thetranscoder object is locked.
voiceBroadcastService Class 3 V1 V12
Description : Authorize Voice Broadcast Service
Value range : [enabled / disabled]Object : signallingPoint
Default value : disabled
Type : DP
Feature : (GSM–R V12)
voiceGroupCallService Class 3 V2 V12
Description : Authorize Voice Group Call Service
Value range : [enabled / disabled]Object : signallingPoint
Default value : disabled
Type : DP
Feature : (GSM–R V12)
Parameters listed in alphabetical orderNortel Networks Confidential 2–395
BSS Parameter Dictionary
VSWR meter Class 2 V9
Description : Presence or absence of the optional equipment “voltagestationary wave rate meter” in S8000 Indoor or Outdoor
Value range : [Present / Absent]
Object : btsSiteManager
Type : DP
Checks : [M] : The parent bsc object is unlocked and thebtsSiteManager object is locked
Nortel Networks Confidential2–396 Parameters listed in alphabetical order
PE/DCL/DD/0124411–9001–124
Standard 13.04/EN March 2002 GSM/BSS V13
W
workstation name
Description : Name of a workstation as defined in its profile (default is thelogged-in user’s workstation)
Value range : [case sensitive]
Object : omc – Display workstation markers
Type : DP
Checks : [A]: The terminal profile object describing theworkstation is created on the OMC–R.
Parameters listed in alphabetical orderNortel Networks Confidential 2–397
BSS Parameter Dictionary
X
X25Port0Operational V13
Description : Operational State of the OMU module external X.25 port 0.
ISO operational state (enabled/disabled).
This attribute is dynamically managed by the BSS.
Value changes are not notified to the Manager.
This attribute is relevant for BSC e3.
Value range : [enabled / disabled]
Object : omu
Type : DD
Feature : AR 1209 – V13.1
X25Port1Operational V13
Description : Operational State of the OMU module external X.25 port 1.
ISO operational state (enabled/ disabled).
This attribute is dynamically managed by the BSS. Valuechanges are not notified to the Manager.
This attribute is relevant for BSC e3.
Value range : [enabled / disabled]
Object : omu
Type : DD
Feature : AR 1209 – V13.1
Nortel Networks Confidential2–398 Parameters listed in alphabetical order
PE/DCL/DD/0124411–9001–124
Standard 13.04/EN March 2002 GSM/BSS V13
xSCBConfiguration Class 0 V8
Description : Number of TSCBs and BSCBs that concentrate LAPDsignaling in the BSC
The TSCBs are used for TCU signaling on the Ater interface.The BSCBs are used for BTS signaling on the Abis interface.
A BSC which manages BTS LAPD signaling concentrationcan control up to 138 radio sites with redundancy, or 147 radiosites without redundancy.
When a BSC does not manage BTS LAPD signalingconcentration, the number of radio sites it controls is limitedto the number of SICD ports available, minus 1 (which isreserved for TCU LAPD signaling), that is 39 sites.
Value range : [2 to 14]Object : bsc
Default value : 2
Type : DP
Checks : [M]: The application database of the parent bsc is notbuilt (bdaState = “not built”).
xSCBNumber
Description : Number of the TSCB that concentrates TCU LAPD signalingin the BSC
This dynamic attribute is managed by the BSC.
Value range : [0 to 13]Object : bsc
Type : DD
Note : This parameter is only available for BSC 2G
xSCBUse V8
Description : State and assignment of the BSC TSCBs and BSCBs
This dynamic attribute indicates, for each TSCB and BSCBhoused in the BSC, its operational state and the list of theLAPD links it concentrates.
Value range : [working / fault]Object : bsc
Type : DD
Parameters listed in alphabetical orderNortel Networks Confidential 2–399
BSS Parameter Dictionary
xtp
Description : Identifier of an xtp object (eXchange Termination Point)defined with regard to a bsc object
Value range : [0 to 2147483646]Object : xtp
Type : Id
Checks : [C]: The number of terrestrial circuits linked to a BSC12000 (BSC 6000) is limited to 1288 (840) ifPCM E1 links are used and to 1440 (828) if PCMT1 links are used. The number of terrestrialcircuits linked to a BSC 2000 is limited to 360.
[C]: The software object related to the bsc object iscreated.
[C/M]: The referenced pcmCircuit object(pcmCircuitId) is assigned to the A interface anddepends on the same transcoder object(transcoderId) as the xtp object.
[C]: The time slot used by the xtp object(timeSlotNumber) is identical to themscPcmTsNumber component of the cic attribute.
[C/M]: The referenced PCM,TS pair (pcmCircuitId andtimeSlotNumber) is not already assigned to anxtp or signallingLink object dependent on thesame transcoder object, and the time slot is notmapped on the TS used by the OMC channel onthe Ater interface.
[C/M]: If the terrestrial circuit uses PCMA link no.3(pcmCircuitId), the timeSlotNumber is in therange [1 to 27] if the PCM link is an E1 link or inthe range [1 to 20] if the PCM link is a T1 link.Since the last four time slots of that link are notmapped on the Ater interface, they are unusable(refer to the transcoderMatrix entry in theDictionary).
[C]: If the application database of the related BSC isbuilt, the parent bsc object is unlocked.
[D]: If the application database of the related BSC isbuilt, the parent bsc object is unlocked and the xtpobject is locked.
Nortel Networks Confidential2–400 Parameters listed in alphabetical order
PE/DCL/DD/0124411–9001–124
Standard 13.04/EN March 2002 GSM/BSS V13
[D]: If the application database of the related BSC isnot built, it has been reset by an Off line reset BDAcommand.
[D]: No traceControl or callPathTrace object refers tothe xtp object (the Call tracing and Call pathtracing functions do not monitor that object).
Restrictions : [M]: The cic and timeSlotNumber attributes of an xtpobject cannot be modified.
Parameters listed in alphabetical orderNortel Networks Confidential 2–401
BSS Parameter Dictionary
Z
ZI bss
Description : List of selected BSCs that defines a BSS zone of interest.Enter “all” to include all the BSCs created on the OMC–R.
If the ZI bss list should include only a subset of BSCs, fillin the list as follows:
The Add button allows to add a BSC to the list.
The Delete button allows to remove selected BSCs fromthe list.
A BSS terminal zone of interest allows users to filter theunsolicited messages (output domain) that can be output onthe terminal outside users’ work sessions according to theBSS entities that send them.
Object : terminal profile
Type : DP
Note : The user can enter a BSC in the list that is not created yet. Whenit is created, this BSC will be handle as the other BSCs alreadycreated.
ZI bss
Description : List of selected BSCs that defines a BSS zone of interest.Enter “all” to include all the BSCs created on the OMC–R.
If the ZI bss list should include only a subset of BSCs, fillin the list as follows:
The Add button allows to add a BSC to the list.
The Delete button allows to remove selected BSCs fromthe list.
A BSS user’s zone of interest defines the BSS entities theuser is entitled to work on. It allows to filter both the MMIcommands they can enter (command domain) according tothe objects managed by these commands and theunsolicited messages (output domain) they have access toaccording to the BSS entities that send them.
Object : user profile
Type : DP
Note : The user can enter a BSC in the list that is not created yet. Whenit is created, this BSC will be handle as the other BSCs alreadycreated.
Nortel Networks Confidential2–402 Parameters listed in alphabetical order
PE/DCL/DD/0124411–9001–124
Standard 13.04/EN March 2002 GSM/BSS V13
ZI omc
Description : Whether output of unsolicited messages issued by theOMC–R applications to a terminal is allowed when no useris logged in
Value range : [OMC included / OMC excluded]Object : terminal profile
Type : DP
ZI omc
Description : Whether user access to unsolicited messages issued by theOMC–R applications is granted
Value range : [OMC included / OMC excluded]Object : user profile
Type : DP
zone frequency hopping Class 2 V9
Description : Whether frequency hopping is authorised in the zone
If frequency hopping is not allowed in a zone, the channelobjects that describe the radio time slots of the TDMA framesused in the zone cannot be allowed to hop.
Value range : [hopping / not hopping]Object : transceiverZone
Default value : not hopping
Type : DP
Checks : [M]: The parent bsc object is unlocked and theassociated bts object is locked.
Note : The transceiverZone objects are only created for bts objectsthat describe concentric cells.
zone frequency threshold Class 2 V9
Description : Minimum number of frequencies needed to allow frequencyreconfiguration in the zone
Value range : [1 to 64]Object : transceiverZone
Default value : 1
Type : DP
Checks : [M]: The parent bsc object is unlocked and theassociated bts object is locked.
Parameters listed in alphabetical orderNortel Networks Confidential 2–403
BSS Parameter Dictionary
Note : The transceiverZone objects are only created for bts objectsthat describe concentric cells.
zone Tx power max reduction Class 2 Z1 V9
Description : Attenuation vs bsTxPowerMax that defines the maximumTRX/DRX transmission power in the zone
Value range : large zone = [0] dB, small zone = [1 to 55] dB
Object : transceiverZone
Default value : 0
Type : DP
Checks :
[C/M]: zone Tx power max reduction equals zero if thetransceiverZone object describes the cell outerzone. It is greater than zero if the transceiverZoneobject describes the cell inner zone.
[M]: The parent bsc object is unlocked and theassociated bts object is locked.
Note : The transceiverZone objects are only created for bts objectsthat describe concentric cells.
Nortel Networks Confidential2–404 Parameters listed in alphabetical order
PE/DCL/DD/0124411–9001–124
Standard 13.04/EN March 2002 GSM/BSS V13
PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
Objects and parameters evolutionNortel Networks Confidential 3–1
BSS Parameter Dictionary
APPENDIX A OBJECTS AND PARAMETERSEVOLUTION
This appendix presents BSS V13 and V12 configuration parameters and objects
A.1 New V13 parameters
Parameter Object
administrativeState cc, cem, cn, bsc3GEqpt, transcoder3GEqpt, iem, in,lsaRc, mms, omu, sw8kRm, tmu, trm
associatedTMUPosition btsSiteManageratmRmId atmRmavailabilityStatus cc, cem, cn, bsc3GEqpt, transcoder3GEqpt, iem, in,
lsaRc, mms, omu, sw8kRm, tmu, trmbsc2GEqptId bsc2GEqptbsc3GEqptId bsc3GEqptbscList executableSoftwarebscLogId bscLogbscName bscbscReset bsc3GEqptbscUsedAdr bscMdInterfaceccId cccemId cemcnId cncoderPoolList transcoder3GEqptconfigRefList executableSoftwareCTU cable iemexecutableSoftwareId executableSoftwareexecutableSoftwareName executableSoftwareiemId ieminId ininterOmuEtherlinkOper cnlapd exists iem, lsaRclapdlinkCallPLoad transcoder3GEqptlsaPcmList iem, lsaRclsaRcId lsaRclsaRc Reference iemmaxNbrConsMess bscLogmmsId mmsmmsUsage mmsnumberOfEnabledHDLCPorts iem, tmuomuId omuoperationalState atmRm, cc, cem, cn, bsc3GEqpt, transcoder3GEqpt, iem,
in, lsaRc, mms, omu, sw8kRm, tmu, trmport Ethernet Operational omu
Nortel Networks Confidential3–2 Objects and parameters evolution
PE/DCL/DD/0124411–9001–124
Standard 13.04/EN March 2002 GSM/BSS V13
Parameter Object
port Ethernet Status omuport0X25Status omuport1X25Status omupositionInShelf atmRm, cc, cem, iem, lsaRc, mms, omu, sw8kRm, tmu,
trmprivateMmsOmuRef mmsprotocolUsed bscMdInterfacerelatedSoftwares executableSoftwareshelfNumber atmRm, cc, cem, iem, lsaRc, mms, omu, sw8kRm, tmu,
trmsoftwareLabel executableSoftwarestandbyStatus atmRm, cem, iem, lsaRc, omu, sw8kRmsw8kRmId sw8kRmtmuId tmutranscoder2GEqptId transcoder2GEqpttranscoder3GEqptId transcoder3GEqpttranscoderAlarmList transcoder2GEqpttrmId trmtSCBNumber bsc2GEqpttSCBUse bsc2GEqptupgradeStatus atmRm, cc, cem, iem, omu, sw8kRm, tmu, trmX25Port0Operational omuX25Port1Operational omu
Objects and parameters evolutionNortel Networks Confidential 3–3
BSS Parameter Dictionary
A.2 New V12 parameters
Parameter Object Feature
additional supervised PCM 0 btsSiteManager FM1189additional supervised PCM 1 btsSiteManager FM1189additional supervised PCM 2 btsSiteManager FM1189additional supervised PCM 3 btsSiteManager FM1189additional supervised PCM 4 btsSiteManager FM1189additional supervised PCM 5 btsSiteManager FM1189additional unmasked users alarms btsSiteManager FM1158adjCHOReserved3 adjacentCellHandOver FM1189adjCHOReserved4 adjacentCellHandOver FM1189administrativeState pcu SV407allocBitmap transceiver SV407availabilityStatus pcu SV407availabilityStatus pcusn SV407biZonePowerOffset adjacentCellHandOver
handOverControlTF875
bscGprsActivation bsc SV407btsLockedReserved2 bts V12bscPcuPcmRefList pcu SV407bscRefList pcusn SV407bsCvMax bts SV407btsReserved3 bts TF995btsReserved4 bts V12btsSensitivity bts SV407btsSensitivityInnerZone bts SV407btsSMReserved1 btsSiteManager V12btsSMReserved2 btsSiteManager V12btsWithCavity bts PR1179codingScheme transceiver SV407cpueNumber btsSiteManager AR874currentChannelHorqd signallingPoint V12Data14.4OnNoHoppingTs bts V12directedRetryPrio bts TF821dLPwrValue transceiver SV407drxTimerMax bts SV407eMLPPThreshold signallingPoint ASCIenhancedTRAUFrameIndication bsc FM660geographical coordinates pcusn SV407gprsAvgParam bts SV407gprsCellActivation bts SV407gprsPermittedAccess bts SV407gprsPreemption bts TF1121gprsPreemptionProtection bts TF1121gprsPriority transceiver TF1121
Nortel Networks Confidential3–4 Objects and parameters evolution
PE/DCL/DD/0124411–9001–124
Standard 13.04/EN March 2002 GSM/BSS V13
Parameter FeatureObject
gprsTimerWaitPUAM bts SV407gprsTimerWaitRLC bts SV407hoMarginTiering handoverControl TF995hoMarginTrafficOffset adjacentCellHandOver TF132HOPingpongCombination adjacentCellHandOver TF821HOPingpongTimeRejection adjacentCellHandOver TF821hoTraffic bsc
btsTF132
interferenceType adjacentCellHandOver TF995longTbfLossThroughput bts SV407longTbfSizeThreshold bts SV407maxBsTransmitPowerInnerZone bts SV407maxDnTbfP1P2Threshold bts SV407maxDnTbfPerTs bts SV407maxDwAssign bts SV407maxNbrPDAAssig transceiver SV407maxNbrPUDWithoutVChange transceiver SV407maxNbrRLCEmptyBlock transceiver SV407maxRach bts SV407maxUpTbfP1P2Threshold bts SV407maxUpTbfPerTs bts SV407measurementProcAlgorithm bts TF1089minNbrsGprsTs bts TF1121msCapWeightActive bts SV407msTxPwrMax2ndBand bts TF875muxNumber pcusn SV407N3103 bts SV407N3105max bts SV407nbrFreeTchBeforeAnticipation bts SV407nbrFreeTchToEndAnticipation bts SV407nbrTch pcu SV407NCHPosition bts ASCInumberOfPwciSamples handOverCOntrol TF995offsetLoad adjacentCellHandOver TF716offsetPriority adjacentCellHandOver TF716operationalState pcu SV407operationalStatus pcusn SV407packetAckTime transceiver SV407pan bts SV407pcmErrorCorrection bts FM660pcmNbr pcu SV407pcu pcu SV407pcuLapdEqptRefList pcu SV407pcusn pcusn SV407
Objects and parameters evolutionNortel Networks Confidential 3–5
BSS Parameter Dictionary
Parameter FeatureObject
pcuSNName pcusn SV407pcuSNReserved1 pcusn SV407pcuSNReserved2 pcusn SV407preemptionAuthor signallingPoint ASCIpwciHreqave handOverControl TF995radioAllocator bts TF1121reserved1 pcu SV407reserved1 transceiver SV407reserved2 pcu SV407reserved2 transceiver SV407reserved3 bts SV407reserved3 pcu SV407reserved3 transceiver SV407reserved4 bts SV407reserved4 pcu SV407reserved4 transceiver SV407reserved5 bts SV407reserved5 pcu SV407reserved5 transceiver SV407routingArea bts SV407rxQualDLIH handOverControl TF819rxQualULIH handOverControl TF819selfTuningObs handOverControl TF995sigPReserved1 signallingPoint V12sigPReserved2 signallingPoint V12speechOnHoppingTs bts SV407speechVersionAsscomp signallingPoint V12speechVersionHoperf signallingPoint V12speechVersionHoreq signallingPoint V12speechVersionHorqd signallingPoint V12T3172 bts SV407transcdBReserved1 transcoderBoard V12transcdBReserved2 transcoderBoard V12transcvEReserved1 transceiverEquipment V12transcvEReserved2 transceiverEquipment V12uplinkMappingChannelNumber bts TF876uplinkMappingFreq bts TF876uplinkMappingMeasurementMode bts TF876uplinkMappingProcessingMode bsc TF876voiceBroadcastService signallingPoint ASCIvoiceGroupCallService signallingPoint ASCI
Nortel Networks Confidential3–6 Objects and parameters evolution
PE/DCL/DD/0124411–9001–124
Standard 13.04/EN March 2002 GSM/BSS V13
A.2.1 Parameter updates linked to new feature introduction
Parameter Object Feature
associatedInterface lapdLink SV407bsc equipment name Alarm and notification logs
– FilterSV407
bts time between HO configuration bts TF821channelType channel TF184
SV407concentric cell bts TF875intraCell handOverControl TF995lapdConcentration lapdLink SV407lapdLink lapdLink SV407lapdTerminalNumber lapdLink SV407new power control algorithm bts TF975pcmCircuit pcmCircuit SV407pcmType pcmCircuit SV407processorLoadSupConf bsc FM874rxLevULIH handOverControl FM876standard indicator bts TF875standard indicator AdjC adjacentCellHandOver
adjacentCellReselectionTF875
timeBetweenHOConfiguration bsc TF821
Configuration parameter listNortel Networks Confidential 4–1
BSS Parameter Dictionary
APPENDIX B CONFIGURATION PARAMETER LISTTable B–1 lists the configuration parameters of a BSS in alphabetical order, with their type,their class, and the object class to which they are related.
The following should be noted:
Dynamic data (DDs) and internal data (DIs) are not classified.
Some permanent data (DPs) are not classified. This includes object administrativeStateattributes, object name attributes, attributes that cannot be modified, and attributes thatare not managed by users.
Parameter Type Class Object class
abisSpy DP 3 bts
absoluteRFChannelNo DP 2 channel
accessClassCongestion DP 3 bts
accessibilityState DD signallingLinkSet
active (passive) chain disk state DD bsc
active (passive) chain Dmux state DD bsc
active (passive) chain ECI boardstate
DD bsc
active (passive) chain REM linkstate
DD bsc
active (passive) chain Sic boardstate
DD bsc
active (passive) chain sicchannels state
DD bsc
active (passive) chain sls boardstate
DD bsc
active (passive) chain state DD bsc
active (passive) chain switchingcapacity
DD bsc
active (passive) chain tcuaccessibility
DD bsc
active (passive) chain ute boardstate
DD bsc
active rem link DD bsc
activeChain DD bsc
adjacent cell umbrella Ref DP 3 bts
adjCHOReserved3 DP 3 adjacentCellHandOver
adjCHOReserved4 DP 3 adjacentCellHandOver
Nortel Networks Confidential4–2 Configuration parameter list
PE/DCL/DD/0124411–9001–124
Standard 13.04/EN March 2002 GSM/BSS V13
Parameter Object classClassType
administrativeState DP – bsc, bscMdInterface, bts,btsSiteManager, pcm-Circuit, pcu, signallingLink,transceiverEquipment, transcoder,transcoder-Board, xtp, cc, cem, cn, bsc3GEqpttranscoder3GEqpt, iem, in, lsaRcmms, omu, sw8kRm, tmu, trm
aLAIntState DD bsc
alarmListConverter DD transcoder
alarmListFan DD transcoder
alarmListFanBoard DD transcoder
alarmListVCOTension DD transcoder
AlgoId DP – transcoderBoard
algorithm Used DP 2 transcoderBoard
allocationState DD transceiver
allocBitmap DP 3 transceiver
allocPriorityTable DP 3 bts
allocPriorityThreshold DP 3 bts
allocPriorityTimers DP 3 bts
allocWaitThreshold DP 3 bts
allOtherCasesPriority DP 3 bts
answerPagingPriority DP 3 bts
assignRequestPriority DP 3 bts
associatedInterface DP – lapdLink
associatedTMUPosition DP – btsSiteManager
atmRmId DP – atmRm
Attenuation DP 2 btsSiteManager
auditBdaStatus DI – bsc
auditState DI – bsc
availabilityStatus DD – bsc, bscMdInterface, bts,btsSiteManager, lapdLink, pcmCircuit,pcu, signallingLink, transceiver,transceiver-Equipment, transcoder,transcoderBoard, xtp, cc, cem, cnbsc3GEqpt, transcoder3GEqptiem, in, lsaRc, ms, omu, sw8kRmtmu, trm
Configuration parameter listNortel Networks Confidential 4–3
BSS Parameter Dictionary
Parameter Object classClassType
averagingPeriod DP 2 handOverControl
backupServer DP – md
baseColourCode DP 23
btsadjacentCellHandOver
bCCHFrequency DP 233
btsadjacentCellHandOveradjacentCellReselection
bdaNewBscState DI – bsc
bdaSelected DI bsc
bdaState DI bsc
bdaVersionNumber DD bsc
biZonePowerOffset DP 33
adjacentCellHandOverhandOverControl
bsc2GEqptId DP – bsc2GEqpt
bsc3GEqptId DP – bsc3GEqpt
bscAlarmMask DP 3 bsc
bscArchitecture DP 0 bsc
bscDateTime DD bsc
bscGprsActivation DP 3 bsc
bscHopReconfUse DP 1 bsc
bscList DP – executableSoftware
bscLogId DP – bscLog
bscMdInterfaceRef DP – bsc
bscMdInterfaceVersionNumber DP – bsc
bscMSAccessClassBarring-Function
DP 3 bsc
bscName DP – bsc
bscPcuPcmRefList DP 2 pcu
bscQueuingOption DP 1 signallingPoint
bscRefList DP 3 pcusn
bscReset DP – bsc3GEqpt
bscSitePcmList DP 2 btsSiteManager
bscTimeSlot DD channel
bscType DP 0 bsc
bscUsedAdr DP – bscMdInterface
bsCvMax DP 3 bts
bscX25PrefAdr DP 2 bscMdInterface
Nortel Networks Confidential4–4 Configuration parameter list
PE/DCL/DD/0124411–9001–124
Standard 13.04/EN March 2002 GSM/BSS V13
Parameter Object classClassType
bscX25SecAdr DP 2 bscMdInterface
bscX25UsedAdr DD bscMdInterface
bsPowerControl DP 3 powerControl
bssMapT1 DP 1 bsc
bssMapT12 DP 1 bsc
bssMapT13 DP 1 bsc
bssMapT19 DP 1 bsc
bssMapT20 DP 1 bsc
bssMapT4 DP 1 bsc
bssMapT7 DP 1 bsc
bssMapT8 DP 1 bsc
bssMapTchoke DP 1 bsc
bssSccpConnEst DP 1 signallingPoint
bssSccpInactRx DP 1 signallingPoint
bssSccpInactTx DP 1 signallingPoint
bssSccpRelease DP 1 signallingPoint
bssSccpSubSysTest DP 1 signallingPoint
bsTxPwrMax DP 3 powerControl
bts time between HOconfiguration
DP 3 bts
btsDescription DI – btsSiteManager
btsHopReconfRestart DP 2 bts
btsIsHopping DP 2 bts
btsLockedReserved2 DP 3 bts
btsMSAccessClassBarring-Function
DP 3 bts
btsReserved3 DP 3 bts
btsReserved4 DP 3 bts
btsSensitivity DP 3 bts
btsSensitivityInnerZone DP 3 bts
btsSiteManagerList DP 2 multiple site
btsSMReserved1 DP 2 btsSiteManager
btsSMReserved2 DP 2 btsSiteManager
btsThresholdHopReconf DP 2 bts
btsWithCavity DP 2 bts
buildState DI bsc
Configuration parameter listNortel Networks Confidential 4–5
BSS Parameter Dictionary
Parameter Object classClassType
callClearing DP 3 bts
callReestablishment DP 3 bts
callReestablishmentPriority DP 3 bts
ccId DP – cc
cellBarQualify DP 3 bts
cellBarred DP 3 bts
cellDeletionCount DP 3 bts
cellDtxDownlink DP 3 bts
cellIdentity DP 233
btsadjacentCellHandOveradjacentCellReselection
cellName DP – bts
cellPagingState DD bts
cellReselectHysteresis DP 3 bts
cellReselectOffset DP 3 bts
cellReselInd DP 3 bts
cellType DP 33
adjacentCellHandOverbts
cemId DP – cem
channel state DP 2 channel
channelType DD channel
chanState DP – channel
chosenChannelAsscomp DP 1 signallingPoint
chosenChannelCompL3Info DP 1 signallingPoint
chosenChannelHoPerf DP 1 signallingPoint
chosenChannelHoReq DP 1 signallingPoint
cic DP – xtp
circuitGroupBlock DP 1 signallingPoint
cnId DP – cn
coderPoolList DP – transcoder3GEqpt
codingScheme DP 2 transceiver
concentAlgoExtMsRange DP 3 handOverControl
concentAlgoExtRxLev DP 3 handOverControl
concentAlgoIntMsRange DP 3 handOverControl
concentAlgoIntRxLev DP 3 handOverControl
concentric cell DP 2 bts
Nortel Networks Confidential4–6 Configuration parameter list
PE/DCL/DD/0124411–9001–124
Standard 13.04/EN March 2002 GSM/BSS V13
Parameter Object classClassType
configRef DP 2 btsSiteManager
configRefList DP – executableSoftware
confusion DP 1 signallingPoint
counter list filename DP – bscCounterList
counters DP – bscCounterList
cpueNumber DP – btsSiteManager
cpueOccurrence DD btsSiteManager
cRC DP 2 pcmCircuit
CTU cable DD – iem
currentChannelHorqd DP 1 signallingPoint
cypherModeReject DP 1 signallingPoint
data mode 14.4 kbit/s DP 2 transcoderBoard
data non transparent mode DP 33
btssignallingPoint
data transparent mode DP 33
btssignallingPoint
Data14.4OnNoHoppingTs DP 3 bts
dDTIIntState DD pcmCircuit
delayBetweenRetrans DP 2 bts
deltaUtc DP – md
directedRetry DP 3 adjacentCellHandOver
directedRetryModeUsed DP 3 bts
directedRetryPrio DP – bts
distHreqt DP 3 handOverControl
distWtsList DP 3 handOverControl
diversity DP 2 bts
dLPwrValue DP 3 transceiver
drxTimerMax DP 3 bts
dtxMode DP 3 bts
duplex link state DD bsc
early classmark sending DP 3 bts
emergencyCallRestricted DP 3 bts
emergencyCallPriority DP 3 bts
eMLPPThreshold DP 1 signallingPoint
encrypAlgoAsscomp DP 1 signallingPoint
encrypAlgoCiphModComp DP 1 signallingPoint
Configuration parameter listNortel Networks Confidential 4–7
BSS Parameter Dictionary
Parameter Object classClassType
encrypAlgoHoperf DP 1 signallingPoint
encrypAlgoHoreq DP 1 signallingPoint
encryptionAlgorSupported DP 1 bsc
enhancedTRAUFrameIndication DI – bsc
error concealment unit DP 2 bts
errorCorrectionMethod DP 3 signallingLinkSet
executableSoftwareId DP – executableSoftware
executableSoftwareName DP – executableSoftware
extCommsInt DD bsc
extended cell DP 2 bts
external alarm configuration DP 2 btsSiteManager
external battery cabinet DP 2 btsSiteManager
externalTime DP – md
fhsRef DP 2 channel
forced handover algo DP 3 adjacentCellHandOver
geographical coordinates DI btsSiteManagerbscmdpcutranscoder
gprsAvgParam DP 3 bts
gprsCellActivation DP 3 bts
gprsPermittedAccess DP 3 bts
gprsPreemption DP 3 bts
gprsPreemptionProtection DP 3 bts
gprsPriority DP 3 transceiver
gprsTimerWaitPUAM DP 3 bts
gprsTimerWaitRLC DP 3 bts
HandOver from signalling channel DP 3 handOverControl
hardware configuration DP 2 transceiverEquipment
hardwareRef DP 222
btsSiteManagertransceiverEquipmenttranscoderBoard
hoMargin DP 3 adjacentCellHandOver
hoMarginBeg DP 3 bts
hoMarginDist DP 3 adjacentCellHandOver
hoMarginRxLev DP 3 adjacentCellHandOver
Nortel Networks Confidential4–8 Configuration parameter list
PE/DCL/DD/0124411–9001–124
Standard 13.04/EN March 2002 GSM/BSS V13
Parameter Object classClassType
hoMarginRxQual DP 3 adjacentCellHandOver
hoMarginTiering DP 3 handOverControl
hoMarginTrafficOffset DP 3 adjacentCellHandOver
HOPingpongCombination DP 3 adjacentCellHandOver
HOPingpongTimeRejection DP 3 adjacentCellHandOver
hoppingSequenceNumber DP 2 frequencyHoppingSystem
HOSecondBestCellConfiguration DP 3 bsc
hoTraffic DP 33
bscbts
iemId DP – iem
iMSIAttachDetach DP 2 bts
incomingHandOver DP 3 handOverControl
inId DP – in
interBscDirectedRetry DP 3 bsc
interBscDirectedRetryFromCell DP 3 bts
interCellHOExtPriority DP 3 bts
interCellHOIntPriority DP 3 bts
interferenceType DP 3 adjacentCellHandOver
interferer cancel algo usage DP 2 bts
interOmuEtherlinkOper DD – cn
intraBscDirectedRetry DP 3 bsc
intraBscDirectedRetryFromCell DP 3 bts
intraCell DP 3 handOverControl
intraCellHOIntPriority DP 3 bts
intraCellQueueing DP 3 bts
intraCellSDCCH DP 3 handOverControl
lapdConcentration DP – lapdLink
lapdexists DD – iem, lsaRc
lapdLinkCallPLoad DP – transcoder3GEqpt
lapdLinkOMLRef DP 022
transcoderbtsSiteManagertransceiverEquipment
lapdLinkRSLRef DP 2 transceiverEquipment
lapdTerminalNumber DP 0 lapdLink
layer3MsgCyphModComp DP 1 signallingPoint
lightning protection DP 2 btsSiteManager
Configuration parameter listNortel Networks Confidential 4–9
BSS Parameter Dictionary
Parameter Object classClassType
locationAreaCode DP 332
adjacentCellHandOveradjacentCellReselectionbts
longTbfLossThroughput DP 3 bts
longTbfSizeThreshold DP 3 bts
lRxLevDLH DP 3 handOverControl
lRxLevDLP DP 3 powerControl
lRxLevULH DP 3 handOverControl
lRxLevULP DP 3 powerControl
lRxQualDLH DP 3 handOverControl
lRxQualDLP DP 3 powerControl
lRxQualULH DP 3 handOverControl
lRxQualULP DP 3 powerControl
lsaPcmList DP 3 iem, lsaRc
lsaRcId DP – lsaRc
lsaRc Reference DP – iem
maio DP 2 channel
managerServer DP – md
maxBsTransmitPowerInnerZone DP 3 bts
maxDnTbfP1P2Threshold DP 3 bts
maxDnTbfPerTs DP 3 bts
maxDwAssign DP 3 bts
maxNbOfCells DP 2 btsSiteManager
maxNbrConsMess DP – bscLog
maxNbrPDAAssig DP 2 transceiver
maxNbrPUDWithoutVChange DP 2 transceiver
maxNbrRLCEmptyBlock DP 2 transceiver
maxNumberRetransmission DP 3 bts
maxRach DP 3 bts
maxUpTbfP1P2Threshold DP 3 bts
maxUpTbfPerTs DP 3 bts
mdId DP – md
measurementProcAlgorithm DP 2 bts
microCellCaptureTimer DP 3 adjacentCellHandOver (A algorithm)
microCellStability DP 33
adjacentCellHandOver (A algorithm)bts (B algorithm)
Nortel Networks Confidential4–10 Configuration parameter list
PE/DCL/DD/0124411–9001–124
Standard 13.04/EN March 2002 GSM/BSS V13
Parameter Object classClassType
minNbOfTDMA DP 2 bts
minNbrGprsTs DP 3 bts
missDistWt DP 3 handOverControl
missRxLevWt DP 3 handOverControl
missRxQualWt DP 3 handOverControl
mmsId DP – mms
mmsUsage DP – mms
mobileAllocation DP 2 frequencyHoppingSystem
mobileCountryCode DP 1233
bscbtsadjacentCellHandOveradjacentCellReselection
mobileNetworkCode DP 1233
bscbtsadjacentCellHandOveradjacentCellReselection
modeModifyMandatory DP 3 bsc
msBtsDistanceInterCell DP 3 handOverControl
msCapWeightActive DP 2 bts
msRangeMax DP 3 handOverControl
msTxPwrMax DP 3 bts
msTxPwrMax2ndBand DP 2 bts
msTxPwrMaxCCH DP 3 bts
msTxPwrMaxCell DP 3 adjacentCellHandOver
multi band reporting DP 3 bts
multipleVocoders DP 1 bsc
muxNumber DP 3 pcusn
N3103 DP 3 bts
N3105max DP 2 transceiver
nbOfRepeat DP 2 bts
nbrFreeTchBeforeAnticipation DP 3 bts
nbrFreeTchToEndAnticipation DP 3 bts
nbrTch DP 2 pcu
NCHPosition DP 2 bts
networkColourCode DP 23
btsadjacentCellHandOver
networkIndicator DP 11
signallingPointsignallingLinkSet
Configuration parameter listNortel Networks Confidential 4–11
BSS Parameter Dictionary
Parameter Object classClassType
new power control algorithm DP 3 bts
noOfBlocksForAccessGrant DP 2 bts
noOfMultiframesBetween-Paging
DP 2 bts
notAllowedAccessClasses DP 3 bts
numberOfPwciSamples DP 3 handOverControl
numberOfEnabledHDLCPorts DD – iem, tmu
numberOfSlotsSpreadTrans DP 3 bts
numberOfTCHFreeBefore-Congestion
DP 3 bts
numberOfTCHFreeToEnd-Congestion
DP 3 bts
numberOfTCHQueuedBefore-Congestion
DP 3 bts
numberOfTCHQueuedToEnd-Congestion
DP 3 bts
observationType DP – bscCounterList
occupationState DD xtp
offsetLoad DP 3 adjacentCellHandOver
offsetPriority DP 3 adjacentCellHandOver
omuId DP – omu
operationalState DD bsc, bscMdInterface, bts,btsSiteManager, lapdLink, pcmCircuit,pcu, signallingLink, transceiver,transceiver-Equipment, transcoder,transcoderBoard, xtp, atmRmcc, cem, cn, bsc3GEqpttranscoder3GEqpt, iem, in, lsaRcmms, omu, sw8kRm, tmu, trm
otherServicesPriority DP 3 bts
packetAckTime DP 3 transceiver
pagingOnCell DP 3 bts
pan DP 3 bts
pcmCircuitBsc DP – btsSiteManager
pcmCircuitBtsSiteManager DP – btsSiteManager
pcmCircuitId DD lapdLink
Nortel Networks Confidential4–12 Configuration parameter list
PE/DCL/DD/0124411–9001–124
Standard 13.04/EN March 2002 GSM/BSS V13
Parameter Object classClassType
pcmCircuitId DP 222
signallingLinktranscoderxtp
pcmErrorCorrection DP 2 bts
pcmNbr DP 2 pcu
pcmTimeSlotNumber DP 2 btsSiteManager
pcmType DP 3 pcmCircuit
pcuLapdEqptRefList DP 2 pcu
pcuSNName DP – pcusn
pcuSNReserved1 DP 3 pcusn
pcuSNReserved2 DP 3 pcusn
penaltyTime DP 3 bts
periodCCCHLoadIndication DP 3 bts
plmnPermitted DP 3 bts
pointCode DP 11
signallingLinkSetsignallingPoint
port0X25Status DD – omu
port1X25Status DD – omu
portChosen DP 2 bscMdInterface
portEthernetOperational DD – omu
portEthernetStatus DD – omu
portUsed DD bscMdInterface
positionInShelf DD – atmRm, cc, cem, iem, lsaRc, mmsomu, sw8kRm, tmu, trm
powerBudgetInterCell DP 3 handOverControl
powerClass DP – transceiver
powerControlIndicator DP 3 bts
powerDownlink DP – transcoderBoard
powerIncrStepSize DP 3 powerControl
powerRedStepSize DP 3 powerControl
preemptionAuthor DP 1 signallingPoint
preSynchroTimingAdvance DP 3 adjacentCellHandOver
priority DP 2 transceiver
privateMmsOmuRef DP – mms
processorLoadSupConf DP 3 bsc
protocolUsed DP – bscMdInterface
Configuration parameter listNortel Networks Confidential 4–13
BSS Parameter Dictionary
Parameter Object classClassType
rACHLoadAveragingSlots DP 3 bts
radChanSellIntThreshold DP 3 handOverControl
radioAllocator DP 2 bts
radioLinkTimeout DP 3 bts
radioSiteMask DP 2 btsSiteManager
radioSiteName DP – multiple site
radResSupBusyTimer DP 3 bsc
radResSupervision DP 3 bts
radResSupFreeTimer DP 3 bsc
redundantPcmNumber DD btsSiteManager
redundantPcmPresence DP 2 btsSiteManager
relatedSoftwares DP – executableSoftware
remoteSsuState DD signallingLinkSet
reserved1 DP 2 pcu
reserved1 DP 2 transceiver
reserved2 DP 2 pcu
reserved2 DP 2 transceiver
reserved3 DP 2 bts
reserved3 DP 2 pcu
reserved3 DP 2 transceiver
reserved4 DP 2 bts
reserved4 DP 2 pcu
reserved4 DP 2 transceiver
reserved5 DP 3 bts
reserved5 DP 2 pcu
reserved5 DP 2 transceiver
resetCircuitRepeat DP 1 signallingPoint
retransDuration DP 2 bts
rlf1 DP 2 bts
rlf2 DP 2 bts
rlf3 DP 2 bts
rmpConfState DD transceiver
rndAccTimAdvThreshold DP 3 bts
routingArea DP 2 bts
runCallClear DP 3 bts
Nortel Networks Confidential4–14 Configuration parameter list
PE/DCL/DD/0124411–9001–124
Standard 13.04/EN March 2002 GSM/BSS V13
Parameter Object classClassType
runHandOver DP 3 bts
runPwrControl DP 3 bts
rxLevAccessMin DP 3 bts
rxLevDLIH DP 3 handOverControl
rxLevDLPBGT DP 3 adjacentCellHandOver
rxLevHreqave DP 3 handOverControl
rxLevHreqaveBeg DP 3 handOverControl
rxLevHreqt DP 3 handOverControl
rxLevMinCell DP 3 adjacentCellHandOver
rxLevNCellHreqaveBeg DP 3 handOverControl
rxLevULIH DP 3 handOverControl
rxLevWtsList DP 3 handOverControl
rxNCellHreqave DP 3 handOverControl
rxQualDLIH DP 3 handOverControl
rxQualHreqave DP 3 handOverControl
rxQualHreqt DP 3 handOverControl
rxQualULIH DP 3 handOverControl
rxQualWtsList DP 3 handOverControl
sapi DP – lapdLink
selfTuningObs DP 3 handOverControl
shelfNumber DP – atmRm, cc, cem, iem, lsaRcmms, omu, sw8kRmtmu, trm
signallingLinkResState DD signallingLink
signallingPointType DP – signallingPoint
signallingTerminalNumber DP 2 signallingLink
sigPReserved1 DP 3 signallingPoint
sigPReserved2 DP 3 signallingPoint
siteGsmFctList DP 2 btsSiteManager
siteName DP – btsSiteManager
slc DP 2 signallingLink
small to large zone HO priority DP 3 handOverControl
smoke detector DP 2 btsSiteManager
smsCB DP 3 bts
softwareLabel DP – executableSoftware
Configuration parameter listNortel Networks Confidential 4–15
BSS Parameter Dictionary
Parameter Object classClassType
speechMode DP 33
btssignallingPoint
speechOnHoppingTs DP 3 bts
speechVersionAsscomp DP 1 signallingPoint
speechVersionHoperf DP 1 signallingPoint
speechVersionHoreq DP 1 signallingPoint
speechVersionHorqd DP 1 signallingPoint
standard indicator AdjC DP 2 adjacentCellHandOveradjacentCellReselection
standardIndicator DP 2 bts
standbyStatus DD – atmRm, cem, iem, lsaRcomu, sw8kRm
supportingTransceiverEquipment DD transceiver
sw8kRmId DP – sw8kRm
sWVersionBackUp DP – software
sWVersionFallback DP – software
sWVersionNew DP – software
sWVersionRunning DP – software
synchronized DP 3 adjacentCellHandOver
synchronizing PCM DD bsc
t3101 DP 3 bts
t3103 DP 3 bts
t3107 DP 3 bts
t3109 DP 3 bts
t3111 DP 3 bts
t3122 DP 3 bts
T3172 DP 3 bts
teiBtsSiteManager DP 2 btsSiteManager
teiLapdLink DP – lapdLink
teiTransceiverEqpt DP 2 transceiverEquipment
teiTranscoder DP 2 transcoder
temporaryOffset DP 3 bts
TFH or RWM DP 2 btsSiteManager
thresholdCCCHLoadIndication DP 3 bts
thresholdInterference DP 2 handOverControl
timeBetweenHOConfiguration DP 3 bsc
Nortel Networks Confidential4–16 Configuration parameter list
PE/DCL/DD/0124411–9001–124
Standard 13.04/EN March 2002 GSM/BSS V13
Parameter Object classClassType
timerPeriodicUpdateMS DP 3 bts
timeSlotNumber DD lapdLink
timeSlotNumber DP 2–
signallingLinkxtp
tmuId DP – tmu
traffic PCM allocation priority DP 2 transceiver
transcdBReserved1 DP 3 transcoderBoard
transcdBReserved2 DP 3 transcoderBoard
transceiver equipment class DP 2–
transceivertransceiverZone
transceiver zone Ref DP 2 transceiver
transcoderAlarmMask DP 3 transcoder
transcoderBoardIntState DD transcoderBoard
transcoder2GEqptId DP – transcoder2GEqpt
transcoder3GEqptId DP – transcoder3GEqpt
transcoderAlarmList DP – transcoder2GEqpt
transcoderId DP 22
signallingLinkxtp
transcoderIntPcmIntState DD transcoder
transcoderMatrix DP – transcoder
transcvEReserved1 DP 3 transceiverEquipment
transcvEReserved2 DP 3 transceiverEquipment
trmId DP – trm
tSCBNumber DP – bsc2GEqpt
tSCBUse DP – bsc2GEqpt
tsConfiguration DD transceiver
txPwrMaxReduction DP 2 transceiver
unequippedCircuit DP 1 signallingPoint
unknownNCellWarning DP 3 bts
unmasked users alarms DP 2 btsSiteManager
upgradeStatus DD – atmRm, cc, cem, iem, omusw8kRm, tmu, trm
uplinkMappingChannelNumber DP 2 bts
uplinkMappingFreq DP 2 bts
uplinkMappingMeasurementMode DP 2 bts
uplinkMappingProcessingMode DP 2 bsc
Configuration parameter listNortel Networks Confidential 4–17
BSS Parameter Dictionary
Parameter Object classClassType
uplinkPowerControl DP 3 powerControl
uRxLevDLP DP 3 powerControl
uRxLevULP DP 3 powerControl
uRxQualDLP DP 3 powerControl
uRxQualULP DP 3 powerControl
usageState DD xtp
version DP 2 transcoder
voiceBroadcastService DP 3 signallingPoint
voiceGroupCallService DP 3 signallingPoint
VSWR meter DP 2 btsSiteManager
X25Port0Operational DD – omu
X25Port1Operational DD – omu
xSCBConfiguration DP 0 bsc
xSCBNumber DD bsc
xSCBUse DD bsc
zone frequency hopping DP 2 transceiverZone
zone frequency threshold DP 2 transceiverZone
zone Tx power max reduction DP 2 transceiverZone
Table B–1 Configuration parameter list
In the standard OMC–R configuration, the disks of the active and backup servers aremirrored. Any change to the active server disks updates the standby server disks.
A directory name specified in this chapter beginning with “/xxx” should be understood as“/xxx_SRV” when applied to the active server and “/xxx_BKP” when applied to the standbyserver.
The various operands that can be applied to a parameter are detailed in NTP < 130 > asfollows:
in Paragraph 12.2.2, for scope & filter commands
in Appendix A “Filter parameter”, for trace data display commands
Nortel Networks Confidential4–18 Configuration parameter list
PE/DCL/DD/0124411–9001–124
Standard 13.04/EN March 2002 GSM/BSS V13
PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
Index of parametersNortel Networks Confidential i
BSS Parameter Dictionary
AabisSpy, 2–1
absoluteRFChannelNo, 2–1
access time end, 2–2
access time start, 2–2
accessClassCongestion, 2–2
accessibilityState, 2–3
acknowledged by, 2–3
acknowledgment time, 2–3
activationObjectcallPathTrace, 2–4 traceControl, 2–4
active chain disk state, 2–4
active chain Dmux state, 2–4
active chain ECI board state, 2–5
active chain REM link state, 2–5
active chain Sic board state, 2–5
active chain sic channels state, 2–5
active chain sls board state, 2–5
active chain state, 2–6
active chain switching capacity, 2–6
active chain tcu accessibility, 2–6
active chain ute board state, 2–6
active rem link, 2–6
activeChain, 2–7
additional supervised PCM 0, 2–7
additional supervised PCM 1, 2–8
additional supervised PCM 2, 2–8
additional supervised PCM 3, 2–9
additional supervised PCM 4, 2–10
additional supervised PCM 5, 2–10
additional unmasked users alarms, 2–11
addresses, 2–12
adjacent cell umbrella ref, 2–12
adjacentCellHandOver, 2–13
adjacentCellReselection, 2–14
adjCHOReserved3, 2–14
adjCHOReserved4, 2–14
administrativeState, 2–22 alarm criteria, 2–15
Index of parameters Nortel Networks Confidentialii
PE/DCL/DD/0124411–9001–124
Standard 13.04/EN March 2002 GSM/BSS V13
atmRm, 2–15 bsc, 2–15 bscMdInterface, 2–16 bts, 2–16 btsSiteManager, 2–18 callPathTrace, 2–19 cc, 2–20 cem, 2–20 cn, 2–20 efd, 2–21 g3BscEqp, 2–21 g3Transcoder, 2–21 iem, 2–21 in, 2–21 log, 2–22 lsaRc, 2–22 mdWarning, 2–22 mms, 2–23 omu, 2–23 pcmCircuit, 2–23 pcu, 2–23 signallingLink, 2–24 sw8kRm, 2–24 tmu, 2–24 traceControl, 2–24 transceiverEquipment, 2–25 transcoder, 2–26 transcoderBoard, 2–27 trm, 2–27 xtp, 2–27
aLAIntState, 2–28
alarm criteriaalarm criteria, 2–29 omc, 2–28
alarm number, 2–29
alarm severity, 2–30
alarm state, 2–30
alarmDuration, 2–30
alarmListConverter, 2–30
alarmListFan, 2–30
alarmListFanBoard, 2–31
alarmListVCOTension, 2–31
alarmPriority, 2–32
AlgoId, 2–33
algorithm Used, 2–33
allocationState, 2–34
Index of parametersNortel Networks Confidential iii
BSS Parameter Dictionary
allocBitmap, 2–34
allocPriorityTable, 2–35
allocPriorityThreshold, 2–35
allocPriorityTimers, 2–36
allocWaitThreshold, 2–36
allOtherCasesPriority, 2–36
answerPagingPriority, 2–37
architecture, 2–37
assignRequestPriority, 2–37
associatedInterface, 2–38
associatedLogcallPathTrace, 2–38 mdScanner, 2–38 traceControl, 2–38
associatedTMUPosition, 2–38
atmRmId, 2–39
Attenuation, 2–39
auditBdaStatus, 2–40
auditState, 2–40
authorised user, 2–40
availabilityStatusbsc, 2–41 bscMdInterface, 2–41 bts, 2–41 btsSiteManager, 2–41 lapdLink, 2–41 log, 2–41 mdScanner, 2–42 pcmCircuit, 2–41 pcu, 2–42 pcusn, 2–42 signallingLink, 2–41 transceiver, 2–41 transceiverEquipment, 2–41 transcoder, 2–41 transcoderBoard, 2–41 xtp, 2–42
averagingPeriod, 2–43
Bbackup manager addresses, 2–44
backupServer, 2–44
baseColourCodeadjacentCellHandOver, 2–44 bts, 2–45
Index of parameters Nortel Networks Confidentialiv
PE/DCL/DD/0124411–9001–124
Standard 13.04/EN March 2002 GSM/BSS V13
bCCHFrequencyadjacentCellHandOver, 2–45 adjacentCellReselection, 2–46 bts, 2–46
bda activation type, 2–47
bdaNewBscState, 2–48
bdaSelected, 2–49
bdaState, 2–49
bdaVersionBuild, 2–50
bdaVersionNumber, 2–50
Beginning date, 2–50
beginSearchTimeDisplay custom report, 2–51 Display raw report, 2–51 List available temporary observations, 2–52 List observation messages, 2–52
biZonePowerOffsetadjacentCellHandOver, 2–53 handOverControl, 2–53
bscadjacentCellHandover, 2–55 adjacentCellReselection, 2–55 bsc, 2–54 bts, 2–55 btsSiteManager, 2–55 channel, 2–55 frequencyHoppingSystem, 2–55 handOverControl, 2–55 lapdLink, 2–55 multiple site, 2–55 pcmCircuit, 2–55 powerControl, 2–55 signallingLink, 2–55 signallingLinkSet, 2–55 signallingPoint, 2–55 software, 2–55 transceiver, 2–55 transceiverEquipment, 2–55 transceiverZone, 2–55 transcoder, 2–55 transcoderBoard, 2–55 xtp, 2–55
bsc equipment name, 2–55
BSC list, 2–56
bsc model, 2–57
BSC number, 2–57
Index of parametersNortel Networks Confidential v
BSS Parameter Dictionary
bsc2GEqptId, 2–53
bsc3GEqptId, 2–54
bscAlarmMask, 2–57
bscArchitecture, 2–58
bscChainId, 2–58
bscCounterList, bscCounterList, 2–58
bscDateTime, 2–59
bscGprsActivation, 2–59
bscHopReconfUse, 2–60
bscIPFirstAdr, 2–60
bscIPSecondAdr, 2–61
bscList, 2–61
bscLogId, 2–61
bscMdInterface, 2–62
bscMdInterfaceRef, 2–62
bscMdInterfaceVersionNumber, 2–62
bscMSAccessClassBarringFunction, 2–62
bscName, 2–63
bscPcuPcmRefList, 2–63
bscQueueingOption, 2–64
bscRefList, 2–64
bscReset, 2–64
bscSitePcmList, 2–65
bscTimeSlot, 2–66
bscType, 2–67
bscUsedAdr, 2–67
bsCvMax, 2–68
bscX25PrefAdr, 2–68
bscX25SecAdr, 2–69
bscX25UsedAdr, 2–69
bsMsmtProcessingMode, 2–70
bsPowerControl, 2–70
bssMapT1, 2–70
bssMapT12, 2–71
bssMapT13, 2–71
bssMapT19, 2–71
bssMapT20, 2–72
bssMapT4, 2–72
bssMapT7, 2–72
bssMapT8, 2–73
Index of parameters Nortel Networks Confidentialvi
PE/DCL/DD/0124411–9001–124
Standard 13.04/EN March 2002 GSM/BSS V13
bssMapTchoke, 2–73
bssSccpConnEst, 2–74
bssSccpInactRx, 2–74
bssSccpInactTx, 2–74
bssSccpRelease, 2–75
bssSccpSubSysTest, 2–75
bsTxPwrMax, 2–75
btsadjacentCellHandOver, 2–78 adjacentCellReselection, 2–78 bts, 2–77 channel, 2–78 frequencyHoppingSystem, 2–78 handOverControl, 2–78 powerControl, 2–78 software, 2–78 transceiver, 2–78 transceiverEquipment, 2–78 transceiverZone, 2–78
bts equipment name, 2–79
bts list, 2–80
bts time between HO configuration, 2–80
btsDescription, 2–81
btsHopReconfRestart, 2–81
btsIsHopping, 2–81
btsLockedReserved2, 2–83
btsMSAccessClassBarringFunction, 2–83
btsReserved3, 2–83
btsReserved4, 2–83
btsSensitivity, 2–84
btsSensitivityInnerZone, bts, 2–84
btsSiteManageradjacentCellHandOver, 2–86 adjacentCellReselection, 2–86 bts, 2–86 btsSiteManager, 2–84 channel, 2–86 frequencyHoppingSystem, 2–86 handOverControl, 2–86 powerControl, 2–86 software, 2–86 transceiver, 2–86 transceiverEquipment, 2–86 transceiverZone, 2–86
Index of parametersNortel Networks Confidential vii
BSS Parameter Dictionary
btsSiteManager model, 2–86
btsSiteManagerList, 2–87
btsSMReserved1, 2–87
btsSMReserved2, 2–87
btsThresholdHopReconf, 2–88
btsWithCavity, 2–88
buildState, 2–89
CcallClearing, 2–90
callPathObservationArea, 2–91
callPathTrace, 2–91
callPathTraceType, 2–92
callReestablishment, 2–92
callReestablishmentPriority, 2–93
capacityAlarmThreshold, 2–93
Cause, 2–94
ccId, 2–94
cellAllocation, 2–95
cellBarQualify, 2–96
cellBarred, 2–97
cellDeletionCount, 2–98
cellDtxDownLink, 2–99
cellIdentityadjacentCellHandOver, 2–100 adjacentCellReselection, 2–100 bts, 2–101
cellName, 2–101
cellPagingState, 2–102
cellReselectHysteresis, 2–103
cellReselectOffset, 2–105
cellReselInd, 2–106
cellTypeadjacentCellHandOver, 2–106 bts, 2–107
cemId, 2–107
chainFault logs, 2–108 software–bsc, 2–108
chainIdbsc – Display chain information, 2–108 bsc – Suicide chain, 2–108
Index of parameters Nortel Networks Confidentialviii
PE/DCL/DD/0124411–9001–124
Standard 13.04/EN March 2002 GSM/BSS V13
channel, channel, 2–109
channel state, 2–110
channelType, 2–111
chanState, 2–114
chosenChannelAsscomp, 2–115
chosenChannelCompL3Info, 2–115
chosenChannelHoPerf, 2–115
chosenChannelHoReq, 2–116
cic, 2–117
circuitGroupBlock, 2–118
circularFileId, 2–118
circularFileState, 2–119
clear time, 2–119
cleared by, 2–119
clearing cause, 2–119
cnId, 2–120
coderPoolList, 2–120
codingScheme, 2–120
command classes, 2–122
command line, 2–122
command number, 2–122
commandFileCommand file editing, 2–123 commandFile, 2–123
commentreport template, 2–123 short message, 2–123
comments, 2–124
ComputeSyntheticCounters, 2–124
concentAlgoExtMsRange, 2–124
concentAlgoExtRxLev, 2–125
concentAlgoIntMsRange, 2–126
concentAlgoIntRxLev, 2–127
concentric cell, 2–129
condition, 2–130
configRef, 2–132
configRefList, 2–132
configurationType, 2–133
confusion, 2–133
Counter list, 2–133
Index of parametersNortel Networks Confidential ix
BSS Parameter Dictionary
counter list filename, 2–133
counterId, mdWarning (outOfRangeCounter), 2–134
counters, 2–134
cpueNumber, 2–134
cpueOccurence, 2–135
cRC, 2–136
creator, 2–137
criteriaEventType, 2–137
CTU cable, 2–137
current log size, 2–137
currentChannelHorqd, 2–138
cypherModeReject, 2–138
Ddata mode 14.4 kbit/s, 2–139
data non transparent modebts, 2–139 signallingPoint, 2–140
data transparent modebts, 2–140 signallingPoint, 2–141
Data14_4OnNoHoppingTs, 2–141
dateDaily observation report, 2–141 md – Archive, 2–142 md – Restore, 2–142 omc – Archive, 2–142 omc – Restore, 2–142
day intervention, 2–142
Day to be purged, 2–143
dDTIIntState, 2–143
delayBetweenRetrans, 2–143
deltaUtc, 2–144
detectionFunction, 2–144
directedRetry, 2–145
directedRetryModeUsed, 2–146
directedRetryPrio, 2–147
directory, 2–147
distHreqt, 2–148
distWtsList, 2–149
diversity, 2–150
Index of parameters Nortel Networks Confidentialx
PE/DCL/DD/0124411–9001–124
Standard 13.04/EN March 2002 GSM/BSS V13
dLPwrValue, 2–150
drxTimerMax, 2–151
dtxMode, 2–152
duplex link state, 2–152
duration, 2–152
dwAckTime, 2–153
Eearly classmark sending, 2–154
efd, efd, 2–154
efdType, 2–155
eftmd, 2–156 omc, 2–156 software, 2–157
emergencyCallPriority, 2–158
eMLPPThreshold, 2–159
encrypAlgoAsscomp, 2–159
encrypAlgoCiphModComp, 2–159
encrypAlgoHoperf, 2–160
encrypAlgoHoreq, 2–160
encryptionAlgorSupported, 2–160
End date, 2–161
end date, 2–161
End of probative Phase Type, 2–161
end timejob, 2–162 system session log, 2–162
endAlarmFilter, 2–162
endAlarmThresholdmdWarning (excessiveAnomalyRate), 2–163 mdWarning (outOfRangeCounter), 2–163
endCounterThreshold, 2–164
endSearchTimeDisplay custom report, 2–164 Display raw report, 2–164 List available permanent observations, 2–165 List available temporary observations, 2–165 List observation messages, 2–166
endSessionCriteriaType, 2–166
enhancedTRAUFrameIndication, 2–167
Index of parametersNortel Networks Confidential xi
BSS Parameter Dictionary
equipment processor number, 2–167
error concealment unit, 2–167
errorCorrectionMethod, 2–168
exclusive interval of codano, 2–168
exclusive list of codano, 2–168
executableSoftwareId, 2–168
executableSoftwareName, 2–169
extCommsInt, 2–169
extended cell, 2–170
external alarm configuration, 2–170
external battery cabinet, 2–172
externalTime, 2–172
FFamily, 2–175
faultNumber, 2–176
fhsRef, 2–177
forced handover algo, 2–178
frequencyHoppingSystem, 2–178
Ggeographical coordinates
bsc, 2–179 btsSiteManager, 2–179 md, 2–179 pcusn, 2–179 transcoder, 2–179
gprsAvgParam, 2–180
gprsBtsExtendedConf, 2–180
gprsBtsLockExtendedConf , 2–181
gprsCellActivation, 2–181
gprsPcuCrossConnectList, 2–181
gprsPcuLockExtendedConf, 2–182
gprsPermittedAccess, 2–182
gprsPreemption, 2–182
gprsPreemptionProtection, 2–183
gprsPriority, 2–183
gprsTimerWaitPUAM, 2–183
gprsTimerWaitRLC, 2–184
gprsTranscvLockBtsExtendedConf , 2–184
Index of parameters Nortel Networks Confidentialxii
PE/DCL/DD/0124411–9001–124
Standard 13.04/EN March 2002 GSM/BSS V13
HHandOver from signalling channel, 2–185
handOverControl, 2–185
hardware configuration, 2–186
hardwareRefbtsSiteManager, 2–186 transceiverEquipment, 2–186 transcoderBoard, 2–186
hexa text, 2–187
hoMargin, 2–187
hoMarginBeg, 2–187
hoMarginDist, 2–188
hoMarginRxLev, 2–188
hoMarginRxQual, 2–188
hoMarginTiering, 2–188
hoMarginTrafficOffset, 2–189
HOPingpongCombination, 2–189
HOPingpongTimeRejection, 2–190
hoppingSequenceNumber, 2–191
HOSecondBestCellConfiguration, 2–191
hoTrafficbsc, 2–192 bts, 2–192
Iidentifier
short message, 2–193 software, 2–193 software–bsc, 2–193
iemId, 2–193
iMSIAttachDetach, 2–194
inactivity timeout, 2–194
inclusive interval of codano, 2–194
inclusive list of codano, 2–194
incomingHandOver, 2–195
inhibitRequest, 2–195
inId, 2–195
interBscDirectedRetry, 2–195
interBscDirectedRetryFromCell, 2–196
interCellHOExtPriority, 2–196
Index of parametersNortel Networks Confidential xiii
BSS Parameter Dictionary
interCellHOIntPriority, 2–196
interferenceType, 2–197
interferer cancel algo usage, 2–197
internal DMUX alarm state, 2–197
internal DMUX state, 2–199
internal PCM states, 2–199
internal switching matrix, 2–199
interOmuEtherlinkOper, 2–200
intraBscDirectedRetry, 2–200
intraBscDirectedRetryFromCell, 2–200
intraCell, 2–201
intraCellHOIntPriority, 2–201
intraCellQueueing, 2–201
intraCellSDCCH, 2–202
Jjob, 2–203
jobResult, 2–203
Llabel
md – Archive, 2–204 md – Display archive list, 2–204 md – Display label, 2–204 md – Restore, 2–204 md – Set label, 2–204 omc – Archive, 2–204 omc – Display archive list, 2–204 omc – Display label, 2–204 omc – Restore, 2–204 omc – Set label, 2–204
language, 2–204
lapdConcentration, 2–205
lapdLink, 2–206
lapdLinkCallPLoad, 2–207
lapdLinkOMLRefbtsSiteManager, 2–207 transceiverEquipment, 2–208 transcoder, 2–208
lapdLinkRSLRef, 2–209
lapdTerminalNumber, 2–210
Index of parameters Nortel Networks Confidentialxiv
PE/DCL/DD/0124411–9001–124
Standard 13.04/EN March 2002 GSM/BSS V13
layer3MsgCyphModComp, 2–211
Level to process, 2–211
lightning protection, 2–211
line, 2–211
locationAreaCodeadjacentCellHandOver, 2–212 adjacentCellReselection, 2–212 bts, 2–212
log, log, 2–213
logFullAction, 2–213
longTbfLossThroughput, 2–214
longTbfSizeThreshold, 2–214
lRxLevDLH, 2–214
lRxLevDLP, 2–215
lRxLevULH, 2–215
lRxLevULP, 2–216
lRxQualDLH, 2–216
lRxQualDLP, 2–217
lRxQualULH, 2–217
lRxQualULP, 2–217
lsaRc Reference, 2–218
lsaRcId, 2–218
Mmachine name
job, 2–219 jobResult, 2–219
mainNetworkBand, 2–219
maio, 2–219
managedObjectClassalarmRecord, 2–220 mdScanReportRecord, 2–220 observationFileReadyRecord, 2–220 stateChangeRecord, 2–220 traceFileReadyRecord, 2–220 traceLogRecord, 2–220
managedObjectInstancealarmRecord, 2–220 mdScanReportRecord, 2–220 observationFileReadyRecord, 2–220 stateChangeRecord, 2–220 traceFileReadyRecord, 2–220 traceLogRecord, 2–220
Index of parametersNortel Networks Confidential xv
BSS Parameter Dictionary
Manager address type, 2–221
Manager addresses, 2–221
managerServer, 2–221
manufacturerIntervention, 2–221
marking type, 2–222
max log size, 2–222
maxAdjCHOARMPerBts, 2–222
maxBscPerNetwork, 2–222
maxBsTransmitPowerInnerZone, bts, 2–223
maxBtsPerBtsSM, 2–223
maxBtsPerNetwork, 2–223
maxDnTbfP1P2Threshold, 2–223
maxDnTbfPerTs, 2–224
maxDwAssign, 2–224
maxFileSize, 2–224
maximum acknowledgment time, 2–225
maximum alarm number, 2–225
maximum clear time, 2–225
maximum event time, 2–226
maximum MD notification number, 2–226
maximum OMC notification number, 2–226
maximum reception time, 2–227
maxLapdChPerBtsSM, 2–227
maxNbOfCells, 2–228
maxNbrConsMess, 2–227
maxNbrPDAAssig, 2–228
maxNbrRLCEmptyBlock, 2–229
maxNbrWithoutVchange, 2–229
maxNumberRetransmission, 2–229
maxPcmCPerBtsSM, 2–230
maxPcmCPerTranscd, 2–230
maxRACH, 2–230
maxRowCount, 2–230
maxSigLPerSigLS, 2–231
maxTeiPerLapdCh, 2–231
maxTranscdBPerTranscd, 2–231
maxTranscdPerBsc, 2–231
maxUpTbfP1P2Threshold, 2–232
maxUpTbfPerTs, 2–232
md, 2–232
Index of parameters Nortel Networks Confidentialxvi
PE/DCL/DD/0124411–9001–124
Standard 13.04/EN March 2002 GSM/BSS V13
MD notification number, 2–232
mdArchive, 2–233
mdConfirm, 2–233
mdFileName, 2–233
mdGranularityPeriodmdScanner, 2–234 mdScanReportRecord, 2–234 observationFileReadyRecord, 2–235
mdId, 2–236
mdLog, 2–236
mdObjectListDisplay xxx report, 2–237 List observation messages, 2–237 mdScanner, 2–236
mdScanner, 2–237
mdScannerTypeDisplay xxx report, 2–238 List observation messages, 2–238 Load formulae, 2–239 mdScanner, 2–239
mdStorageDuration, 2–240
mdTransferMode, 2–240
mdWarning, mdWarning, 2–240
measurementProcAlgorithm, 2–241
mergeEftmd – Create EFT, 2–241 md – Validate EFT, 2–241 omc – Download and validate EFT from gigatape to md, 2–242
microCellCaptureTimer, 2–242
microCellStability, 2–242
minimum acknowledgment time, 2–243
minimum alarm number, 2–243
minimum clear time, 2–243
minimum event time, 2–244
minimum MD notification number, 2–244
minimum OMC notification number, 2–244
minimum reception time, 2–245
minNbOfTDMA, 2–245
minNbrGprsTs, 2–245
missDistWt, 2–246
missRxLevWt, 2–246
missRxQualWt, 2–247
Index of parametersNortel Networks Confidential xvii
BSS Parameter Dictionary
mmsId, 2–247
mmsUsage, 2–247
mobileAllocation, 2–248
mobileCountryCodeadjacentCellHandOver, 2–248 adjacentCellReselection, 2–249 bsc, 2–249 bts, 2–250
mobileNetworkCodeadjacentCellHandOver, 2–250 adjacentCellReselection, 2–251 bsc, 2–251 bts, 2–251
modeModifyMandatory, 2–252
monitoredObjectClass, 2–252
monitoredObjectInstance, 2–253
monitoredSpecificProblemsList, 2–253
month, 2–253
msBtsDistanceInterCell, 2–253
msCapWeightActive, 2–254
msRangeMax, 2–254
msTxPwrMax, 2–255
msTxPwrMax2ndBand, 2–255
msTxPwrMaxCCH, 2–256
msTxPwrMaxCell, 2–257
multi band reporting, 2–258
multiple site, 2–258
multipleVocoders, 2–259
muxNumber, 2–259
NN3103, 2–260
N3105max, 2–260
nAvgl, 2–260
nAvgT, 2–261
nAvgW, 2–261
nbOfRepeat, 2–261
nbrFreeTchBeforeAnticipation, 2–262
nbrFreeTchToEndAnticipation, 2–262
nbrTch, 2–262
NCHPosition, 2–263
Index of parameters Nortel Networks Confidentialxviii
PE/DCL/DD/0124411–9001–124
Standard 13.04/EN March 2002 GSM/BSS V13
network protocolUsed, 2–264
networkColourCodeadjacentCellHandOver, 2–264 bts, 2–265
networkIndicatorsignallingLinkSet, 2–265 signallingPoint, 2–266
new name, 2–266
new password 1st try, 2–266
new password 2nd try, 2–267
new power control algorithm, 2–267
next execution time, 2–268
night intervention, 2–268
noOfBlocksForAccessGrant, 2–268
noOfMultiframesBetweenPaging, 2–269
notAllowedAccessClasses, 2–269
notification numberalarmRecord, 2–269 mdScanReportRecord, 2–269 observationFileReadyRecord, 2–269 stateChangeRecord, 2–269 traceFileReadyRecord, 2–269 traceLogRecord, 2–269
notification type, 2–270
number of records, 2–270
numberOfEnabledHDLCPorts, iem, 2–270
numberOfPwciSamples, 2–271
numberOfSlotsSpreadTrans, 2–271
numberOfTCHFreeBeforeCongestion, 2–273
numberOfTCHFreeToEndCongestion, 2–273
numberOfTCHQueuedBeforeCongestion, 2–274
numberOfTCHQueuedToEndCongestion, 2–274
OObject Filter List, 2–276
objectClassalarmRecord, 2–275 mdScanReportRecord, 2–275 observationFileReadyRecord, 2–275 stateChangeRecord, 2–275 traceFileReadyRecord, 2–275 traceLogRecord, 2–275
Index of parametersNortel Networks Confidential xix
BSS Parameter Dictionary
objectInstance, 2–275
objects, 2–276
objects assigned, 2–277
observation typebscCounterList, 2–277 report template, 2–277
Observed counters, 2–277
Observed object class, 2–278
occupationState, 2–278
offsetLoad, 2–278
offsetPriority, 2–279
OMC notification number, 2–279
omuId, 2–279
on error, 2–279
operationalStateatmRm, 2–280 bsc, 2–280 bscMdInterface, 2–281 bts, 2–281 btsSiteManager, 2–282 callPathTrace, 2–282 cc, 2–283 cem, 2–283 cn, 2–284 efd, 2–284 g3BscEqp, 2–284 g3Transcoder, 2–285 iem, 2–285 in, 2–286 lapdLink, 2–286 log, 2–287 lsaRc, 2–287 mdScanner, 2–288 mms, 2–288 omu, 2–288 pcmCircuit, 2–289 pcu, 2–290 pcusn, 2–290 signallingLink, 2–291 sw8kRm, 2–291 tmu, 2–292 traceControl, 2–292 transceiver, 2–293 transceiverEquipment, 2–293 transcoder, 2–294 transcoderBoard, 2–294 trm, 2–295 xtp, 2–295
Index of parameters Nortel Networks Confidentialxx
PE/DCL/DD/0124411–9001–124
Standard 13.04/EN March 2002 GSM/BSS V13
otherServicesPriority, 2–296
output classesterminal profile, 2–296 user profile, 2–297
owner, 2–297
PpacketAckTime, 2–298
pagingOnCell, 2–298
pan, 2–298
panDec, 2–298
panInc, 2–299
panMax, 2–299
parameter(s), 2–299
partialRecordCriteriaType, 2–300
particular intervention, 2–300
passive chain disk state, 2–4
passive chain Dmux state, 2–4
passive chain ECI board state, 2–5
passive chain REM link state, 2–5
passive chain Sic board state, 2–5
passive chain sic channels state, 2–5
passive chain sls board state, 2–5
passive chain state, 2–6
passive chain switching capacity, 2–6
passive chain tcu accessibility, 2–6
passive chain ute board state, 2–6
passworduser profile – Change password, 2–300 user profile – Create/Set, 2–301
password duration, 2–301
pcmCircuitpcmCircuit (A interface), 2–302 pcmCircuit (Abis, Ater, and Agprs interfaces), 2–301
pcmCircuitBsc, 2–303
pcmCircuitBtsSiteManager, 2–304
pcmCircuitIdlapdLink, 2–304 signallingLink, 2–304 transcoder, 2–305 xtp, 2–305
Index of parametersNortel Networks Confidential xxi
BSS Parameter Dictionary
pcmErrorCorrection, 2–306
pcmNbr, 2–306
pcmTimeSlotNumber, 2–306
pcmType, 2–307
pcu, 2–307
pcuLapdEqptRefList, 2–308
pcusn, 2–308
pcuSNName, 2–308
pcuSNReserved1, 2–309
pcuSNReserved2, 2–309
penaltyTime, 2–309
perceived severity, 2–310
periodCCCHLoadIndication, 2–310
periodicity, 2–310
plmnPermitted, 2–310
PODType, 2–311
pointCodesignallingLinkSet, 2–311 signallingPoint, 2–311
port0X25Status, 2–312
port1X25Status, 2–312
portChosen, 2–313
portEthernetOperational, 2–311
portEthernetStatus, 2–312
portUsed, 2–313
positionInShelf, iem, 2–313
powerBudgetInterCell, 2–314
powerClass, 2–314
powerControl, powerControl, 2–315
powerControlIndicator, 2–315
powerDownlink, 2–316
powerIncrStepSize, 2–316
powerRedStepSize, 2–316
powerUplink, 2–317
preemptionAuthor, 2–317
preSynchroTimingAdvance, adjacentCellHandOver, 2–317
priority, 2–318
privateMmsOmuRef, 2–318
probable cause, 2–318
processorLoadSupConf, 2–320
Index of parameters Nortel Networks Confidentialxxii
PE/DCL/DD/0124411–9001–124
Standard 13.04/EN March 2002 GSM/BSS V13
RrACHLoadAveragingSlots, 2–322
radChanSelIntThreshold, 2–322
radioAllocator, 2–323
radioLinkTimeOut, 2–324
radioSiteMask, 2–325
radioSiteName, 2–326
radResSupBusyTimer, 2–326
radResSupervision, 2–327
radResSupFreeTimer, 2–327
reception time, 2–327
Record reference, 2–328
redundantPcmNumber, 2–328
redundantPcmPresence, 2–328
refPeriodalarm criteria, 2–329 mdWarning (excessiveAnomalyRate), 2–329
relatedSoftwares, 2–329
relay, 2–330
remoteSsuState, 2–330
repetition rate, 2–330
Report range, 2–331
report template, report template, 2–331
reportObjLevel, 2–331
reserved1pcu, 2–331 transceiver, 2–332
reserved2pcu, 2–332 transceiver, 2–332
reserved3bts, 2–333 pcu, 2–333 transceiver, 2–333
reserved4bts, 2–334 pcu, 2–334 transceiver, 2–334
reserved5bts, 2–335 pcu, 2–335 transceiver, 2–335
Index of parametersNortel Networks Confidential xxiii
BSS Parameter Dictionary
resetCircuitRepeat, 2–336
retransDuration, 2–336
retry on error, 2–336
rlf1, 2–337
rlf2, 2–337
rlf3, 2–338
rmpConfState, 2–338
rndAccTimAdvThreshold, 2–339
routingArea, 2–339
runCallClear, 2–340
runHandOver, 2–340
runPwrControl, 2–340
rxLevAccessMin, 2–341
rxLevDLIH, 2–341
rxLevDLPBGT, 2–342
rxLevHreqave, 2–342
rxLevHreqaveBeg, 2–343
rxLevHreqt, 2–343
rxLevMinCell, 2–344
rxLevULIH, 2–344
rxLevWtsList, 2–345
Ssapi, 2–346
scannerIdDisplay xxx report, 2–346 List observation messages, 2–346
sequenceNumber, 2–347
serial number, short message – Display broadcast characteristics, 2–347 , 2–348
session context saving mode, 2–348
shelfNumber, mms, 2–348
short message, 2–349
sicBoardsInt, 2–349
signallingLink, 2–350
signallingLinkResState, 2–351
signallingLinkSet, 2–351
signallingPoint, 2–352
signallingPointType, 2–352
signallingTerminalNumber, 2–353
Index of parameters Nortel Networks Confidentialxxiv
PE/DCL/DD/0124411–9001–124
Standard 13.04/EN March 2002 GSM/BSS V13
sigPReserved1, 2–353
sigPReserved2, 2–354
siteGsmFctList, 2–354
siteName, 2–355
slc, 2–356
small to large zone HO priority, 2–356
smoke detector, 2–356
smsCB, 2–357
software, 2–358
softwareLabel, 2–359
source indicator, 2–359
specific problems, 2–359
speechModebts, 2–360 signallingPoint, 2–360
speechOnHoppingTs, 2–361
speechVersionAsscomp, 2–361
speechVersionHoperf, 2–361
speechVersionHoreq, 2–361
speechVersionHorqd, 2–362
standard indicator AdjCadjacentCellHandOver, 2–362 adjacentCellReselection, 2–362
standardIndicator, 2–363
standbyStatus, iem, 2–365
start date, 2–365
start timejob, 2–366 System session log, 2–366
startAlarmFilter, 2–367
startAlarmThresholdmdWarning (excessiveAnomalyRate), 2–368 mdWarning (outOfRangeCounter), 2–368
startCounterThreshold, 2–369
startTimelog, 2–369 mdScanner, 2–369
stopTimelog, 2–370 mdScanner, 2–370
subChanId, 2–370
subject, 2–371
Index of parametersNortel Networks Confidential xxv
BSS Parameter Dictionary
Suffix, 2–371 summary, 2–371
supportingTransceiverEquipment, 2–372 sw8kRmId, 2–372
sWVersionBackUp, 2–373 sWVersionFallBack, 2–373
sWVersionNew, 2–373 sWVersionRunning, 2–374
synchronized, 2–375 synchronizing PCM, 2–376
syntheticFaultNumber, 2–376
system state, 2–376
Tt3101, 2–377
t3103, 2–377 t3107, 2–378
t3109, 2–378 t3111, 2–379
t3122, 2–379 T3172, 2–379
target Bda, 2–380 teiBtsSiteManager, 2–380
teiLapdLink, 2–381 teiTransceiverEqpt, 2–381
teiTranscoder, 2–382
temporaryOffset, 2–382 terminal name, 2–382
terminal profile, 2–383 text
commandFile, 2–383 short message, 2–383 user message, 2–383
TFH or RWM, 2–383
thresholdCCCHLoadIndication, 2–384 thresholdInterference, 2–384
thresholdType, 2–385
timeBetweenHOConfiguration, 2–386 timerPeriodicUpdateMS, 2–386
timeSlotNumberlapdLink, 2–386 signallingLink, 2–387 xtp, 2–387
Index of parameters Nortel Networks Confidentialxxvi
PE/DCL/DD/0124411–9001–124
Standard 13.04/EN March 2002 GSM/BSS V13
tmuId, 2–388
traceConstraintList, 2–388
traceControl, 2–389
traceDayAccessed, 2–389
traceFileName, 2–389
traceInfoRequested, 2–390
traceReference, 2–390
traffic PCM allocation priority, 2–390
transcdBReserved1, 2–390
transcdBReserved2, 2–391
transceiver, 2–391 channel, 2–391
transceiver equipment classtransceiverEquipment, 2–392 transceiverZone, 2–393
transceiver zone Ref, 2–393
transceiverEquipmentsoftware, 2–394 transceiverEquipment, 2–394
transceiverZone, 2–395
transcoderpcmCircuit, 2–396 transcoder, 2–397 transcoderBoard, 2–397
transcoder2GEqptId, 2–396
transcoder3GEqptId, 2–396
transcoderAlarmList, 2–398
transcoderAlarmMask, 2–398
transcoderBoard, 2–399 software, 2–399
transcoderBoardIntState, 2–399
transcoderIdsignallingLink, 2–400 xtp, 2–400
transcoderIntPcmIntState, 2–400
transcoderMatrix, 2–401
transcvEReserved1, 2–403
transcvEReserved2, 2–403
trmId, 2–403
tSCBNumber, 2–404
tSCBUse, 2–404
tsConfiguration, 2–404
Index of parametersNortel Networks Confidential xxvii
BSS Parameter Dictionary
txPowerMaxReduction, 2–405
typemd – Archive, 2–406 md – Restore, 2–406 omc – Archive, 2–407 omc – Restore, 2–407 report template, 2–408
Type of data to be purged, 2–408
Type of display, 2–408
UunequippedCircuit, 2–415
unknownNCellWarning, 2–415
unmasked users alarms, 2–416
upAckTime, 2–416
upgradeStatus, omu, 2–417
uplinkMappingChannelNumber, 2–417
uplinkMappingFreq, 2–417
uplinkMappingMeasurementMode, 2–418
uplinkMappingProcessingMode, 2–418
uplinkPowerControl, 2–418
uRxLevDLP, 2–419
uRxLevULP, 2–419
uRxQualDLP, 2–420
uRxQualULP, 2–420
usageStatecallPathTrace, 2–421 xtp, 2–421
use default list, 2–421
user name, 2–422
user profile, 2–422
usernamejob, 2–422 jobResult, 2–422
Vversion, 2–423
voiceBroadcastService, 2–423
voiceGroupCallService , 2–423
VSWR meter, 2–424
Index of parameters Nortel Networks Confidentialxxviii
PE/DCL/DD/0124411–9001–124
Standard 13.04/EN March 2002 GSM/BSS V13
Wworkstation name, 2–425
XX25Port0Operational, 2–426
X25Port1Operational, 2–426
xSCBConfiguration, 2–427
xSCBNumber, 2–427
xSCBUse, 2–427
xtp, 2–428
ZZI bss
terminal profile, 2–430 user profile, 2–430
ZI omcterminal profile, 2–431 user profile, 2–431
zone frequency hopping, 2–431
zone frequency threshold, 2–431
zone Tx power max reduction, 2–432
Wireless Service Provider SolutionsBSS Parameter Dictionary
Copyright 2000–2002 Nortel Networks, All Rights Reserved
NORTEL NETWORKS CONFIDENTIAL:
The information contained in this document is the property of NortelNetworks. Except as specifically authorized in writing by NortelNetworks, the holder of this document shall keep the informationcontained herein confidential and shall protect same in whole or in partfrom disclosure and dissemination to third parties and use for evaluation,operation and maintenance purposes only.
You may not reproduce, represent, or download through any means, theinformation contained herein in any way or in any form without priorwritten consent of Nortel Networks.
The following are trademarks of Nortel Networks: *NORTELNETWORKS, the NORTEL NETWORKS corporate logo, the NORTELGlobemark, UNIFIED NETWORKS, DMS, DMS–MSC, BSC6000,S2000, S4000, S8000. GSM is a trademark of France Telecom.Sun, Ultrastation are registered trademarks of Sun Microsystems, Inc.All SPARC trademarks are used under license and are trademarks orregistered trademarks of SPARC International, Inc. in the United Statesand other countries. Sybase is a registered trademark of Sybase, Inc.Windows is a U.S. registered trademark of Microsoft Corp.All other brand and product names are trademarks or registredtrademarks of their respective holders.
Publication ReferencePE/DCL/DD/0124 411–9001–12413.04/ENMarch 2002Printed in France
For more information, please contact:
For all countries, except USA:
Documentation Department1, Place des Frères MontgolfierGUYANCOURT78928 YVELINES CEDEX 9FRANCEEmail : umts–[email protected] : (33) (1) 39–44–50–29
In the USA:
2221 Lakeside BoulevardRichardson TX 75082USATel: 1–800–4 NORTEL1–800–466–7838 or (972) 684–5935
Internet Address:
http://www.nortelnetworks.com